Cornell Muiversity Library

 

 
Cornell University Library
arV17446

il (inna nu

4 031 275 856
olin, a

 

 

 

 

 

 
FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.
FRESH-WATER
AQUARIA:

THEIR CONSTRUCTION, ARRANGEMENT,
AND MANAGEMENT,

WITH FULL INFORMATION AS TO THE BEST WATER-PLANTS
AND LIVE STOCK TO BE KEPT, HOW AND WHERE TO
OBTAIN THEM, AND HOW TO KEEP THEM IN HEALTH.

BY |.
REV. GREGORY C.’BATEMAN, A.K.C.

‘

PROFUSELY ILLUSTRATED.

Shis Work forms fhe First Division ~of
“Ghe Aquarium Book.”

LONDON:
L. UPCOTT GILL, 170, STRAND, W.C.

1890.

®
PRINTED BY A, BRADLEY,
THE LONDON AND COUNTY PRINTING WORKS, 55 TO 57, DRURY LANE, W.C.
PREFACE.

WAS always fond of Natural History, and while
Iwas a boy I frequently looked forward to one day
possessing an aquarium so large that I might collect
as many aquatic creatures as I liked from the neighbouring
ponds and streams, place them all together in my tank, and
then make myself quite happy by watching the habits and
the changes of my captives. But, alas! in course of time.
I found, as so many find, that the realisation of one’s hopes
does not always bring with it the anticipated pleasure. For
when I did eventually own as big and—as appeared to me at
that time—as suitable an aquarium as I could wish for, and
when I did stock it with many curious and (to my mind)
interesting animals, I was, after all, not very happy, nor even
content; far from it. The Sticklebacks and the aquatic Spiders
would not build their nests. side by side;. the Dytiscus marginalis
absolutely refused to live on anything like friendly terms with
the Minnows; the Snails while crawling over my most valued
plants were not able to refrain from devouring them and
ruining them; the water would not keep: bright, nor the glass
of the tank clear, and my patience was sorely tried. I bought
or borrowed whatever books I could upon aquarium and kin-
dred matters, but I was. not able to obtain all the information
I required. Then JI .attempted to find out by experiment

 
vi PREFACE.

 

that which I could not ascertain by reading. After not
a few failures and disappointments, most of my attempts were
successful, and as I began to have more knowledge of these
things, I resolved that I would, at some time or other, try
to write such a book as that I wished for so much when I was
making my first blunders in aquarium matters. By-and-by,
Mr. Upcott Gill was good enough to give me an opportunity
of contributing to The Bazaar a series of articles upon the
fresh-water aquarium. These articles are now re-published
in book form, and so in this way I have kept my resolution
and have written my book; but as I finished looking over the
“proofs” of its last chapter, I confessed, with not a little
mortification, that it fell far short of the book I had hoped
to write. However, I shall feel very thankful if I can be the
means of saving some keepers of an aquarium from dis-
appointment, and many aquatic animals from unnecessary
suffering.

Before or while writing the above-mentioned articles, I read
all or portions of the following books, and to the authors I
am more or less indebted:

“Land and Fresh-water Shells,” by R. Rimmer, F.LS.;
“ British Beetles,” by HE. C. Rye; “Manual of British
Beetles,” by J. F. Stephens, F.L.8.; “ British Wild Flowers,”
by Miss Pratt; “The Aquarium,” by J. E. Taylor, Ph.D.,
F.LS., &e.; “The Fresh and Salt-water Aquarium,” by Rev.
J. G. Wood, M.A.; “Lakes and Rivers,” by C. O. G. Napier,
F.G.S.; “Ponds and Ditches,” by M. C. Cooke, M.A., LL.D.;
“Pond Life—Insects,”’ by HE. A. Butler, B.A. B.Se.;
“Popular History of the Aquarium,” by G. B. Sowerby, F.L.S.;
“The Book of the Aquarium,” -by Shirley Hibberd ; “ Intro-
duction to Entomology,” by Kirby and Spence; “The Natural
History of British Fishes,” by F. Buckland; “Land and Fresh-
water Shells of the British Islands,” by J. EH. Gray, Ph.D.,
F.R.S.; “Popular History of British Crustacea,” by Adam
White; “The Microscope,” by Jabez Hogg, M.R.C.S., F.R.MS.:;
“The Home Naturalist,” by Harland Coultas; “Country Walks,”
by the Rev. H. Houghton, M.A.; “The Badminton Library ”
—“Fishing,”—by H. Cholmondeley Pennell; “L’Aquarium,”
PREFACE. vil

 

J. Rothschild, Editeur. In addition to these books, I have
consulted Science Gossip and Cassell’s Natural History. There
are other books whose names and authors I have forgotten,
but some of the useful information which I obtained from
them I remember, and for it I am grateful. But the correct-
ness or inaccuracy of whatever information I have gained
from books or articles, I have tried to prove by practical
experience.

G. C. B.

JACOBSTOWE Rectory, NortH DEVON.
July 21, 1890.
CHAPTER

I.
II.

TIT.
IV.
Vv.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.

XI.
XII.

XM.
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.

CONTENTS.

THE AQUARIUM
MAKING AQUARIA

THE CABINET AQUARIUM
CoLLEcTING EQuIPMENT
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM
WATER-PLANTS

AMPHIBIANS

FIsHES 4

SwaI~s AND LIMPETS

MussELs

WATER-BEETLES

WATER-BUGS OR WATER-MEASURERS, WATER-

SCORPIONS, ETC. ...
Larva or WATER-FLIES
WATER-SPIDERS AND WATER-WORMS ...
FRESH-WATER CRUSTACEANS ...

Hypra
RECAPITULATION
INDEX

PAGE

25

42
59
92
109
162
187
197

228

271
284
297
302
307
 

 

Uniform with ‘ FRESH-WATER AQUARIA,”
ARINE AQUARIA: Their Con-

struction, Arrangement, and Management; with
Full Information as to the best Animals and Seaweeds to
be Kept, How and Where to Obtain them, and How to
Keep them in Health.

FULLY ILLUSTRATED.
By R. A. KR. BENNETT, B.A.

This Work forms the Second Division of ‘The Aquarium Book.”

Lonpon: L. UPCOTT GILL, 170, Stranp, W.C.

 

 
FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

CHAPTER I.

THE AQUARIUM.

W things are more interesting and less troublesome
than a well cared-for aquarium. It makes no litter
to annoy the tidy housewife, and no noise to distract
the student. Besides, if properly arranged, it is very orna-
mental. The aquarium also is exceedingly useful to the
naturalist in the prosecution of his studies; and by its help
the botanist can conveniently observe aquatic plants as they
pass through the various stages of their existence.

Those who intend to keep an aquarium must remember
that though few things are less troublesome, still it does
require a little care, and that little care should be given
regularly and daily. A few minutes at a time will suffice
—just long enough to feed the fish, to see that there is no
death and no decay, to notice that the light has not been so
strong as to cause the conferve to grow too rapidly, and to
take care that the representatives of the Animal Kingdom do
not exceed the proper proportion according to the amount of
weed provided. The reason for this is that the fish inspire
the oxygen held in solution by the water, and expire carbonic-
acid gas. The plants, by respiration, consume the carbonic-
B

 
2 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

acid gas supplied by the fish, using the carbon for the con-
struction of their tissues and fibres, and liberating again the
oxygen for the use of the animal life within the aquarium; or,
to put it plainer, the fish breathe out carbonic-acid gas and
breathe in oxygen. The snails, which should always be present
in the aquarium, find their food in the confervoid growth and
decaying vegetable matter. They thus not only remove that
which otherwise would be injurious to the inmates of the water,
but they, as also do the fish, convert a part of what they eat
into food for the plants.

The proof that this much-desired
te result is attained is seen in the
apparent health and happiness of
the animals and the sparkling clear-
ness of the water. But to arrange
matters thus will require a little
experience. The plants, however
numerous they may be in the aqua-
rium, will not alone supply sufficient
oxygen. For the principal duty of
the vegetation is, as it has been
said, to decompose the carbonic-
j acid gas expired by the animals,
absorbing the carbon into their own
substance and setting free the
oxygen for the use of the fish; but
the oxygen must be chiefly drawn
from the atmosphere which comes in contact with the surface
of the water. Therefore it will be seen that the shape of the
aquarium is a very important matter; and that this is the
case is proved by a simple experiment. If a wide-mouthed
bottle be filled with water, and an equal quantity of water be
poured into a shallow dish or pan about 2in. deep, and three
or four minnows be placed in each vessel, it will be seen that
while the fish in the pan remain apparently well, those in
the bottle will, after having ascended to the surface of the
water, die.

The reason that the fish in the one case die and in the

8in.

 

 

16 in.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fig. 1.
THE AQUARIUM. 3

 

other live, is because water is simply a vehicle for holding in
solution the oxygen which is necessary to animal life. And
the greater the surface of water exposed to the air, the more
oxygen will it absorb in proportion to its bulk.

An aquarium of the shape and size of Fig. 1, which would
present to the air a surface of water of 32 square inches,

would hardly supply the oxygen
& in. necessary for the health of three
a small fish; while one like Fig. 2,
having a superficial measurement
of 64 square inches, would hold
comfortably six small fish; but
one of the shape and size of
Fig. 3, presenting a surface of
128 square inches, would supply
rn sufficient oxygen for tweive fish.
Fic. 2. And yet all three aquaria would
contain exactly the same quantity

of water, viz., 512 cubic inches.

I have kept twenty-six small minnows for a week in an
ordinary soup-plate, a little more than half-full of water, and
then only one of them died. At the present time one pike
(9in. long). twenty very small roach (about l}in. long), nine
perch (from 24in. to 3in. long), and one large water newt

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

{6 in.

8,

 

Ain,

 

 

 

 

 

Fig. 3.

(Triton cristatus) are living in perfect health in an aquarium
lin. by 133in., but which contains water only 2in. deep—
sufficient to cover the dorsal fin of the biggest fish as he
swims just clear of the bottom. And these fish live in this
comparatively small quantity of water in apparently the
“pest of health, not only because the water is very shallow in
B2
4 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

proportion to its superficies, but also because the act of their
swimming agitates the surface of the water, thus helping to
aérate the whole of it; and for the same reason the twenty-
six minnows lived for a week, and would have done s0
longer, in an ordinary soup-plate half-full of water.

Of course, an aquarium ought not to be so shallow that
the water-plants will fail to grow properly. A tank may be
of almost any depth, but it must have length and breadth in
proportion. To sum up, in order that an aquarium may
be a success, it is necessary that it should be of the right
shape; that the repre-
sentatives of the Animal
Kingdom should not be
in excess of the mini-
mum amount of weed;
and that a little care
be taken daily to main-
tain their balance.

It is almost unneces-
sary to say that if an
aquarium is taken up as
a toy, to be fussed over
for a few days and then
= to be neglected for

Fic. 4. weeks, it will be any-

thing but pleasing and

instructive. The water under these circumstances will
quickly become corrupt and offensive, many of the animals
will die, those which are unfortunate enough to survive will
be extremely miserable, and the owner and his friends will
come to the conclusion that an aquarium is certainly not
what I have described it to be—both pleasing and instructive.

There are very many kinds of aquaria, ranging from the
simple, flat earthenware pan, to the beautiful and expensive
combination of plate-glass, slate, fountains, enamel, and
gilding. All are more or less useful. The aquarium, of
course, most suitable for the fish and the plants is that
which most resembles a pond—the light only entering it”

 
THE AQUARIUM. 5

 

from above. The great drawback to a tank of this kind is
the difficulty of watching closely the movements and ways of
its inhabitants, and besides, such a one cannot be said to be
ornamental. The commonest aquarium, perhaps, is that often
described as an “inverted propagating glass” (Fig. 4). This
kind has its advantages and disadvantages. Its advantages
are the facility with which the contents can be inspected, its
non-leaking character, its cheapness, its portability, and its
attractiveness. Its disadvantages are
its transparency, which causes much
discomfiture to the fish and too great
a growth of conferve ; and its proneness
to apparently distort its inhabitants
as they swim round it. However, the
transparency can be partly overcome
by judicious shading, the method of
which will be explained when “light”
is spoken of, and the apparent distortion can be avoided by
taking care to choose white and well-blown glasses. In buying
an aquarium of this kind, that which is broadest and
shallowest should certainly have the preference.

Another receptacle for water and fish is the common glass
globe (Fig. 5), which has nothing whatever to recommend
it, except perhaps to those who delight to hang their

 

Fig. 5.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fig. 6.

unfortunate captives—suspended by a chain from the ceiling—
in front of the window; and of course an aquarium which is
6 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

to be placed in this position—the worst possible—must, on
account of its weight, be small; besides, if full, the surface
of water exposed to the air must be extremely limited.

The ordinary oblong tank (Fig. 6), containing four glass
sides, is both ornamental and useful. However, in order that

 

Fic. 7.

the fish may be happy and the vegetation kept within bounds,
an arrangement of curtains and the like must be made, which
will be explained in due course. This aquarium is made of
iron and glass or zinc and glass.

 

 

   

|

 

i

(=

 

Fig. 8.

A very useful and somewhat easily-made tank is shown at
Fig. 7. It is constructed of glass, wood, and slate. The
ends and bottom are of wood, the former being lined with
thin window-glass, the latter with slate; and the sides are
formed of plate-glass.
THE AQUARIUM. 7

 

A more useful aquarium than any yet mentioned is one
formed of slate and plate-glass only (Fig. 8). It can be
made by an amateur without much difficulty. But perhaps
the tank most suitable for its purpose is Fig. 9. One side
only is of glass; the others can be made of wood lined with

 

Fig. 9.

glass, or of slate only. The former method is the easier and
cheaper to construct, the latter the more serviceable.

Explicit directions for making aquaria similar to those
shown at Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9, are given in Chapter IT.
CHAPTER II.

MAKING AQUARIA.

appears more difficult to make an aquarium than
it really is. Even a tank like Fig. 6, though it
is less easy to construct than most of the aquaria
mentioned in Chapter I., is not beyond the powers of the
ordinary amateur mechanic. Of course it will require some
little skill, care, and patience; but when it is properly made

 

 

Fic. 10. IRON Buock.
A, Side View; B, End View; C, Standing on its End.
it will not only be useful as an aquarium, but also, if wished,
it can, at some future time, be turned into either a fernery
or a vivarium.
The materials which will be required for its construction are
MAKING AQUARIA. 9

 

zinc, solder, cement, and plate-glass. The tools necessary are
an old tenon-saw, square, hammer, soldering-iron, and a pair
of scissors made for cutting sheet metal; but besides these a
few blocks must be prepared. The amateur can either make
the blocks himself, or he can get them made at a trifling cost.
I will describe them in the order in which they will be required.

 

SZ

Fig. 11. STEEL Bar.

Fig. 10 shows an iron block, 6in. long, having a U-shaped
groove down its centre. The groove is jin. wide and $in. deep.
The holes at each end of the block are for the screws which
fasten it firmly to the bench. It will not only be useful for the
purpose for which it has been made, but at any time it will be
serviceable as a small anvil for straightening nails and the like.

A B
Fic. 12, Woop BLock. A, Side View; B, End View.

Fig. 11 represents a steel bar a little less than jin. in diameter,
and a little longer than the aquarium is intended to be. Figs.
12 and 13 illustrate blocks made of some hard wood. That in
Fig. 12 ought to be not less than Gin. long, and the groove in it
should be at least lin. deep, and just broad enough to receive a
double thickness of zinc. The latter has a groove exactly the

= &

A B
Fig. 13. Woop Bock. A, Side View; B, End View.

same size as that in the iron block (Fig. 10). Fig. 14 is made
of hard wood, faced with two iron plates. The groove in this
block must equal that of the iron block (Fig. 10), and the
iron plates should be just far enough apart to receive a double
thickness of zinc. Besides these blocks an ordinary mitre-
10 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

block will be useful, and all of them are more or less necessary,
not only for the preparation of the zinc framework of this
particular aquarium, but also for other aquaria of a much
easier make. The zinc should be moderately stout—that is,
about No. 12 gauge.

Having decided upon the dimensions of the tank now about
to be made, cut four strips of zinc its exact length, four its

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fic. 14. IRON-FACED BLOCK.
A, Side View; B, End View; C, Face View.

exact breadth, and four its exact height. Hach piece ought
to be ‘hin. wide. Now take a strip of zinc, mark a line down
its centre, and place it upon the iron block (Fig. 10), the line
marked on the zinc being exactly over the middle of the groove
and running lengthwise with it. Then take the steel bar
(Fig. 11) by the handle in the left hand, hold the rod part
of it exactly over the line marked on the zine (and which, of

   
    

qe

=A) OE

~ Os im.

 
    

Fig. 15. Fig. 16,

course, will be over the centre of the groove in the block), and,
with the hammer in the right hand, drive the bar and the zinc
home into the groove, and about 6in. of the strip of zinc will
be bent into the shape of Fig. 15; bend the rest of the strip
in this way, then press, by means of a pair of pincers (Fig. 16),
the zinc tightly round the steel bar. When this has been done
evenly and carefully along the whole length of the strip, put
MAKING AQUARIA. 11

 

the flat part of the zinc into the narrow groove of the block
Fig. 12, the bar not having been withdrawn.

Take the block Fig. 13, place it over the tubing now formed
in the zinc, and by striking it (the block) with a hammer rectify
any inequality which may have appeared in the moulding.
Separate the steel bar from the zinc and slide the latter, tubing
downwards, into the iron-faced block (Fig.

14). Then with a chisel or other like tool

open the flat portion of the zinc now facing

upwards until it forms as nearly as possible

a right angle (Fig. 17). When this has been

done, withdraw the moulding from the block,

and it should now have assumed the shape Fic. 17.

of Fig. 18. If the edges be found to be not

quite straight and true, they may easily be made so by
hammering them on a side of the mitre-block.

Bend all the other strips in the same way, and then take
two of them the length of the proposed aquarium and two of
its breadth, and mitre them together. The mitre cuts can
readily be made by means of an old tenon-saw and an ordinary
mitre-block. Having fixed them in position (Fig.
19), solder the corners neatly and firmly together,
taking care to have the flat portions of the
moulding perfectly square—that is one edge quite
perpendicular and the other perfectly horizontal
(Fig. 20). This will be for the bottom of the
aquarium.

Now take four other pieces of moulding, corre-
sponding to the last four, and repeat exactly the
same operation, and then the top of the tank will
be formed. Next join the top and bottom together
at the corners by means of the remaining four
pieces of moulding. Fig. 22 will show the way in
which these joints are to be made. Care, of course, should be
taken that everything is square and true. The framework of
the aquarium ‘will now be complete. It will be, if properly
done, very strong.

For a bottom, cut a piece of zinc or slate (the latter being far

 

MOULDING.
12 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

preferable) the length and breadth of the tank (inside measure-
ments), place it on the ledge which is running round the lower
part of the frame inside, and solder or cement it there. The
glass for the sides should be iin. thick, and long enough to go
quite across from end to end. But the glass for the ends ought

>

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fig. 19. Four PIECES OF ZINC MOULDING JOINED TOGETHER, thus forming
either the Top or the Bottom of Frame for Aquarium.

just to touch the glass in the sides, so helping to hold it in its
place. Before putting the glass into the frame its bed ought
to be painted with gold-size, and then covered with a thinnish

coating of cement. Recipes for several kinds of cement are
given at the end of this chapter. But, for an aquarium of this

 

A
Fic. 20. Posirion oF ZINC Fic. 21. A, Zinc Frame;
MOULDING WHEN FRAMED. B, Glass; C, Cement,

kind, a mixture of red and white lead is recommended. Now
put the glass in, and press it gently into its place. Put the
sides in first. Paint all the corners with gold-size, and then fill
them in with cement to the depth of about qin. (Fig. 21). When
the cement has been roughly put into position, the fixing of it
MAKING AQUARIA. 13

 

may be firmly and neatly completed by gently rubbing it with
the finger upon the end of which is some gold size.

The tank should now be left to dry for some days; but
during this time a stand and covering for it may be prepared.
The stand (Fig. 23) can be made of oak, mahogany, or deal;

 

Fic. 22. SHOWING THE JUNCTION OF THE ZINC MOULDING AT THE CORNERS.

this last should be stained and varnished. It ought to bea trifle
longer and broader than the aquarium. A groove must be cut
in its surface, to receive the beading of the zinc which is at the
bottom of the tank. The whole should stand quite firmly.
Instead of the heavy-looking covering usually made for such an

SO ——

 

Fic. 23, STAND FOR ZINC-FRAMED AQUARIUM.

aquarium as this, a flat piece of glass or of perforated zinc is to
be preferred: the former is the better.

At the end of a week the cement will have become somewhat
hard; and if red and white lead have been used as the cement,
14 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

it should now receive two coats of a varnish made of the best
sealing-wax dissolved in spirits of wine. With this the zinc
bottom ought also to be painted two or three times. Japan
black may be used instead of the above varnish, but it will not
be so satisfactory. If no varnish at all is used, the aquarium
must be filled with water for three weeks or a month before
it is stocked with plants and fish, the water being frequently
changed during the time. The framework of the aquarium
will be much improved in appearance if carefully painted
with Brunswick Black or enamel of some suitable colour; if
black is used. it may be “picked out” with gold or yellow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fic. 24. METHOD OF DOVETAILING CROSSBARS OF AQUARIUM (FIG. 7) INTO
UPPER PART OF ENDS.

J have taken it for granted that the maker of such a tank as
this has had some little practice in the use of the soldering-iron.
But should the reader not know how to solder, and yet wish to
attempt to make such an aquarium as this, he cannot do better
than invest 6d. in an excellent little book entitled “ Working
in Sheet Metal,”* which will give him all the information he
will require.

It is comparatively easy to make an aquarium to resemble
Fig. 7. The ends and bottom are made of lin. well-seasoned
deal, dovetailed together. They are grooved. The grooves run
with the grain, and are $in. deep, about the same wide, and
3in. from each edge. The ends are held firmly in their places

* “Working in Sheet Metal.” Instructions to amateurs in soldering, brazin:

&c. By the author of ‘Turning for Amateurs.” L : * +
Strand, W.C. 5 rs.” London: L. Upeott Gill, 170,
MAKING AQUARIA. 15

 

by two bars at the top of the aquarium (Fig. 7, a). These bars
are 2in. broad and lin. thick. They are dovetailed into their
places (Fig, 24), and have grooves to correspond with those in
the bottom and the ends.

The ends are lined with window-glass and the bottom is lined
with slate. The sides are formed of plate-glass Hin. thick;
these must be put in their places before the crossbars at the
top of the aquarium are fastened, the grooves into which they
go having previously been half-filled with cement No. 2 (p. 24).
Cover the bottom with a thin layer of the cement just
mentioned, and press the slate firmly and gently into its place.
Fix, in the same way, the glass linings for the ends. Fill up
the corners with a cement of red and white lead to’ the depth
of Zin., and when it is somewhat hard put over it a coating of
the cement which was first used. This cement might be
employed throughout; but then, for safety, it must be used a little
more liberally than the other. The junction of the glass
linings with the ends, and the dovetailing of the crossbars, can
be hidden by four strips of wood, 23in. wide and Hin. thick,
neatly mitred together, the corners of which framing may be
decorated with small turned ornaments (as in Fig. 7). The
woodwork will look well either stained, sized, and varnished, or
French-polished. The aquarium should have six little feet
lin. high, screwed to the bottom.

Slate Zin. or lin. thick will be required to make a tank like
Fig. 8. It may be- procured at a slate merchant’s at a cost of
about 10d. a foot. The three pieces which will be wanted can
most likely be obtained the size required. The bottom 30in.
long and 16in. wide, and the ends each 16in. by 18in., will
make an aquarium of good dimensions. At lin. from the
extremity of each end—that is, across the broad part—cut a
groove in. deep and lin. broad. This is supposing that slate
lin. thick has been chosen; but if it is only #in. thick, then
the groove must be proportionately smaller each way. The
groove may be cut in the following manner: First mark with
an awl the exact place and dimensions of the groove. Then
get two straight-edged pieces of wood some inches longer
than the breadth of the end; place them each side of the line
16 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

which is to be cut, and nail them to the bench—they should be
Just wide enough apart to admit a tenon-saw—and with the
saw cut the line to the required depth, jin. Without some
such preparation as this it would be difficult to cut the sides of
the grooves with the necessary accuracy. When both lines
have been sawn in this way, take a chisel and mallet and cut
out the slate which lies between them. But before using the
chisel take the precaution to put two or three folds of carpet,
or the like, between the slate and the bench to prevent all jarring
and the danger of a crack. These grooves are to receive the
ends of the bottom.
There is E suobher way of making the cuts for these grooves.
It is this: Get a piece of hoop-iron,
; = about a foot long, and straighten
it. Then for a handle procure 10in.
of broomstick, more or less, saw it
half through lengthwise, and hammer
the hoop-iron into the groove. Mark
with an awl the place on the slate
where the cut is to be made—and
deepen this mark a little by running
the point of a three-cornered file a
FIG ee eo nroka) SEATE few times carefully up and down.

oe (FIG. 8), show- 7 i
ing Grooves for, Glass Fill the slight groove thus made

a Sass Pe eae with fine white sand, and moisten it
with water by means of a wet brush.
Now run to and fro in this sand and water the edge of the
tool which has just been made. By continually doing this,
always keeping plenty of sand and water under the edge of
the iron, the cut will gradually become deep enough. When
the cuts have been made, the portion of slate between them may
be chiselled out as before directed. As a rule, the slate can be
split cleanly out by striking the chisel against the edge and not
on the top of the slate, and there is less danger of breakage.
The latter method of making the cuts is the more satisfactory
of the two—the former so quickly blunts the saw.
Now along both sides of the bottom and of each end, cut, at
a distance of jin. from the edge, grooves }in. deep and Sin.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2 ry

 
MAKING AQUARIA. 17

 

broad. These grooves are to receive the plate-glass sides, tin.
thick. After this bore four holes, fin. in diameter, right
through each end. Two of these are to be 14in. from the edge
and iin. below the groove which is to receive the end of the
bottom, and two lin. from the top and just within the grooves
cut for the glass (Fig. 25).

The holes are for the bolts which run across from end to end
to hold the aquarium together. Bore them with an ordinary
brace, and a bit used for metal. The bolts should be made of
brass wire; but iron will do. It is a wise precaution to have
the thread for the nut a little longer than necessary, for it can
easily be shortened when the bolts are in their places, and
the long threading is a great convenience in the screwing-up.
Before putting the aquarium together, place a little cement in
all the grooves. Then raise the bottom on blocks of wood to
such a height that it will be level with the grooves cut to
receive it in the two ends. And when this has been done, put
the ends, plate-glass, and bolts into position, and screw them
all together, turning the nuts of the bolts with only the finger
and thumb. Before the nuts are quite screwed home, press the
glass gently downward, so that it is forced firmly into its place.
Carefully finish filling up the grooves with cement, and the
aquarium will be completed. If iron bolts have been used,
paint them with Brunswick Black.

An aquarium like Fig. 9 will perhaps be more suitable for its
purpose than any yet described, but will not be so ornamental.
It makes an excellent tank for marine specimens; and may be
made either of wood, slate, and glass, or of slate and glass only.
If made on the former plan, the directions given for the con-
struction of an aquarium like Fig. 7 will suffice for the building
of this, with the following exceptions: A wooden side lined
with window-glass, or roofing-slate, will take the place of a plate-
glass side. As the aquarium will be broader than Fig. 7, the
grooves in the ends for the glass front must run across the
grain, and the bottom must be made the required breadth by
clamping and glueing on another piece of wood. The wood
work ought to be dovetailed together; but if this cannot con-
veniently be done, nailing with long French nails will do. The

c
18: FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

front must be framed as wellas the top. A useful size for an
aquarium of this description will be 24in. long, 20in. wide, and
10in. deep. If the tank is to be made of slate and plate-glass
only, the directions given for making an aquarium like Fig. 8
will be enough, except
that in the place of a
glass side there will be
a slate one, and for this
the grooves, instead of
being 4in. deep and Zin.
broad, ought to be 4in.
deep and Iltin. broad.
This is a most useful
Fic. 26. PORTABLE AQUARIUM. and durable aquarium.
Fig. 26 represents a
very easily and cheaply made aquarium. It is a small tank,
chiefly useful for observing the habits of insects and the like.
Being of little weight, it can conveniently be moved about
when full of water. It is deeper and narrower in proportion
than a aquarium in which fish are kept ought to be. The
foundation is made of lin.
well-seasoned wood (maho-
gany answers the purpose
excellently), Cut a piece
14in. long by lin. broad.
At lin. from the edge, all
round, make a groove jin.
wide, and the same deep;
bend four pieces of zinc
moulding according to the Q
instructions already given, ,
10in.long. Boreahole jin. Fie. 27. BoTToM OF PORTABLE AQUARIUM,
in diameter at each corner eee ne fk Gelaee: Balch eine
of the grooving in such a
way that the square part of the moulding when sunk in the wood
will come flush with the outside of the groove; and when this
has been done make a cutting with a keyhole-saw to receive the
flat. portion of the zinc upright (Fig. 27). Drive gently with a

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
MAKING AQUARIA, 19

 

mallet each piece of moulding until its end has come flush with
the other side of the wood foundation; then by driving a long
French nail, minus its head, into the side of the wood and
through the flat part of the zinc, each upright can be made firm.
Now cut two strips of zinc 12in. long, and two Qin. long, all lin.
wide. Mitre them, then join together with solder. When this
has been done, take what is made of the aquarium, turn it
upside down, place each upright on a corner of this frame, and
solder them carefully there. Next get a piece of roofing slate,
and with an old saw cut it to fit as a lining for the bottom. The
four sides may be of window-glass of a moderate thickness. Use
red and white lead as the cement, and paint it, when dry, with
two coats of sealing-wax varnish or Aspinall’s Bath Enamel. If
this cement is not covered in some way, every aquarium in
which it is used must be thoroughly soaked before it is stocked;
indeed, the soaking of a new aquarium in which cement of any
kind has been used should never be omitted. Fill the spaces
which may have occurred through inaccurate work, between
the outside of the glass and the groove in the wood foundation,
with Portland cement or plaster of Paris, and the tank is
complete. :

If the uprights are not more than 6in. in height, they will
need no support at the top. Instead of the groove cut in
the wooden foundation, slips of wood may support the glass
at the bottom; the slips will save trouble, but will not make’
the aquarium look so neat as the grooving would. Aquaria
made in this way are easily and cheaply constructed, and
are not likely to leak.

An arrangement of an aquarium and fernery combined is
interesting and ornamental (Fig. 28). This combination
is fixed outside a window. The tank should be of slate and
plate-glass, like Fig. 8, but it may be similar to either Fig. 7
or Fig. 9. I£ it be either of the first two shapes, then the.
stand should be so arranged that there will be a place for
ferns beyond the aquarium. The effect of seeing them
through the water will be pleasing, and at the same time
they will provide suitable shade for the fish. The framework
to support and protect the aquarium and fernery may be as

c 2
Hn ea A A Te me
if — a Te i ie
i wit

enc = Mi

it —- rl 7

| = a
Mi ial HN i)

cen i it

eat

Hl Hil

 

FIG. 28. AQUARIUM AND FERNERY COMBINED.
MAKING AQUARIA. 21

 

high as the window—or only half as high—but its breadth
should somewhat exceed that of the window. The reason for
this greater breadth is that the tank may be so long that its

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fic. 29. Back OF AQUARIUM AND FERNERY COMBINED.

ends will not be exposed to view, the aquarium thus ap-
pearing to be larger than it really is. If the tank is made
22 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

of slate, according to Fig. 8, only a piece of plate-glass will
be seen as its front, no top bar being necessary, which would
mar the effect. The whole combination may be supported by
a strong wooden stand outside the window (Fig. 80); or if
the room to which it is affixed is an upper one, iron brackets
let into the wall must be used instead of the stand. The
frame, back, and sides should be glazed with tinted cathedral
glass, especially if the view from the window is unpleasing.
One large sheet is used for the back (A, Fig. 29); but if it
should not be convenient to use only one pane for this
purpose, the necessary wood-work for more than one may be
tastefully covered inside with cork, with here and there a
fern, which may be planted in the following way: Get a
small, round tin canister with a few holes punched in the
bottom, and sew round it two pieces of sufficiently-curved
cork, using thin copper wire for this purpose, and in this
contrivance plant the fern. Ferns ‘in suitable baskets may be
hung from.the roof of the frame, but care should be taken
that they are not too heavy, as this roof should be so
arranged as to open and shut at pleasure. No fern ought to
be hung in such a way that the drip from it would fall
inside the aquarium. If anything does hang over the tank,
it should be a fern-basket and filter in one, which combina-
tion is not difficult to make.

A fountain playing in the aquarium will be a great im-
provement, and can, according to circumstances, be more or
less easily contrived.

Directions for making fountains and the filter are given in
another chapter.

Fig. 30 represents a section of the fernery and aquarium
combination. A, window-sill; B, aquarium; C and D, trays
for ferns, running the whole length of the aquarium; E, one
of the hanging-baskets; F, fountain; G, wooden support; H
and I, legs to support aquarium and tray. The trays ought
to have holes in their bottoms, to allow for drainage, which
should be able to run freely through the floor of the frame-
work into the yard or garden outside. Instead of the trays
C and D for ferns, one tray, so arranged as to admit of
MAKING AQUARIA. " 23

a sloping surface of mould (as shown by the dotted line) may
be substituted.

All the aquaria described in this chapter, with one ex-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

ee
Fic. 30 SECTION OF AQUARIUM AND FERNERY COMBINED.

ception, I have myself made at different times, and the one
excepted was made by a friend; therefore it will be seen that
24 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

their construction is not beyond the powers of an ordinary
amateur mechanic.

The following cements have been found useful in the con-
struction of aquaria:

1. Red and white lead—the two being mixed together into
a stiff paste. The bed for this cement ought to be painted
with gold-size. :

2. One pint each of plaster of Paris, litharge, fine white
sand, and one-third pint of finely-powdered resin. This (or in
this proportion) should be kept in a well-stoppered bottle, and
when wanted the necessary quantity should be made into a
putty with boiled oil and driers. This is a very quick-drying
cement. It becomes, if anything, too hard.

3. The same as No. 2, with the exception of the plaster of
‘Paris and the driers.

4, The best Portland cement.

5. One part pitch and one-fourth part gutta-percha, applied
when warm. These should be melted together in an iron
ladle over a gas-flame or lamp. This cement is especially
useful for an aquarium made of wood.

In buying an aquarium, care should be taken to choose one
which is broad and shallow in proportion to its size. It
ought, at the same time, to be neat in appearance and
strongly made.

The different aquaria suitable for insects only will be de-
scribed in another chapter.
CHAPTER III.

THE CABINET AQUARIUM.

IN arrangement called the “cabinet aquarium” is ex-
ceedingly interesting and instructive. It consists of
a kind of backless bookcase, upon the shelves of

which are placed small aquaria containing such aquatic

plants and animals as are unsuitable, owing to various
reasons, for the general tank. These shelves should be strong,
and so constructed that they will-stand quite firmly. They
may be made of almost any kind of wood, and in either

a plain or an ornamental manner, as the taste of the

aquarium-keeper may dictate or his purse allow. They may

also be constructed to stand upon the floor, or upon a table.

Care should be taken, however, that the shelves are at

different distances apart, the greatest space being between

the first two shelves, counting from the bottom. Shelves
thus arranged will hold vessels of various sizes.

The most suitable position for the cabinet aquarium is
about 6ft. from a window, and out of reach of the direct rays
of the sun. Then, if the stand has been wisely built, the
contents of the aquaria can be easily watched without any
inconvenience.

No shelf should be so low as to occasion stooping on the
part of the aquarium-keeper, or so high as to necessitate his
standing upon a chair or stool. If the stand is required to
hold very many vessels, it should be long rather than too

 
26 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

high or too low. A cabinet aquarium, if properly arranged
and cared for, is rather an ornament in a room. It will
impede hardly any light when placed at right angles to a
window.

None but those who have possessed some such arrangement
as a cabinet aquarium can readily understand how much in-
terest and instruction it is able to afford. Some change or
other is always taking place in the various aquaria, and thus
there is continually a fresh lesson to be learnt or a new wonder
whereat to be astonished. As nearly all the little tanks can
be made more or less self-supporting, a very small amount of
trouble will be required in their management. If the shelves
are made to stand upon the floor of the room, and not upon
a table, a small cupboard or a drawer or two may be con-
trived beneath the lowest shelf, which will be very convenient
for holding siphons, nets, cans, and the like.

An arrangement of a simpler kind than that just described
can be made by placing a piece of strong board lengthwise
across any large tank which has slate or wooden ends. Such
a board will hold several small aquaria. If it is of a fair length,
three small inverted propagating-glasses may be placed upon
it at equal distances apart, the middle glass being a little
larger than the other two, chiefly for the sake of appearance.
The glasses will stand quite firmly if the knob of each is
inserted through a hole made in the board. There may also
be room for other and smaller aquaria between the glasses.
Little oblong tanks might be used, and with advantage, instead
of the propagating-glasses.

The vessels of the cabinet aquarium may be either rectangular
or round—the former shape, for several reasons, being the
more suitable; but whether they are square or round, there
should certainly be some uniformity among them. Propagating-
glasses of various sizes can always be used in the cabinet
aquarium by fixing them as just described. A great disad-
advantage of these glasses is that they so much distort the
objects which they contain; but if they are used it is
wise to have a few common stands at hand for them, which
will be convenient in case the glasses have occasionally to be
THE CABINET AQUARIUM. 27

 

moved. The stands can be easily and cheaply made. For
instance, a piece of wood about Gin. square, having a hole big
enough to receive the knob of the glasses bored in the centre,
and also having two strips of wood (lin. thick) nailed across
two opposite ends, will be quite as firm as the ordinary turned
stand; or a small and strong wooden box, with a hole cut in
the middle of the lid, or if there be no lid, through the bottom,
will answer the purpose very well. In the latter case, the
box must be inverted, of course.

Various cheap glass bottles or jars are useful for the
cabinet aquarium. For example, the jam or fruit jars made

 

NAANGSSKCC

CTT TS

WY

at
\

MY
7
yj
HUY [LAY

 

I};

¢

 

 

FIG. 31. EASILY AND CHEAPLY-MADE INSECT AQUARIUM.

by Messrs. G. Clark and Co., of Bordeaux, are of fairly clear
glass, wide-mouthed, neckless, neatly shaped, and provided with
lids, which, when perforated with small holes, make excellent
“covers. Of course, there are other vessels equally suitable
for the cabinet aquarium, and those of Messrs. Clark are
only referred to in order that some idea may be given of what
kind to use. The long clear glasses used by confectioners for
the exhibition of sweetmeats in their windows can be utilised
with advantage for such purposes as the cultivation of certain
aquatic plants and some animals. There are other bottles, too,
generally used also by confectioners for keeping their goods
28 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

in, but not for showing them. These are made of coarser glass
than those just mentioned, and they also possess the dis-
advantage of having a short neck and a mouth of a much less
diameter than the rest of the bottle. The neck and mouth,
however, can be cut off by a simple method, which will be
explained. There is, nevertheless, a great drawback to all
bottles and the like for aquarium purposes, and this is that
their depth is much too great in proportion to their width.
Still, there are circumstances under which they are more
useful than wider and shallower vessels.

Rectangular aquaria are by far the best for the cabinet and
other purposes. Small ones, such as that illustrated at Fig. 31,
can be easily, cheaply, and quickly made, according to the
following directions:

For the bottom (E), procure a piece of well-seasoned board
lin. in thickness of any size up to 16in. long and 12in wide.
No tank which is intended for the cabinet aquarium should
be broader than the shelf of the cabinet upon which it is to
stand.

Cut four strips of stout zinc lin. wide, and of any length
up to Gin. long.

Bend these four pieces of zinc lengthwise at right angles.
This may be done by the help of a carpenter’s ordinary vice,
or by hammering half of the zine over the square edge of a
hard piece of board. A line should be made down the middle
of the strips to guide the bending, which ought to be quite
correct.

Make at nearly the extremity of one end, by means of a
small awl, two holes, one through each side of the zine
moulding, for the wire as represented at D D.

Before nailing a piece of the moulding to each corner of
the board which is intended for the bottom of the aquarium,
a small portion of the wood should’ be cut away so that the
zinc-moulding may be let in until it is quite flush with the
edge of the board.

Cut a strip of zinc 1iin. wide and so long that it will go exactly
round the edges of the board for the bottom (B B).

Nail one piece of the zine moulding at each corner of the
THE CABINET AQUARIUM. 29

 

board in the place cut for it (A A). See that it is quite
upright. Use small French nails, and hammer them well
into the zinc. One nail at each side of the moulding will be
sufficient.

- Nail the piece of zinc, which has been cut 1}in. wide, quite
round the edge of the wood for the bottom. The zinc to the
height of jin. should come above the board. The nails ought
to be put through the centre of the zinc. If the tank is not
more than 6in. long, three French nails in each side will be
enough; one nail at each end, close to the edge of the
uprights, and one in the middle.

Window-glass should now ‘be cut to fit the frame just made,
and put in its place (C C). The glass ought to just reach
the holes in the zinc made for the wire.

Draw four pieces of thin copper or brass wire tightly
through the holes made for it, and fasten it neatly (D).
Copper wire must be well stretched before it is used. The
wire should then hold the glass sides in their places.

Melt in a tin saucer over a lamp four parts pitch and one
part gutta-percha. The pitch and gutta-percha must be well
mixed before it is fit for use. It should boil for some little
time and be stirred with a small iron spoon. Instead of the,
pitch and gutta-percha the following cement may be used, viz. :
One part pitch, one part resin, and a little boiled oil—this last
in the proportion of a tablespoonful to $lb. pitch. This also
must be boiled and well mixed together.

Take what is already made of the aquarium and hold it in
the left hand. In the right hand take a spoonful of the
boiling cement and allow it to cool a little for a moment or
two, or it will crack the glass. Then put the spoonful of
cement into one corner of the aquarium, and having returned
the spoon to the saucer, with both hands tilt the aquarium
carefully, so that the cement will run just at the junction of
two pieces of glass, up to the top of the aquarium and
then down again. Continue to do this until the cement ceases
to flow. If this be well done, the cement will not be seen
beyond the edges of the moulding. Treat all the corners
in the same way, but do not begin a second corner until the
30 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

first is quite firm. This cement sets very quickly. When all
the corners have been cemented, with the spoon pour sufficient
of the mixture on the bottom to cover it, and then the
aquarium, after standing an hour, will be ready for use.
After a little practice, several aquaria, such as the one just
described, can be made ina morning. If carefully constructed,
they look very neat, and will not leak, unless perhaps when
placed for a long time within reach of the rays of a very
hot sun—a position which is not fit for any aquarium. Even
under these circumstances probably the tank would not leak
at all, but the pitch would begin to melt. The zinc-work of
these small cabinet aquaria may be painted with Brunswick
Black or with Aspinall’s Enamel. Instead of the pitch-cement,

 

 

 

 

Fig. 32. CHEAPLY-MADE ALL-GLASS AQUARIUM FOR INSECTS.

mixed red and white lead can be substituted, and after it is
quite dry covered with Aspinall’s Bath Enamel. When the
red and white lead are used the aquarium must be well
soaked before it is stocked.

Tanks made according to the above directions should not be
of greater dimensions than 16in. long, 12in. wide, and 5in. deep.
Those of the largest size should be placed on the bottom shelf
of the cabinet. In fact, these tanks ought to be constructed
according to the shelves, and should stand at least 2in.
apart when placed in position, in order that they may be
easily moved.

Fig. 32 represents another useful and easily-made little tank
which is very suitable for the cabinet aquarium. This small
THE CABINET AQUARIUM. 31

 

vessel is made entirely of glass, of which there are five pieces,
fastened together with marine glue. The two sides and the ends
are stuck to the bottom at the distance of about tin. from its
edge all round. The former are 4in. shorter than the bottom,
and the latter are nearly if not quite as broad. The sides are
put in their places first, and when they are firm the ends are
glued to the extremities of the sides. The gluing is done by
holding a piece of glue about the size of a pea, attached to the
point of an awl, in the flame of a candle until it begins to burn
and melt, when it should be gently drawn along a mark which
has been made on the glass until the glue at the end of the awl
is used. The glue should be placed on the glass quite evenly
to the depth of about }in., and the same in breadth. When
a line of glue is completed, the edge of the piece of glass
which is to be fastened by it should be gently heated, and
then pressed carefully into the glue. In a minute or two the
glass will be quite firm. The gluing should be executed
neatly, for any trimming that is required to be done after the
aquarium has been put together, tends to weaken it. As soon
as the little tank is finished, it may be filled with water, and if
the work has been done with care there will be no leaking.
Should the vessel, however, be not quite watertight, it may
be easily made so by an additional piece of glue, or by
running a little of the pitch-cement previously recommended
over the weak spot, and, to make matters safer, over every
joint. Such an aquarium as the one just described is very
usefal for small aquatic animals; but it should not be con-
structed of greater dimensions than the following, viz., Qin.
long, 2in. wide, and 2in. deep. I have made tanks of this
kind as large as Ift. long, 6in. deep, and 6in. wide; but
I find that they are liable to give a little when the weather
or the room in which they are placed is too hot. Though
the joints open sometimes under these circumstances as much
as 3in., the glue and pitch together become so elastic that the
water is rarely allowed to escape.

The large bottles, which have been already referred to as
suitable for the cabinet aquarium, can be cut in half by satu-
rating a piece of thick worsted in paraffin, and tying it evenly
32 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

round the bottle at the proper place and then setting it on
fire. As the worsted burns, the glass will crack in the
direction of the flame. The rough edges of the shortened
bottles may be rubbed off by using a piece of the stone with
which scythes are sharpened.

Among other things, clear, thin, plain glass tumblers are
very convenient vessels for the upper shelves of the cabinet
aquarium; but the habits and wants of the various animals
and plants should be considered before they are placed in any
of the many different articles which may be converted into
aquaria.

Every tank of the cabinet aquarium ought to be provided with
a well-fitting glass cover, for the purpose not only of preventing
the escape of its inmates, but also of excluding the dust and of
lessening, as far as possible, evaporation; and it is wise to gum
a strip of white paper along the bottom of the front of each
aquarium, in order that a record may be kept of the times
when and the places where its contents were obtained, and
any other circumstance of interest in connection with them.

When the stand of the cabinet aquarium is completed, and
all its shelves are judiciously filled with vessels, some clean
and fine river-sand or well-washed bird-sand should be pre-
pared for the purpose of covering the bottoms of the different
aquaria. But those tanks which are intended to contain
interesting aquatic plants rather than animals ought to be
especially prepared for the reception of such subjects by the
placing of mud, loam, or anything else they may require,
beneath a layer of the gravel. The aquaria, however, which
are to receive various animals will need for the covering of
thetr bottoms only fine gravel or sand, for in such foundations
the very useful American weed (Anacharis alsinastrum) will
readily grow, and provide all that is required of vegetation
in the tank. The most convenient way of planting the
Anacharis in the small vessels of the cabinet aquarium is to
attach to each spray a small piece of lead and drop it in the
water. The spray thus weighted will sink rapidly to the
bottom of the vessel, and assume there its proper position.
By the help of a penholder or a small stick the lead may be
THE CABINET AQUARIUM. 33

 

easily pushed beneath the gravel, and thus hidden from
sight. The Anacharis, or any other suitable weed thus
treated, may be easily placed in or removed from any
aquarium without either trouble or disturbance. When this
method of planting is adopted, it is advisable to fill the
vessel with water before the introduction of the weed. As a
rule, the different tanks of the cabinet aquarium should be
supplied with water and stocked with weed before the animals
which they are to contain are bought or sought for.
CHAPTER IV.

COLLECTING EQUIPMENT.

course, it adds greatly to the interest of cabinet or
other aquaria if the various specimens can be ob-
tained personally from their native waters. Fish
generally should be carried from place to place in well-con-
structed bait-cans; and it is wise, if possible, for this purpose
to procure a can which has a: mechanical contrivance for
aérating the water within it. In such a can, fish may be trans-
ported great distances without injury. If, however, a can
without such a contrivance is used, it should be so made
that the water does not readily splash out of it, and the
splashing thus confined within the can goes a long way
towards aérating the water and supplying the fish with the
necessary oxygen. The can ought not to be more than three-
quarters full of water. Of the many very useful bait-cans
which have been from time to time invented, two may be
referred to here, viz., one recommended by the late Mr. Frank
Buckland in his “Natural History of British Fishes,”
and the other patented by Mr. Basil Field, and manu-
factured by Mr. H. Bowcombe, 2, Victoria-road, Holloway.
The former is a German invention, and though Mr. Buckland,
while speaking highly of this can, says that he engaged a
tinman to construct it, he omits to mention that workman’s
name and address. The latter can is shown in Fig. 33. The
perforated zine interior (D) is lifted whenever a fish is

 
COLLECTING EQUIPMENT. 35

 

required, and there is obviously no occasion to wet the hands
or warm the water by groping in it for the fish. In the
handle (A) is a small pair of bellows, worked by merely
pressing the knob B. The air passes down the small tube
(C), and bubbles up at the bottom of the can. When at the
riverside, the perforated interior can be sunk in the water.
The ordinary pike-fisher’s double live-bait kettle, which can
be got at any tackle-maker’s, is practically the same thing
minus the aérating bellows.

 

Fic. 33. PATENT AERATING BalT-CAN,

If the aquarium-keeper is unwilling to go to the expense of
buying a bait-can, he may easily make one for himself out of
an ordinary oblong tin coffee-canister. This is done by solder-
ing the lid of the canister in its place, cutting a new opening
in the side of the tin, and covering this opening with a small
flap-lid. A handle of strong and rather thick wire is fastened
on each side of the aperture by soldering a strip of tin over
each end of the wire handle after about lin. of it has been
bent at right angles. The lid is affixed by bending about lin.
of its end over a piece of straight wire cut to such a length

D2
36 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

that it projects a short distance on either side of the lid.
When the lid has been put into its place, it is fastened
there by soldering a strip of tin over both extremities of the
projecting wire. After this can has been painted with Brunswick
Black or with enamel, very few would be able to see that it
was originally a coffee-canister. I have found such a con-
trivance as this very convenient, and have carried fish in it
a distance of more than 200 miles by rail.

When the aquarium-keeper intends, during his hunting
expeditions for specimens for his aquaria, to include fish among
his other captives, it is a good plan for him to set out pro-
vided with a can in which he has placed one or two short,
wide-mouthed bottles. He will thus be able to sort his prizes
in such a way as will be conducive both to their safety and
their comfort. He ought, however, to prevent all movement
of the bottles within the can by cutting a piece of tin, zinc,
or wood in such a way that it will fit inside the can and
go over the mouths of the bottles. If the holes, which are cut
in whatever material is chosen, fit the tops of the bottles
exactly, the latter cannot move sufficiently to hurt the
fish or anything else in the can. Theclear glass jars which
have a lip but no neck, and which are sold containing jam,
are excellent vessels for placing within the bait-can, and also
upon the shelves of the cabinet aquarium.

Should it not be the intention to catch fish, however,
the can ought to be left behind, and several wide-
mouthed bottles taken in its place. These may be very
conveniently carried by placing, say, three of them side by
side in a narrow and light wooden box or wicker basket
made for the purpose. Good bottles for this purpose are
those made by Messrs. Clark. They are of a portable size,
and their tin covers, which screw on, are very useful
for preventing both the splashing of the water into the
basket or box, and the escape of the inmates. If the
receptacle for the bottles is a little deeper than they
are, there will be room above them for forceps, brush,
macintosh, magnifying-glass, and any other small appliance
which the aquarium-keeper may require.
to

COLLECTING EQUIPMENT. 37

 

Fig. 34 represents a very useful net for obtaining aquarium
specimens. The frame is of strong iron, which is screwed
into a stout wooden handle of about 6ft. in length. The
material for the net part may be of what is called mosquito-
net, or of that light canvas which is sold for straining milk.
The net should not be too deep, and be of the shape represented
in the engraving. It ought to be—at any rate, the fore part
of it—attached to the iron frame by means of small rings,
which prevent to a great extent the
wearing away of the net by rubbing
against the mud, stones, and bottom
of the water. Such a net as this,
which should be about 3ft. in cir-
cumference, with care will last for a
long time.

Another, a much smaller net
in every way, but made upon
the same plan, will be found very
convenient in addition to the one
just described.

Besides the nets, there should be
taken on the hunting expedition, a
long piece of strong cord, at the end
of which is fastened a kind of hook,
made somewhat after the fashion of
a tiny anchor. This will be useful
for pulling up from the bottoms
of ponds, &., masses of aquatic
plants, among the dripping and muddy tangles of which will
be found many very interesting creatures.

A very simple arrangement may be made for obtaining almost
any number of Entomostraca and other small aquatic animals. It
consists of a wide-mouthed bottle, a small metal funnel, and a small
indiarubber or leaden tube. The broad end of the funnel is covered
with a piece of very fine muslin—so fine that it will hardly allow
anything but the water itself to pass through it—and the
narrow part of the funnel is attached to one end of the tube.
As long as the funnel will go into the bottle, the broader

 

Fic. 34. COLLECTING-NET.
38 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

it is the better. The funnel should occupy the same position
in the bottle as represented in the illustration (Fig. 35). The
bottle ought to have a piece of strong string tied round its
neck, in order that it may be easily carried—even while water is
running through the siphon—from place to place. Another
bottle should be fastened to the end of a strong walking- or other
stick, so that water may be taken from the pond, ditch, or
stream, both near the edge and some distance from it, and
poured into the bottle possessing the siphon. As soon as
the latter is full of water, which is supposed to contain the
minute animals required, the siphon is made to run, and by
constant additions of water
is allowed to continue
doing so until sufficient
captives are taken.

When the muslin gets
choked—as it occasionally
will do—with mud and
the like, it may be cleared
by gently striking it once
or twice against the sur-

Fic. 35. BOTTLE AND SIPHON. face of the water within
the bottle. This operation
will necessitate, of course, the re-starting of the siphon. As the

Entomostraca are attracted to the surface of the water by the

shining of the sun, a fine rather than a dull day should be
, chosen for catching them.

Besides the cans, bottles, and nets, the collector of specimens
for the aquarium will find the following articles very useful
during his hunting expeditions: (1) A pair of forceps, (2) a
small brush of camel’s-hair, (3) a piece of macintosh, (4) magni-
fying-glass, (5) wading boots, (6) wire, string, and pocket-
knife. ;

The forceps are convenient for quickly and gently picking
certain animals off the weeds, or out of the mud brought to
the banks with the weeds, and placing them into the receptacles
prepared for them. Fig. 36 represents two kinds of forceps.
The steel forceps may be obtained, for a small sum of money, of

 
COLLECTING EQUIPMENT. 39

 

a surgical instrument maker. The wooden forceps can be easily
made at home by nailing two slender pieces of hard and elastic
wood to a small centre block. If the latter pair of forceps are
1ft. long, they may be used also for bringing up objects from the
bottom of the smaller aquaria.

The camel’s-hair brush is convenient for removing the more
delicate animals from the weeds or net, and placing them in
the bottles.

The piece of macintosh is useful for three different purposes :
for the collector to kneel on while he is examining the weeds
or mud which he has taken from the water; for receiving the
various animals which fall from those aquatic plants which
are shaken over it; and for wrapping up the weeds which are

 

—eee
—— SD
"

Fic. 36. WOODEN AND STEEL: FORCEPS.

intended to be carried away. It should not be much less
than lyd. square.

The magnifying-glass is often of great help in making a
close and careful examination of both plants and animals, and
in deciding what are to be left behind and what taken home.

Of course, it goes without saying that a pair of strong boots
are almost a sine qud non during the expeditions in search of
aquarium specimens; but those boots in which the collector
can wade in the water up to his knees, are not only a great
convenience, but are also often the means (by reason of
the greater range which they give) of making interesting
captures.

A piece of string, some thin wire, and a pocket-knife, should
never be left behind, for one or other of them is almost sure to
be required for something during the day.
40 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

If the aquarium-keeper be prudent, he will take care not to
overburden himself with bottles and nets, for nothing is so
likely to mar the pleasure of a hunting expedition as a long
walk home, after hard work, with more than one can con-
veniently carry.

I have more than once heard it said that one of the greatest
charms of English sport is that one never knows for certain
what is going to “get up.” This is, in a way, true of hunting
for aquarium specimens, for the collector is always wondering
what he will fish up next; and after he has begun to use his
nets in some well-stocked piece of water, he hardly knows when
to leave off, or when he has obtained enough prizes. At least,
such has generally been my own experience. There are often
in ponds, ditches, and streams, what may be called traps. These
traps consist of old boots, old hats, pieces of rag, and half-sunk
bonnet-boxes or newspapers; and if the collector will take the
trouble to examine such things, he will frequently be well
rewarded for his pains, for in them or under them a good
collection of many and various aquatic animals are often to be
found. It is, indeed, a good plan to purposely set these useful
traps.

I can easily remember that while I was a small boy I often
used to look forward to the time when I should be able to
possess one very large aquarium in which I could place all the
different aquatic animals I might procure; but I have long
since learnt by experience that it is impossible for the members
of such an interesting (to me) collection to live peaceably
together for any length of time—no, not even for one single
night. It is wise, therefore, for the collector to return home
from his hunting expedition before it be too late, or before he be
too tired to put his prizes into their respective dwelling-places.
Should he, however, be indisposed or unable at once to finally
assort his captives, he ought to transfer into shallow and well-
covered vessels those creatures which he cannot trust, either
for their own welfare or for the welfare of their comrades, to
remain in the collecting-bottles. The various animals and
plants can then be conveniently arranged on the following day.

There is a little net which may be cheaply and easily made,
COLLECTING EQUIPMENT. 41

 

and which I have found very useful for transferring aquatic
specimens from vessel to vessel. The net is constructed out of
one of the small wire baskets which are sold for the purpose
of hanging on to the ends of teapot-spouts, in order that they
may catch those tea-leaves which otherwise would fall into
the cups. The wire fastening which is made to go down the
spout of the teapot is taken off the basket, and a straight piece
of rather thin wire, about 16in. or 18in. long, is wound (at its
middle) once round the basket, just below the rim, in such a
way that the two ends when twisted together form a handle
of nearly 1ft.in length. The teapot-spout basket may be bought
at almost every ironmonger’s for 1d. or 13d.

There is hardly any part of the year which is altogether
unsuitable for excursions in search of aquatic animals or plants.
I have had successful days even when I have been obliged to
break the thin ice which was covering the surface of the water,
However, the summer-time is the best season of all for these
expeditions.
CHAPTER V.

MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM.

 
 

N aquarium in the formation of which cement of
any kind has been used, should stand filled with
water for ten days or a fortnight,'and the water be
changed several times during that period, before it is stocked.
The cement will thus have an opportunity of giving off anything
which would be likely to injure the inhabitants of the tank.
When the aquarium has been sufficiently seasoned in this way,
empty it, clean it, and put it into its permanent position, taking
care that it stands quite firm and is perfectly level in every
direction. After this has been satisfactorily arranged, some
sand should be taken from a river or running stream; but if
it cannot conveniently be procured from there, ordinary bird-
sand will do very well when it has been prepared in the following
manner: By means of a fine-meshed sieve all the larger stones
should be separated from the rest of the sand. As the sand
is riddled it should fall into a bucket of water. When a
sufficient quantity of sand has been obtained in this way, it
ought to be energetically stirred for several minutes with a
stick, and then the muddy water poured off. The pail should
now be filled with boiling water, in which the sand ought to
be thoroughly washed, and then the water emptied away.
When this operation has been repeated two or three times,
the sand will be ready for the aquarium. River-sand should
also undergo the same careful washing. This cleansing of
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM. 43

 

the sand ought never to be neglected, for without it some
decaying matter, either vegetable or animal, will certainly be
present, and in time corrupt the water of the tank, and so
cause injury to its inmates.

This clean sand should now be placed in the aquarium to
a depth of from 2in. to 4in., according to the size of the tank
and the character of the plants which are to be introduced.
But if the aquarium is bell-shaped, all its lower portion may
with advantage be filled with sand until it reaches that part
of the vessel where the sides begin to be vertical. This will
both lessen the depth of water and increase the rooting-space
for vegetation. Over the sand a layer of some fine gravel
should be put, which also must be washed perfectly clean.
This gravel may be obtained from a river or stream, but that
which has been sifted from the bird-sand will do very well.
The gravel is chiefly for the purpose of preventing fish and
their comrades from turning up the sand and sediment, and
thus interfering with the clearness of the water. Charcoal
is sometimes buried in the sand—for it has the power to some
extent of counteracting putrefaction and preventing unpleasant
smells. Its presence, however, in the aquarium has its draw-
backs: if allowed to float in the water, it will look unsightly;
and if sunk in the sand, there will be a difficulty in renewing
it when its efficiency as a deodoriser has gone. A properly-
stocked aquarium needs no charcoal.

‘Among the occupants of an aquarium there will be some
which. will not care to remain in the water always; and for their
accommodation it will be advisable to erect a kind of rockwork,
the top of which ought to rise above the surface of the water.
This rockwork will also provide shade for the fish and the other
animals which delight in retirement. It can be bought all ready
for the aquarium; but often that which is offered for sale is
gaudily coloured, or is in other respects unsuitable. Sometimes
it will be found made in the shape of ruins of various kinds.
Of course such rockwork is altogether out of place in a well-
arranged tank, for no one with any taste at all would care to see
a fish, for instance, swimming through the window of a house,
or a triton wriggling through the loophole of a castle.
44 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Suitable rockwork can easily be constructed. It should be
of small dimensions rather than the reverse, as long as it will
answer its purpose; for much rockwork takes up valuable space,
and does not look well in an aquarium. Care ought to be taken
to so arrange it that, while it will afford the necessary shade to
the occupants of the tank, it will not at the same time provide
them with retreats into which they can retire altogether from
their owner’s sight; for, if the animals are able to completely
hide themselves, it is very possible that, should they die, their
deaths will be undiscovered until the corrupting bodies have
done irreparable damage to the whole aquarium.

Rockwork may be made of pumice-stone, coke, melted glass,
mica-schist, or other material of a like kind. If the desired
shape and size cannot be found in one single piece, two or three
pieces may be joined together by means of Portland cement,
always remembering that this cement, after it has well set,
should be soaked for some days in water before it is placed in its
permanent position in the aquarium. Pieces of pumice-stone
or coke may be united by means of wooden rivets, each rivet
running into the adjoining parts a couple of inches, the holes
for which can easily: be made with an ordinary awl. Before
coke is put in the tank it should be dipped into some liquid
Portland cement of about the consistency of ordinary whitewash,
keeping the mixture well stirred during the process.

An aquarium like Fig. 9 may have rockwork so arranged
as to represent a cave, out of which and into which the fish
and other animals seem continually to go and come. To effect
this arrangement it will be necessary to get a piece of looking-
glass about 5in. square, more or less according to the size of
the tank. Paint the back of this two or three times with
sealing-wax varnish, japan ‘black, or anything else which will
protect it from the action of the water; then, when this is dry,
place the aquarium with the glass front upwards, and cover
its back, inside, with cement No.2. Now take the looking-glass
and fix it firmly in the centre of the back of the tank, and
around it arrange mica-schist in such a way that the glass will
represent the mouth of a cave. All the back should be covered
with the stone. This plan, however, is more appropriate for
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM. 45

 

a marine than for a fresh-water aquarium. Instead of rockwork,
a small island may be constructed for the newts; and upon the
island a fern or some semi-aquatic plant can be grown.

All plants should be put in their places before the aquarium
is filled with water. Those which do not require much rooting-
space may be planted in the sand and gravel at the bottom of
the tank; but those which need greater depth can be set in
small flower-pots. These pots can either be hidden by means
of a careful arrangement of rockwork, or they themselves may
be made to resemble it by covering their sides with small pieces
of coke, fastened into position with Portland cement. The
whole should be then dipped as before described. There is
one great advantage in putting plants into pots, inasmuch
that, should occasion require, the aquarium can be emptied
without materially interfering with their growth. But wherever
plants are placed, whether in pots or at the bottom of the tank,
the sand above their roots should be covered with plenty of
gravel, as it tends to make the setting firm and permanent.
The different aquatic plants suitable for freshwater aquaria
will be described in another chapter.

In an aquarium that is properly arranged and cared for, the
water should seldom or never need changing. Its character,
therefore, is a matter of much importance. The best water for
the purpose is that from a river; next, that from a large and
very clear pond; next, very clean rain-water; next, that from
the “tap”; and last of all, and to be avoided if possible, hard
water from the well, When the aquarium has been made quite
clean, its glass has been well polished, the sand and the gravel,
in the proper proportion, at its bottom have been perfectly
washed, the plants have been put in their places, and the
rockwork has been placed in position, then—and not till then—
should the water be introduced.

There is really only one satisfactory way, so far as I know,
of filling an aquarium with water, and that is by means of a
very slender siphon. A siphon of large diameter is worse
than useless for this purpose; but should the proper-sized
siphon not be conveniently at hand, the water may be intro-
duced in one of the following ways:
46 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

1. Pour it very slowly and carefully, by means of a slender-
spouted can, against the sides of the tank.

2. Place a jug in the centre of the aquarium, taking care
that it does not stand on any plant, and pour the water
gently into it until the tank is full; then remove the pitcher
without emptying it.

3. Put the aquarium, if not too large, under a “supply”
tap, and regulate the latter so that it allows the water to drip
slowly upon a sponge placed on the gravel of the former.
The sponge, while being taken out, should not be squeezed.

4, Fill the tank by the help of a watering-can which has a
very fine rose.

 

Fic. 37. CORRECT METHOD OF FILLING AN AQUARIUM.

But however carefully the water is introduced into the
aquarium in any one of the above four ways, it will be found
not to be perfectly clear. A small siphon only will attain
that much-desired end. If one siphon does not work quickly
enough, two or three may be used at the same time. A slender
india-rubber tube of the necessary length, not thicker than
the stem of an ordinary clay pipe, will make the siphon. The
smaller the tubing in its diameter, the more satisfactorily wil]
it do its work (Fig. 37). The lower end of the siphon should
rest on the gravel of the aquarium or upon the rockwork.
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM. 47

 

When the aquarium has been properly filled in the way
just described, it is a good plan, if patience will allow, to
postpone the introduction of any animals for at least ten
days or a fortnight—the longer the better. During this time
the plants ought to commence to grow and give off oxygen.
At first only a few occupants should be introduced—say, a
newt, three or four small fish, and a few snails—and if these
do well, one or two more may be added, and so on. When the
plants are fairly established, the aquarium will support much
more life than when they are only just beginning to grow.
If the fish swim near the surface of the water tails downwards
and mouths upwards, there are too many in the tank, and
unless some are speedily removed, many will die. There should
always be too few inmates in an aquarium rather than too
many; but if the tank is properly arranged, it is. really sur-
prising how much animal life it will support. For instance,
I have at the time of writing in a bell-glass aquarium, 19in.
in diameter, one gold-fish, one silver-fish, one carp, about a
dozen snails (Planorbis corneus), and at the least forty small
minnows (Cyprinus phoxinus). All these fish are seemingly
in perfect health, and have been so for about ten months.
The plants in this aquarium are Vallisneria spiralis and the
Cape Fragrant Water Lily (Aponogeton distachyon).

The water of an aquarium that is properly balanced and cared
for, should never require changing, as a rule; but circumstances
do occasionally arise in which it is necessary to empty the tank.
For instance, the water may have become corrupted by an un-
discovered dead body; the plants may need renewing, or the
rockwork re-arranging; perhaps the aquarium has sprung a
leak, or it is necessary to remove it to some other position.
Any one of these circumstances would require the emptying
away of the water. This can easily be done by means of a piece
of india-rubber tubing, of about 3in. in diameter, used as a
siphon (Fig. 38.) Before the commencement of the withdrawal
of the water, as many of the fish and other inhabitants of the
aquarium as possible should be transferred elsewhere. How-
ever, it is not probable that all will be caught, for some
will hide themselves in the weeds or under the rockwork; and to
48 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

prevent their being sucked up, the end of the siphon which is
to go in the aquarium should be covered with a piece of mosquito
net or similar material.

The position of an aquarium is an important matter, for very
much depends upon the regulation of the light. Light is
necessary to the growth of the plants, and to the production
of oxygen. But too much light will encourage the development
of the freshwater Alge commonly called Conferva. This con-

 

Fic. 38. METHOD OF EMPTYING AN AQUARIUM.

ferva is a vegetable growth which appears upon the inside of
the glass of the aquarium, depriving it of its transparency. It
grows also upon the plants, interfering with their welfare,
and it will quickly spread, if unchecked, throughout the
water, making it thick, green, and unsightly. Care is there-
fore necessary to guard against both too much, and too little
light. The latter is much to be preferred to the former. The
rays of the sun should never fall directly upon an aquarium,
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM. 49

 

for, if they do, not only will the growth of the conferva be
encouraged, but the temperature of the water will quickly rise
too high. The higher the temperature of the water, the fewer
animals will it be able to contain; besides which, water
in this condition very readily becomes impure. The average
temperature of an aquarium ought to be about 50deg., and, if
possible, it should never be allowed to vary more than 10deg.
either way. It may be reduced by covering the tank with a
woollen cloth, the lower end of which is standing in some

'"-water.

As a rule, aquaria are placed near a window—a position con-
ducive to the growth of the plants, but not to the happiness
of the fish. Indeed, it is positively cruel to put fish in an all-
glass aquarium and allow the sun to shine upon it during the
hottest part of the day. Since an aquarium, however, will most
likely be put close to a window, let it be one facing the north
if possible. An eastern aspect is not at all unsuitable, but it
will be advisable to cover the tank at night, so that it will not
get the early morning sun.

There are many ways of shading aquaria so that they shall
not be unduly influenced by light and sun. If the aquarium is
round, a sheet of green paper or a piece of American cloth,
hung by means of small wire hooks to the edge of the glass,
will answer the purpose. This can easily be removed for the
inspection of the contents of the aquarium. Of course, such a
screen cannot be called ornamental, but it is effective. Flowers
or ferns placed between the aquarium and the window will
supply not a little shade. If the tank is rectangular, and all-
four sides made of glass, the same kind of shading will do, or
cardboard may be cut to exactly fit three of the sides, instead,
A little protection from too much light and sun may be obtained
by having three of the sides made of ground-glass, or by
covering these sides (externally, of course), with whitening
dabbed on with a sponge, in imitation of ground-glass; or the
conferves may be allowed to grow upon the three sides, and the
fourth kept clear by using, when necessary, a piece of flannel
tied to the end of a short cane. A good piece of looking-glass,
cut the exact length and depth of the aquarium, and placed

E
50 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

behind it, will give both shade and effect. The back of the
mirror must, in some way or other, be protected from the action
of the sun.

It has been already mentioned that the water of an aquarium
should obtain the necessary oxygen, not only directly from
the atmosphere above it, but also from the vegetation growing
within it; but there are circumstances under which artificial
means of aération should be resorted to. For instance, the
tank may be overstocked with fish, and their owner, unwisely,
be reluctant to part with any of them; or the temperature of
the water, from some cause or other, may suddenly have risen
too high. I think, therefore, that a short description of some
of the instruments by which the water of an aquarium may be
artificially aérated, will not be out of place here.

A fountain is very useful for this purpose, and is also, if
properly arranged, ornamental. Fig. 39 represents one which
may be easily and inexpensively constructed. A is. a tank,
made of wood, slate, or zinc; but if- made of the last-named
material, its interior should be protected from the action of
the water by tar-paint, or something of the like kind. This
tank has a spout and a tap at the bottom of one end. It is
placed upon the top of a bookcase or some other convenient
elevation, and should be hidden there if possible. B is a deal
table, over which there is a cover reaching down to the floor
of the room. C is an easily-lifted can, capable of holding
about three gallons of water. D is a leaden or indiarubber
tube, joined at the upper end to the spout of the tank A, and
at the lower to E, which is a leaden pipe running under the
table and through its centre, and through that of the bottom
of the aquarium. The hole in the tank to receive E should
be rather larger than the pipe. When the pipe has been
inserted into the hole, it can be fastened in its place by
means of little wooden wedges, and all the interstices left
between the wedges, the pipe, and the bottom of the tank,
should be tightly filled up with red and white lead. F is a
leaden waste-pipe, the lower end of which runs just through
the table in order that it may be inserted into the indiarubber
tubing (H), which will connect it with the can (C). F is fixed
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM. 51

 

in the bottom of the aquarium in the same way as E has
been; its length within the tank will of course regulate the

ii

       

  

yet
it

Fic. 39. AQUARIUM CONTAINING AN EASILY-ARRANGED FOUNTAIN.

height of the water there. If the aquarium is made of slate,
there may be an overflow-pipe at G (instead of F), fixed in
E2
52 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the side of the tank as high as the water is intended to rise.
Should there be an objection to cut the table and its cover,
the longer part of the pipe (E) can be fastened by means of
brackets to the bottom of the aquarium instead of the inside
of the top of the table; and the tubing (H) which is affixed
to F may run round the farther edge of the table, and so into
the can (C) beneath it. H should be long enough to reach
the bottom of the can (C), and so the noise of trickling water
will be prevented. The tubing (D) might be brought quite
down to the floor, and thence up under the table to its con-
nection with E, whether the latter is fastened to the bottom
of the aquarium or not. However, there should be an endeavour
to hide from sight the tank, the tubing, and the overflow-can.’

There are various ways of forming the jet (I). The easiest,
perhaps, is to cut the end of the pipe off square with a pair
of cutting pincers (this will press the edges of the pipe closely
together); then, with a point of a pin, make the hole or holes
required. The object is to procure the flowing upward of the
least amount of water with the greatest effect. No more water
should be placed in the tank (A) than the can (C) is able to
hold, or some time or other there is certain to be a flood
in the room. The top of the overflow-pipe (F) should be pro-
tected with a little cap made of finely-perforated zinc; this
will prevent insects and pieces of weed being sucked down,
and so causing death and stoppage.

The pipes within the aquarium should be hidden by well-
arranged rockwork. A good way to do this is to get a piece
of slate about 3in. or 4in. wide, and long enough, when standing
on the bottom of the tank touching the front glass, to reach
just above the jet (I). It should rest against the overflow-pipe
and not on the fountain, or it will interfere with the upward
flow of the water; and for this purpose the former might be bent
a little to the front. Care should: be taken that the jet points
perfectly upright. Pieces of coke can be fastened by means
of Portland cement to the slate just mentioned. All one
side should be covered with the coke, and an inch or so from
each edge of the other side ; the edges also being hidden in the
same way. The whole ought then to be dipped in some liquid
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM. 53

 

Portland cement of the consistency of cream, and then left to
dry. When it is quite dry, it must be well soaked before it is
put in the aquarium. In constructing the above rockwork, and
anything else of the kind, care should of course be taken that
all formality of arrangement is avoided. This movable rock-
work is very convenient in case a missing animal has to be
searched for. Rockwork could be built against the pipes by
the help of cement with perhaps better effect, but then it must
be a fixture.

Such a fountain contrivance as this just described I have
found a great success, and very little trouble. All that is
required is to take the can (C) full of the overflow water
every morning, empty it, while standing on a chair, into
the tank (A), and return the can to its place under the table.
If the fountain is cared for by a lady, the can (C) should be
smaller, and perhaps emptied twice a day instead of once.

Instead of having the supply tank in the room, the
fountain may be connected by means of a leaden siphon to
the cistern at the top of the house. I have at present a fountain
in an aquarium, worked by a siphon connected with an outside
cistern, which is a great success, and when once started is no
trouble at all. The two pipes — overflow and supply — run
through one hole at the bottom of the window-sash. The
aquarium, its slate framework covered with cork, stands on the
sill of a staircase window, making an interesting ornament.

A syringe is a useful instrument for supplying oxygen arti-
ficially to the water of an aquarium. It may be of glass, or
such a one as is commonly found in a greenhouse, and con-
structed of metal. To use the syringe, it must first be filled
with water from the tank, and then, being held at a good height,
made forcibly to return the water. This operation should be
repeated several times.

A pair of ordinary kitchen bellows will also do for the purpose
of aération, but it is clumsy and rather tiring to work. A
smaller and more suitable pair may be generally bought at a
toy-shop, or can easily be made at home. The wood for the
construction of the bellows should be about 3in. thick, so that
it will not break when they are worked with the necessary force,
54 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

and will not split when the leather or American cloth is being
nailed to its edge. Fig. 40 will show how such bellows may be
made to work with a spring instead of the ordinary handles. A,
the bellows ready for use, to the nozzle of which (j) is attached
a prepared indiarubber tube (h); B, the lower side, to which
the spring (d) is fastened; C, the upper side, having a round hole
(f) not more than 3in. in diameter. To this hole inside is nailed
the usual leather trap-door (i) which opens to receive the air and
closes to expel it through the nozzle of the bellows. The nozzle

   
   

ere &

fof ft

 

 

Fic. 40. BELLOWS FOR AERATING THE WATER OF AN AQUARIUM

should be about tin. in diameter, and made of some metal;
a piece of small gas-piping will do. It is fixed in the centre of
a slip of hard wood, 4in. thick, and this is screwed across the
narrow end of B at e. The spring is made by twisting a piece
of elastic and stiff wire round the end of a broomstick or some-
thing of a like nature, and when made is fastened in the centre
of the broad part of Batd. The two sides are joined together
by nailing to their edges a piece of leather or American cloth,
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM. 55

 

cut the desired shape (for which see A). The little nails or
upholstering pins are placed very closely together, so that the
bellows are made perfectly air-tight; and the indiarubber
tubing should be just large enough to fix securely over the
end of the nozzle (j). The other end of the tubing must be
stopped with a cork, which should be tied firmly in its place.
At the cork end of the tubing there are ten or fifteen little holes,
which have been made with a strong pin, and so arranged that
they are all point upwards when the tubing is at the bottom of
the tank, and the bellows are resting upon the stand or table
which the aquarium is on. When the instrument is com-
pleted and put in the position just described, press the bellows
forcibly with one hand, and immediately several small bubbles
of air will be seen to rise in the water and ascend to its surface.
This contrivance will be found very useful, not only for aérating
an aquarium, but also for supplying air to fish which are being
taken a long distance by rail or by road.

Fig. 41 represents a useful instrument for aérating the water
of an aquarium. It isa small pump or syringe made of india-
rubber, and can be bought for a few shillings. It can also be
made at home by inserting two pieces of small indiarubber
tubing into opposite sides of an indiarubber ball. I have found
that sound uncovered tennis-balls will answer the purpose. The
pieces of tubing, one longer than the other (Fig. 41), are put
into holes just large enough to receive them. These holes can
be made by means of a hot piece of thick wire. The tubing and
the ball are firmly united by covering the junction (Fig. 37, a)
of the two several times with pure indiarubber, this having been
dissolved in bisulphide of carbon or chloroform. The carbon
or chloroform soon evaporates, and leaves the indiarubber dry
and firm. <A second coat of this solution must not be applied
until the first has become hard. At the end of the longer piece
of tubing a kind of trap must be fixed, so that the water can
be drawn in there, but cannot be expelled by the way it entered.
This trap may be made out of about lin. of lead piping, the
diameter of the indiarubber tubing. The bore of one end of
the lead piping should be enlarged a little (Fig. 46, B-and C).
This enlargement can be made with a sharp, square-pointed
56 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

bradawl, a little larger than the hole in the piping. While
being used for this purpose the awl must be steadily turned
round and round. The plug (c) can be made of indiarubber,
cork, or leather; and it must be made so that it will close
the smaller bore in the pipe perfectly, but not the larger.
This plug is kept in position by a pin (d), which should be a
black one, run through the centre of the plug, and turned

  

Fig. 41. “
A, Pump for Aérating the Water of an Aquarium; C and B, Sections of Traps
which are inserted in A at f and g.

round another pin, running right through the pipe at e. CO
and B (Fig. 41) show the section of the trap. The former
represents the plug raised for the purpose of allowing the water
to be drawn into the pump; the latter illustrates the plug
driven home, and so preventing the water from escaping by
the way it entered. Two of these traps ought to be prepared,
MANAGEMENT OF THE AQUARIUM. 57

 

one to be inserted in the tubing of the pump at g, and the
other at f. If there is a difficulty in putting a trap so far
down the tubing as f, the latter must be cut through at that
point, and joined again by placing each extremity of the cut
part over opposite ends of the trap. When this has been
done, the junction should be made quite secure. by covering it
three or four times with the indiarubber solution. When this
pump is used, the longer tubing is put 2in. or 3in. deep in the
water, while the shorter is held over it; and as the ball is
repeatedly and vigorously squeezed, an almost continuous
stream of water will run out of and back into the aquarium.
The trouble of making the traps
may be prevented by substituting
two of the glass tubes which are
made for babies’ feeding-bottles.
These tubes are trapped.

A piece of sponge fixed in the
hole of a flower-pot will make a
kind of filter. The sponge should
be so tightly packed as to allow
the water to run through the hole
slowly in drops only. This simple
contrivance can be either suspended
over the aquarium or placed on Fic. 42. Top oF FLOWER-POT

. : FILTER, showing Wire Frame
two strips of wood resting on the for holding in position Pot
top of it at the centre. It may containing Plant.
also stand on the cover of the
tank if that be strong enough. Of course, if the cover
is glass, a hole must be cut through it, to allow the water
to run from the filter into the tank. Should the flower-
pot be something better than a common one, and another,
in which some pretty semi-aquatic plant is growing, is
placed inside it, the arrangement will be both useful and
ornamental. A little water, taken occasionally out of the
aquarium by means of a small siphon and put into the filter,
will cause an almost constant drip of water into the aquarium.
The pot containing the plant is kept in its position in that
which is acting as a filter by means of a small wire frame.

 
58 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

(Fig. 42). Occasionally the sponge will get clogged, and require
taking out and cleansing.

Other simple means of aérating the water of an aquarium
will readily suggest themselves to the reader, such as violently
agitating the water for a few minutes with a short, slender
stick—a penholder, for instance—or taking a small portion of
water from the aquarium and returning it again through the
fine rose of a water-can.
CHAPTER VI.

WATER-PLANTS.

T has already been explained why aquatic plants of
some kind or other should always be present in an
= aquarium; and in this chapter a few hints are

given as to the choice and management of such vegetation.

Half the pleasure of owning and caring for an aquarium would

be gone if no plants were necessary: they give to the tank

nearly all its beauty.

Almost every aquatic plant can be grown in the still water
of an aquarium, and be made more or less useful there. Some
may be introduced chiefly for their beauty, others for their
utility; but for both beauty and utility none is superior to
the Italian Water-weed Vallisneria spiralis. This plant has
for many years been a great favourite with those who keep an
aquarium; for besides being ornamental and useful, it is also
exceedingly interesting, inasmuch as it possesses a peculiar
method of reproduction, and in its graceful grass-like leaves
the cyclosis, or circulation of the sap, may be readily seen by
the help of a microscope, just as one may observe the circu-
lation of the blood in a frog’s foot or in a tadpole’s tail.

Vallisneria spiralis belongs to the natural order Hydro-
charidez, of which there are only three species native in Britain,
viz., the Frog-bit (Hydrocharis morsus-rane), the Water-
Soldier (Sératiotes aloides), and the somewhat lately introduced
Canadian Water-weed Anarcharis Alsinastrum.

 
60 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The Vallisneria comes from the South of Europe, and is
named in honour of an Italian botanist, Antonio Vallisneri.
This weed is dicecious, that is, its female flowers grow on one
individual plant (Fig. 43), and its male flowers on another (Fig.
44). The female flowers are borne at the end of long spiral

 

Fig, 43. ITALIAN WATER-WEED, VALLISNERIA SPIRALIS (FEMALE PLANT).

stalks, giving to the plant its specific name. These stalks,
which increase in length very rapidly, are able to adapt them-
selves to the depth of the water in which they are growing,
so that their flowers can readily reach its surface. The male
flowers are produced at the base of their own plants, and after
WATER-PLANTS, 61

 

a time become detached, rise to the top of the water, and float
there until they fertilise the female flowers with their pollen.
After the fertilisation the latter sink to ripen and to grow.
The Vallisneria also increases by runners, somewhat similar
to the common strawberry. These offshoots run along the
bottom of the water until they begin to strike root in the soil,

 

Fig. 44. ITALIAN WATER-WEED, VALLISNERIA SPIRALIS (MALE PLANT).

and so a new plant is formed. This weed grows fairly well
in the sand at the bottom of an aquarium; it will grow better
in pots in which there is some 4in. or 5in. of a good loam
covered by a layer of fine gravel; but it will grow best of all in
a tank prepared for the purpose, and kept in a cool greenhouse.
62 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

This tank should be oblong, with four glass sides, and its
bottom ought to be covered to a depth of at least 4in. with rich
garden mould, over which there must be about an inch of gravel.
In this about a dozen plants should be carefully set, and the
vessel properly filled with clean soft water, of not too cold a
temperature. The glass sides ought to be shaded with four
pieces of board or slate, to prevent the light from causing an
excess of conferve. The object of having transparent sides is,
that the growth of the Vallisneria may be easily seen by re-
moving the shading; and thus anything that is wrong may
be readily discovered, and quickly put right before much
damage has been done. The top of the tank should be covered
with a piece of glass, raised jin. above the edge by means of
two wooden slips. Many years ago I bought twelve plants
through the medium of The Bazaar, growing them in the
manner just described, and though there lived in the tank a
large favourite old carp, the Vallisneria grew to profusion;
and notwithstanding that, from time to time, I took a great
deal out with which to stock other tanks or to give to friends,
the supply was always equal to the demand.

The following precautions should be taken in regard to the
cultivation of Vallisneria spiralis, and indeed almost any kind
of water-plant :

1. Do not place it in too little light, or it will not flourish; nor
in too much, or it will be choked with conferve.

2. Do not chill it by putting it in water much colder than that
to which it has been accustomed. '

3. Do not let any rusty leaves remain on the plants, but cut
them off close to the roots.

4, Do not stock the aquarium with any animals until the
Vallisneria has begun to grow; and when the tank is stocked, be
careful to remove those creatures which show a disposition to
feed upon this particular plant.

The Vallisneria is one of the best of all water-weeds for pro-
ducing oxygen, therefore it is well worth careful management.
The female plant seems to be much commoner than the male,
but it is not necessary to have the latter in cultivation, as the
former will readily increase by means of offshoots.
WATER-PLANTS. 63

 

The Frog-bit (Hydrocharis morsus-rane) is a very pretty and
suitable plant for the aquarium (Fig. 45). It is easily cultivated
and very hardy. Its beautifully-veined leaves, growing on
rather long stalks, are kidney-shaped, jand its . three-petalled
flowers are white; and when seen in magses upon the surface of

 

Fig. 45. FROG-BIT (HYDROCHARIS MORSUS-RANZ).

some pond, it will be readily conceded that the plant has
been well named Hydrocharis (a beautiful aquatic). The Frog-
bit is a floating plant, its roots never entering the soil. Like
Vallisneria spiralis, it sends out runners; but these, instead
of taking root, put forth small buds, soon to develop into new
64 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA

 

plants. As the winter comes on, the parent plants decay,
leaving their buds and seeds to sink to the bottom, where they
remain dormant until the spring, then rising to the surface
and taking the place and functions of their predecessors of

 

Fic. 46. WATER-SOLDIER (STRATIOTES ALOIDES).

the previous summer. One drawback to the presence of this
plant in an aquarium is that the snails are very fond of feeding
upon it, especially any of the Limneide; and the Great
Water-beetle (Hydrophilus piceus) is quite capable of doing con-
WATER-PLANTS, 65

 

siderable damage in a meal or two. This plant does not grow
in all ponds and other suitable pieces of water, but where it does
grow it is generally to be found in profusion. However, it can,
as a rule, be procured in a healthy condition, during the summer
months, from dealers in aquarium necessaries.

The Water-Soldier (Stratiotes aloides) (Fig. 46) is chiefly
found in Lincolnshire, Cambridgeshire, and Norfolk, but hardly
anywhere else without having been specially introduced. Some-
times it grows in such quantities in these counties as to become
quite a nuisance to fishermen. Its leaves are numerous, long,
narrow, pointed, and serrated; and it bears a rather large pretty
white flower at the end of a stalk about 5in. or 6in. long. This
plant, like the Vallisneria and Frog-bit, increases both by off-
shoots and seeds, generally the former. Its roots penetrate the
muddy soil at the bottom of the water, and the whole plant
remains submerged during the greater part of the year, only
rising to the surface for a short time during the flowering
season. The Water-Soldier, so named from its sword-shaped
leaves, grows readily in an aquarium, and is very ornamental
there. It will flourish either planted in the sand or floating
upon the surface of the water. In either position it will
produce new plants. If it is allowed to float, it will require to
be taken out occasionally, and carefully trimmed of all dying
leaves and decaying matter. When the little plants, which it
will bear at the end of long stalks, are of a fair size, they may
be separated from the parent and floated in the water, or
planted at the bottom of the tank. This plant does not seem
to be a great producer of oxygen, but as it is ornamental,
unusual in appearance, and a furnisher of shade, it is decidedly
worth cultivating in an aquarium.

The Canadian Water-weed (Anacharis Alsinastrum) (Fig. 47)
is remarkable both for its history in this country and for the
manner and great rapidity of its growth. It was first dis-
covered in Britain about the year 1842, and from that date it
has extended to nearly every part of England and Scotland,
growing in some localities in such profusion as to choke the
watercourses, endanger the swimmer by entangling his limbs,
and exhaust even the patience of good fishermen. However,

F
66 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the aquarium-keeper, as far as he is concerned, ought to be
grateful for its appearance here, for not only is it one of the
very best plants for the tank, but also in its tangled masses,
much interesting animal life is almost sure to be found. Its
leaves, varying from dark to light green, according to age, are
three or four in a whorl. They are minutely serrated, and are
to be found in shape from
roundly ovate to oval-oblong ;
and in them the cyclosis may
easily be seen under the micro-
scope. In this country the
plant—as the female flower is
only found as a rule—increases
chiefly by budding and not by
seed. The male flower has
been discovered, it is said,
growing on long tubes some-
what similar to the spiral
stalks of the female flower of
the Vallisneria. The stem of
the Anacharis is long, round,
transparent, and very brittle,
the smallest portion of which,
as long as it contains a whorl
of leaves, will send out roots
and grow, in a comparatively
short time, into an entire mass.
It will flourish either floating
in the water or planted in the
Fig. 47. CANADIAN WATER-WEED soil at its bottom ; however,
(ANACHARIS ALSINASTRUM). its specific gravity is so great
that it very frequently sinks

from its own weight. From what has already been said, it
will be readily gathered that the Canadian Water-weed is
very hardy, and an excellent producer of oxygen. It will
never die if it is carefully pruned of all decaying branches.
The snails and some of the fish will eat it; and swans and even
horses are said to be fond of it. Indeed, the birds are useful in

 
WATER-PLANTS. 67

 

checking its undue growth in streams and ponds. In an
aquarium it should not be allowed to float, for it will make the
water look untidy; small pieces ought to be planted at the
bottom. If the tank has been filled with water before the
introduction of this plant, a small
stone may be tied to the end of a
short spray and sunk where it is
intended to grow, and it will quickly
take root; butit must be watched, lest
it occupy, through its rapid increase,
more than its share in the tank.

In concluding my remarks on the
Anacharis, I will venture to remind
the aquarium-keeper that he should
be exceedingly careful not.to be the
cause of the introduction of this
plant into the streams and ponds
of his neighbourhood. All that he
does not require ought to be com-
pletely destroyed, and not thrown
carelessly away; for the smallest
portion of this most vigorous weed,
being conveyed either by accident or
otherwise to any permanent piece
of water, may quickly become quite
a nuisance there.

The Mare’s-tail (Hippuris vul-
garis) (Fig. 48) is only useful and
ornamental in an aquarium until
after it has flowered, when it sinks
to the bottom, and should be re- ,

Fic. 48. MARE’S-TAIL

moved. It ought to be planted in (HIPPURIS VULGARIS).

a pot containing loam mixed with

silver sand and covered with a layer of gravel; the weed
can then be easily taken away, when its duty has been done,
without disarranging the aquarium. As this plant rises
several inches above the surface of the water, it should not
be introduced into a tank which has a covering. The

F 2

 
68 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Mare’s-tail is rather common, especially in the ditches of
Lincolnshire. It is a ready producer of oxygen, and should
be obtained as young as possible.

 

Fic. 49. SPIKED WATER MILFOIL (MYRIOPHYLLUM SPICATUM).

The Spiked Water Milfoil (Myriophyllum spicatum) (Fig-
49) has long been a favourite with keepers of aquaria. It is
common in stagnant water, where it is entirely submerged
with the exception of the flowers, which rise a few inches
WATER-PLANTS. 69

 

above the surface. Water animals of many different kinds
are fond of making the tangled masses of the Milfoil their
head-quarters. In the aquarium it looks and grows well, and
gives off oxygen freely. The greenish flowers grow in whorls,
forming a leafless spike about 3in. or 4in. long; its leaves
also grow in whorls of four, and are finely divided into
hair-like segments. Most appropriately is it named the

   

 

Fic. 50, VERNAL WATER STARWORT (CALLITRICHE VERNA).

Milfoil (the myriad-leaved). It flowers in July and August.
A portion (not a bunch) of this plant may be tied to a
stone and sunk in the aquarium: it will quickly take root
and grow.

The Vernal Water Starwort (Callitriche verna) (Fig. 50) grows
in both slowly-running and stagnant water. The leaves grow
in pairs, and are narrower when found in a stream than in a
70 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

pond. It is a very pretty plant, its leaves forming a mass
of emerald-green stars on the surface of the water; hence its
common name. It is entirely submerged, with the exception
of the little green flowers which rise above the water in June
and July. If this plant is examined, it will be readily seen that
it takes its generic name (Callitriche) from its beautiful hair-
like roots, some of which slightly enter the soil at the bottom
of the water; so slightly,
indeed, that a small plant,
with a little care, may be
easily pulled up without the
breakage of any of the slender
stems. The Vernal Starwort
is a great favourite with both
female newts and freshwater
shrimps (Gammarus fluviatilis),
for the former wrap their eggs
carefully in the narrow leaves,
while the latter find lurking-
places in its tangles. There
are various opinions concern-
ing the suitability of this
plant for the aquarium. Some
keepers of aquaria declare that
it is useless, as it dies so
quickly; while others assert
that it isa ready grower, and
consequently a good producer
Fic. 51, AUTUMNAL WaTER Starwort of oxygen. There is truth in
(CALLITRICHE AUTUMNALIS). both these statements, for

if it is tied in a bunch to a

stone (as it so often is) and sunk in the water of a tank, the
lower part of it will soon die, its leaves turning a sickly-looking
yellow; but if, on the other hand, 3in. or 4in. of the top of each
healthy spray is broken off, and simply floated in the water, it
will quickly put forth some hair-like roots, and grow. Under
these circumstances it will supply a fair quantity of oxygen,
and by its utility and beauty will earn a place in the aquarium.

 
WATER-PLANTS. 71

 

The Autumnal Water Starwort (Callitriche autumnalis) is
decidedly a rare plant compared to the Vernal Starwort. It
grows in similar situations, but it does not, like that plant, ever
rise above the surface of the water. Its leaves are narrower
(Fig. 51) and of a darker green. C. autumnalis is occasionally
found in the neighbourhood of London, and in some of the
northern lakes. A few inches of the top of a healthy spray

 

Fic. 52. WATER CROWFOOT (RANUNCULUS AQUATILIS).

may be tied. to a small stone and sunk in the water of the
aquarium. No two sprays should be tied together.

The Water Crowfoot (Ranunculus aquatilis) (Fig. 52) is an
excellent plant for the aquarium, and one very easily procured,
as it is common almost everywhere. It grows in streams and
ponds, sometimes nearly covering the latter with its beautiful
green leaves and its pretty flowers. -The leaves of this plant
72 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

are of two different shapes: the upper leaves are three-lobed,
with rounded notches, and float upon the surface of the water ;
the lower ones are divided into numerous hair-like segments,
and are always submerged. In quickly-running streams the
floating leaves are generally wanting. The rather large flowers
are white with many yellow stamens, very like strawberry
blossom, and are borne from May to September. The Water
Crowfoot is a most useful plant to the owner of an aquarium ;
for it will grow extremely well in a tank, and in its masses under
water much interesting animal life is almost certain to be found.
If a healthy portion of this plant is cut off, so that it is just
long enough to allow the flowers and the lobed leaves to float
on the surface of the water while the severed end touches the
bottom, and is then tied to a stone and sunk in the aquarium,
it will quickly take root and grow; indeed, so rapidly will it
increase, that care must be taken lest it usurp the entire tank.

The Ivy-leaved Crowfoot (Ranunculus hederaceus) is a very
useful little plant for the aquarium, especially for those which
are not deep. In some neighbourhoods this weed is very
common, and is to be found growing in shallow water, on the
sloping margins of ponds, and on those places from which the
water has lately retired. This plant is not nearly so large as
the Water Crowfoot, and its flowers are very small. It has a
creeping, submerged stem, throwing out roots, and its leaves
are roundly lobed, rising on rather long stalks some little
distance above the surface of the water. Any portion of the
stem having leaves attached will grow and blossom freely in
an aquarium.

Water Lobelia (Lobelia Dortmanni) is a very pretty and
suitable plant for the aquarium, but it is not readily to be
procured, as it is almost confined to the northern lakes, where
it grows in thick masses at the bottom of the water. Its flowers
are light blue, and grow droopingly upon long stalks, which
rise above the surface of the water, and its leaves are long and
narrow and almost cylindrical. This plant may be set in the
sand and gravel of the aquarium.

The Lily-like Villarsia (Villarsia nympheoides) (Fig. 53),
named in honour of M. de Villars, a French botanist, is a very
WATER-PLANTS. 73

 

lovely and rare water-plant. It is found in still waters in the
neighbourhood of the Thames, and in some slow Yorkshire
rivers. Its nearly round, though almost heart-shaped leaves,
float at the end of long stalks on the surface of the water. The
stem is long and branched. The five-petalled flowers are rather
large, yellow, and fringed. It is very hardy, and is easily

 

Fic. 53, LILY-LIKE VILLARSIA (VILLARSIA NYMPH EOIDES).

cultivated in the aquarium, but it should be planted in a pot
containing good loam mixed with silver sand. The Villarsia
can be propagated either by seed or by division of the root, and
isa rapid grower. Though this plant is so rare, it can generally
be bought from some London florists for quite a reasonable
sum, and I think the aquarium-keeper will never regret the
purchase.
74 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The Buck-bean (Menyanthes trifoliata) perhaps can hardly
be called an aquarium weed, because it prefers to grow in very
damp, boggy soil rather than altogether in water; still, its
exceeding beauty tempts one to place it in the tank if possible,
and there it will certainly succeed well if properly situated.
Few British flowers are so beautiful as those which this plant

 

Fig. 54. FORGET-ME-NOT (MYOSOTIS PALUSTRIS).

bears. It should be planted in as large a pot as convenient,
and so hidden among the rockwork that the lower part of the
pot is in the water. A small plant ought to be chosen. It is
a trefoil, that is, three leaflets grow on a common stalk, and
“each leaf-stalk has a sheathing base, opposite to one of which
rises the beautiful cluster of blossoms.” The buds are a bright
rose colour, and the open flowers are covered with a white silken

a
WATER-PLANTS. 75

 

fringe, well said to resemble plush. It blossoms during June
and July. The Buck-bean is found growing on spongy bogs,
and sometimes in stagnant water. Though there may be
difficulty occasionally in finding this plant growing wild, it

 

Fig, 55. BROOKLIME (VERONICA BECCABUNGA).

can generally be bought cheaply enough from some of the larger
London florists.

The Forget-me-not (Myosotis palustris) (Fig. 54) is placed
in the aquarium chiefly for its beauty. It is rather common,
and is in flower from June until the end of September. This
plant has a creeping stem, and bright green and rather rough
76 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

leaves. The flowers, which grow on leafless stalks, are pale
blue, with yellow centres. The buds before they expand are
pink, and are coiled up in such a way at the top of the flower-
stalk as to give to this plant and its relations the name of
Scorpion Grass. The Myosotis should be set in a pot, and
placed among the rockwork of an aquarium. This weed is also
called the Creeping Water Scorpion Grass, and is said to be
the true Forget-me-not, though this romantic title has been
often claimed for other plants.

The Brooklime (Veronica Beccabunga) (Fig. 55) is very hardy,
and grows rapidly in an aquarium. Its bright green leaves
are oval and roundly notched on their margins. They grow
opposite one another, in twos, on a creeping stem, which sends
out small roots. The flowers blossom from May to September,
and are generally of a deep blue colour; but occasionally they
are flesh-coloured. The Brooklime is a great favourite with
keepers of aquaria, for it is very pretty, common, and useful.
A small portion of the plant, containing a short piece of the -
stem, will begin to grow almost directly it is planted in the
sand and gravel at the bottom of the tank. This weed is often
found growing in the company of watercress, with which it
is sometimes eaten, though the flavour is rather pungent.

The Water-mint (Mentha sylvestris) is one of the most orna-
mental of water-plants. It is fairly common, and is found
growing either in or on the edges of shallow streams, often in
dense masses. The leaves are egg-shaped and serrated. The
flowers, which are a pale lilac, grow on the upper part of a
stem in thick whorls, the top flower of all forming a kind of
head. The Water-mint will grow well in an aquarium, and
may be planted in a pot, or in rather deep sand and gravel
at the bottom of the tank. It flowers from July to September,
and emits rather a strong scent, which is pleasing or unpleasing
according to individual tastes.

The Common Hornwort (Ceratophyllum demersum) (Fig. 56)
grows in slow-running streams and ditvhes. It is not by
any means a rare plant; indeed, in some counties it is very
common. There is no difficulty in recognising this weed, its
appearance is so different from any other. It has narrow
WATER-PLANTS. 77

 

bristle-like leaves growing round a stem in whorls. Hach leaf
is divided in forks, three or four times, so making a rather
dense mass. The green flowers are also whorled, and grow in
the axils of the leaves. The fruit has two horns near the
base. The Hornwort is useful in an aquarium, and will do

 

Fic. 56. COMMON HORNWORT (CERATOPHYLLUM DEMERSUM).

well if a small portion is tied to a stone and sunk to the
bottom. It grows entirely under water, and flowers in July.
The Bladderwort (Utricularia vulgaris) (Fig. 57) is a rare and
very interesting plant. It is found in some of the ponds and
slow-running rivers of the southern and eastern counties of
England. Its leaves are divided into hair-hke segments, to which
are attached numerous small bladders of a purplish or pinkish
colour. The bladders are for the purpose of so buoying up the
78 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

plant that its flowers may have the air and light which are
necessary to their development. When the flowering season is
over, the bladders fill with water and sink the whole plant
to the bottom of the river or pond. ‘The rather large yellow

 

Fig. 57 BLADDERWORT (UTRICULARIA VULGARIS).

flowers grow in clusters of six or seven upon the upper part
of the stalk, which is raised several inches above the surface of
the water. This plant does not often, if ever, grow from seeds,
but generally from buds. Towards the end of the year the
greater portion of the plant decays, leaving the hardish, oblong
WATER-PLANTS, 79

 

terminal buds, about the size of a pea, to lie dormant during
the winter at the bottom of the water. In the spring these buds
rise to the surface and grow into new plants. The buds may be

 

Fig. 58, WATER VIOLET (HOTTONIA PALUSTRIS).

obtained from the bottom of those ponds where the plants are
known to grow, by means of a fine muslin net; or they may
be taken as soon as they rise to the surface, in the spring.
When procured, they should be placed in the aquarium, where
they will soon become interesting, ornamental, and useful.
80 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The Water Violet (Hottonia palustris) (Fig. 58) is named after
Professor Hotton, of Leyden. In some respects it is like the
Water Crowfoot, though it certainly has the advantage of the
comparison. It is by no means a common plant, but it is found
plentifully enough in the ponds and ditches of Norfolk and
Suffolk. Dealers in aquarium necessaries are generally able to
supply this weed during the season. It will grow well in a tank,
but it should not be tied in a bunch and sunk by a stone to
the bottom, according to a common practice; it ought to be
planted separately, a piece of the creeping root being attached.
H. palustris has feathery leaves, which grow in tufts under
the water, only the upper part of the flower-stalk rising a few
inches above the surface. The
five-petalled flowers are rather
large, and vary in colour from
pink and yellow to almost white.

Amphibious Persicaria (Poly-
gonum amphibium) is a hand-
some plant, and will grow readily
in an aquarium. It is not uncom-
mon, and is found either in still
water or upon marshy land; but
when living in the former it
assumes quite a different shape to
that which it has when growing

upon the latter; indeed, the dif-

Te ae ana ference is so great that the

varieties might be taken for two
distinct species. In the one case, the leaves are broad and
smooth, and float at the end of long stalks; in the other, the stem
is short and the leaves are narrow and rough. The flowers are
rose-coloured. A portion of this plant having a piece of the
creeping stem attached (which stem ought to be sending out
roots at a joint or two) should be set in the sand at the bottom
of the aquarium.

The Flowering Rush (Butomus umbellatus) (Fig. 59) is an
exceedingly pretty water-plant. It has narrow, three-cornered
leaves, which spring from the root, and its beautiful pink or

 
WATER-PLANTS. 81

 

purple flowers grow in a bunch upon the top of a long and
circular stem. This plant is found in ponds and slowly-running
rivers, and blossoms from
June to September. The
Flowering Rush _ will
grow very well in an
aquarium if a small plant
(having its tuberous root)
is placed in a pot con-
taining rich garden
mould, covered with
plenty of well-washed
gravel.

The Great Water Plan-
tain (Alisma Plantago)
(Fig. 60) is a very good
weed indeed for the
aquarium. Its leaves are
of two different shapes :
those which grow above
the water are of a bright
green colour, and some-
thing like those of the
Common Plantain, while
those which remain en-
tirely under water are
long and narrow. The
lilac-coloured flowers
grow on long three-sided
stalks, which rise some
distance above the sur-
face. This plant is more
or less common in ponds
and ditches all over Fig. TeanE eae
England. It can easily
be cultivated in the aquarium, where it is both ornamental and
useful. There are very few plants, I think, which so soon
begin to grow after having been introduced in the tank. Small

G

 

 

 
82 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA,

 

plants should be chosen for the purpose: such can generally
be found growing very near a large one. They ought to be
taken with as much of their native soil clinging to their roots
as possible, and then planted in a convenient-sized pot con-
taining loam and gravel.

The Common Arrow-head (Sagittaria sagittifolia) (Fig. 61) is

 

Fic. 61. CoMMON ARROWHEAD (SAGITTARIA SAGITTIFOLIA).

very hardy, and will grow well in the aquarium. The arrow-
head-shaped leaves of this plant will easily lead to its recog-
nition. Its flowers have three white petals, and grow in whorls
on stalks which rise about 6in. above the water. This plant
sends out runners ending in tuberous roots. The Arrow-head is
rather common in lakes, ponds, and ditches, and is often found
in the company of the Water Plantain. It should be placed in
the tank according to the directions given for the setting of the
latter plant.
WATER-PLANTS. 83

 

The Branched Bur-reed (Sparganium ramosum) (Fig. 62) is
ornamental in a large tank. Its fruit, which resembles burs,
and its long wavy leaves, cause it to be readily recognised. The
flowers grow on long, branched stalks, which sometimes rise

 

Fic. 62. BRANCHED BUR-REED (SPARGANIUM RAMOSUM).

as high as 3ft. above the water. It should be-planted in a pot
containing loam.

The Sweet Flag (Acorus Calamus) (Fig. 63) is an interesting
plant, and may be grown in a pot immersed in the water of an
aquarium, where it will be ornamental. It is something like

G2
84. FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

«

 

a large grass or sedge in its habit, but it may be easily dis-
tinguished by its curious spadix, which is 2in. or 3in. long,
and of a light brown colour.
The whole plant gives out a
very pleasant aromatic scent,
and for this reason it was
frequently used many years
ago (and is, I believe, even now
sometimes) for covering the
floors of churches and houses.
This plant is common in Nor-
folk and Suffolk.

The Broad-leaved Pond-weed
(Potamogeton natans) (Fig. 64)
is common in ponds and ditches,
but more so in the former than
in the latter. The only draw-

Rice SW hee RLEO back that I know of to the
(ACORUS CALAMUS). presence of this plant in the
aquarium is the liability of
some of the leaves to premature decay: in other respects it is most
suitable for a tank, as it is both ornamental and a good producer
of oxygen. P. natans has, as a rule, particularly in deep water,
two sets of leaves: the upper ones float upon the surface at
the end of long stalks, which are able to adjust themselves to
the depth of the pond or. ditch in which they are growing; the
lower ones are often absent in shallow water. The floating
leaves are ovate, and 2in. or 3in. long; the submerged ones are
somewhat similar to long grass. The green flowers grow on
small spikes just above the water. This weed may be planted
in a pot containing loam and silver sand.

The Cape Fragrant Water Lily (Aponogeton distachyon) (Fig.
65) grows exceedingly well in an aquarium, and is very graceful,
having bright green, ovate, floating leaves on very long stalks.
The groups of white flowers are forked, and float upon the
water: they remain in perfection for a long time, and give out
a strong, pleasant smell. This plant may be propagated by
division of the root, and can always be bought for a small

 
WATER-PLANTS, 85

 

sum ranging from 1s. 6d. to 3s. It should be planted in a
pot containing loam and silver sand mixed. It is a rapid
grower and a useful and ornamental plant for the tank. I
have found that it will not flower well unless it can have as

 

Fic. 64. BROAD-LEAVED POND-WEED (POTAMOGETON NATANS).

much sunlight as is compatible with the welfare of the rest

of the aquarium.
The Water Chestnut (Trapa natans) (Fig. 66), though not a
native of England, is a great favourite with some aquarium-

oe
86 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

keepers. It is a floating plant, common in the lakes and slowly-

 

Fic. 65. CAPE FRAGRANT WATER LiLy (APONOGETON DISTACHYON)

running rivers of some parts of Europe. The flowers are
a veddish-white. The fruit is large, black, and armed with four

 

Fic. 66. WATER CHESTNUT (TRAPA NATANS).

spines (Fig. 67). The seeds are good to eat, and are sometimes
used in soup: they are said to have a taste similar to that of the
WATER-PLATNS. 87

 

chestnut, hence the common name.

This plant can often be

bought in London for a moderate sum: but perhaps the seed

might be obtained more readily.

The Water Awlwort (Subu-
laria aquatica) (Fig. 68) has
been strongly recommended
as a plant suitable for an
aquarium, but I have never
been fortunate enough to
obtain a specimen. It is only,
as a rule, found in mountain
lakes. The leaves, awl-like in
shape, grow from the root,
which is composed of long
white fibres.
under water.

 

Fig. 67. FRUIT OF TRAPA NATANS.

The flowers are small, and sometimes are borne

Though almost everyone knows the duckweed when he sees
it, yet very few, comparatively, know what an interesting plant

 

Fie. 68. WATER AWLWORT
(SUBULARIA AQUATICA).

it really is. Four species
of duckweed are found
in Great Britain, and all
are useful and pleasing
in the aquarium, for they
keep the water shaded at
the surface, they form

-~  hiding-places for the

smallest animals, they
are introduced without
trouble, they grow well,
and their presence has
a pleasing effect. Only
a few plants should be
placed in a tank at a
time, as they multiply
rapidly. They increase
by offshoots at the edges

of the fronds. The duckweeds are the smallest of all flowering
plants, but they blossom very rarely—the Greater Duckweeds
88 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

not at all in Britain, In winter they sink to the bottom of

 

Fic. 69, GREATER DUCKWEED (LEMNA
POLYRHIZA).

the water.

The Greater Duck-
weed (Lemna polyrhiza)
(Fig. 69) is rather larger
than the rest of the
duckweeds. Its fronds
or leaves are nearly
round, about 3in. in
diameter, thickish, dark
green above and pur-
ple below, each frond
having a number of
little roots or fibres
growing from beneath.
This is a rare plant.

The Thick Duck-
weed (Lemna gibba)

(Fig. 70) das fronds almost round, about jin. in diameter,

bright green in colour, flat above
and round beneath. The fronds
have only one fibre each. This
plant is occasionally found growing
with other duckweeds: upon still
water.

The Lesser Duckweed (Lemna
-minor) (Fig. 71) is the commonest
of all: the fronds are small, ovate,
light green above and a lighter
green below, with one rootlet to
each frond.

The Ivy-leaved Duckweed (Lemna
trisulca) (Fig. 72) is fairly common
on lakes and ponds. It is about
Zin. long, elliptical, thin, serrated
near one end, and of a light green
colour. The young fronds grow at
right angles to the old ones, and

 

Fig. 70. THICK DUCKWEED
(LEMNA GIBBA).

each frond has one fibre.
WATER-PLANTS. 89

 

The Characee are divided into two genera—Chara and
Nitella (Fig. '73)—both of which are very useful and ornamental

 

Fig. 71. LESSER DUCKWEED
(LEMNA MINOR).

in aquaria, but particularly
in those which contain only
very small animals. These
plants are too fragile to be
placed within the reach of
large fish. There are many
species of the Characee in
Britain, some of them being
common. They grow in ponds
and ditches where the water
is clear. They have neither
true leaves nor true flowers,
but they have instead sub-
divided branches and a curious

kind of fruit. The principal difference between the Chara

and the Nitella is that the
former has a compound stem, and
the latter a simple one. These
plants, especially the Nitella trans-
lucens, do not require much light
for their development, growing far
better when. placed at some dis-
tance from the window than when
cultivated in close proximity to
it. A small portion of each
plant should be sunk by the
help of a small stone to the
bottom of the aquarium. Both
the Chara and the Nitella succeed
much more satisfactorily when
planted in this way than when
simply thrown into the water.
They grow very quickly, and will
in a short time fill the recep-

 

Fig. 72. Ivy-LEAVED DUCKWEED
(LEMNA TRISULCA).

tacle in which they are placed. These plants are also very
interesting on account of the ease with which the circulation
90 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

of the sap in their stems may be seen under a good micro-

scope.

Willow Moss (Fontinalis antipyretica) (Fig. 74) is found

Fic. 73, NITELLA TRANSLUCENS.

 

growing on stones, and alto-
gether submerged in rapid
streams and rivers. It can be
easily seen through the clear
water waving up and down
under the action of the cur-
rent. The plant itself is of
a dark green colour, but its
new shoots or terminal buds
are light green. It is a
beautiful and hardy plant,
and very useful in the tank.
It is also of the greatest
utility to the aquarium-keeper,
for its tangled masses are full
of numerous kinds of animal
life. A small and -suitable-
shaped stone covered with a
short growth of the Fonti-
nalis should be placed in the
aquarium.

The Crystalworts (Riccia
fluitans (Fig. 75) and Riccia
natans (Fig. 76) are also very
useful little plants in an
aquarium. They are some-
times found growing upon
the surface of still water
amongst duckweeds. Riccia
fiuitans is about lin. long, and
light green. Its leaves or
fronds are repeatedly forked,
each segment having at the

end a small notch. Like the Greater Duckweed, it has several
rootlets or fibres growing from beneath and hanging down in the
WATER-PLANTS. 91

 

water. Riccia natans is about }in. long, heart-shaped, and light
green. It also has several root-like fibres.

 

Fic. 74. WILLOW Moss Fig. 75. CRYSATLWORT
(FONTINALIS ANTIPYRETICA). (RICCIA FLUITANS).

Besides the water-plants thus briefly described in this
chapter, there are of course others which would also be both
useful and ornamental in
aquaria; but enough has
been said, I hope, to give
the novice in aquarium
matters an idea of what
kinds of plants to look for,
where they may be found,

and how they may be intro-
duced into his tanks.* Fic. 76. CRYSTALWORT (RICCIA NATANS).

 

 

* At the time this article appeared in fhe Bazaar the Editor of that paper
eppeodes the following note : “At Green’s Conservatory, Covent Garden, we saw
the other day a small Water Selaginella, which was very pretty. It was exactly
like fragments of a small variety of Sees or Club Moss, and grew freely on
the surface of the water, like duckweed.” I have tried this plant, and cannot
speak favourably of it. :
CHAPTER VII.

AMPHIBIANS.

a large aquarium, which contains an island of some
kind, various interesting amphibians may be kept.
Indeed, so interesting are many of these animals
that it is worth the while and expense to provide tanks entirely
for their use, particularly in the case of those reptiles which
would be likely to prey upon the usual inmates of an ordinary
aquarium. For instance, a fresh-water tortoise, unless it is very
small, will not be likely to live for any length of time among
fish and beetles without devouring many of them. This lesson
I learnt somewhat unpleasantly several years ago. I had placed
a tortoise in a large tank, properly arranged, as I thought,
for his comfort. When he became tame enough (as he quickly
did) not to take a header from his island into the water on my
approaching the aquarium, I used to feed him by placing small
worms or tiny minnows as near to him as I could. He would
crawl close to his food, suddenly seize it in the curious manner
peculiar to reptiles, and after tearing it with his sharp claws
swallow it in a very dog-like fashion. I soon got fond of the
Emys, and thought him a most interesting addition to the tank.
However, it was not very long before I had cause to qualify my
opinion, for one morning I noticed some curious things upon the
water, which upon closer inspection I found to be the air-bags of
fish. He had eaten, as tortoises so often do, all his prey except
the tell-tale bladder. Of course, he was banished to another

 
AMPHIBIANS. 93

 

tank, and a mate was purchased to share it with him. This and
other experiences taught me that, though very small tortoises
will live peaceably with fish, rather large ones will not. Those
Emydes whose carapaces, or back plates, are not more than two
inches across will be quite harmless among the ordinary
inhabitants of an aquarium—at least, such I have found to be
the case.

Fresh-water tortoises are, as a rule, carnivorous, though very
rarely they can be induced to eat vegetable food, even bread, for
atime. The smaller ones will feed upon little worms, bluebottle
flies, and the fry of fish; while the larger ones, in addition to
these things, will devour birds, frogs, and mice. It is wise, for

 

FIG 77. 'RESH-WATER TORTOISE (EMYS ORBICULARIS).

obvious reasons, to accustom them to eat pieces of meat, either
cooked or raw. They should be fed regularly and sparingly, in
order that they will not be so satiated with one day’s food as to
refuse that of the next. This regularity of feeding will tend to
prevent neglect, for when anything has to be attended to every
second or third day, it runs a very great risk of being forgotten,
sometimes for a week. The tortoises will not eat much during
winter, nor will they often appear above the water. Besides
the Emys orbicularis (Fig. 77) there are other fresh-water
tortoises which will live well in the tank, such as the Emys
europea, Emys Bealii, Emys reticulata, and the like; indeed, I
believe any very small or young Emydes will thrive in an
aquarium. As all the Terrapins are pretty good climbers, the
tanks in which they are kept should be covered.
94 FPRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The metamorphoses of the frog (Fig. 78) and toad are most
interesting, and can easily be observed by the help of the
aquarium. The spawn of either the frog or the toad may be
obtained during the early part of the year, from almost every
ditch and pond. In the South of England it is sometimes
found in January, and frequently in February. The speed
of the development of the tadpole from the egg depends

 

Fic. 78. METAMORPHOSES OF THE FROG, showing the growth of the Embryo,
from the Egg to the Four-legged Tadpole.

greatly upon light and heat. The spawn of frogs may be
readily distinguished from that of toads, for the former is
found in shapeless masses, while the latter is deposited in
strings of two rows each, placed alternately and regularly.
These strings vary greatly in length. Eggs of toads are also
smaller and rather darker than those of frogs. The spawn
of either, when first laid, consists of small globular bodies
surrounded by a glutinous envelope (Fig. 78, a), into which
a large quantity of water is quickly absorbed (6). The whole
then has somewhat the appearance of small shot embedded
in jelly. The development of the embryo can be easily seen
through its almost transparent covering, and the following
AMPHIBIANS. 95

 

stages may be observed: (1) the round egg becomes
elongated; (2) furrows appear; (3) head, tail, and clingers or
claspers partly distinguishable; (4) branchie may be seen
on each side of head; (5) a little movement observable;
(6) the nostrils can be detected; (7) branchie more distinct
and lobed, and in which the circulation of the blood may be
watched under the microscope (c); (8) jerkings from a curved
into an almost straight position (d) until the envelope is
broken and the tadpole is free (e and f). The branchie (9)
now grow until they arrive at their full size (h), and then
they begin to decrease, soon becoming altogether hidden by
the operculum, and after being absorbed are replaced by
lungs. The little animal begins to take the true tadpole
shape (i); the eyes are more distinct, and the mouth
appears at the extremity of the head. After a time, short
or long according to circumstances, the hind legs bud and
grow (k), and these are followed by the forelegs (1). When
all the legs have appeared, the tail, beginning at the tip,
becomes gradually absorbed. It used to be gravely asserted
that the tails fell off. The creature is now able and willing
to leave the water and live almost entirely upon land. Young
tadpoles at first feed upon vegetable matter and afterwards
upon animal. They are capital scavengers in the aquarium,
living there for many months in the tadpole state. I had one
in the middle of September which, I think, was hatched
early in March, and it had not then obtained its fore-legs. In
October, I have caught tadpoles with no legs developed, and
sometimes they will live for a whole year in a tadpole con-
dition. This tardy development into the frog or toad is due,
I suppose, to an insufficiency of animal food.

The spawn when first obtained should be placed in some
shallow vessel, the bottom of which is covered with well-
washed river sand. If a rapid development of the embryo
is required, the eggs must have both light and heat. As soon
as the tadpoles, after becoming free, have consumed that
portion of the spawn which they will eat, they should be
removed to a larger vessel, especially if their number is at all
great; and when moved they should be provided, in small
96 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

quantities, with two or three different kinds of waterweeds.
They are very fond of conferve. As they grow they will
begin to prefer animal food to vegetable, and small pieces
of meat may be given sparingly, as a very little will satisfy a
great many tadpoles. All that is not eaten must be removed,
or it will corrupt the water. I find that tadpoles, if not
kept in too large a number, are very hardy little creatures.
They will not die should they have no animal food, but they
will remain for a very long time in the tadpole state.

When the tadpoles have absorbed their tails and have become
young frogs, they should be allowed their liberty in the garden,
where they will be very useful; for at that time of their life
it is a difficult matter to provide them with the necessary
food, consisting as it does of minute insects. They will not be
worth the trouble, as frogs of a size suited to the aquarium
can readily be obtained.

The Edible Frog (Rana esculenta) is larger than the Common
Frog (Rana temporaria), and more likely to adapt itself to a
life in the tank. Itis a great lover of water, and rarely comes
to land. It may easily be distinguished from the Common
Frog (Fig. 79) by the absence of the black band which runs
from behind the eye of the latter to the shoulder. Though
the Edible Frog is not indigenous to this country, it can be
found in Cambridgeshire and in some other parts of England.
As it is a very handsome animal, it is well worth the extra
trouble of procuring instead of the common kind.

The frog feeds upon insects, worms, slugs, and the like,
and its manner of feeding is interesting and peculiar. The
prey is captured by the help of the tongue, which is a very
curious member, being, unlike most tongues, fixed in front
and free behind, and capable, therefore, of a great reach.
The tongue is also covered with a very sticky secretion,
which enables it to withdraw every insect it touches into the
mouth.

Frogs, though they possess lungs, have at the same time
the power of cutaneous respiration: that is, they are able to
breathe, as it were, through the skin. Hence they can live
for a considerable time under water. This cutaneous respira-
AMPHIBIANS. 97

 

tion is also necessary to assist the pulmonary respiration, or
respiration by means of the lungs, but it cannot take place
unless the exterior of the skin is moist. It can readily, then,
be seen how essential it is that the skin should be continually
moist. But as the frog cannot always have access to water, it
has been provided with a kind of portable reservoir which
contains pure and tasteless water, and by means of which the
animal is able to keep its skin, even in dry places, in the

 

Fig. 72, COMMON FROG (RANA TEMPORARIA).

necessary state of dampness. The frog when captured will
often discharge. the contents of this reservoir.

When the aquarium-keeper has carefully watched the de-
velopment of the egg into the tadpole, and the tadpole into
the perfect batrachian; when he has noticed its curious
tongue and its manner of feeding ; and when he has knowledge
of its cutaneous respiration and portable reservoir, he will
come to the conclusion that the common and often despised
frog is indeed a very interesting and extraordinary animal.
The tanks in which frogs are kept should be covered.

H
98 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Tritons are very interesting and suitable animals for the
aquarium. They are handsome, intelligent, easily tamed, and
their presence in the tank adds very much to its attractiveness.
Their colours are pleasing and variable, and their movements
when swimming are very graceful: indeed, as much so as
those of fish. As the animals go in and out among the weeds
or climb the rockwork, or fight with one another over some
portion of food, one is reminded, by a slight stretch of
imagination, of alligators, or even of the “fabled dragons.”

There are four species of tritons in Britain, viz. :

(1) The Great Water Newt (Triton cristatus).

(2) The Common Smooth Newt (Triton punctatus or Lisso-
triton punctatus).

(3) The Straight-lipped Water Newt (Triton Bibronit).

(4) The Palmated Smooth Newt (Triton palmipes)..

The two former are common almost everywhere, while the
two latter are rare.

The Great Newt is the best adapted of them all for a life
in the aquarium, as it is a lover of water and does not
often venture upon land. The males of all the tritons are
distinguished during the spring and early summer by large
erests which run along their backs and tails. The crest of the
Great Newt (Triton cristatus) (Fig. 80) is serrated, and is

 

Fig. 80. MALE GREAT NEWT (TRITON CRISTATUS).

divided at the junction of the tail and body, while that of
the Smooth Water Newt (Triton punctatus) is wavy at the
edge and continuous throughout. The females of both are
crestless. These crests, being absorbed, disappear during the
AMPHIBIANS. 99

 

autumn and winter, and there is little then to distinguish
the sexes—except, perhaps, in the case of the Great Newt,
for the orange of the lower part of the body of the male
does not extend to the tip of the tail as does that of the
female.

The colouring of newts varies considerably, but the following
are the approximate markings of the different species: the
upper part of the body of the male of the Great Tyiton is
a dark brown, with here and there darker _ Spots ; the sides
are spotted with white, and the sides of the tail are white;
the crest is almost black; the female of the Great Newt
(Fig. 81) is marked something similar to the male, the upper

 

Fig. 81. FEMALE GREAT NEWT (TRITON CRISTATUS).

part of the body being dark brown, the lower orange with
black spots; the sides are speckled with white. The Triton
cristatus is often more than 6in. in length, and its body is
covered with warty tubercles: these tubercles are supposed
to be for the purpose not only of defence, as they capable of
discharging bitter secretions, but also of supplying moisture
to the skin when the animal is out of the reach of water.
The upper part of the body of the male of the Smooth
Newt (Triton punctatus) is greenish-brown; the sides are
bluish-white, speckled with black or dark brown spots; the
under-part of the body is orange; the edges of the crest are
red; the whole body is more or less covered with spots. The
H 2
100 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

female of the Smooth Newt (Fig. 82) is very similar to the
male in her markings.

The Great Newt is shyer than the Smooth Newt.

The Straight-lipped Newt (Triton Bibronii) is coloured some-
thing like the Great Newt, and its body is even more thickly
covered with warts than is that of its larger relative. The

 

Fic. 82. FEMALE SMOOTH NEWT (TRITON PUNCTATUS).

upper lip of this triton does not overhang like that of T.
cristatus, but is perfectly straight with the lower. This
species is rare.

The Palmated Smooth Newt (Triton palmipes) is smaller
than the T. punctatus. The hind feet of the male are webbed.
The upper part of the body is of an olive-colour, and the
upper part of the head is a dark brown. The sides of the
body are light brown, speckled with round black spots. The
tail has a filament at the extremity about gin. in length.

Newts may nearly always be found in ponds and ditches.
They can easily be caught either by fishing with a worm or
by using a small hand-net. The fishing apparatus is very
simple, and consists of a walking-stick, a piece of thin string,
and a lively worm. One end of the string should be tied
round the centre of the worm and the other to the stick.
If the water is clear and a newt can be seen, the bait
should be dropped as close to the nose of the animal as
possible, and when he has taken the worm as far as the
string by which it is tied, the reptile may be gently lifted
upon the land. When the water is thick the fisherman must
Watch the movement of the string. The hand-net, if a newt
cannot be seen, must be passed along the bottom of the
water and among the weed until the desired capture is
made. The best time to obtain the tritons is during the
AMPHIBIANS. 101

 

early part of the spring: they will all then have returned
to the water, and have developed their most striking colours,
and in the case of the males, their crests.

Newts take readily to a life in the tank; and, if they are
provided with an island, proper food, and suitable weed,
the females will soon begin to lay their eggs. During their
breeding season they are very lively, continually moving
gracefully to and fro in the aquarium,
or coming up to the surface of the
water for a fresh draught of air, often
making as they do so a “ popping”
noise ; and besides being lively, they
are extremely inquisitive, apparently
taking notice of all that goes on both
within and outside their tank.

It is very interesting to watch the
female newt lay her eggs. She gene-
rally wraps them carefully, as they
are laid, in the leaves of some water-
weed. But should the desired plants
not be within her reach, she will
deposit the eggs upon stones, or be-
tween two leaves which are not pliant
enough to bend, or she will fold them
in the leaves of the willow should any
be dipping in the water, or in blades
of grass. The plants which she pre-
fers for the protection and hiding of Fic. 83. Leaves of VERNAL

7 GREATER STARWORT EN-
her eggs are the Starwort (Callitriche — rotpine Egas oF NEWT
verna), the Anacharis, and the Water  Duyneorgean TAGES OF
Crowfoot (Ranunculus  aquatilis).

The egg-laying is spread over several days, and may take
place during the months of April, May, and June. The
newt, when wishing to lay, hunts about for a suitable leaf.
She seems to be very particular, and appears to test its
suitability by smelling and bending it. When she has
obtained one to her taste she will fold it with her hind legs
and carefully lay the egg within the fold, gently pressing

 
102 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the leaf upon the egg until the former is firmly stuck
around the latter. Sometimes, to make the matter surer, she
will take the leaf and egg within her mouth, and thus give
them a final pressure. The egg is very small, and is sur-
rounded with a glutinous substance. The leaf gradually
unfolds as the embryo of the future triton begins to grow.
Fig. 83 represents the eggs in various stages of development,
and laid in the leaves of the Vernal Starwort. As soon as

© €¢ @ ®

 

Fie. 84. METAMORPHOSES OF THE NEWT.

the eggs are deposited they should be collected and placed
in a shallow aquarium or earthenware dish—the latter the
better. The vessel should be covered with a piece of glass
and put near a sunny window. The speed of hatching
depends upon light and temperature. Sometimes, under
favourable circumstances, the young tadpoles will be free
within twelve days after the eggs have been laid. It should
be arranged that the eggs have the heat of the sun without
AMPHIBIANS. 103

 

receiving its direct rays. The eggs of the Great Newt take
longer to hatch than those of the Smooth Triton.

The young tadpole’s growth (Fig. 84, a, b, ¢, d) can be
observed while it is within the egg. The embryo for the first
three or four days is globular, and then begins to lengthen
out gradually. At the end of the first week the head and
tail can be distinguished, and soon after this the branchie
appear. The little animal at this stage looks more like a fish
than a newt. The circulation of the blood may now be seen
under the microscope. This sight is most interesting, and
well worth the trouble necessary for the observation. As the
tadpole grows it changes its position in the egg, and finally
becomes rather fidgety, until by its struggles it forces itself
free. The egg collapses as the young newt leaves it.

The triton tadpole just after it is hatched (Fig. 84, e) is
not very easy to find, even in a very small aquarium. When
it is discovered, that which will attract attention most is the
brilliancy of its golden-looking eyes. It does not move much
at this period of its life, except to dart away rapidly on being
disturbed. As it has no legs yet, Nature has provided it, as
the frog tadpole, with two small claspers, but these disappear
upon the development of the forelegs (Fig. 84, f). The speed
of growth of the small reptileVdepends very much upon its
food, which at first should be, if possible, very small water-
insects, Water-Fleas (Daphnia Pulex), Cyclops, and the like;
and as it increases in size it will eat the larve of the gnat
and similar prey, until it grows big enough to devour small
portions of tiny garden worms.

The animal is so transparent until it is about three months
old (Fig. 84, g) that a glance will tell whether it has been
able to satisfy its appetite or not. In time (how long depends
upon food and temperature) the gills will be absorbed, and
the young newt will be obliged to come to the surface of
the water to breathe. When about three months old it
changes its skin for the first time, which generally comes off
in pieces. The mature reptile sloughs very frequently, some-
times as often as once in ten days. Occasionally the skin
comes off in one piece, not even excepting the toes; and if
104 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the aquarium-keeper will skilfully remove it from the water
by the help of a small camel’s-hair brush, and place it
carefully upon a sheet of white paper, he will find that
it makes a very interesting object: the skin will readily
adhere to the paper. When the newt is about to change its
skin, it will, as a rule, become sluggish, and lose its appetite.
It assists the operation by crawling between the weeds and
rockwork. Sometimes the triton will imitate the toad, and
make a meal of its late covering.

As the autumn approaches, the newts, especially the Smooth
ones, will attempt to leave the aquarium. Their colouring
at this time becomes dull, and they lose a great deal of their
activity and inquisitiveness. The island in the aquarium
should be provided with some hiding-places, which at this
season of the year will be taken possession of by the tritons.
In captivity they begin to hybernate about November. After
wintering in the aquarium, and as spring approaches, the
newts will slowly become active, and the males will gradually
develop their crests.

Tritons while in confinement may be fed upon the Water-
Louse (Asellus aquaticus), tadpoles of frogs or toads, garden
worms, or pieces of meat either cooked or raw. The meat
should be cut in narrow slips. The newt is sometimes
guilty of cannibalism, especially when the Great Newt is
kept in the tank with the Smooth one, and when the tadpoles
of any species of triton are allowed to remain with their
parents and older relatives.

Tritons, in common with lobsters and other animals, have
the power of reproducing lost limbs. A Triton cristatus of
mine once climbed out of his own tank and fell into that
containing two young pike. When I found him in the
company of the fish I discovered that he had lost one of his
hind legs. I said I was sorry for him; but I do not think
I was very unhappy, for I had long been desirous of seeing
the reproduction of limbs, of which I had read and heard.
I placed the poor fellow in a small tank by himself, fed
him carefully, and watched him attentively. In a short time
I was rewarded for my care by seeing a new limb gradually
AMPHIBIANS. 105

 

grow until it became nearly as large as the other hind leg.
I believe (I cannot be sure, for this happened eight or nine
years ago) the new leg from the first was perfectly shaped.
However, I was glad to prove the truth of report without
having been cruel enough to make an amputation.

The tanks in which tritons are kept should be carefully
covered, or the animals will be certain to escape, and perhaps
cause some annoyance to the ladies of the household.

There is a peculiar kind of water lizard—found principally
in the lake close to the city of Mexico—which is of unusual
interest, not only in the aquarium, but to all who have any

 

Fic, 85. MEXICAN AXOLOTL (SIREDON PISCIFORMIS).

liking for natural history. This strange animal is commonly
called the Mexican Axolotl, and scientifically named Siredon
pisciformis (Fig. 85). In shape it is something similar to
a three-month-old newt; that is, a young triton which has
developed all its legs, but which still retains its branchie.
The Axolotl may be described as the tadpole of the
Amblystome (Amblystoma mewicanus) (Fig. 86); but for a
long time it was considered to be an animal which retained its
branchie throughout its existence, like the Siren or Proteus,
and was therefore placed among the Perenni-branchiata or
retainers of branchie through life. The Axolotl when full
grown is about Qin. or 10in. long, and rather stoutly built.
It is of a very dark slate-colour, and covered with black
spots, and in the earlier part of its existence it is not
106 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

ungraceful either in form or in movement. It is provided
with lungs as well as gills, and is therefore able to breathe
both below and above water. The tail of the Axolotl is
flattened on each side like that of the triton, and is supplied
with a semi-transparent membranous fin. The head is flat
and broad, and the muzzle blunt. The eyes are small and
the mouth wide. There are four digits on the front feet, and
five on the hind.

The Axolotl, or Siredon as it is sometimes called, lives
apparently very happily in the aquarium, soon becoming
tame enough to take food from its master’s fingers. It is not
necessary to provide it with an island, as it prefers to remain

 

Fic. 86. AMBLYSTOME (AMBLYSTOMA MEXICANUS).

in some shady retreat at the bottom of the tank. Occa-
sionally, however, it comes to the surface of the water for
atmospheric air (desiring, I suppose, a change of air),
making as it does so the same “popping” noise as the
newt under like circumstances; and sometimes it remains
stationary in mid-water in an almost perpendicular attitude,
head pointing upwards. The Siredon has a very good
appetite and will live entirely upon garden worms and raw
meat. Nevertheless, it is quite ready to make a meal of a
small fish or a young newt. One day, for instance, I placed
two young tritons, about four months old, in a tank which
contained a pair of Axolotls, and a little while afterwards
on looking for the former to remove them I could only find
one. I hunted under every piece of weed and behind the
rockwork in vain for the other, and was about to give the
AMPHIBIANS. 107

 

search up when I caught sight of the tip of the tail of the
missing animal just protruding out of the mouth of one of
the Axolotls. And as I watched that tip, every moment ex-
pecting it to disappear altogether, the Siredon, much to my
surprise, suddenly disgorged its captive, which immediately
swam about the aquarium, apparently none the worse for
its late rather awkward predicament. However, a few hours
afterwards I found it dead. An Axolotl will eat almost any
amount of frog and toad tadpoles, and I have seen one
swallow a young minnow with the greatest possible ease.
The fish swam near the reptile, there was a sudden dash on
the Axolotl’s part, and the fish had disappeared.

The Siredon, curiously enough, though not the perfect
animal, will reproduce its own species even in an aquarium.
It affixes its eggs to the water-plants, preferring the Vallis-
neria spiralis for this purpose, or to the rockwork, or to the
sides of the tank. The young are released from the eggs
in fifteen to twenty days, according to the temperature in
which they are placed. As soon as the eggs are deposited
they should be removed, if possible, to a rather large
aquarium which contains plenty of well-established water-
weed, especially Vallisneria and Anacharis, and also much
small (no large) animal life, such as Water-Fleas, Cyclops,
and the like. The eggs, under these circumstances, will be
undisturbed until they are hatched, and the young Axolotls
which come from them will have plenty of proper food until
they are old enough to eat tiny garden worms. From the
first they are provided, of course, with branchiw, but no
feet. In nine or ten days the fore-feet appear, and these
are followed some time afterwards by the hind ones. When
first hatched the young tadpoles are of a greenish colour,
and covered with little dark spots. The length of time
which will elapse before the Axolotl becomes the perfect
Amblystome depends upon circumstances: sometimes it will
lose its branchie and develop into the air-breathing animal
within twelve months, and sometimes it will remain an
Axolotl for three or four years. The perfect Amblystome
will also reproduce by laying. eggs.
108 FRESH WATER AQUARIA.

 

The Axolotls, like the tritons and other animals, have, as I
have seen proved, the power of reproducing lost limbs.
Though these animals are generally of the colour described
above, there is a white variety, a specimen of which may be
seen, or used to be seen, at the Bedford Conservatories,
Covent Garden. It is, I believe, very rare: I have never
seen another.

These animals seem to prefer to seize their food before it
reaches the bottom of the water. If they do not take it as it
falls the first time, it is a good plan to withdraw it and let it
drop again, as close to their noses as possible. Some aquarium-
keepers feed their Axolotls only once a week, and others
every second or third day; but I think that it must be better
to feed them regularly every morning, and this I do, and
always find them ready for their food. They seem to know
their feeding hour, for they swim towards me as I go near
the tank. Axolotls will soon learn to eat raw meat, which
need not be so carefully cut as for the newts, for they have
wide mouths and take their food at one gulp.

Though the Axolotls will grow, under favourable circum-
stances, almost as large as the water-vole (water-rat), it is
not necessary for that reason to keep them in a proportion-
ately large aquarium. Four full-grown animals might be
kept in a tank 2ft. Gin. long by Ift. broad and 8in. deep. If
they are’ well and regularly fed they will not attack fish of
a fair size; but if, on the other hand, they are neglected,
they will attempt to devour not only the fish, but even one
another. In Mexico, Axolotls are eaten by the natives; they
are prepared and cooked in the same way that eels are
prepared and cooked in this country.

Axolotls can be bought in London of the principal dealers
in aquarium requisites.
CHAPTER VIII.

FISHES.

is almost unnecessary to say that there are no
more interesting and attractive inhabitants of an
aquarium than fish. Fish are both intelligent and,
to a certain degree, affectionate. No one ought for a
moment to doubt their possession of intelligence when he
calls to mind the time, thought, patience, and skill, which
must often be expended before the devices of man can over-
come the craftiness of some fish; when he comes to remember
how apt they are to profit by experience, and how ready
they are to take advantage of the least clumsiness or care-
lessness on his own part when, having hooked them, he is
attempting to land them; and when he reads (and believes)
that certain fish have been known to come to their feeding-
places in the lake in which they live upon the sounding of
a gong, and that others (sticklebacks in an aquarium) have
been trained to ring a bell when they were wanting food.
Nor is it unreasonable to suppose that fish possess affection
when sharks hunt in twos; when pike pair, and if one of
them should be captured, the other haunts the spot waiting
for the return of his mate; when sticklebacks carefully build
their nests and fight in the defence of their young; and
when bullheads constantly watch and guard their little ones
until the latter are able to take care of themselves.

Most fish in captivity will grow quite tame, learn to know

 
110 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

their owner, and come to the side of the tank on his
approach.

By the help of the aquarium we are able to learn very
much concerning the habits and characteristics of fish, which
knowledge, without its assistance, we should fail to obtain,
It is very pleasant to see healthy fish in a tank when the
water is bright and clear, the plants are green and growing,
and everything is quite clean. But, on the other hand, it is
distressing to see fish swimming with their noses close to
the surface of thick, unwholesome-looking water, vainly en-
deavouring to get a sufficiency of oxygen; to see plants
partly dead and decaying, and fungus growing upon food
which, in excess, has been carelessly thrown into the aquarium
and left there until it has introduced disease. To see a
miserable bird in a dirty cage is bad enough; but it is far
worse, I think, to see dying fish in foul water. There are
few pets which require such little care as fish, but it is
absolutely necessary that they should have some attention;
and he who keeps fish and neglects them is just as much
guilty of cruelty as he who is summoned for working a horse
with sore shoulders.

If the aquarium-owner would keep his fish in a healthy
and happy condition, he ought to carefully observe the
following rules :

(1) Provide shade for the fish.

(2) Never let the sun shine for any length of time upon
the water in which fish live.

(3) Never keep more fish than the aquarium can contain
in comfort.*

(4) Never put large fish in a small tank. Prefer small fish.

(5) Never forget to feed regularly, and on suitable food.

(6) Never allow discarded food to remain in the water.

(7) Remove diseased fish at once, and never introduce
strange ones about whose health there is any doubt. Keep
them in quarantine for a short time.

 

* There are too many fish in an aquarium when they swim with their noses
close to the surface of the water.
FISHES. 111

 

(8) Never permit the presence of armed and bullying fish
with unarmed and timid ones—e.g., sticklebacks with small
goldfish.

(9) Never allow the water-plants in their luxuriant growth
to fill the whole aquarium, and so interfere with the free
movements of the fish.

(10) Always remove dead and dying weeds, or dead and
dying animals of any kind, at once. /

There are no fish more commonly seen in the aquarium
than the Gold-fish (Carassius auratus) (Fig. 87), and few
are more suited to a life there than they are. They are

 

Fic. 87. GOLDEN CaRP (CARASSIUS AURATUS).

very hardy, not too active, handsome, of various colours, and
easily tamed. Not only do these fish vary in their colour,
but also in their fins: some fins are double, others are
entirely wanting. Occasionally one fish has two or three
tails. I have had a Silver-fish in my possession for some
years whose tail looks, from behind, like an inverted capital
Y. This fish is perfectly healthy and very handsome, his
scales glistening like mother-of-pearl.

It is a long time since Gold-fish were first introduced into
England, and when is a matter of doubt; probably, however,
about the year 1611. They originally came from China.

A great many Golden Carp are now annually bred in this
country, especially in those tanks which receive the waste
hot water from some of the great manufactories in the
112 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

North of England. For the aquarium, “cold-water” fish
should always be chosen—that is, those which have been
born in ponds uninfluenced by artificial heat: they are much
hardier than the “hot-water” ones. Not seldom the latter
will be found on their backs in the tank gasping for breath
and apparently dying. When this is the case, they may be
revived by placing them in running water, under a tap for
instance, or by dropping a very little brandy down their
throats, or by putting them for some time in fairly warm
water (about 90deg.). This last remedy—the simplest—is
perhaps the most effectual.

“ Cold-water” fish, if properly managed, hardly ever suffer
from illness, and rarely die except from accident or old age;
indeed, I have found that the mortality of fish (not Gold-fish
only) in an aquarium is very far less than that of birds in
an aviary. Mr. T. H. Jones, of Woolwich, has told me, and
has kindly allowed me to mention the fact, that he placed a
Silver-fish in his aquarium on 20th May, 1853, and that it
lived there until 1th April, 1883, a period of thirty years all
but about six weeks. This fish was fed during that time
upon raw meat (beef or mutton), and cut into narrow pieces
to resemble worms. The food was given about thrice a
week. About eighteen months ago I was in a bird-dealer’s
shop, and while there a lady came in and asked for some
Gold-fish, adding the remark that she could never get hers
to live more than about half a year. On hearing this I
ventured to ask, as politely as I could, whether she fed her
fish. “Oh, no,” she replied, “I never give them anything to
eat.” As she said this, the shopkeeper exclaimed: “Never
feed your fish if you want ’em to live.” That lady’s fish had
died the very painful death of slow starvation. And her
fish, alas! I fear, are not the only ones which so die. The
fish this man sold were healthy “cold-water” fish, and this I
knew, for I had bought several of him, which had then been
living in my aquarium for years, and are alive still. Some
of my friends also had bought fish of him, with the same
satisfactory result. And this lady’s fish died, not because
they were. unfitted to live in confinement, but because they
FISHES. 113

 

were improperly cared for. And those people who so often
complain that their Gold-fish die, may depend upon it that,
as a rule, the fault is not in the fish or in the seller of the
fish, but in their own mismanagement. Fish, however healthy,
must of course be regularly fed.

The best food for Gold-fish is finely-crushed vermicelli.
This should be thrown sparingly into the water, and as it
sinks the fish will soon learn to take it eagerly. Never give
them more than they will eat at the time of feeding. Besides
this food, the fish will eat the eggs und fry of the water-
snails (which should always be present in the tank). A little
raw meat, and a few garden or water worms, will be good for
them as a change; but vermicelli should be their principal food.

Golden Carp, in common with all the Cyprinide, have the
power of living for a considerable time out of water. The
reason of this is that the covers of their gills, having bony
supports, can be opened by the action of the muscles, and so
the fish are able as it were to breathe the atmospheric air.
Aquarium-keepers have often recorded instances in which
Golden Carp have jumped out of their tank on to the floor,
have remained there for several hours before they have
been discovered, and then, on being returned to the water,
have quickly regained their former health and spirits. A
convenient way of carrying these fish a long distance is to
w. them up in damp moss. The late Mr. Frank Buckland
sa that once having a dozen Gold-fish given to him, he
pl. them in wet grass and then in a cloth in his carpet
be “There they remained all night.” On his arrival in
towu, during the afternoon of the following day, he placed
them in water, and found that six of them were still alive
after having been kept a night and half a day in his carpet
bag. When first placed in the aquarium they rolled about as
if intoxicated, but they soon recovered from the effects of
their journey.

When Gold-fish, by accident, have been allowed to remain
for a long time out of water, they may frequently be revived
by administering a little brandy, even if they are apparently
quite dead.

I
114 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Gold-fish will breed in a large aquarium: they affix
their spawn to the water-weeds there, especially to the
Anacharis. The spawn as soon as deposited should be
removed to another tank, or the. old fish will eat either it
or the fry which are hatched from it. The young fish are
hatched, as in the case of many coarse fish, in about ten
days. They should be provided at first with the smallest
animal life for food, such as water-fleas and Cyclops. When
about four months old they may be returned to the
aquarium, for they will then be quite able to take care
of themselves. The young fish at first are very dark,
almost black, but gradually as they grow they become either
golden or silvery in colour.

Gold-fish can’ be more easily bred in a small pond in
the garden than in an aquarium. The pond for this
purpose need not be more than 8ft. or 9ft. in diameter,
and about 3ft. deep. The sides of the pond ought to slope
gradually from the edge, so that the young fry will be
able to get out of the reach of those old Gold-fish which
pursue them with cannibalistic intentions. The pond should
be made perfectly watertight by means of a mixture of
Portland cement and sand. Before any fish are introduced
into the pond it should be filled with water, which ought to
be frequently changed during a period of six weeks or two
months. The Portland cement will then be deprived of any
poisonous properties, which would be certain to injure the
fish. When the pond has been properly soaked, its bottom
should be covered with well-washed river sand to the depth
of about 6in., and in this sand several sprays of Anacharis
ought to be planted. When the Anacharis has taken root,
and made a fair amount of growth, the fish may be intro-
duced—say, three male Gold-fish and six females. These
under favourable circumstances will increase with great
rapidity: one carp alone will sometimes deposit about half-
a-million eggs: Iuckily, however, only a small portion of
these hatch. The fish during their breeding season should
be fed on meat and garden worms as well as vermicelli.
The pond ought to be so situated that as little dust and
FISHES. 115

 

as few dead leaves as possible can enter it. The Anacharis
must be watched, lest it make too luxuriant a growth,
and thus prevent the free movement of the fish. About
six dozen water-snails (Planorbis corneus) should be put
into the pond with the fish; their eggs and little ones will
help to supply the young fish with food. No frogs or
sticklebacks must be allowed with the Gold-fish; indeed, it
is better to put no other fish at all into the pond if the
Gold-fish are wished to breed. Such a pond as this might
be made very profitable.

There is certainly no more suitable fish for the aquarium
than the Common Carp (Cyprinus carpio) (Fig. 88), for it is

 

Fic. 88. COMMON CaRP (CYPRINUS CARPIO).

very handsome when in good health, its scales looking—as it
has been well said by Pope—as if “bedropp’d with gold.”
Its form shows that it is admirably fitted for a life in
stagnant water; and being the least carnivorous of fish, it is
never likely (except driven by absolute starvation) to prey
upon any of its smaller comrades in the tank. As it has the
largest brain, in proportion, of any fresh-water fish, it is very
intelligent, and soon becomes so exceedingly cunning that no
fish is more difficult to catch with rod and line in a large
pond than an old Carp. It will even with great success
dodge the net. How well, then, is it named the “fresh-water
fox”! Though it is'one of the most troublesome of all fish
to catch, it is one of the easiest to tame when caught.

12
116 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Cyprinus carpio will live apparently quite contented where
any other fish—except perhaps a tench— would very likely
die. It seems to be almost indifferent to either heat or cold,
for it has been proved that it will survive being placed in
water heated to 109deg., or frozen up in a mass of solid ice.
The Common Carp will also live for several hours out of
water; and fishermen sometimes tell us how that after a
long and successful day’s Carp fishing, they have found their
spoil still alive on their return home. On the Continent
Carp are even fattened by being suspended in the air in a
net containing damp moss, and in that position they are fed
upon bread and milk, put into their mouths with a wooden
spoon. At first, however, until they get accustomed to this
extraordinary treatment, the net, moss, and fish are oc-
casionally dipped in water. Carp are said to live 150 or even
200 years, but this is not proved. However, at any rate it
is certain that they are capable of attaining a great age.
Fontainebleau, in France, is among other things noted for its
very old Carp, some of them being described as “white with
age”; but it is not unreasonable to suppose that this
whiteness is not so much an indication of great age as of
disease, for fish, especially the Carp, are subject to a
vegetable parasite (Saprolegnia ferox) which gives to its
victims a hoary appearance. This mould or fungus is chiefly
caused by the presence of decaying animal matter in the
pond or tank. The disease is contagious. Whenever, there-
fore, the least appearance of this growth is noticed, the
suffering fish should be at once removed from its fellows and
be kept quite alone until a cure has been effected. The best
manner of accomplishing this end is to keep the fish in
running water, and this may be done in one of the following
ways:

(1) Put the fish in a box having perforated sides and lid,
and sink it all but 3in. or 4in. in a running stream. (2) Or
place the patient in a shallow vessel covered with,wire netting
or the like, under a gently running tap. (3) Should no tap
be conveniently at hand, a contrivance may be made (out of
doors for preference) by the help of a siphon, a tub, and a
FISHES. 117

 

large flower-pot saucer. It will save trouble if this arrange-
ment is carried out close to a pump. If the siphon is small,
and the tub large, the water will run for a long time without
attention. The saucer should have a small hole bored just
below the rim, to allow for the escape of water, and the top
of the saucer ought to be covered with perforated zine or
wire netting to keep the fish from jumping out. The fish
should be kept and fed in the running water until all traces
of the fungus have disappeared. Fish may be also cured of
this disease by being dipped, as is explained in another
place, in salt water. When tanks are properly looked after,
there is not much danger of the appearance of this mould,
which is so often a source of great annoyance and loss to
aquarium-keepers.

It is supposed that Carp were introduced into this country
by German monks about the middle of the fifteenth century,
and now there are very few old-established ponds in England in
which they may not be found. During the greater part of
the winter these fish, when at liberty, eat little or nothing,
and retire as close as they can to the mud of the water in
which they live, or get into some cave-like hollows in the
bank, or under weeds or roots of trees. They continue this
practice, to a certain extent, even in the aquarium, with-
drawing themselves as much as possible from sight, and
hardly touching any food. The Carp grows larger and
increases more quickly in stagnant than in running water.
It commences to breed when about three years old, and the
number of eggs deposited by each female fish depends
generally upon its size. A Carp weighing 20lb. has been
known to contain more than a million eggs. The ova are
affixed to water-plants and the like during the latter part of
May and the three or four following months.

In a state of nature the Common Carp feeds upon water-
plants, larve of insects, insects and worms, but in confine-
ment it may be fed upon crushed vermicelli, and on this
food it will apparently live quite contentedly. This fish
grows, under favourable circumstances, to a great size,
occasionally reaching more than 20lb. in weight, and more
118 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

than 23ft. in length and 2ft. in girth. The body is broad
and deep, but not ungraceful; the colour is olive-brown,
tinged with gold; the mouth is small and toothless, and has
two barbels on each side; the lips are fleshy. The head is
of a darker shade than the body, and the under-part of the
body is of a yellowish-white; the fins are dark brown; there
is one long dorsal fin. The tail is large and deeply forked;
the scales are also large, and covered with a kind of mucus.
The Prussian Carp (Carassius gibelio) (Fig. 89) is if possible
hardier than the Common Carp. It is a great lover of
stagnant water, and is therefore well fitted for a life in the
aquarium. In the country from which this fish takes its

 

Fic. 89, Prusstan Carp (CARASSIUS GIBELIO).

name, the breeding and feeding of Carp are an important and
very often a profitable business. The Gibel Carp is very
good to eat when properly cooked, and it does not taste, it is
said, of the water in which it lives. This fish attains no
great weight or size. Its habits and character are very
similar to those of the Common Carp, and in confinement it
should be fed on the same kind of food. It has an equal, if
not a greater, power of resisting the fatal effects of an
enforced absence from water. The chief difference between
the Prussian Carp and the Common Carp is the absence of
barbels on the sides of the mouth of the former. All fish of
the genus Carassius are without barbels. The body is broad
and deep, deeper in proportion than that of Cyprinus carpio.
The head is blunt, and the eyes are yellow. The mouth is small,
FISHES. 119

 

The scales have a bronze-like tinge, and the fins are red.
This fish seldom exceeds lb. in weight.

The Crucian Carp (Carassius vulgaris), sometimes called the
German Carp, is very suitable for the aquarium. It has for
a long time been domesticated on the Continent, and now
shows several varieties. It seldom exceeds 3lb. in weight.
The characters and habits of the German Carp and Common
Carp are very much alike. The Crucian Carp is a much
rarer fish in England than the Prussian Carp; the latter
being found in nearly every part of the country, while the
former has been caught, I believe, nowhere but in the
Thames. The body is flat and very deep, and much curved
both above and below. The stiff rays of the dorsal and anal
fins are finely serrated. The head is small in proportion to
the size of the body. The scales are large, and of a light
golden tinge. The mouth is without barbels.

The Speigel Carp (Cyprinus rex Cyprinorum) is a most
interesting and handsome fish, and appropriately called the
“King of the Carp.” I keep a fine Speigel Carp in the
same aquarium with a number of smaller fish of different
kinds, and find it to be very gentle and tame. Its: move-
ments are generally sedate, but occasionally it indulges in a
little violent exercise. It seems to be a very inquisitive fish,
apparently taking notice of all that goes on in the room.
This Carp is sometimes called the “mirror or looking-glass
fish.” It is rather rare, and is certainly worthy of a place in
any fairly large fresh-water aquarium. It may be fed upon
vermicelli. This fish, I believe, originally came to this
country from Silesia. The body in shape is very like that
of the Common Carp; the greater part of it is without
scales, and it is soft and leathery. On each side of the central
line there is one row of scales, which are large and of a
golden colour tinted with silver. There are also a few scales
on each side of the fleshy part of the tail, and one or two
here and there on other portions of the body. The tail is
large and deeply forked. The mouth is small, and has two
barbels on each side. The sides of the fish possess a con-
siderable amount of sheen.
120 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Prussian and Crucian Carp may be readily bought of
aquarium-dealers in London; and the Speigel sometimes.

The Gudgeon (Gobio fluviatilis) (Fig. 90) is a general
favourite. It is a favourite with the aquarium-keeper, for it
is hardy, handsome, and easily tamed; it is a favourite with
the fisherman, for it is a bold biter and provides excellent
sport; and it is a favourite with the epicure, for when freshly
caught and properly cooked it is most delicious to eat. An
old writer says that this fish used to be swallowed alive as a
cure for consumption. The Gudgeon is generally found in
those rivers in England which possess a gravelly bottom. It
may be readily taken with rod and line, or with a net. The

 

Fig. 90. GUDGEON (GOBIO FLUVIATILIS).

fish can be collected together by scraping the bottom of the
river with a heavy rake: this raking disturbs and exposes the
animal life upon which the Gudgeon feeds, viz., larvae of
insects, water-worms, and the like. As these fish are gre-
garious, it is wise and kind to keep a few of them together,
but they will not die if kept in solitary confinement: they
seem soon to learn how to be happy and contented in the
aquarium. The bottom of the tanks in which Gudgeon live
should be covered with a layer of gravel of extra depth,
for without such precaution these fish, being bottom feeders,
would interfere greatly with the clearness of the water. The
Gudgeon generally spawns about May, and the ova, it is said,
take nearly a month to hatch. This fish, while in the
aquarium, should be fed upon small garden worms, water-
FISHES. 121

 

worms, larve of gnats, or pieces of raw meat. After a time
it will learn to eat a little vermicelli. The body is cylindrical
in shape, and olive-brown in colour, and spotted; a dark line
runs along the sides. The eye is placed high up in the
head, and the mouth possesses two small barbels, one on
each side. The scales are large and the snout is somewhat
blunt. This fish sometimes grows 7in. long.

The Roach (Leuciscus rutilus) (Fig. 91), if young, will live
fairly well in an aquarium. He is rather a handsome fish,
and by no means the “fresh-water sheep” which some people
think him to be. He may not have the intelligence of the

 

Fig. 91. ROACH (LEUCISCUS RUTILUS).

carp, but he has certainly enough common sense to profit
by experience, for he soon becomes so suspicious that it
is by no means an easy matter to catch him with rod and
line. Roach are found nearly everywhere, and in great
numbers; for though trout feed upon their eggs, and pike
and perch upon their fry; though so many men like to
catch them when mature; and though they so often fall
victims to more than one disease, they are still able, by
means of their wonderful reproductive powers, to more than
hold their own in the battle of life. When the aquarium-
keeper wishes to procure Roach of the right size for his
tank, he should, during the autumn, pass his hand-net along
the weedy edges of those streams which run into some river
where these fish are know to exist. Roach ought to be kept
122 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

in a rather large and shallow aquarium, and not crowded
there; for they are subject, not only to the fish fungus or
mould, but also to another disease which causes their scales
to turn black. Roach while in confinement may be fed upon
crushed vermicelli.

The depth of the body of this fish is: a little greater than
the length of the head. It‘is stoutly built, of a silvery
colour on the sides, and of an olive-brown upon the back.
In maturity the fins are red. The lateral line has a down-
ward curve. The mouth is toothless, and rather blunt. The
scales are large, and become easily detached. This fish
seldom exceeds lft. in length and 2lb. in weight.

The Chub (Leuciscus cephalus) (Fig. 92) is a hardy and
‘handsome fish, and will live for a long time in an aquarium

 

Fic. 92. CHUB (LEUCISCUS CEPHALUS).

under judicious management. He is rather a large eater for
his size, and seems to prefer insect food. A small kitchen
blackbeetle (so called) will soon tempt him to feed from the
fingers. In a natural state he lives upon larve of insects,
worms, and the tender shoots of water-plants, but in the
aquarium he will readily learn to feed upon vermicelli. Chub
are found in many of the rivers in England, especially in
those which have a gravelly bottom. They may be caught
with either a fly or a minnow as a bait or by “float fishing.”
They ought not to be more than 3in. or 4in. in length for
the aquarium; but should they be larger than this, it will
FISHES. 123

 

not be wise to keep fish smaller than they are in the same
tank with them. Their great appetites would sooner or later
tempt them to devour their companions. A large dace and
a small Chub are so much alike that one is often mistaken
for the other; but this error need not be made if it be
borne in mind that the rear part of a Chuh’s anal fin is
convex, while that of the dace is concave (Figs. 92 and 93).
The Chub is noted for its extreme quickness of sight and
for its power of rapidly rising and sinking in the water
at will.

The depth of the body of the Chub is a little greater than
the length of the head. The scales are large and thick. The
lateral line curves slightly towards the ventral fins. The
head is blunt and the mouth toothless; the lips are very
leathery. The colour of its back is olive-brown, of its sides
silvery when the fish is young, but bronze-like when the fish
is mature. The under-part of the body is silvery-white. The
tail is large, dark in colour, and slightly forked. The pectoral
fins are olive-green, and the ventral and anal fins bright
pink. This fish does not often exceed 41b. in weight.

The Dace (Leuciscus vulgaris) (Fig. 93) is a lively, graceful,
and active little fish, and a great favourite. Its glittering

 

Fic. 93. DACE (LEUCISCUS VULGARIS).

scales are very conspicuous in the aquarium. The Dace is
hardy and soon becomes quite tame. AS an instance of the
hardiness of this fish, I may mention that a young pupil
of mine one day brought me two little Dace, not 2in. long.
I placed them in some water in a shallow vessel, which I
foolishly neglected to cover, and left the room. On returning
about an hour afterwards I found that both, fish had jumped
124 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

out of the water and were on the floor, apparently quite dead.
However, I replaced them in the temporary aquarium, and
one of them recovered: the other died. The former I kept
for three years and then I gave it, together with a gold-fish,
to one of my sisters, under whose care it lived for about five
years longer. The hardy gold-fish was the first to die. The
Dace lived altogether about eight years in captivity, and
during this time it grew from lin. to 6in. or 7in. in length,
and became so tame that it would take a fly from the fingers.
The aquarium in which Dace are kept should be covered, for
they are great jumpers. They will live upon vermicelli, a fly
or two being given to them now and then as a treat. Dace
are generally found in clear, deep water, and may be caught
with a hand-net or fly, or by “ bottom-fishing.”

The general appearance of the Dace is very graceful. The
depth of its body equals the length of its head. Its colour
on the back is brownish-green, on the sides silvery, and on
the under-part of the body nearly white. The dorsal and
tail fins are brownish-green; the ventral and the pectoral are
slightly pink, and the anal fin is white, tinged with green.
The tail fin is rather deeply forked. The Dace does not
often exceed Qin. in length or 2b. in weight.

The Rudd (Leuciscus erythrophthalmus) (Fig. 94) when
young will live very well in an aquarium. It is decidedly a
handsome fish, handsomer than the roach, with which it is
often confounded. I do not know whether Rudd sleep more
than other fish, but whenever I take a light into my study at
night they are the fish which seem more certain to be asleep
than any of the others. It is rather a curious and interesting
sight to see a large and well-stocked tank which has for some
tirhe been in a state of darkness suddenly lighted up. Many
of the fish will be seen resting on the sand at the bottom of
the water. They appear perfectly motionless, but gradually
rise under the influence of the light and begin to swim slowly
and seemingly sleepily about. Rudd are found in great
numbers in Norfolk. When kept in an aquarium they may
be fed upon vermicelli.

The body of the Rudd is shaped very like that of the roach.
FISHES. 125

 

Its back is brown, and its sides are silvery, tinted sometimes
with gold. The scales are rather rough. The eyes and the
fins are red, the lower fins being darker than the upper. The
dorsal fin is behind the ventral. This fish does not often
exceed 1$lb. in weight. The late Mr. Frank Buckland has
given the following rule for distinguishing the Rudd from the
roach: “In the dorsal fin of the roach it will be found that

 

Fig. 94. Rupp (LEUCISCUS ERYTHROPHTHALMUS). .

the front ray stands almost even with the front ray of the
leentral fin, but in the Rudd the dorsal fin stands evenly
between the anal and the ventral fins. The eye in the Rudd
is of a much brighter red than the roach.”

The Minnow (Leuciscus phoxinus) (Fig. 95) is a beautiful,
hardy, and, as a schoolboy
would say, “cheeky” little fish.
Though Minnows are generally
found in clear and running
water, yet there are no fish
which are more ready to take

 

. ee Fig. 95. MINNOW
kindly to a life in confinement (LEUCISCUS PHOXINUS).

than they are. They will live,

apparently happily, where one would never expect a fish to
exist at all. I have known two Minnows to live for six
weeks or two months in a small bottle, containing less than
half-a-pint of water, and the surface of the water exposed to
126 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the air not being more than could be covered with half-
a-crown. The Minnows did not die even under these circum-
stances, but were. killed by a Water-boatman (Notonecta
furcata), which lived in the bottle with them. These fish
will live almost equally well in the smallest vessel worthy of
the, name of an aquarium, or in the largest tank. They can
be caught in nearly every pond, river, or stream. They may
be taken in a small hand-net, which should be sunk a little
way in the water where these fish are seen swimming about in
shoals. In the centre of the net a piece of bright red braid
or cloth should have been tied. When the Minnows,
urged by their curiosity, have come in some numbers to
examine the gay colour, the net ought to be suddenly raised
in the air, and if adroitly done, it will be found to contain
not a few captives. Another way to catch the Minnow in the
hand-net, is to run it along under the overhanging banks of
the stream or pond, or among the weeds (especially if the
weather be cold). Sometimes, when I have been hunting for
beetles and other insects, the numbers of Minnows which I
have unwillingly caught have caused me a considerable loss
of time, and I am afraid occasionally some little annoyance ;
for before the insects can be secured, the fish must be taken
one by one and returned to the water.

Minnows very soon become tame enough to feed from the
fingers. They will live upon vermicelli. It is pleasant to see
a small shoal of these active little fish busily picking up
their food as it is thrown to them in the aquarium. They
will also eat flies, small worms, and pieces of meat. Some-
times their boldness and impudence cause them to be quite a
nuisance in the tank, for when a portion of food has been
carefully dropped in front of some shy-feeding fish, a
“cheeky” little Minnow will very likely dash suddenly for-
ward and greedily devour that which was meant for his more
retiring companion. Minnows are longer-lived than most
people imagine them to be. Mr. Jones, of Woolwich, put
a few of these fish in the same aquarium with the silver carp
before mentioned (p. 112), and thirteen years elapsed before
the last of them died.
FISHES. 127

 

In the spring-time the male Minnow becomes tinged with
green and red, and when thus coloured it is difficult to
find a more beautiful little fish Minnows spawn where
the stream or river has a gravelly bottom. The ova hatch
in about a week. It seems very wonderful that Minnows
should be as numerous as they are, when one considers how
many enemies they have. Almost every fish will, at times,
devour them. Man has also found that they make delicious
food when properly cooked. The body of the Minnow is a
little less in depth than the length of its head. The colour

 

Fie. 96. TENCH (TINCA VULGARIS)

of the back is olive-brown, the sides being lighter in shade
and spotted. The colouring, however, of these fish varies a
good deal according to the localities in which they are found.
The dorsal fin is just over the space between the ventral
and anal fins. The tail is somewhat deeply forked, and there
are dark spots at its base. This fish does not often exceed
3in. in length.

Though the carp and the minnow are so extremely hardy,
I believe the Tench (Tinca vulgaris) (Fig. 96) is hardier than
either. It will live for a very long time out of water; in
fact, it is said that when this fish has been brought to the
market, and has failed there to obtain a purchaser, it has
been taken back again and returned to the water whence it
128 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

came. Tench are sometimes found in rivers, but more
frequently in weedy and muddy ponds, and often in the pits
of disused brickfields. The muddier the water, the better
the flavour of the fish. The habits of the Tench are very
like those of the carp—both fish growing larger and increasing
more quickly in stagnant water than in running, and both
getting, during some portion of the winter, as far into the
mud at the bottom of the water in which they live as
possible. The Tench has been often called the “ physician
fish,” from the idea that it has the power, by means of the
sliminess of its skin, of curing the diseases of all other fish.
And it has been said that the pike, out of gratitude to the
Tench for his skill in healing, will refrain from devouring
him. Gratitude is so rare that one would be glad to discover
it even in a fish; but we do not really find it there, at least
so far as the pike is concerned, for that “fresh-water shark,”
notwithstanding his reputation of being possessed of the
“erace of courtesy” will not hesitate, if pressed by hunger,
to make a dinner of his “kind physician.” The other day,
in an aquarium of mine, a pike took, not his medicine, but
his “doctor.” In the Tench’s power of healing himself and
other fish I do not for a moment believe. It was only the
other day that a Gibel Carp was sent to me, and was placed
in the same tank with three Tench. Now, had these fish
their reputed gift of healing, I do not understand how it was
that they did not prevent their new companion from showing
signs of fungus, which it did shortly after its arrival. As
Tench delight in stagnant water, they are very well suited to
a life in the aquarium. Their natural food consists of larve
of insects, worms, and the tender shoots of some water-plants.
In confinement they will live upon vermicelli, to which should
be added a little animal food occasionally.

The Golden Tench or Golden Schlei (Tinca auratus), a
variety of the Common Tench, is a very handsome fish, and
a great acquisition to an aquarium. It originally came to
this country, I think, from the Continent, and now it is
quite acclimatised in England. It is “of a most lovely
yellow colour mixed with the gleam of gold.”
FISHES. 129

 

Tench, either the Golden or the Common, will increase
very rapidly in suitable ponds. Two males should be allowed
to each female. The males are distinguished from the females
by the large size of their ventral fins. The mouth of
the Tench is blunt, very leathery, toothless, and possesses a
small barbel at each corner. The scales are very small, and
are covered with a thick mucus. The dorsal fin is just
opposite the ventral fin. The former and the anal fin are
without bony rays. The tail fin varies in form according
to the age of the fish, being at first concave, then truncate,
and finally convex. The colour of the Tench, which is really

 

Fig. 97. CaRp-BREAM (ABRAMIS BRAMA).

very beautiful when closely examined, is difficult to describe.
Perhaps the most approximate description is dark green
and golden. The lips are flesh coloured, and the fins darker
than the body. The Tench does not often exceed 6lb. in
weight, or 18in. in length.

Both the Common and the Golden Tench may be readily
bought in London—the former, when small, for about 4d.
each, and the latter for about 2s.

The Carp-Bream (Abramis brama) (Fig. 97) is rather a good-
looking fish, but it is not so easy to keep in health in an
aquarium as any of the fish already mentioned. It should
be obtained when young, and placed in a tank which presents

K
130 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

a large surface of water in proportion to its size, and which
also possesses plenty of freely-growing plants. The natural
food of the Carp-Bream is worms, insects, and the tender
parts of water-weeds. It is a hearty eater. In the aquarium
it will feed upon vermicelli. Personally, I have a great regard
for the Carp-Bream ; not because it is a very good fish for the
aquarium, for it is not, but because it used to provide me
with such famous sport when I was a boy. The usual weight
of this fish when full grown is from 4b. to 7lb., but some-
times it has been taken weighing upwards of 14]b. The late
Mr. Frank Buckland mentions a Carp-Bream which weighed
113Ib., measured 2ft. 2in. in length, and which a gentleman
asserted that he had placed in the pond in which it was
caught fifty years before. Upon the Continent the Carp-
Bream is more highly esteemed as food than in this country;
but I believe that in some of our large towns great, numbers
of them are eaten during Lent and the Hebrew Passover.
These fish are found in many of the rivers, lakes, and canals
of both England and Ireland. They spawn during May, the
eggs of a single fish sometimes numbering more than 120,000.
The body of the Carp-Bream is deep, flat, and much curved
above and below. The lateral line is rather low down. The
mouth is small, toothless, and without barbels; the snout is
blunt; the scales are rough and have a yellow tinge, which
becomes a brown tinge with age; the pectoral and ventral
fins are tinged with red, and the other fins are slightly brown;
the dorsal fin is small, and the anal fin large; the tail is
deeply forked.

The White Bream, or Bream-flat (Abramis blicca), is more
difficult to keep alive in the aquarium than the carp-bream.
It is a pretty fish, its silvery and glittering scales showing off
well in the tank. It is very subject to fungus, but in a well-
arranged and well-cared-for aquarium it will live in health, and
will certainly be an ornament there. The tank in which it is
placed must have been some time established, or this fish will
not do well—at least, such has been my experience. There
will of course be little or no difficulty in keeping the White
Bream in an aquarium in which a fountain is continually
FISHES. 131
playing. This fish can be distinguished from the carp-
bream by its silvery scales and smaller size. The habits and
habitat of both fish are alike. The White Bream is rather
common. It takes the bait of the fisherman in such a
manner as to make the float lie flat upon the water instead
of going under its surface. Young carp-bream and White
Bream are not by any means difficult to catch in their native
waters. If, however, they cannot be conveniently procured in
this way, they may generally be purchased cheaply enough
from some of the London dealers in aquarium requisites.

The Pomeranian Bream (Abramis buggenhagii) is rare, and
Dr. Ginther regards it as a hybrid between the roach and

 

Fig. 98. BLEAK (ALBURNUS LUCIDUS).

‘the carp-bream. It is certainly more like the former than
the latter. It should be treated according to the directions
given for the keeping and feeding of the carp-bream. The
Pomeranian Bream can sometimes be bought at the London
dealers.

The Bleak (Alburnus lucidus) (Fig. 98) is a very active
and beautiful little fish, with bright glittering scales, and
looks. exceedingly well in an aquarium; but unfortunately
it is not by any means easy to keep alive in confine-
ment. It should be placed either in a large and shallow
tank which is well stocked with growing plants,,or in one
possessing a constantly-playing fountain. As Bleak are
great jumpers, it is necessary to cover the aquaria in
which they are confined. These little fish abound in many
of the rivers of England, swimming near the surface in
the swiftest part of the stream. Their natural food consists

K 2
182 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

of flies, midges, and other insects, and various decaying -matter ;
but in the aquarium they should be fed upon vermicelli,
to which flies may be added when they can conveniently
be obtained. Though while at liberty in the river the
Bleak is said to help to purify the water by feeding upon
decaying substances, the aquarium-keeper must not think
that he is- providing food for his fish by allowing such
matter to remain in the tank. It is never wise to presume
upon the presence of any scavengers in the aquarium; but
to constantly attend to the cleanliness of the tank, as if
there were no such animals. The scavengers will find
plenty of food, notwithstanding all the owner’s care. Bleak
can be caught by fishing for them with a fine line and a

 

Fig. 99. STONE LOACH (COBITIS BARBATULA).

very small hook, baited with a fly or gentle: the hook
should be quite hidden by the bait. The Bleak is the
narrowest and flattest British fresh-water fish, its body
being shaped very like that of a sprat. The colour of the
back is a faint brownish-green, and the rest of the body
is a glittering silvery-white. The dorsal fin is small and the
anal fin large. The lower jaw projects beyond the upper.
The Bleak is about 7in. long when full grown.

Many people who keep aquaria declare that the Stone Loach
(Cobitis barbatula) (Fig. 99) is a delicate fish, and will not
live for any length of time in confinement; and they are
right, for it will not continue very long in health in an
ordinary deep tank. In such an aquarium it will be often
seen, especially towards evening, rising in its curious newt-
like motion to the surface of the water, and after obtaining
FISHES. 133

 

what oxygen it can, sinking again quickly to the bottom.
Sometimes, in order to remain as near to the surface of the
water as possible, it will rest upon the top of the rockwork
or upon the broad buoyant leaves of some aquatic plant.
Such conduct as this shows that the poor fish is uncomfort-
able, that his surroundings are not suited to his requirements,
and that sooner or latter, unless it be removed, it will die.
As long as the Loach remains contentedly on the bottom of
the tank, the aquarium-keeper may be sure that the water
contains all the oxygen necessary for the welfare of his fish.
In this way the Loach is useful as a gauger of the condition
of the tank. Few deep aquaria, however, are so well balanced
that Stone Loach within it will remain in perfect health. As
these fish are generally found in shallow running water, it
is reasonable to suppose that tanks of the least depth and
the greatest area are the most suitable for them; and in
an aquarium about 4in. deep, 18in. long, and 12in. wide, I
have found them to live in perfect health, and apparently
quite happily. I have never seen them come to the surface
of the water in a tank so constructed. Such an aquarium
as this can be made with hardly any expense in less than
two hours, and filled with water as soon as completed; while
short directions for making it have already been given in
Chapter II. A few rather large and flat stones should be
placed upon the bottom of the aquaria in which Loach are
kept, for on and under these the fish will frequently lie.
Loach are easy to catch. A short hunt among the stones
of the stream in which these fish are found will soon drive a
few from their lairs. When disturbed they swim only a short
distance, then sink to the bottom and remain motionless
there. After a fish has been “marked down,” it may be
snared with a horsehair tied to the end of a short stick, or
filliped with the fingers, or driven by a splash, into a hand-net
held just in front of it. The net should touch the bed of
the stream, or the fish will very likely escape by getting
under it. The natural food of the Loach is larve of insects,
water-worms, and the like. In captivity it should be fed
upon water-worms, small garden-worms, and tiny pieces of
134 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

raw meat. This fish appears to discover the presence of its
food by smell rather than by sight. In an aquarium made to
suit its convenience, the Loach will soon become tame enough
to feed from the fingers, and will as quickly prove itself to be
a most interesting little fish. The flesh of the Stone Loach
is highly esteemed as a great delicacy. The body of this fish is
almost cylindrical in shape. The mouth is surrounded by six
barbels. The colour of the back is a kind of olive-brown,
which becomes lighter in shade on the sides. The whole fish
is more or less covered with dark spots. The dorsal fin is
placed over the ventral fin. The dorsal and tail fins are
brownish, and marked with little dark dots arranged in
lines; the other fins are tinged with red. The tail fin is
slightly concave. The Loach has the power of using its intes-
tines as a supplementary means of respiration. The body is
covered with mucus. This fish rarely exceeds 5in. in length.

The Spinous Loach (Cobitis tenia) is not nearly so common
as the stone loach, and is found where the water is muddy
rather than clear. Of the two fish, the former is perhaps
the hardier. Both, however, should be treated in precisely the
same way while kept in confinement. The colour of the
Spinous Loach is a kind of orange-brown. On the sides
there is a row of brown spots, somewhat similar to those
often found upon the sides of the minnow. The barbels are
short. There is a small spine below each eye: the fish is
able to raise these spines at pleasure. This fish, in common
with the stone loach and another loach (Misgurnus fossilis),
has the power of using the intestines as supplementary
breathing organs. The Spinous Loach does not exceed 4in.
in length, and is not much esteemed as food.

The Golden Orfe (Leuciscus orfus) (Fig. 100) is a very
beautiful and interesting little fish, and is in every way suit-
able for the aquarium. It originally came to this country,
I think, from Austria. While in captivity it should be
fed upon vermicelli, and occasionally small garden-worms.
A friend of mine has told me that he has more than once
seen his Golden Orfe devour young minnows. My Orfe, though
I have never seen it take minnows, at first preferred worms
FISHES. 135

 

to vermicelli, but it now feeds upon the latter in preference
to the former. The Golden Orfe is a hardy and lively little
fish, and very quick and graceful in its movements. The
length of the head of this fish about equals the depth of
its body. Its back and the upper part of its sides are orange
in colour, which colour gradually becomes silvery as it nears
the lateral line. The fins are white and slightly tinged with
silver. The tail fin is rather deeply forked. The eyes are
unusually full and beautiful. The head is small, and the
snout blunt. This fish does not exceed 3lb. in weight.
Small Golden Orfe can generally be bought in London for
about 1s. 6d. each.

 

Fig. 100. GOLDEN ORFE (LEUCISCUS ORFUS).

The Common Perch (Perea fluviatilis) (Fig. 101) is an
extremely handsome fish and very suitable for the aquarium.
It is hardy, and if properly cared for, readily adapts itself
to a life in confinement. The only drawbacks to the Perch
as an inmate of the tank are its voracity, and a proneness
to devour its companions. These drawbacks, however, may
be easily overcome in one of the following ways: (1) By
only keeping very small fish of this species, considerably
smaller than the rest of their comrades; (2) by keeping
them in a separate aquarium; (3) by dividing off a portion
of the tank for them by means of pieces of glass. This
glass division is occasionally very useful if the aquarium is
large. It is easily arranged and by no means unsightly.
It is thus constructed: Two pieces of thin copper wire are
136 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

stretched tightly side by side across the top of that part
of the tank where the division is desired. If the aquarium
is made of slate, the wire is fastened to the iron bolts;
if of zinc, through tiny holes made in the framework; if
of wood, to four little screw-eyes placed in the cross-bars.
Three or more pieces of glass about 3in. wide, the length
of which exactly equals the depth of the tank, are cut, and
one piece is placed between the cross-wires, pressed against
the side of the aquarium, and then sunk at the lower
end as deeply in the sand and gravel as possible. A short
piece of wire is now twisted tightly once round the two

 

Fig. 101. COMMON PERCH (PERCA FLUVIATILIS),

parallel pieces and then pushed quite close to the glass
just inserted. The remaining pieces of glass are fixed in
the same way until a partition has been made across the
tank, The twisted wires not only keep the portions of the
glass division firmly in their places, but the proper distances
apart—close enough together to prevent the passage between
them of small fish, and wide enough asunder to allow for
tie free circulation of the water. A piece of perforated
zine, cut the right size and fixed in the same manner, is
another method of making a partition; but it does not look
so neat as the glass, nor is it so wholesome for the fish.
These divisions may be made when the tank is full of
water and stocked, care |of course being taken that the
FISHES. 137

 

place chosen for the partition is free from plants or rockwork.
None but large and rectangular aquaria should be thus
divided.

The Perch is one of the most intelligent of all the fresh-
water fishes, soon learning to know its owner and its feeding
time. In a very little while it will become tame enough to
take food from the fingers. It is, however, rather nervous and
easily frightened while in captivity. Perch are found in
most of the rivers, canals, and lakes of Great Britain; it is
somewhat rare in the North of Scotland. As these fish are
bold biters, they are not by any means difficult to catch; but
unfortunately they are generally hooked in such a manner
that it is often a very difficult matter to free them without
seriously hurting them. The best way to procure Perch for
the aquarium is to catch them with a hand-net, according to
the directions given for taking roach; for the young of the
former as well as of the latter during the autumn ascend
those streams which run into the rivers and canals where
these fish are found, and retire into the weeds and under
the banks. The fish thus caught will be of a suitable size
and free from injury. The Thames is noted for its very
beautiful Perch. Perch are able to live out of water almost
as long as the tench and the carp. They can be carried a
considerable distance by wrapping them up in wet grass or
moss. As Perch swim in shoals, two or three should be kept
together in the aquarium.

Perch deposit their eggs during the latter part of April
and the beginning of May. The eggs are laid in strings or
ribbons, which are sometimes 4ft. or 5ft. long. These strings
of spawn are very interesting, the ova being placed closely
side by side in what appears to be a kind of tube. At first
sight it seems impossible that a fish the size of an ordinary
Perch could contain such a string of eggs; but a closer
examination will show that what takes place in the case of
the spawn of frogs and toads is repeated in that of the
Perch. Each egg is surrounded by a membranous enve-
lope, which absorbs a great quantity of water as soon
as it is exuded from the fish, The ova are hatched in
188 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA

 

about ten days. Perch will spawn in a suitable aquarium,
arranging their strings of eggs among the weeds and rock-
work; and if the old fish are withdrawn from the tank, the
fry can be easily reared. The little ones, of course, should
be supplied with as much small aquatic animal life as
possible. It has been proved that Perch are unisexual;
they are most prolific. Mr. Frank Buckland has said that
he and his secretary counted 155,620 eggs in a fish which
weighed 3lb. 20z.; and 127,240 in another 2Ib. 1loz. in weight;
while Mr. Yarrell records that 280,000 ova were found in a
fish weighing only half a pound.

When at liberty, Perch feed upon insects, worms, and
fish; and in captivity they may be fed upon garden-worms,
minnows, and pieces of meat. It is wise to get them to
partake of the last as soon as possible. Perch ought not to
be crowded in the aquarium, and care should be taken that
the water in which they live does not rise much in tempera-
ture. These fish are so handsome and interesting, that it is
quite worth the trouble and expense of providing a tank
especially for them. A full-grown Perch does not often
exceed 2lb. in weight.

The length of the head of this fish about equals the
depth of its body. The back rises rather suddenly, giving
a “high-shouldered” appearance, and the fleshy part of the
tail as suddenly becomes very slender. There are two
dorsal fins; the front one has fourteen bony rays, developed
into sharp-pointed spines, and the back one (which is situ-
ated almost directly over the anal fin) has soft rays. The
colour of the back is greenish-brown, the sides are golden,
and the under part of the body is white. Six broad dark
green stripes run vertically down the sides. The lateral
line is high up on the side, and follows the curve of the
back. The ventral, anal, and tail fins, are bright scarlet;
the posterior dorsal fin’ is greenish, slightly tinged with
red. The tail fin is small, and slightly forked. The. mouth
is large, and the teeth small and pointed backwards.

Though a very handsome fish, the Pope or Ruffe
(Acerina cernua) is not so easy to keep alive in confine-
FISHES. 139

 

ment as its near relative the common perch. The reason
of this may be that it is nearly always found in running
water, and hardly ever in stagnant. Ruffes are very often
caught while gudgeon are being fished for. They are bold
biters, but are seldom taken in such numbers as to make
it worth while to carry them home for food. The flesh
is, however, highly valued upon the Continent. The Ruffe
is really a very beautiful fish, and, when in good con-
dition, his scales seem to glisten with all the colours of
the rainbow. Though he is so handsome, he has, however,
such an inexpressibly sad-looking face as almost to make
one miserable to look at him. While in captivity he
generally swims, with dorsal fin erect, close to the bottom
of the tank. He is a great eater, and must be supplied
with suitable food, or he will certainly die. When at liberty,
he feeds upon insects, worms, and the like; and in the
aquarium he ought to be fed upon the same until he can
be induced to take raw meat. All the carnivorous in-
habitants of the tank should be fed, where possible, upon
meat instead of living animals; for continually feeding
one’s captives upon live minnows, tadpoles, worms, and the
like, must tend to make one callous to the feelings and
fears of one’s fellow-creatures; though I think the sufferings
of the minnow when seized by a pike, or the pains of a
tadpole while in the clutches of the pupa of a dragon-fly,
are extremely slight, for not only are they cold-blooded,
but it is mercifully ordained—I believe—that all animals
more or less lose all sensation when being preyed upon.
Dr. Livingstone has recorded that when under the paws
of a lion he was unconscious of either fear or pain. The
Ruffe should not be kept with fish smaller than himself,
or very likely he will devour some of his companions;
neither should he be placed in an aquarium where there is
even the slightest approach to crowding of its occupants, or
he will be one of the first to die. The chief differences
between the perch and the Ruffe are that in the case of
the former, the dorsal fin is divided into two fins, the one
with spines, the other without; while in the case of the
140 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

latter the two fins are joined into one; the Ruffe, too, is
without the vertical hands of the perch, and the perch is
without the spots on the dorsal fin of the Ruffe. The
general appearance of the Ruffe certainly seems to justify
the erroneous ‘idea that it is a cross between the gudgeon
and the perch. It is said to have received its name from
the want of smoothness of its scales. This fish does not
often exceed 5in. in length. It spawns during March and
May, among the weeds of streams and small rivers.

The Black Bass (Grystes nigricans) is now acclimatised
in Britain, owing to the efforts and enterprise of certain
noblemen and gentlemen, but especially of the Marquis of
Exeter. The Black Bass is common in the lakes and rivers
of Canada and the United States, where it affords ex-
cellent sport to the fisherman. It is a bold biter, full of
fight, and very good for table purposes; the flesh, it is
said, tasting very much like that of the whiting. No
fresh-water fish that we have in this country, with the
exception of the salmon, is capable of providing more
amusement for the angler than the Black Bass. It will
take minnows, flies, or worms; and as it grows sometimes
so large as to weigh 7b. or 8lb., it generally affords no
small amount of excitement, and requires not a little skill
to land it safely. The Black Bass, I find, makes an ex-
cellent fish for the aquarium; for it is handsome, hardy,
intelligent, and easily tamed. Of course, owing to its
predaceous habits, it must not be kept in a tank among
small defenceless fish, or: the aquarium-keeper will find
them gradually disappear. I keep my Black Bass in a
divided part of a tank which is 2ft. wide, 2ft. llin. long,
and lft. deep, his separate compartment being llin. wide.
and running the whole breadth of the tank. The division is
of glass, and made according to directions given on page 135.
The Bass has for companions two English perch (Perca
fluviatilis) nearly its own size. The three perch (for the Bass
is a perch) agree very well together. I notice, however, that
the English fish do not venture to dispute with him the
possession of a minnow or worm. The Black Bass does not
FISHES. 141

 

make a sudden dash at its prey, like the pike, but hunts it
down with persistence, as a greyhound does a hare.

Black Bass spawn about May and June, and prepare for
the reception of their ova a kind of nest, which they scoop
out in the gravel or mud at the bottom of the water in
which they live. The parent fish protect the eggs and fry,
and accompany their little ones for some time after they
are able to leave the nest. I see no reason why Black Bass
should not be induced to breed in a large aquarium; in fact,
they may have already done so.

Like the carp and the tench, the Bass retires during
winter to the bottom of the pond, lake, or river in which
it lives. The Black Bass while in confinement should as
soon as possible be encouraged to eat pieces of raw meat.
One of these fish about 6in. long will devour several small
minnows a day. A specimen of mine has taken five within a
few hours.

The length of the head of the Black Bass about equals
the depth of its body. It is not so “hog-backed” as the
English perch. The mouth is very large and cruel-looking,
and the under-jaw projects some distance beyond the upper.
The front dorsal fin has nine spines, the tallest of which
is in the middle, the others gradually decreasing in height
towards each end. The back dorsal fin, which is the taller
of the two, is joined to the front one in a way which is
somewhat similar to the junction of those of the ruffe
(Acerina cernua). The spines are very sharp, and blackened
near their points. They are not so often carried erect as
are those of the common perch (Perca fluviatilis). The
back dorsal fin is nearly always erect and vibrating. All
the fins are large in proportion to the size of the fish, and
are continually in motion, especially the pectoral fins. The
tail fin is large, powerful, slightly forked, and black along
its edges. All the fins are dusky at their bases, becoming
of a light greenish tinge towards their extremities. The
anal fin has a sharp spine. The general colour of the fish
is a dark olive-green. Sometimes the body is marked with
black spots or blotches. The sides of the head are a dusky
142 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

kind of white, on which are two broad reddish stripes
running parallel with the mouth. The scales are small.

The River Bullhead, or Miller’s Thumb (Cottus gobio)
(Fig. 102), is a very interesting little fish, and will live well
in an aquarium. It may be caught in the same places and in
the same way as the loach. After turning over a few of the
rather large and flat stones of those streams in which Miller’s
Thumbs are known to exist, one or two will be almost certainly

 

Fic. 102. BULLHEAD (COTTUS GOBIO).

discovered. Upon the removal of the stone, the cunning little
fish will remain perfectly motionless, trusting, no doubt, to
its chameleon-like power of assuming the shade of the gravel
upon which it is resting. Now is the opportunity of the
aquarium-keeper, for, if he be quick, he can either ‘catch the
Bullhead in both of his hands, or he can throw it with one
hand into a net held in front of the fish with the other. If
the Bullhead is allowed to escape, it will dart away with such
quickness to some other retreat, that it will be almost impos-
sible to follow it with the eye, especially when the water has
been disturbed by the ineffectual attempt to throw it into the
net. It is wiser, therefore, to hunt for another fish rather
than waste time in looking for the one that has just evaded
capture.

The Bullhead will live more happily in a shallow aquarium
than in a deep one. It is a great eater, and when at liberty
feeds upon the larve of insects, worms, and the fry of fish.
In confinement it will be satisfied with small garden-worms
or pieces of meat, and will soon learn to take its food from
its owner’s fingers. The Bullhead is a plucky little fish. A
few weeks ago I witnessed an interesting struggle between
FISHES. 143

 

one and a young axolotl. I had given the latter its morning
worm, which it immediately began to swallow, beginning
at one end, when a Bullhead darted from its retreat under
a stone, and seized the other end of the worm. This action
on the part of the fish commenced a furious struggle between
it and the axolotl. As the reptile was the stronger of ‘the
two, the fish was literally tossed about in all directions, some-
times to the right side of its opponent, sometimes to the left,
and sometimes it was turned completely upside down; never-
theless, the plucky little fish continued to hold on until the
worm of contention parted in the middle, and each combatant
got a portion of the prey. The fight between the reptile and
the fish seemed to last for quite half a minute.

Miller’s Thumbs are said to guard their ova and their little
ones, but I have never been able to witness this evidence of
parental care on the part of these fish. Perhaps they might
be induced to breed in a suitable aquarium, since they so soon
become quite tame.

The Bullhead has a flat and broad head and a wide mouth.
The body (seen from above) is very wedge-like in shape.
There are two dorsal fins: the front one is short and some-
thing like the front dorsal fin of the perch; the back one
is very long, and extends quite close to the base of the
caudal fin. The pectoral fins are large and powerful in
proportion to the size of the fish. The anal fin is also very
long, and is just under the long dorsal fin. The ventral fins
are rather small in comparison to the other fins, and upon
them the fish often raises itself from the bed of the stream
or aquarium. The tail fin is slightly convex. The eyes are
rather close together on the top of the head, have golden
irides, and are very bright. The colour of the fish varies,
but it is generally of a yellowish-brown, blotched and spotted
with black. The under-part of the body is nearly white.
There is a small spine on each side of the head.

The Three-spined Stickleback (Gasterosteus aculeatus) (Fig.
103), though very beautiful and interesting, ought never to
be confined in the same aquarium with any other fish: even
in a very large tank it will be a great nuisance. But if it
144 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

be placed in a suitable and separate vessel during early
spring, it will afford much amusement, interest, and in-
struction. The male fish will have then put on his strikingly
beautiful courting dress, the colours of which almost equal in
variety and brilliancy those of the rainbow. He is, especially
when excited during a fight with a rival, or elated over a
victory, a most lovely little fellow—his colouring under such
circumstances becoming brighter and more iridescent than ever.
Sticklebacks may be caught in most of the ponds, ditches,
and slow-running streams of this country; and they can be
readily taken according to the directions already given for
capturing newts (p. 100).

If it be wished that the Sticklebacks should build their nests
in confinement, they should be caught during the latter part

 

Fic. 103, THREE-SPINED STICKLEBACK (GASTEROSTEUS ACULEATUS).

of April, and placed in an aquarium which is well stocked
with growing plants and which contains a great quantity of
minute animal life, such as water-fleas and cyclops. These
insects will serve as food for the young Sticklebacks. Of
course, no other fish but Sticklebacks should be placed in the
tank. Should there, however, be other piscine occupants of
the aquarium, they would be almost certain to lead a short
and unmerry life. If the tank which is to be set apart for
these nest-building little fish be of a fair size, two males and
about eight females may be introduced. The former during the
courting season are distinguished by their crimson breasts and
emerald-green eyes. Almost immediately after entering their
new home, each little male will choose for himself a corner or
some other part of the aquarium. They will then, though at the
same time guarding the chosen spots with the greatest courage
FISHES. 145

 

and alacrity, hunt for suitable materials for the construction
of their nests. These materials consist of small vegetable fibres
and other substances of the like kind. The nests, when com-
pleted, vary somewhat in shape, but they may be described as
rather like a hedge-sparrow’s nest, having a top and a hole in
the side for a door. They have also been occasionally likened
to a flattened hay-cock, a tiny barrel, or a lady’s muff. They
are generally about liin. in length. The building materials
are kept together by a kind of mucus or cement, which comes
from the fish as they draw their bodies over and about the
nest. Sometimes if the fibres and other substances are not
heavy enough to keep in their proper positions until the
cementing operation is completed, the clever little nest-builders
will weight them down with sand or minute particles of gravel,
which they will collect in and discharge from their mouths.
Such are the energy and skill of the little fish that the nests
are frequently finished within a few hours. Immediately they
are completed, the fish set out in search of wives. And should
these gaily-coloured courtiers meet one another while on this
errand there is sure to be a fight, especially if they happen to
make up their minds to pay their respects to the same lady
Stickleback. As they quickly make preparations for the
encounter their colours grow more brilliant than ever, while
the coveted little female retires demurely to one side and
becomes a silent, though not an uninterested, witness of the
battle. The fish charge furiously at one another, and then,
if no great harm has been done, continue to swim round and
round, trying to bite with their strong mouths or to pierce
each other with their sharp lateral or dorsal spines. So the
fight goes on until one is obliged to give in. The poor defeated
fish—one feels so sorry for him—loses at once his gallant
bearing, and swims away with quickly-fading colours, while the
conqueror becomes, if possible, more gorgeous than ever as he
claims the gentle spectator of the fray as his lawful prize.
With all the address of which he is capable he persuades her
to inspect the little nest which he has built. He then pressingly
invites her to enter the door, in order that she may lay her
eggs within. In a few minutes the eggs are laid, and the fish,
L
146 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

instead of backing out by the way she entered, makes for herself
a door in the opposite side of the nest. The eggs just deposited,
only a few in number, are of a yellowish-pink colour, and
about the size of a German rape-seed. A slight current of
water now sets in between the two doors of the nest, which is
of great benefit to the ova inside. The fickle little male, after
entering the nest himself, at once discards his bride, and in a
few hours sets out to find and win another. In this way the
nest is visited by several female Sticklebacks until the necessary
number of eggs has been laid. The male now becomes more
vigilant than ever, and jealously guards the nest and spawn,
furiously attacking any other inhabitant of the tank that may
venture too near. The little fish spends the greater portion
of his time in re-arranging the eggs, and in fanning them with
his fins as he balances himself obliquely before a door of the
nest. After a little while the young fish may be seen moving
slightly within the eggs—that is, supposing they are closely
examined—and in about a month (according to the temperature
of the water) from the time they are deposited, the fry are
hatched. At first they are so small and transparent that it is
not an easy matter to see them. With the appearance of his
offspring, the male Stickleback’s cares seem to increase, and
though he worked so hard during the incubation of the ova,
he has to work much harder now; for not only has he to guard
his little ones from the attacks of his discarded wives and other
fish, but he has to carefully confine them entirely to the nest.
Should they, however, elude his vigilance for a moment, and
escape from the nursery, they are either quickly driven back
or are seized in their protector’s mouth and forcibly returned.
Old Sticklebacks are exceedingly fond of Stickleback fry, and
should the father of the little ones die or be taken away, every
other Stickleback in the aquarium will immediately act the
part of cannibals, and much enjoy the acting.

The eggs of Sticklebacks are very large in proportion to
the size of the fish which lay them; and in comparison with
the quantities of eggs deposited by many other fish they are
very few in number. As the eggs are so large, so plainly
seen, and such tempting food to fish generally and even to
FISHES. 147

 

the Sticklebacks themselves, they must be protected in some
way or other. For this purpose, therefore, the male Stickle-
backs are instinctively taught to build nests and to guard
their eggs and little ones to the utmost of their powers.
Indeed, so great is the strain of the building, the necessary
fighting, the incubation of the ova, and the nursing of the
fry, that the plucky little fellows often leave off living at the
end of their labours. Under no circumstances can the Stickle-
back be described as a long-lived fish: he rarely attains a
greater age than three years—oftener it is much less, especially
in an aquarium.

In a state of nature these fish are exceedingly destructive
to the fry of other fish. For instance, it has been recorded
(I believe, by Dr. Giinther) that one of these Sticklebacks,
while in a tank, devoured seventy-four young dace, each about
fin. long, in five hours. Two days afterwards the same
little glutton ate sixty-two more, and then seemed quite ready
to continue his feast. During this huge gastronomic feat this
Stickleback was under close observation.

The natural food of the Stickleback is small aquatic insects,
water-worms, eggs and fry of fish. In captivity he may be
fed upon tiny portions of worm and pieces of meat. (Before
worms are cut up they should be killed by dashing them down
upon the ground or pavement. Their death then must be
quite painless.) Sticklebacks soon become very tame, and are
nearly always bold enough to charge one’s finger or one’s
pencil if placed too near the jealously-guarded nest. They
are intelligent and amusing little fish, but I venture to repeat
they should not be kept in confinement unless they can be
provided with an aquarium entirely to themselves. Under any
other circumstances they will be a source of annoyance and loss
to their owner, and of great discomfort and even misery to
their companions.

The Stickleback has three strong and sharp spines on the
middle of his back in place of the usual dorsal fin. There is
a fin behind the spines. The body is rather long and com-
pressed ; it is without scales, but is more or less protected on
the sides by small plates. The ventral fins have one strong

L2
148 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

spine each, but no other rays. The anal fin is opposite the
dorsal fin, and is about the same shape and size. The caudal
fin is slightly convex. The male fish lose their brilliant colours
when the breeding season is over. The general colour of
Sticklebacks varies greatly according to the condition of the
water in which they live. I have found specimens of them
almost black. -The Three-spined Stickleback is from 2in. to
3in. long.

The Ten-spined Stickleback, or Nine-spined Stickleback
(Gasterosteus pungitius) (Fig. 104) is one of the smallest of
British fishes, hardly ever exceeding 2in. in length. It is often
found in brackish water, and will live in either a fresh or
a salt-water aquarium. This fish also builds a nest, but affixes
it to aquatic plants rather than building it upon the gravel

 

Fig. 104. TEN-SPINED STICKLEBACK (GASTEROSTEUS PUNGITIUS).

at the bottom of the water. The nest in shape is very like
a barrel, and is about lin. long. The male fish during the
breeding season, instead of becoming crimson, golden, and
green, assumes a “velvety-black.” The habits and character
of the Nine-spined Stickleback are very like those of the
Three-spined. The fish has nine spines in front of the dorsal
fin: I have never found one with ten spines. The spines are
small and fine. It is not so stoutly built as the Three-spined
Stickleback, nor is its body protected by plates, but is quite
smooth. The fleshy part of the tail is very slender. The
ventral fins each consist of one bony spine and no other rays.
The caudal fin is slightly convex.

The Common or Yellow Trout (Salmo fario) is a very
beautiful and popular fish, and one that will live in an
aquarium. The tank in which it is kept should be of rather
FISHES, 149

 

large dimensions, and ought to present a great surface of
water in proportion to its size; it must also contain a quantity
of growing aquatic plants. But Trout, however well they may
be cared for, and however suitably the aquarium in which they
are confined may be constructed, will lose a great deal of the
beauty and brilliancy of their colouring. There are, perhaps,
no fish whose colouring and form are influenced so much by
food and locality as Trout. For instance, it has been said
that “the Trout of Lynn Ogwin, almost the whole bottom of
which is formed of grass, have, when first caught, a brilliant
emerald gloss over their golden and yellow tints.” And if the
bottom of the water in which Trout live is black, the fish will
be very dark. Sometimes, when the same lake or river varies
in character as to the bottom soil, the Trout taken from the
same water, but from different parts of it, will also vary in
colour. That it does not take long for a Trout to change the
shading of his colouring, may be easily proved by placing a
captured fish for a few minutes only in a large white basin of
water, and he will be seen to grow pale under the influence of
the colour with which he is surrounded. However, I believe
that any fish will alter the shading of its colours under similar
circumstances. I can remember my astonishment when I first
saw an instance of this chameleon-like power on the part of
fish. A good many years ago I had asked a Thames profes-
sional fisherman to net me some gudgeon for an aquarium.
A day or two after I had made the request he brought me
the gudgeon, but more than my tank could conveniently hold.
However, not wishing to send them back, in case some of
those which I had retained for the aquarium should die, I
placed the surplus fish (for the time being) in a large sponge
bath. There they remained for more than a week, and at
the end of that time they had become almost white. Since
then I have often had occasion to keep fish temporarily in a
bath (not half a bad receptacle for them), and have not failed
to notice the great influence which the white interior has had
upon the colouring of the different species of fish—a black
bass, for instance, becoming in a day or two anything but
a black bass in appearance. ,
150 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Though a Trout will live fairly well in the stagnant water
of a well-formed, well-arranged, and well-cared-for aquarium,
it will of course live better in a tank which has the advan-
tage of a continually-flowing fountain. Care must be taken,
however, that the water which comes from the fountain is
of a suitable character: otherwise it would be wiser to have
no fountain at all.

The natural food of the Trout is larve of insects, aquatic
insects, flies, fresh-water shrimps, young snails, worms, min-
nows, ova and fry of fish. It has been often seen to eat
its own ova, soon after it has deposited them. In confinement
it may be fed upon minnows, worms, many kinds of aquatic
insects, flies, and especially fresh-water shrimps. These last
form one of the very best foods, making the flesh of the
fish of the much-desired pink colour; they may be bred for
it according to directions which will be given in another
chapter. The quantity of minnows which a tame Trout
(about 7in. long) of mine ate was surprising.

Trout 3in. to 5in. in length are of a suitable size for the
aquarium. Fish of such dimensions may be either taken
with a net or caught with fly or worm.

Trout fed upon suitable food will grow from Ib. to 10]b. in
weight within four or five years. As the Trout is so subject,
owing to locality and food, to considerable variety of both
form and colour, it is somewhat difficult to describe. How-
ever, as a rule, it may be said that its body is rather long
and compressed at the sides, its head thick, its muzzle
wide and blunt, and its eyes large. The upper part of its
body is of an olive-green colour, the sides are lighter in
shade. The under-part is often of a yellowish-white. Its back
and sides are nearly always (more or less) beautifully spotted
with red. There are two dorsal fins, which are far apart;
the first has soft rays, and the second, which is much
smaller, is without rays, and adipose. The front dorsal
and caudal fins are spotted with black. The other fins are
yellowish and edged with black.

Charr (Salmo alpinus) are nearly always found in the
deepest part of large lakes, excepting during the breeding
FISHES, 151

 

season, when they ascend the rivers and streams to spawn.
Some of the Charr spawn during February, others during
autumn. A few years ago, while going down one of the
London streets, I saw in an aquarium-dealer’s shop some very
beautiful little fish in a large tank. On stopping and asking
what they were, I was told that they were Charr. As the
fish were new to me, I bought two of them. When I got
home I put them in a large and rather deep tank, which was
well stocked with growing weeds,.and there they lived quite
healthily, and apparently perfectly happily, for nearly two
years. At the end of this time I changed my house, and
during the trouble and inconvenience of moving, the Charr
and other fish were placed, rather early on the day of
“flitting,” in a large disused aquarium, which had been carried
into the garden of the new house. Late in the evening I
went with a lantern to catch the fish and put them in a tank
inside, but in my hurry and in the darkness I caught all the
fish but the Charr. When next I saw them they were frozen
up in a mass of ice. These were the only Charr I ever kept
in confinement, and they might, I think, have been alive now
but for my carelessness. During the time I had them they
fed upon the eggs and fry of water-snails, small aquatic
insects, and occasionally vermicelli. They were always very
lively and active.

Charr, like trout, vary in form and colour with the locality.
It has been said that in some lakes they are nearly as round
as eels, while in others they are as flat as herrings. The chief
difference between the Charr and the trout is that the under-
part of the body of the former, during the breeding season,
acquires an orange or bright red tinge; and that on the
central bone in the roof of the mouth of the Charr, called the
vomer or vomerine bone, there are only a few teeth, while
the trout has two complete rows. The Charr has reached
2lb. in weight, but generally it is not more than from lb.
to $lb.

There have been more extraordinary stories told concerning
the Pike (Hsowx luctus) (Fig. 105) than any other fish; and any-
one who would believe them all must possess a power of
152 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA,

 

“taking in,” as the schoolboy would say, equal to that of the
fresh-water shark himself.

Small Pike or Pickerel can easily be kept in an aquarium,
but of course it is almost unnecessary to say that they should
have no companions. Even two Pike, especially if one were much
bigger than the other, would not be safe together. I have seen
it seriously stated that Pike will not touch tench, perch, or
gold-fish. And the reasons given for the Pike’s very unusual
reluctance to dine upon his fellow-fish are, that he is never
ungrateful enough to forget that the tench is the curer of all
the ills the piscine tribe is heir to; that he dare not attempt
to swallow the perch and his formidable “fixed bayonets”; and
that the gold-fish is quite safe because of his colour. But I

 

Fic. 105. PIKE (ESOX LUCTUS).

am quite sure that if a hungry Pike had these three fish for
his companions in an aquarium, it would not be very long
before he and his friends became so closely acquainted as to
arrive at a state of perfect unity. Most fishermen know quite
well that the Pike is often ready to take both perch and tench;
and as for the gold-fish, there can be for Pike no more deadly
bait. There are, however, circumstances under which, with
care, Pike may be allowed companions while in confinement.
The circumstances are these: If when a young Pike is first
caught he is placed in an aquarium with other small fish also
just caught, he seems to look upon them as companions of his
misfortune, and will not touch them, at any rate for some days.
Directly he begins to get very hungry, a strange fish should
be placed in the tank, and he will, if the owner will stand far
back, most likely immediately pick this one out from the rest
FISHES. 153

 

and devour it. If this manner of feeding is carefully continued,
never allowing the’ Pike to become very hungry, his companions
will be safe. I have thus kept a Pike among several young
roach and perch. A friend of mine tells me that he has seen
in the aquarium at Kensington a Pike living peaceably among
young roach, and only feeding upon those small fish which
are specially introduced for his food.

The Pike soon becomes very tame, and will learn to know
the tank in which his food is kept and the net with which it
is caught. Directly the net is taken in his owner’s hands a
curious hungry gleam is seen in his eye, but he himself remains
almost motionless. It is very interesting to watch this gleam
appear as the fish’s master takes the net, and to see it as
quickly disappear if he should put it down unused. The Pike
will not be very long in confinement before he will allow him-
self to be touched with a pencil or even a finger.

Pike, as everyone knows, are tremendous eaters. They are
well described as omnivorous, for they will—some of them—
take anything, e.g., the hand of a boy when bathing, a mule’s
nose, or a swan’s head. Mr. Jesse is reported to have said
that eight Pike, about 5lb. each, in three weeks consumed 800
gudgeon. A clerical friend of mine told me that on one occa-
sion when he arrived at some water where he was going to fish
for Pike, he found one jumping about upon the bank. He
immediately secured it, and when he examined it he found that
it weighed 17lb., and that it contained within its stomach a
water-vole and a moorhen. The fish is supposed to have jumped
upon the bank while capturing the bird, and had not time to
get back again to the water before he was caught.

The growth of Pike, of course, greatly depends upon the
amount and quality of the food they are able to obtain. Mr.
Cholmondeley Pennell, in the “Badminton Library,” quotes a
letter, published in the Field, in which it is said that “Mr.
Kinsey, of Melbourne (Derbyshire), put a Pike into a well when
a few inches long. Food was given to it for several years, but
it grew very slowly, and at last reached 3lb. It lived fourteen
years, and latterly became very tame—so much so as to take
food from the hand.” Another Pike kept in confinement in

2
154 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the Zoological Gardens, Regent’s Park, is said to have only
increased 14lb. in ten years. On the other hand, where Pike
have been better fed, they have been known to increase in
weight as much as 4lb. every year until they arrive at maturity,
when they generally begin to get lighter.

Pike commence to spawn when about three years old, and
deposit their ova during March and May among the aquatic
plants growing in those streams and ditches which they
are able to ascend. During the breeding season these fish are
generally seen in pairs. The young are hatched in about a
month. The late Mr. Frank Buckland found in a fish which
weighed 32lb., and which measured 3ft. 8in. in length, no less
than 595,200 eggs.

When at liberty Pike will feed upon almost anything
which they find alive in the water, providing that it is not
altogether too big. They will not, however, swallow a toad.
. Sometimes they will take fish nearly as large as themselves,
devouring as much of their prey at one meal as they can,
and trusting to their great powers of digestion to be able
to finish it at another; their mouths, for the time, being
turned into larders. The principal food of Pike, how-
ever, is frogs and fish of all kinds. In captivity these fish
may be fed upon minnows and lob-worms. I have never
been able to induce any of my tame Pike to eat dead fish
or raw meat.

Pike, small enough for the aquarium, may be caught either
in a net, or by fishing for them with a large worm placed
upon a single hook. Pike can be separated from other fish
in the same aquarium by means of the glass division already
recommended for perch (pp. 135-6): and black bass.

The “Water-wolf,” as this fish is well called, is really very
handsome. It has a long and rather compressed body,
uniform in depth from just behind the eyes to the com-
mencement of the dorsal fin, when it suddenly becomes much
narrower. The scales are small, and the lateral line is not
very distinct. The dorsal fin is placed very far back, and
just over the anal fin. The caudal fin is broad, strong, and
rather deeply forked; the pectoral and the ventral fins are
FISHES. 155

 

small. The head is broad, long, and depressed. The jaws are
capable of great distension; the upper one being “duck-billed,”
and the lower projecting. The mouth contains numerous
strong and very sharp teeth, all pointing backwards. The
colour of the head and back is olive-brown. The sides are
lighter in shade, and are beautifully mottled with green and
yellow. The under-part of the body is silvery-white. The
dorsal, caudal, and anal fins are dark brown, the pectoral and
ventral fins being of a lighter brown. The former three fins
are blotched and spotted with dark green. Trout and Pike
are subject to a parasite (Argulus foliaceus).

There are few fish, with the exception, perhaps, of the
lampern, which will give less trouble in an aquarium than
the Sharp-nosed or Common
Hel (Anguilla vulgaris) (Fig.
106). Its movements when
swimming are exceedingly
graceful, and its wants are
few and supplied without
difficulty. The only draw-
backs to its presence in an Fic. 106, SHARP-NOSED EEL
ordinarily-arranged tank are Sere eH OeGh
its readiness to devour, if it
be of any size, very small fish, and a disposition to disarrange
a little of the sand and gravel at the bottom of the water.

The Eel should be procured when very small—about 5in.
long is a suitable size for an aquarium. Fels of so short
a length, however, are not often taken with a hook, and,
besides, an Eel caught in this way is likely to be more or
less injured. I have often caught Elvers (as young Hels are
called) by passing, during autumn, a hand-net along the
weedy edges of slowly-running streams. Not seldom at
the same haul have I secured along with Elvers, fry of perch
and roach.

In the autumn, adult Hels migrate towards the mouths
of those rivers in which they live. During this migration
they are supposed to spawn: very little, however, is known
of their spawning. Not only do Eels migrate towards the

 
156 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

mouths of rivers, but also from one piece of water to
another. They are able to take these overland journeys by
reason of their well-known power of living, without ill-effect
to themselves, for a long time out of water, and because,
owing to their snake-like form, they can travel at a con-
siderable pace along dew-covered grass. Some time ago I
saw an Eel, about 18in. long, which had been dug up by
a man who was making a surface-drain across a field. It
was not found in water, but in moist clay. It was very
lively. The nearest stream was about 50yds. away from the
spot where it was discovered.

Eels are very fond of burying all their bodies, with the
exception of their heads, in the soft mud at the bottom of
the water. They have been known to live twenty or thirty years
in an aquarium, and they soon become tame enough to take food
from the fingers. During winter, especially if their tank is
in a cold room, they are very likely to pass a great portion
of their time in a state of torpidity—at any rate, they will
take hardly any food; but when the weather becomes warm
they will make up for lost time by becoming rather greedy,
readily devouring worms, and if the Hels are of any size, small
minnows, roach, and the like. If well fed they grow quickly.

An Eel is exceedingly interesting in many ways. For
instance, there is the remarkable contrivance by which it is
enabled to keep its gills moist during the time it is out of
water: Each gill is inclosed in a kind of pouch or bag, and
within these bags or pouches the fish can retain water for
the purpose of moistening its gills during its overland journey-
ings. Then, again, as the fish often live under stones, mud,
and sand, its eyes must be protected in some way, so it is
provided with an arrangement which may be likened to a pair
of spectacles; and again, some people are said to carry their
hearts in their pockets, but an Hel carries one in its tail,
called a lymphatic heart, the pulsation of which may be seen
under a microscope. Eels can be killed by striking them
upon their tails. As they are able to ascend perpendicular
surfaces, the aquarium in which they are confined should be
securely covered.
FISHES. 157

 

The Hel in shape is very like a snake. The scales are small
and embedded in the skin. It has no ventral fins, but it
possesses pectorals. The dorsal, caudal, and anal fins are
joined together, the dorsal one commencing some distance
behind the pectorals. The eyes are beautiful. The body is
very slimy, and beneath
varies in colour from
silvery-white to golden.

The Broad-nosed Hel
(Anguilla  latirostris)
(Fig. 107) is almost as
common as his Sharp-
nosed relative. It is dis-
tinguished from the
latter by its broad head,

Fig. 107. BROAD-NOSED EEL blunt nose, thick skin,
(ANGUILLA LATIROSTRIS). and its proportionately
thicker and slimier body.

The Snig Hel (Anguilla mediorostris) (Fig. 108) is said to
be common in Hampshire. Its nose is neither blunt nor
sharp. It does not grow so heavy as the common Eel, but
it is described as being very
delicious eating. Unlike its
relatives, it feeds during
the day. All Eels, however,
are occasionally day-feeders,
but the Snig Hel is espe-
cially so. The three dif-
ferent species of Hel should ( ee Ee ee ee a
be treated alike in the ;
aquarium.

The Lampern, or River Lamprey (Petromyzon fluviatilis)
(Fig. 109), is a curious little fish, though by no means
beautiful, and has much attraction for the aquarium-keeper,
for it has a very remarkable structure, it gives no trouble,
and is very graceful while in motion. The Lampern is found
in many of the rivers and streams of England, especially in
the Severn, Trent, and Thames. When the water is quite clear

 

 
158 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

these fish can often be seen clinging in masses with their
leech-like mouths to stones, while the rest of their bodies
waves up and down with the current. The Lamprey is shaped
somewhat similar to an eel, being round for about two-thirds
the length of its body, when it gradually flattens towards
the tail.

The mouth of this fish is very curious, and something like
that of a leech; when open it has been well described as
“circular and terminal, so that the fish appears as if the
head had been cut off”? The lips are fleshy. This mouth,
and these lips, and a piston-like tongue, form a kind of
powerful sucker, by which the fish is able to cling firmly to
stones, rocks, and the like. On each side of the head there
are seven openings in a horizontal line which lead to an equal
number of bronchial cells or gills. When the fish is not

 

 

Fic. 109. LAMPERN, OR RIVER LAMPREY (PETROMYZON FLUVIATILIS).

clinging to anything with its mouth, water passes through
the mouth to the gills; but when the Lampern is adhering
to a stone, the water, being unable to enter by the mouth,
passes to the gills through these openings in each side of
the head. There is a small aperture or hole in the middle of
the back of the head just in front of the.eyes: this is a
nostril, and water does not pass through it (as some writers
say) to the gills when the mouth is fixed to any foreign body.
Such a passage of water is impossible, as there is no direct
communication between the nostril and the gills. The mouth
is well provided with teeth. There are neither pectoral nor
ventral fins: there are caudal and dorsal fins of a certain
kind, but as they have no rays proper they can hardly be
called true fins. The Lampern swims with a lateral undu-
latory motion. Where the streams are very rapid, it frequently
rests by anchoring itself with its mouth to a stone. When
FISHES. 159

 

wishing to spawn, this fish scoops a shallow hole at the
bottom of the water, about 15in. or 16in. in diameter, for
the reception of its eggs. The Lamprey removes the stones
by fixing itself to them by the help of its suctorial mouth,
and then swimming backwards down the stream, drops them
at some distance from the spot chosen for the ova.

It has been said that the Lampern feeds not only upon
dead fish, but also upon living ones: the latter, it is recorded,
have frequently been caught showing the marking of the
rasping of the Lampern’s teeth. However, none of the
Lampreys which I have from time to time kept in aquaria
have attacked any of the fish which were confined with them—
at least, so far as I know. Indeed,I have found that “Seven
Byes,” as he is sometimes called, is very peaceful, spending
most of his time under the sand and gravel. He generally
chooses the same spot as his lair, and when he is wanted
he can be roused by a gentle probing with a stick. He
often attaches his suctorial mouth to the glass sides of the
aquarium, thus forming a very interesting object. As he
can easily climb by the help of his mouth, the tank in
which he is confined must be covered. The natural food of
the Lampern is said to be aquatic insects, worms, and dead
and live fish.

The fresh-water Lamprey is from 6in. to 10in. in length,
and is of a dark olive-brown on the upper part of its body,
and silvery beneath. This fish can be caught in a hand-net
when seen in masses, as already described, or when making
its way alone up the stream. I have also taken it by passing
the hand-net along the overhanging sides of the stream or
river.

There are some very beautiful little fish called Paradise
Fish (Osphromenus Olfax*), which are in every way suitable for
the aquarium. They were taken from a brook near Canton,
China, and brought to France by M. Simon, who was French
consul at Ningpo. These fish, up to the time of their intro-
duction into Europe in 1869, were said to be unknown to

 

* I am indebted to Mr. R. A. R. Bennett, author of ‘“‘ Marine Aquaria ”
(London: L. Upcott Gill), for the scientific name of this fish.
160 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

naturalists. M. Simon placed them in the charge of M.
Carbonnier, under whose care they soon began to spawn. After
the spawning, the male fish ejected bubbles from his mouth
which did not break when on the surface of the water. He
then, much to M. Carbonnier’s astonishment, began to swallow
the eggs, which he afterwards discharged under the shelter
of the bubbles. The female fish was then driven by the male
from the neighbourhood of the bubbles and ova, over which
the latter fish kept a vigilant watch. In about three days the
young fish were hatched, and soon began to feed upon
cyclops, water-fleas, and the like. The Paradise Fish will
breed more than once in the year if the water is kept of a
suitable temperature. Mr. Frank Buckland, who had a pair

 

Fic. 110. PARADISE FISH

of these fish given to him, declared that they were certainly
the most beautiful little fish he ever saw. The scales glisten
with all the colours of the rainbow. Their fins are most
extraordinary: the dorsal fin extends from near the back of
the head quite to the caudal fin (Fig. 110); the anal fin is as
long as the dorsal. Both fins have bony rays, which gradually
increase in height from the commencement of the fin, the last
ray in each fin extending to the extremities of the caudal fin.
The caudal fin is large and forked, and also consists of bony
rays; these rays have sharp points. The ventral fins
each have a few short bony rays and one exceedingly long
FISHES. 161

 

and apparently strong ray. The pectoral fins have soft rays;
the male fish, when making love to the female, spreads out
his extraordinary fins, often in doing so bending himself
almost into a circle. While in confinement, these fish should
be kept rather warm and fed upon small aquatic insects.
Their aquarium ought to be well stocked with water-plants.

Mr. Frank Buckland, speaking of Paradise Fish, says:
“They would, I feel convinced, do exceedingly well in this
country, not, of course, as fish to turn out, but as aquarium or
—to coin a phrase—hot-house fish. Should any lady take a
fancy to looking after these fish—keeping them in a warm
room, feeding them regularly, and seeing that the water is
properly managed—they would, I am convinced, become
acclimatised in this country. It has been proved they will
breed in France—why not, therefore, in England ?”
CHAPTER IX.

‘SNAILS AND LIMPETS.

NYONE who kept an aquarium or aquaria just
simply for the sake of the fresh-water molluscs
would be amply rewarded for his trouble by the
pleasure and instruction with which they would provide him.

The Mollusca (mollis, “soft”) form one of the sub-divisions
of the Animal Kingdom whose members are characterised--by
having soft skins and fleshy
bodies, but are without bones
or joints. Molluscs are either
naked or are covered with a
shell of one or two valves, but
with some of the latter only
we have to do in this chapter.
The shell is composed of
carbonate of lime and animal
matter, which is secreted by
the skin or mantle of the
creature.

The Mollusca are divided into the Encephalous (possessing
a head) and the Acephalous (without a head). In the former
division are placed the Gasteropoda (belly-footed), or Univalves,
&c., and in the latter the Conchifera (shell-bearing), or Bivalv
The fresh-water Univalves are commonly called Snails, and
the fresh-water Bivalves, Mussels. Both the snails and mussels

 
 

 

Fig. 111. PLANORBIS CORNEUS.
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 163

 

are exceedingly interesting in the aquarium. The forms,
structures, and habits of the Univalves especially are very
various. For example:

1. The shells of some snails are flat-coiled, like the Planorbis
corneus (Fig. 111), while those of others are oval-oblong, like

 

Fic. 112, LIMNA STAGNALIS.

the Limnea stagnalis (Fig. 112), or ear-shaped at the opening,
like Limneea auricularia (Fig. 118).

2. Some snails’ shells are as much as lin. in length, while
those of others are as small as a big pin’s head.

 

Fig. 113. LIMNZA AURICULARIA,

3. Some snails are able to close the aperture of their shells
with an operculum, and others, during an enforced absence
from water, with an epiphragm.

4. Some snails are either male or female; others are both
male and female; others again, when young, have the sexes

M 2
164 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

distinct, but as they grow older, each individual becomes both
male and female.

5. Some snails are oviparous, and others ovoviviparous (the
eggs being hatched within the oviduct of the parent).

6. Some snails are pulmobranchiate (possessors of lung-like
branchie for breathing the atmospheric air), and others are
pectini-branchiate (possessors of comb-like branchiz, adapted
for respiration beneath the water).

7. Some snails have their eyes placed upon short footstalks
at the base of their tentacles, while others have theirs sessile
there. The tentacles of all the species are situated above
the mouth, and are used for touching, and perhaps also for
smelling.

The oviparous animals, according to their different species,
deposit their ova in masses, which are in shape either
cylindrical or elliptical, or orbicular or round. The eggs in
some of the capsules are as few as from three to six;
while in others they are as many as from 80 to 130. They
are affixed either to stones, or to leaves or stalks of water-
plants, or sometimes to the shells of one another. The eggs
are hatched, according to the different species, in from ten
to about twenty-six days.

Many water-snails, perhaps nearly all, have the power
of “spinning” a kind of gelatinous thread by means of
which they are able to ascend or descend in the water. Mr.
G. Sherriff Tye, the writer of an interesting article on “ Mol-
luscan Threads,” which was published in Science Gossip
for March, 1874, in speaking of the habit of the Physa
hypnorum as a “thread-spinner” says: “One of the most
beautiful sights in molluscan economy is to see these little
‘golden pippins’ gliding through the water by no visible
means; and when they fight, to see them twist and twit,
performing such quick and curious evolutions, while seemingly
floating in mid-water, is astonishing, even to the patient
student of Nature’s wonders.” These threads are anchored
to the surface of the water in a curious way, viz., “a
minute concavity at the upper end acts like a small boat of
air, and thus sustains the thread.”
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 165

 

As the tastes of the various species of Mollusca differ,
some species preferring to eat the healthy growing plants,
others the decaying, others confervoid growth, and a few
delighting to partake of a little animal food as a relish to their
vegetable, it will readily be seen that while some water-
snails are useful in the tank, others are injurious there,
inasmuch as they will be likely to destroy or hurt the weeds
which are so necessary to the welfare of the aquarium.
Those snails which prefer to feed either upon decaying
vegetation or upon conferve are, of course, the most suitable
for the ordinary tank. The Univalve Molluscs are valuable
in the aquarium, not only from their readiness to act as
scavengers and to clear away the confervoid growth which
both checks the growth of the plants and interferes with
the transparency of the glass, but also because their eggs
and fry provide the fish with about the best of foods. How-
ever, it must not be supposed that they will mow away the
alge from the sides of the aquarium with the precision
with which labourers cut down hay in the fields. Their work
must occasionally be supplemented with the gentle rubbing
of a bit of sponge tied to a short cane, or, what perhaps is
better, a piece of coarse brown paper so fastened. Snails can
keep the glass perfectly clean, but it is not wise, for the sake
of the plants, to have so many in the aquarium as to force
them to do this. I once placed a few half-grown snails
(Limnea stagnalis) in a very small aquarium, the sides of
which were so covered with conferve that nothing could be
seen through them, and by the end of five or six days the
glass was as clear as if it had been polished with a cloth.
The snails had nothing else but the conferve to eat.

It is an interesting sight to see a snail at work upon the
transparent sides of an aquarium. The flat portion of the
mollusc, which is pressed against the glass, is called the foot
or disc, and the animal progresses by alternately expanding
and contracting this foot or disc. The mouth of the snail will
be continually opening and shutting, and from the lower part
of it a curious yellowish-grey band will be seen, between each
opening and shutting, to come forward and scrape the glass.

hy
166 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

This band is known as the lingual ribbon or toothed tongue.
The lingual ribbon is not only very interesting, especially under
the microscope, but it is also useful in helping to determine
the genera of various individuals. Some snails have a great
number of teeth. The teeth are arranged on the lingual ribbon
in rows, which vary in number and order according to different
genera.

Snails, when kept in confinement, frequently deposit their
eggs upon the transparent sides of the tank, thus giving the
aquarium-keeper an opportunity, by the help of a magnifying
glass, of watching the development of the fry. Soon after the
eggs are laid, a small speck may be seen close to the side of
each egg; as this speck grows it will gradually work its way
into the middle of the egg, and then it continues to increase
in size and in power of movement, until it breaks the egg-sac,
and becomes free. When the young snails are hatched in an
ordinary aquarium they generally fall victims to some of the
watchful fish. Should it be wished, however, to rear the snails,
it will be necessary to transfer the eggs to a small and shallow
aquarium well stocked with growing weeds and conferve, and
where there are no fish or any other visible animals. This
may easily be done by removing those portions of weed or
pieces of stone upon which the ova have been deposited. The
flat floating leaves and long stalks of the Cape Fragrant Water
Lily seem to have great attractions for the snail which is
desirous of depositing eggs.

When the ova are hatched and the fry have grown sufficiently
—say so large that they can be easily picked off the plants
with the finger and thumb—they may be returned to the
aquarium. Snails grow slowly, and it is sometimes about two
years before they arrive at maturity. As the young snail
grows it enlarges its shell according to its wants. This is
done by adding a small portion of mucous secretion to the
edge of the shell, and when the secretion is dry it is followed
by some more, but this time it is mixed with carbonate of
lime. The first secretion makes what is called the epidermis
of the shell, while the second forms the shell itself. These
additions go on from time to time until the animal is full-
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 167

 

grown. Should any portion of the shell be injured by a
blow or the like, the animal, if not too much hurt, will repair
the broken part in the same way that it formed the rest of
the shell. These repairs can be plainly seen, for they are
lacking in colour and in uniformity of execution. The colour-
ing of the shell is caused by the secretion of particular
glands in the mantle or skin. The snails obtain the chalky
matter for the formation of their shells from the food they
eat, and as aquatic plants are not rich in lime, fresh-water
Mollusca have therefore thin shells.

Certain snails are
very irritable, and
when touched or
startled in any way
some will let go their
hold and fall to the
bottom of the water,
while others will dis-
charge a coloured
liquid. For instance,
under such  circum-
stances the Planorbis
corneus (Fig. 111) will
frequently emit red
liquid, and the Limnea
stagnalis (Fig. 112)

ai
Bowen coe seems

 

: * Fig. 114. ENLARGED OUTLINE OF A FRESH-
occasionally violet. WATER SNAIL. A, Apex; B, Whorls;
Snails are sometimes C, Suture; D, Spire; E, Body-Whorl ;
7 ‘ F, Periphery; G, Inner Lip; H, Outer

found with the apices Lip; I, Operculum.

of their shells eaten

away. The erosion is apparently caused by the action of
carbonic-acid gas, which is frequently present in consider-
able quantities in stagnant water owing to the presence of
decaying vegetable and animal matter. This gas is de-
structive to lime. The rest of the shell is protected by the
epidermis; but on the apex, which was formed when the
animal was very young, the epidermis is so thin that it is
frequently hardly any protection at all.
168 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

It is necessary to take care that no dead snails remain in
the aquarium, or they will quickly corrupt the water.

Fig. 114 will perhaps be useful to some readers in helping
them to understand the descriptions of the various snails
suitable for the fresh-water aquarium which will be given.

The pectinibranchiate (possessors of comb-like gills, adapted
for breathing beneath the surface of the water) fresh-water
snails of Britain are divided into three families, viz.: (1)
Neritide, (2) Paludinide, (3) Valvatide.

Neritina fluviatilis is the only representative we have of the
family Neritide. It inhabits running streams. It will not
live long in confinement, and it is only mentioned here in the
hope that the assertion of its unsuitability for the aquarium
will save some individuals of this species much unhappiness,
and their captors not a little disappointment.

The following short description of this mollusc may help
those who do not know it to identify it: The body of the
animal is of a dirty-white colour, spotted with black; head
almost black; tentacles long, slightly transparent, and
streaked with black; eyes large and black, and placed on
short pedicels at the base of the tentacles; shell nearly gin.
long, of a yellowish-brown colour, marked with spots of white,
brown, purple, or pink; there are three whorls, the last very
large in proportion to the rest; spire very short; sutures
rather deep; operculum half-moon shaped, and yellowish, with
an orange border; the shells are often covered with some
chalky substance. These snails generally deposit their eggs
upon the shells of one another.

All the members of the family Paludinide (dwellers in
marshy places) possess an operculum, and, each individual is
either male or female.

Paludina contecta (whose specific name implies that it is
operculate) is one of the handsomest of the British fresh-
water snails. It is found in ponds, canals, lakes, and slow-
running rivers in many parts of England, but especially in
the South. It is an irritable animal, falling from the stones
and plants to which it may be adhering as soon as it is
touched or startled. The snail is ovoviviparous, the eggs
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 169

 

being hatched within the oviduct of the mother, and the fry
are retained there, sometimes for at least two months, until
they are able to take some care of themselves. The young are
not excluded from the parental shell all at once, but gradually.
Sometimes only two or three are sent out into the watery
world around them in the course of a day or longer. These
fry, frequently numbering as many as thirty, have at first
rows of bristles or cilia upon their shells, which after a time
disappear and are replaced by the brown bands which mark
the full-grown snail. P. contecta has long and elegant
tentacles, which diverge somewhat. The eyes, which are
round and black, and rather large, are situated upon short
pedicels on the outer bases of the tentacles. The colour of
the body varies from dark grey to dark brown, and is spotted
with yellow. The foot is ovate, and has a yellowish margin;
the head is small. The brownish-green shell is sometimes
13in. long, and more than lin. broad. There are six whorls:
the first is not much more than a mere point, but the last is
very large, exceeding in length half of the entire shell. The
last whorl has three, and the two whorls next to it two,
rather broad brown spiral bands. The sutures of the shell
are very deep, and the aperture is pear-shaped. The oper-
culum is thin, and the lines of growth are plainly seen. This
snail is very useful in the aquarium. The male has the right
tentacle shorter and thicker than the left.

Paludina vivipara (Fig. 115) very much resembles the last
species in habits, habitat, and structure. The body, in colour,
is almost black and spotted with yellow; the tentacles are
bluish-black and are thinly sprinkled with yellow or orange
spots; the shell is much like that of the P. contecta, but it
is more oblong in shape and less glossy in colour, and the
whorls are not so swollen, nor consequently are the sutures
so deep. The body-whorl of this snail has three bands, and
not four, as represented in the illustration. The shells of
both species are marked with broad brown bands, almost
exactly in the same way. The apex of the shell of P.
vivipara is blunter than that of the P. contecta, and the
operculum thicker. This snail, which ie sometimes called the
170 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

“Fresh-water Winkle,” is a favourite with aquarium-keepers,
and as it seems to prefer to feed upon decaying vegetation, it is
very useful in the tank. It is much more prolific and more
active than its near relative P. contecta, and it also, as its
specific name implies, brings forth its young alive. More
than eighty fry in different stages of growth are said to
have been counted in the ovary of a female of this species.
The “Fresh-water Winkle,” unlike P. contecta, clings most
tenaciously to that substance to which it may be adhering
when touched. Sometimes, indeed, it seems as though the
animal would be injured in the attempt to detach it from the

 

Fig. 115. PALUDINA VIVIPARA.

side of an aquarium. Under such circumstances it should
be gently slid up the glass or side until it is above the,
surface of the water, when, as a rule, it will immediately
let go its hold. The right tentacle, when it is shorter and
thicker than the left, distinguishes the male.

Bythinia tentaculata (Fig. 116) is an interesting little
snail, found more or less abundantly in the slow-running
rivers, ponds, canals, and ditches of nearly every part of
Britain except Scotland, where it is rather local. It is ovi-
parous, and deposits its eggs, arranged in two or three rows,
in an oblong mass upon stones, the stalks and leaves of
aquatic plants, and, in addition to these, while in confine-
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 171

 

ment, upon the sides of the aquarium. The labour of
laying the eggs, sometimes numbering as many as seventy,
occupies several days. The little animal carefully cleans
every spot upon which she deposits an egg. The fry are
hatched, according to the temperature of the water, in from
twenty to twenty-five days, and do not reach maturity until
they are about two years old. The body of the animal is
almost black, and spotted with yellow. The tentacles ure
filiform (thread-like), and diverge considerably ; both tentacles
of the male, unlike the genus just described, are of the
same size. The eyes are black, large, and sessile. The shell
is conical, and of a yellowish horn-colour and_ glossy.
There are five whorls, the last taking up more than half
of the shell. The sutures are

rather deep, and the apex is ;

pointed. The operculum is thick ee

and oval. This is a useful little ee

snail in the aquarium, often
feeding upon decaying vegeta-
tion, and not unwilling at times
to partake of a little animal
food. From the name Bythinia Fic. 116. BYTHINIA TENTACULATA.
one would imagine that the

members of this genus always dwell in deep water; but this
is not the case by any means, for they are frequently found
in shallow streams, small ponds, canals, and ditches.

Valvata piscinalis is a little mollusc, whose name signifies
that it possesses an operculum and lives in fish-ponds: it
should not be introduced into an aquarium which is rather
wanting in growing plants, for it will feed chiefly upon
them. It is an interesting animal and well worthy of a
place in a tank which is rich enough in vegetation to
supply it with food without suffering in consequence. The
respiratory organs of this snail are curious: it possesses a
branchial plume and a branchial thread. The former
consists of gills which somewhat resemble feathers, and
which extend beyond the edge of the mantle when the
animal is in motion. The latter is a tentacle-like appendage .

  
172 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

on the right side of the mantle. When this snail is young
it is either male or female, but when it is old it becomes both
male and female. It is found in ponds, ditches, canals,
and slowly-running streams nearly everywhere. The body of
the animal is rather transparent, of a yellowish-grey colour,
and spotted with white. The tentacles are rather thick and
placed near together. The eyes are large and black, and
situated upon very short pedicels at the base of the tentacles.
The shell is about din. long and of a yellowish horn-colour;
its shape is conical, and there are five whorls, the largest
of which more than equals in length all the rest together.
The sutures are deep; the aperture is circular and the
operculum round and horny. The shell is found attached to
the cases of certain caddis-worms. The V. piscinalis lays
from sixteen to’ twenty eggs, which are hatched in about
the same number of days. The shells of the fry are so
transparent that the young animals within can be very
plainly seen.

Valvata cristata, though not large enough for the ordinary
aquarium, is interesting in those small tanks in which fish
are not kept. It is found upon weeds growing in slowly-
running or stagnant water. Like the last species, and as its
specific name denotes, it possesses a branchial plume and a
branchial thread. Its body is dark brown, slightly spotted
with black. The tentacles are close together and thread-like.
The shell is so much compressed that it somewhat resembles

that of the genus Planorbis. It is about }in. in diameter, .

and of a light horn-colour. The operculum has been likened
to an “inverted pot-lid.”

Of the six families of British molluscs belonging to the
order Pulmobranchiata, only one of them is aquatic—Lim-
neide ; and as all the members of this family are pulmo-
branchiate, it is necessary that they should occasionally
come to the surface of the water for atmospheric air.
Some of them, by ascending the stalks of the water-plants
and the like, even leave the water altogether for a time.
The Limnexide are divided into the following four genera:
(1) Planorbis; (2) Physa; (3) Limnzxa; (4) Ancylus. All the
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 173

 

members of the genus Planorbis are more or less suitable
for the aquarium, for they seem, as a rule, to feed upon
the confervoid growth in preference to any other. They all
live in slow-running or stagnant water. There are eleven
species of the genus in this country, and most of them
are fairly common. The chief characteristic of the Planorbes
is a long body contained, with plenty of room to spare,
in a flat-coiled shell. The disc or foot of the animal is
short, and is attached to the body by a kind of stalk.
The tentacles are long and slender. Both sexes are united
in the same individual. They have no operculum. Some of
them, when out of reach of water, have the power of
closing the apertures of their shell with an epiphragm.
They are, as a rule, herbivorous, though they have oc-
casionally been seen to partake of animal food. The snails
of this genus, when irritated, sometimes emit a red liquid;
and some of them, if not all, are at times thread-spinners.

There are few, if any, snails more suitable for a tank than
Planorbis corneus (Fig. 111). It has long been a great
favourite with aquarium-keepers. It is handsome, hardy,
large, and not given to destroying useful vegetation. It is
prolific, and ready to breed while in confinement at almost
any period of the year. P. corneus is found in slow-running
or stagnant water, but it is rather local. However, it can
nearly always be bought very cheaply of most dealers in
necessaries for the aquarium. It deposits its eggs upon
stones, leaves, and stalks of plants, and, while in confinement,
upon the sides of the tank as well. The eggs are contained
in an orbicular capsule, and vary in number from twenty to
forty-five. The fry are hatched, according to the temperature
of the water, in from sixteen to thirty days. The epidermis
of the young shell is covered with a kind of down, which has
been likened to velvet pile. The body of the animal is black
above and slightly greyish underneath. The mouth is
brownish-red. The tentacles are long and elegant. The
shell is flat-coiled in shape, and of a dark reddish-brown
colour, sometimes appearing almost quite black. There are
five or six whorls, and the sutures are rather deep. The shell
174 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA,

 

is sometimes an inch in diameter; the periphery is round.
This snail has a curious habit of fixing itself by its side to
perpendicular surfaces, such as the glass of the aquarium.
Planorbis carinatus is also a very useful snail in a tank,
and very popular with aquarium-keepers. The periphery of
the shell, instead of being round as in the last species, is dis-
tinctly keeled near the centre. Like P. corneus, it feeds upon
conferve in preference to growing plants. It is not a very
active animal. P. carinatus is unfortunately by no means

 

Fic. 117. PLANORBIS MARGINATUS,

common, except perhaps in the ponds, ditches, and slow-
running streams of the Eastern Counties. It is taken in other
parts of England, but not in any numbers; nevertheless, it
can generally be bought of aquarium dealers. This species
incloses its eggs (six to twelve in number) in capsules shaped
like those of P. corneus, and affixes them to stones, leaves,
&c., and in addition to these, while in confinement, to the
sides of the aquarium. The fry are hatched, according to
the temperature of the water, in about fourteen days. The
body of the animal is a reddish dark brown. The tentacles
are slender and yellowish, with a pinkish tinge; they are also
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 175

 

rather blunt at their extremities. The shell is about 3in. in
diameter, compressed, concave above, and almost flat below.
The whorls are five or six in number, and rapidly enlarge.
The sutures are deep; the aperture is angular.

Planorbis marginatus (Fig. 117) is very like P. carinatus in
structure and habits; but it is commoner, though quite as
useful in the aquarium as its near relative. Great numbers
of P. marginatus are said to be bred in those reservoirs in
Yorkshire which are used for cooling the water from the con-
densers of the steam-
engines of the factories.
The tentacles of P. mar-
ginatus are rather more
pointed than those of
P. carinatus. In other
respects the bodies of
the two animals are
much alike. The shell
of P. marginatus is
thicker, and a little
greater in diameter than
that of P. carinatus, and
the keel is placed nearer
to the lower side of the
periphery than to the Fig. 118. PLANORBIS VORTEX.
middle; hence the
specific name marginatus. The keel itself is not so prominent
as that of P. carinatus. The eggs of this species are from
six to fourteen in number, and are contained in an orbicular
capsule; they are hatched, according to the temperature of
the water, in about a fortnight.

Planorbis vortex (Fig. 118) is a very pretty little snail
found in the slow-running and stagnant water of nearly
every part of Britain. It is one of the molluscs which are
in the habit of closing the aperture of their shell with an
epiphragm should the pond, ditch, or stream in which they
live become dry during summer; and thus protected, it
will remain in a state of torpidity until the return of rain.

 
176 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The colour of the animal is a kind of violet-brown, the lower
part of the body being of a lighter shade. The body itself
is slender and the head large. The shell is thin and com-
pressed, not quite din. in diameter, a little concave above and
flat “below, so flattened indeed as to cause the periphery to
be prominently keeled at the lower side. The colour of the
shell is a glossy brown, and there are from six to eight
whorls. The aperture is slightly angular. This snail lays
about fourteen eggs, and incloses them in an _ orbicular
capsule. They are hatched in from ten to fourteen days.

Planorbis spirorbis is smaller and thicker than the last
species: it is found in the sluggish or stagnant water of
almost every part of Britain. The animal is of a purplish-
grey; the tentacles are long, thread-like, and pointed at the
tips; the disc is spotted with black. The shell is glossy
brown and slightly concave on both sides, or sometimes
rather flat below: it very much resembles that of P. vortex,
but it is less in diameter, rather thicker, and possesses fewer
whorls. The periphery is very slightly keeled below; the
aperture is almost round. This species also, when out of
water, closes the mouth of its shell with an epiphragm.

Planorbis albus is a beautiful snail, found in the slow-
running and stagnant water of many parts of Britain, The
body of the animal is greyish, and faintly spotted with black;
the head is rather large, and the tentacles are slender. The
shell, which is marked with raised spiral strie (thread-like lines),
is thin, brittle, about jin. in diameter, and of a very light
horn-colour. The epidermis of the shell is thick, and is more
or less covered with fine bristles. There are five whorls, and
the sutures are rather deep. P. albus lays from ten to four-
teen eggs, and incloses them in an orbicular capsule. The
fry are hatched in from twelve to fourteen days.

Planorbis lineatus is not a very common snail, and is found
only, as a rule, it is said, im the Home and Eastern Counties,
and occasionally in Yorkshire and Nottinghamshire. The
body of the animal is of a purplish-brown colour. The tentacles
are long, thread-like, and yellowish-brown. The disc is small,
broad, and tapers to a point behind. The shell is usually
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 177
«

 

described as quoit-shaped, and the upper side is more conyex
than the lower: it is of a glossy reddish-brown colour, and
not quite #in. in diameter. There are four whorls: the body-
whorl, which is larger than all the rest, contains partitions
plainly visible through the shell. The spire is much depressed.
This snail lays about five eggs, and incloses them in an
orbicular capsule. The fry are hatched in from ten to four-
teen days.

Planorbis nitidus is found in the sluggish and stagnant
water of nearly every part of Britain. It is very like the
P. lineatus, but is smaller, is without the internal partitions or
plates, and the spire of the shell is not so much depressed.
The animal is almost black, and is spotted with dark grey.
The tentacles are very slender and pointed at their tips.
The shell varies in both size and colour, but it is never, I
think, as much as iin. in diameter. Its colour varies from
dark to light horn-colour, and is slightly prismatic. The
largest shells are generally the darkest. There are three or
four whorls. The body-whorl, which is very large in pro-
portion to the rest, partly covers the preceding whorl and
turns outward. The periphery is rather prominently keeled,
near the centre. The sutures are fairly deep; the aperture
is angular. The eggs of this snail, which are about four in
number, are inclosed in an orbicular capsule, and are hatched
in from ten to fourteen days. It is a very sluggish
mollusc, its shell sometimes being found covered with insect
egg-cases or with conferve.

The following Planorbes are, as a rule, too small for the
ordinary aquarium, but they will be interesting, harmless,
and useful in those tanks in which fish are not kept:

Planorbis contortus is a little snail found on plants in
clear, stagnant water throughout Britain, but it is rather local.
It is inactive. Its body is almost black and is tinged with
red. Its tentacles are unusually slender and of a brownish
colour. The shell is about lin. in diameter, and of a brownish
horn-colour; it is flat above with a concavity in the middle,
and very concave below. There are eight very compact
whorls. The sutures are deep, and the aperture is narrow and

N
178 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

crescent-shaped. This snail lays about seven eggs and in-
closes them in an orbicular capsule. The fry are hatched in
from ten to fourteen days.

Planorbis glaber is found in widely different parts of
Britain, but it is very local. It is much like P. albus, but
is smaller, more glossy, and without the raised spiral strie.
The animal is described as having “a yellowish-grey body; .
tentacles rather short, cylindrical, and ending in a blunt point;
foot rather broad, especially in front, with a yellowish edge.”
The shell is convex above, with a slight depression in the
middle, and concave below. It is of a brownish horn-colour,
and slightly transparent. There are about four compact
whorls, and the periphery is round. The aperture is nearly
round, and the sutures are rather deep. This snail has been
likened, when young, to the Valvata cristata.

Planorbis nautileus is a very beautiful little snail, taken on
water-plants in the lakes, ponds, and ditches of many parts of
Britain. It is generally found upon the under-side of broad,
floating leaves, such as those of the Pond Weeds (Potamogeton)
and the Water-Lilies, but especially upon the former. The
ibody of the animal is greyish and is spotted minutely with
black. The shell is about j,in. in diameter, and is quoit-
shaped. There are three whorls, the body-whorl being larger
than the rest of the shell. The periphery is bluntly keeled.
This small snail lays from three to six eggs, and incloses
them in an orbicular capsule. The fry are hatched in about
twelve days.

The Physe connect the Planorbes with the Limnezade.
There are only two species of the genus Physa in Great
Britain, but both are suitable for the aquarium. The Physe
can be easily recognised by their sinistral shells. Sinistral
shells are those whose coils instead of winding from left to
right—i.e., following the course of the sun—wind from right to
left, the way an ordinary screw is withdrawn.

Physa hypnorum is found on water-plants in slow-running
streams and ponds throughout Britain. It is an active snail,
and very interesting in the aquarium, especially as a “thread-
spinner.” The body of the animal is generally dark grey,
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 179

 

thickly covered with small black spots. The tentacles are
pointed and blackish in colour. The dise is narrow, and
ends behind in a slightly pointed tail. The shell is about $in.
long, and is spindle-shaped; it is of a dark or yellowish horn-
colour, glossy, and semi-transparent. There are five or six
whorls, and the spire is produced: the body-whorl occupies
more than half of the entire shell. The aperture may be de-
scribed as pear-shaped. P. hypnorum deposits its eggs, which
number from three to twenty, in a roundish capsule. The fry
are hatched in from sixteen to twenty days.

Physa fontinalis is much commoner than the last species.
It is found in sluggish or stagnant clear water in nearly every
part of Britain. It is frequently taken upon watercress. This
molluse is also, like the P. hypnorum, a very busy “thread-
spinner.” The body of the animal is dark grey. The tentacles
are of a lighter colour than the body. The disc is light grey,
and ends behind in a rather pointed tail. The shell, which
is about 3in. long, is very thin, and of a glossy light horn-
colour. There are four or five whorls, the body-whorl more
than equalling half of the shell. The spire is very short, and
the apex is blunt. The sutures are rather deep; the aperture
is large and pear-shaped. This snail lays from three to
twenty eggs, and incloses them in a roundish capsule. The
fry are hatched in from sixteen to twenty days.

Limneze are more active, greater eaters, and fonder of
feeding upon healthy growing water-plants than any of the
molluscs already described; and consequently are not, on the
whole, so suitable for the aquarium. However, some of the
Limnee are useful in the tank, and all of them are interest-
ing there. A few are carnivorous as well as herbivorous.
I have several times seen snails of this genus, especially
I. peregra, sharing a worm or a dead fish with the beetles,
Corixe, and the like. Although Limnzz will eat no small
quantity of necessary vegetation, they are at the same time
exceedingly useful in clearing away conferve, and in acting
as scavengers generally.

I dare say I shall be laughed at by some people when
I say that I believe that a taste for confervoid growth can be

N 2
180 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

cultivated in a snail. But I certainly have noticed that the
longer some of the Limnze are kept in confinement, the less
they eat of growing plants and the more of conferve. These
snails are gregarious for the most part, and extremely prolific.
They are generally found in sluggish or stagnant water,
crawling upon the mud or adhering to and feeding upon
aquatic plants, or floating on the surface of the water. Hach
individual is both male and female.

Limnza stagnalis (Fig. 119) is a very elegant snail, found in
slow-running and stagnant water nearly all over Brita, and
is sometimes called the “Fresh-water Whelk.” It is very

 

Fig. 119. LIMNZA STAGNALIS,

useful in the aquarium as a consumer of conferve, but it is.
not always willing to confine itself to this food. It should
therefore be watched, and removed directly it is seen destroying
the aquatic plants. I have had some snails of this species
which lived almost entirely upon confervoid growth, but they
were those which I had had in confinement for a long time.
This snail, when irritated, sometimes discharges a violet-
coloured liquid. It is also occasionally carnivorous. LL. stag-
nalis is not by any means difficult to recognise, on account of
its large size and elegant shape. Its body is yellowish-grey
with a bluish-green tinge and mottled with brown and white.
The tentacles are flat and triangular. The disc is broad and
has a yellowish margin. The shell is about I1%in. long, of
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 181

 

a greyish-white or yellowish horn-colour, and is sometimes
covered with some extraneous substance. There are from six
to eight whorls, the body-whorl being much larger and more
swollen than the others. The spire is elongated, and tapers
gracefully to a fine point. The sutures are rather deep, and
the aperture is almost oval. This snail incloses its eggs, some-
times numbering as many as 130, in an orbicular capsule.
The fry are hatched, according to the temperature of the
water, in from fifteen to twenty days.

Limnzxa auricularia (Fig. 120) has a greater liking for con-
ferve than L. stagnalis, and is therefore more suitable for
the aquarium. It is found in the sluggish streams, lakes, and
ponds of different parts of Britain, but it is not a very

po Be
sar Be
An ger
se ii \

yo

 
   

Fig. 120. LIMNAA AURICULARIA.

common species. Even where it does abound, it frequently
escapes capture, unless properly searched for, from the habit
it has of remaining at or near the bottom of the water. When
taken it is easily recognised. The body of the animal is a
greenish dark grey, spotted with small black spots and larger
white ones. The tentacles are flat, triangular, and spotted
with yellowish-grey on the margins. The disc has also a
yellow margin. The shell is about lin. long, fin. wide, and of
a light yellowish horn-colour. There are four or five whorls,
the body-whorl being much larger than all the rest of the
shell. The spire is short and the apex is much pointed. The
aperture is very large and ear-shaped: hence the specific name.
The outer lip is bent backward or reflected. ZL. auricularia
lays about eighty eggs, and incloses. them in a somewhat
182 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

elliptical capsule: they are hatched in from sixteen to twenty
days.

Limnza palustris (Fig. 121) is rather an elegant snail, but
it is too great an eater of useful growing plants to be safely
trusted for long in an ordinary aquarium. There are occasions,
however, upon which it may be of use, such as when there is
an excess of vegetation. It is always, I think, interesting.
The tank in which it is kept
should be covered, or it will be
very likely to escape and die.
It is found in the lakes, ponds,
ditches, and sluggish streams of
nearly every part of Britain.
The animal is of a dark grey
colour, tinged with violet, and
spotted with black or yellow.
The tentacles are conical. The

Fig. 121, LIMNZA PALUSTRIS, disc is slightly notched. The

shell is about #in.- in length,
conical in shape, and of a light or darkish horn-colour. There
are six or seven whorls: the body-whorl more than equals
half the shell. The sutures are rather deep, and the aperture
is oval or almost so. This snail lays from sixty to eighty eggs,
and incloses them in a somewhat cylindrical capsule. The fry
are hatched in from sixteen to twenty days.

Limnea peregra (Fig. 122) is a rather handsome snail, and
is perhaps commoner than any other aquatic mollusc. Some
people do not give it a very good character as an inmate of
the aquarium, but I am never without it, and find that it
does more good than harm. I have just examined seven
aquaria, large and small, in which snails of this species are
kept, and have found only one solitary individual, out of the
many, upon any of the plants. All the others seemed to be
busy at work upon the sides of the tanks. These molluscs
are good scavengers, as they are not at all unready, as I .
have said, to become occasionally carnivorous. They will eat
a dead worm, a defunct fish, or even a deceased relative.
They are most prolific, and thus provide a great quantity of

 
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 183

 

useful food for the fish. A drawback in keeping these snails
in the aquarium is their habit of escaping from it, and
dying outside of it for want of water. The tanks, therefore,
in which they are confined should be covered. The body of
the animal is a pale brown, tinged with green. The tentacles
are flat, triangular, and placed almost at right angles with
the sides of the animal. The eyes are black, and plainly
geen. The shell is obliquely-ovate, and of a glossy dark

1

 

Fig. 122. LIMNZA PEREGRA.

yellowish horn-colour. There are five whorls, the body-whorl
taking up more than three parts of the length of the shell.
The spire, which is more or less produced in different in-
dividuals, occupies about a quarter the length of the shell. The
aperture is large and oval, and the outer lip is a little
reflected. This snail is found in the slow-running and
stagnant water of nearly every, if not every, part of Britain.
It lays from sixty to eighty eggs, and incloses them in an
elliptical capsule. It produces many such capsules in the
184 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

course of a year. Dr. Jeffreys is reported to have stated that
L. peregra deposits about 13,000 eggs. The eggs are hatched
in from sixteen to twenty days.

Limnea glabra is an elegant little snail, found in many
parts of England, but more rarely in Scotland and Ireland.
It lives at the bottom of rather shallow stagnant water, only
coming, as a rule, to the surface of the water for the purpose
of taking a fresh supply of air. The body of the animal is
of a dull grey colour, spotted minutely with black, The
tentacles are triangular and of a lighter colour than the body.
The eyes are placed upon tubercles. The shell is cylindrical,
and not quite an inch long. There are seven or eight whorls;
the body-whorl does not equal half the shell. The spire is
produced, and tapers to a rather fine point. The aperture is
narrowly oval. This mollusc lays from twenty to thirty eggs,
and incloses them in an oblong capsule. The fry are hatched
in, I believe, from sixteen to twenty days.

Limnexa truncatula is found in rather muddy water in every
part of Britain. It is fairly useful in the aquarium, and is
not likely to do much harm. The body of the animal is
almost black and spotted with black: it is of a lighter shade
underneath. The tentacles are light grey, and also spotted
with black. The shell is about 4in. in length, and oblong-
conical in shape. There are five or six turreted whorls.
The spire has the appearance of being slightly truncated;
hence the specific name of the mollusc. The apex is sharp,
the sutures are very deep, and the aperture is almost oval.
This snail generally deposits its capsules, containing from
twelve to twenty eggs, upon the mud. The eggs are hatched,
I believe, in from sixteen to twenty days. ,

Limnea glutinosa is said to be “locally and periodically
abundant;” that is, in some localities it is common for a time
then it disappears apparently altogether, only to re-appear after
an interval of longer or shorter duration as numerous as ever.
It has been suggested as a reason for this strange habit on the
part of the mollusc that it buries itself for some considerable
time in the mud at the bottom of the water in which it dwells
and thus escapes notice andcapture. The L. glutinosa lives in
SNAILS AND LIMPETS. 185

 

ponds and ditches in different parts of Britain. It is frequently
recommended as an inmate of the aquarium, but those who
introduce it among their water-plants should remember that it
has a very great liking for their tender roots and rootlets,
especially those of the duckweeds. With the exception of this
weakness, the snail may be considered as useful and harmless.
The body of the animal is plentifully covered with slime; hence
its specific name of glutinosa. It is of a dark grey colour, tinged
with yellow and spotted with orange. The tentacles are short,
very broad at the base, flat, blunt at the tips, and spotted with
white. The shell is about iin. in length, “ globosely-ovate” in
shape, and of a glossy yellowish horn-colour. There are three
or four globose whorls: the body-whorl is considerably larger
than the rest of the shell. The spire is produced very little,
and the sutures are rather deep. The aperture is almost oval,
and the inner lip is much expanded. This snail lays from
twenty-five to thirty eggs, and incloses them in a rounded
and transparent capsule. They are hatched in from sixteen
to twenty days.

The little molluscs called Ancyli are interesting, useful, and
harmless in the aquarium. They are very sluggish in their
movements, taking a long time to travel even a short distance.
They do not swim, nor have I ever seen them float, though I
seldom let a day go by without having noticed them and their
habits. Their principal food seems to be conferve and decaying
vegetable matter. The stomachs of these “fresh-water limpets,”
as they are sometimes called, have been compared to the gizzard
of a fowl, on account of their muscular bands and the minute
particles of sand which they are found to contain. The shell is
hooked like a hawk’s beak; hence the generic name. There are
two species of this genus in Britain: though pulmobranchiate,
they are rarely seen to come to the surface of the water for
a fresh supply of atmospheric air.

Ancylus fluviatilis (Fig. 123) inhabits rivers, streams, and
other clear water in every part of Britain. It is generally
found adhering to stones at the bottom, but occasionally
it is taken upon aquatic plants or out of water altogether,
though within reach of the spray of waterfalls and the like.
186 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Mr. Darwin, in his “Origin of Species,” speaks of an Ancylus
as having been taken adhering to a water-beetle—a Dytiscus.
A good way to obtain these interesting little molluscs is to

. take up and examine the flat stones at the bottom of clear and
shallow streams, to which they will be found adhering. It is
necessary to exercise a little care in removing Ancyli, or they
may be hurt. They give no
trouble in the aquarium, where
they spend nearly all their time
upon the sides, feeding upon
conferve. The body of the
animal is greyish, and the ten-

Fic. 123. ANCYLUS FLUVIATILIS. tacles are greyish-white and

broad at their base. The shell,
which is described as cowl-shaped, covers all the animal when
it is moving, except the tips of the tentacles, and sometimes
perhaps a portion of the muzzle. It is a dark horn-colowr,
and about jin. in diameter. The spire is curved towards the
right. The apex is rather blunt, and the aperture is oval.
This mollusc lays about eight eggs, and incloses them in a
roundish capsule. The eggs are hatched in about twenty-six
days.

Ancylus oblongus lives in slow-running or stagnant clear
water throughout Britain, but it is rather local. It is found
adhering to the under-side of aquatic plants, and not, like A.
fluviatilis, to stones and wood. When it moves, which is seldom,
it travels more quickly than the last species. It has a yellowish-
grey body, with a greenish tinge. The tentacles are light grey,
and widely separate from each other. The shell is more oblong
than the last species; hence the specific name. It is about din.
in diameter, and of a glossy yellowish-green horn-colour. The
spire is bent towards the left, and not, as in the A. fluviatilis,
towards the right. The apex is rather sharp, and the aperture is
oval. The eggs are from four to twelve, and are inclosed in an
orbicular capsule. They are hatched in about twenty-six days.

 

$+ reece
CHAPTER X.

MUSSELS.

-

  

HE Conchifera (shell-bearers), or Bivalves, form one
of the sub-divisions of the Molluscas. They never
live (as so many of the gasteropods, or univalves,
do) upon land, but always in either fresh or salt water, most
of them, however, being inhabitants of the latter. The fresh-
water bivalves are not only useful in the aquarium, but they
are in themselves full of interest, and anyone who will watch
and study them a little will certainly be rewarded for his
trouble.

Those who begin keeping aquaria are sometimes advised to
have nothing to do with the Conchifera, as they are so likely
to die and corrupt the water. I cannot say that such has
been my experience, for I have rarely known them die, and
my tanks have never suffered any bad effects to my know-
ledge through their death. Nor are they likely, as far as I
know, to do any harm by their slowly ploughing through the
sand and gravel at the bottom of the aquarium. As a rule,
they are useful as scavengers, for they extract from the water
particles of animal and vegetable matter. They are exceedingly
prolific, and, breeding readily in confinement, their eggs and
fry supply the fish with suitable food. Some bivalves of
course are more active than others. For example, some of the
Spheriide will frequently ascend the sides of the aquarium
or float along the under-surface of the water apparently with
188 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the same ease that the Planorbis corneus performs the like
feat, or they will suspend themselves in the water by means
of a “molluscan thread,” while some of the Unionide will
seem to remain for days in the same place without moving.

The soft parts of a “shell-bearing” mollusc consist chiefly
of a mantle having two lobes or divisions, leaf-like gills,
siphons, or a siphon or orifices, and a tongue-shaped foot
which can be considerably elongated and sometimes possesses
a tuft of muscular threads called a “byssus,” by means of
which the animal can attach itself to foreign bodies. There
are also various muscles, a heart, a liver, a stomach, and
intestines. There is no distinct head.

The two valves or shells of these molluscs are drawn to-
gether by means of muscles called the “adductor muscles.”
Some of the Conchifera have only one adductor muscle, which
isysituated near the centre of the body, while others possess
two, one of which is placed towards the anterior extremity of
the animal, and the other towards the posterior. The former
molluses are called Monomyarian (having one muscle), the
latter Dimyarian (having two muscles). The places inside the
shells to which these muscles are attached are marked by an
impression, more’ or less distinct, called the “muscular scar.”
Another scar, the “pallial,” runs from the anterior muscular
scar, following at a short distance from the edge the course
of the ventral margin of the shell, and then joins the
posterior muscular scar. This pallial scar shows where the
mantle of the animal was attached to the shell. The two
valves are joined together by a hinge, which often possesses
teeth. The ligament, as the hinge is sometimes called, is
either external or internal. The male and female of these
molluses are united in the same individual. Figs. 124 and 125
will perhaps help to make plain the following description of
some of the bivalves suitable for the fresh-water aquarium.

The Lamellibranchiata (possessors of leaf-like gills), as the
Conchifera are often called, are now divided into three
families, viz: (1) Spheriide, (2) Unionide, (3) Drerssenide.

The members of the Sphzriide family have the shell either
oblong or oval, and its hinge possesses teeth. They
MUSSELS. 189

 

are provided with one or two siphons, which can be
extended or contracted. Their foot is long, beardless, and
capable of great extension. The Sphzriidz are ovoviparous,
and are divided into two genera: (1) Spheriwm (a sphere), (2)
Pisidium (pea-shaped).

The Spheria possess two siphons, one longer than the
other. The former is called
the incurrent siphon, and is
used for respiration and nu-
trition, and the latter is
known as the  excurrent
siphon, and serves to carry
away that for which the
animal has no further use.
The valves of the shell are
of equal size, but of slightly
different shape. The hinge
possesses what are called
cardinal or anterior teeth and
lateral or posterior teeth.
The Spheria are active in
their habits, and many of
them, if not all, are more
or less “thread-spinners.”
They breed readily in con-
finement, and sometimes be-
fore they reach maturity.
They feed principally upon
animalcula, and when winter

 

Fie. 124. OUTLINE OF THE DORSAL

5 PaRT OF BOTH VALVES OF UNIO
comes on. they bury them TUMIDUS. aa, Thickness ; bb, Umbo ;
selves in the mud at the ¢, Lunule ; d, Ligament; e, Anterior

Extremity ; J, Posterior Extremity.

bottom of the water, and
remain there in a state of
torpidity until the spring. They seem to be irritable
or timid little molluscs, for when they have ascended the
sides of the aquarium, the slightest touch or startling
will frequently cause them to quit their hold and sink to
the bottom.
190 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Spherium rivicolum is found in the slow-running and
sometimes in the stagnant water of various parts of England,
and rarely in Ireland, but it is local. It is the largest of the
Sphxriide, having a shell about 3in. long, din. high, and #in.
thick. The body of the animal is grey, with a yellowish
tinge; the foot is a greyish-white; the siphons are short,
nearly of the same length, and whitish. The shell is
globosely-ovate, solid, and of a greenish-brown colour, marked
with two or three darkish bands. The umbones are central

 

 

Fig. 125. OUTLINE OF LEFT VALVE OF UNIO TUMIDUS. aa, eng bb, Height ;
c, Umbo; d, Anterior Extremity; ¢, Posterior Extremity; f, Ventral Margin ;
g, Dorsal Margin; hk, Ligament; 7, Lunule. Se

(i.e., in the middle), close to the dorsal margin. The hinge is
strong, and there are two cardinal and four lateral teeth.
The ligament is short and external, and the muscular scars
are distinct.

Spherium ovale is a small scarce mollusc, but it is of
interest in the aquarium. It is found in canals and ponds.
The body is white, and the siphons are long and united
nearly as far as their tips. The foot is large and tongue-
shaped. The shell is oblong, one extremity being - rather
round and the other truncate. The umbones are a little in
MUSSELS. 191

 

front of the middle of the shell. The teeth are like those of
the last species, but are very small. The muscular scars are
indistinct. The shell is about 3in. long, }in. high, and 3in.
thick.

Sphzerium corneum is very much commoner than the last
species, being found in the rivers, streams, canals, ditches,
and ponds of nearly every part of Britain. The body is
greyish, and the foot is rather pointed and whitish. The
siphons are long, and of a pale flesh-colour. The shell is
rather orbicular, and of a light horn-colour. The umbones
are central, and the ligament is inconspicuous and short. The
teeth are like those of the last species, and the muscular
scars are indistinct. The shell is about in. long, 3in..
high, and jin. thick.

Sphzrium lacustre (Fig. 126) : § Pies 2
is an interesting little bivalve, = ee reese
and will live very well in S :
confinement. It is rather a
busy “‘thread-spinner,” and is
found in the running and
stagnant water of many parts
of Britain, but it is rare in
Scotland. The body is almost
white, and sometimes of a
pale flesh-colour. The siphons are white and long, and the
foot is very large for the size of the animal. The shell is
nearly round, and of a pale horn-colour. The umbones are
prominent, central, and show the first growth of the shell.
The teeth are like those of the last species, but are very
small. The ligament is inconspicuous, and the scars are
indistinct.

In many respects the Pisidia are very like the Spheria, but
they differ principally in having one siphon instead of two;
they are also more abundant, and are divided into five species:
it is rather difficult, unfortunately, to tell one species from
another. Dr. Gwynn Jeffreys says, concerning them, that
“size, substance, sculpture, and lustre, are not of much
account, as they mainly depend on the chemical ingredients

 

Fic. 126. SPH£ZRIUM LACUSTRE,
192 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

of the water inhabited by these molluscs as well as on their
supply of food.” He arranged the five species in the following
order :

1. Pisidiwm amnicum

2. P. fontinale

3. P. pusillum has an oval shell.

4, P. nitidwm has a round shell.

5. P. roseum has an oblong shell.

The bodies of all the species of Pisidiwm are very much
alike; their colour is whitish or whitish-grey.

Pisidium amnicum (Fig. 127), by far the largest of the
genus, is found in the slow-running and stagnant water of
nearly every part of Britain.
The shell is glossy, solid, of
a greyish horn-colour, and is
a little over jin. in length.
This molluse is said to spend
the greater part of its time

Fic. 127, PISIDIUM AMNICUM. partly buried in the mud at

the bottom of the water.

Pisidiwm fontinale is much smaller than the last species,
being only about }in. in length. The umbones of the shell
are prominent. This mollusc lives in the slow-running and
stagnant water of nearly every part of Britain, and is described
as being the most active species of the genus to which it
belongs. It is said to be fond of small splashy ponds; hence,
I suppose, its specific name.

Pisidium pusillum lives in weedy water throughout Britain.
The shell is more oval in shape than that of the last species,
and even tinier in size; hence the specific name.

Pisidium nitidum bas an almost round shell, the umbones
of which are marked with rather deep grooves. It is found
in clear, stagnant water in many parts of Britain, but it
is not so common as some of the other species. Its funnel-
shaped siphon is generally considered as a help to distinguish
it from its other relatives, all of which have such a confusing
family likeness. The shell is iridescent and very glossy; hence
the specific name.

have triangular shells.

 
MUSSELS. 193

 

Pisidiwm roseum is also found in weedy ponds and ditches.
The shell is oblong, and is about 3;in. in length, but in other
respects it is very like that of the last species. It receives
its specific name from the rose-colour of the upper part of
its body.

The Unionide are more commonly called Mussels than any
of the other fresh-water bivalves. Some of them are ovo-
viparous, while others are oviparous. They live in rivers, lakes,
and ponds throughout Britain, and they feed upon the
vegetable and animal matter which they extract from the
water, as well as upon Entomostraca and other minute animals.
Each individual of this family is both male and female. In
winter they bury themselves in the mud. These animals,
instead of having one or two siphons, like the Spheriide,
have two orifices. The lower orifice, which is bearded, is used
for respiration, and the upper orifice, which is beardless or
simple, serves for getting rid of that from which the animal
has extracted all nutriment. The foot is. large and tongue-
shaped.

The Unionide are divided into two genera, viz.: (1) Unio;
(2) Anodonta. The former genus possesses two species, and
the latter only one.

The Uniones are oviparous, and some of them contain pearls;
hence the generic name of Unio.

Unio tumidus (Fig. 128) is a handsome bivalve, found in the
sluggish and stagnant water of nearly every part of Britain.
lt is occasionally sold by dealers in aquarium necessaries, as the
“Duck Mussel.” It is useful and interesting in the tank, where
at times it is rather active in its movements, leaving long
grooves behind it in the sand and gravel, as it travels from
spot to spot. The upper orifice is a short brownish tube, and
the lower or branchial orifice is somewhat lighter in colour.
The shell has a swollen appearance (hence the specific name)
in comparison with some other shells of this family. It is
about 24in. long, lin. high. and #in. thick, and of a yellowish-
brown colour, the lines of growth being well marked. The
umbones are towards the anterior extremity, and turn a little
mwards. The anterior side slopes away towards the ventral

°
194 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

margin, and the posterior side or end tapers to a wedge-like
point. The lunule is narrow, and the ligament short and
prominent. There are four strong teeth attached to the
hinge—two cardinal and two lateral. The muscular scars
are quite distinct. M. Moquin Tandon is reported to have said

 

Fie. 128. UNIO TUMIDUS.

that this animal, in July and August, emits small elongated
pointed masses, each containing about 100 eggs, and a single
molluse of this species has been known to lay about 150 of
such masses in a few days.

Unio pictorum is a species found in the sluggish and
stagnant water of England, but not, it is said, farther north
than Yorkshire. The foot of the animal is reddish. The
orifices are very like those of U. tumidus. The shell is about
24in, long and more than lin. high: it is not so thick as that of
the last species, and altogether has a slimmer appearance. The
colour is yellowish-brown, marked with darker brown bands.
The anterior side slopes away towards the ventral margin,
which is almost straight. The posterior side gradually tapers
each way, but principally from the dorsal margin, until it
comes to a round point. The umbones are towards the anterior
extremity, and turn a little in. Both the lunule and the
ligament are rather long: the former is narrow. There are
four teeth, but they are not so strong as those of U. twmidus.
The muscular scars are distinct, and the pallial scar is not.
One individual of this species has been said to lay the extra-
MUSSELS. 195

 

ordinary number of 220,000 eggs during the months of May,
June, and July. The shells of this bivalve in former days
were used for the purpose of holding the painter’s colours;
hence its specific name. At the present time they may be
purchased containing gold and silver leaf.

Unio margaritifer is especially the “pearl-bearing” mussel,
as its specific name implies. It is chiefly found in the rivers
of the mountainous districts of Britain. Beautiful and valu-
able pearls have at various times been found in this and
other species of the Unionide. Mr. Cholmondeley Pennell,
in his book on “Pike and other Coarse Fish,” mentions a boy
who, while fishing for trout in the Chapel Brook, near Tweed
Mill, Coldstream, caught a large Mussel (the species is not
given) which contained no less than “forty fine pearls of
different sizes, some of which were thought to be worth ten
shillings each.”

The body of U. margaritifer is a dirty grey, and its foot is
large, tongue-shaped, and reddish-brown. The shell is about
din. long and 2in. high, oblong, compressed, and of a darker
colour than the rest of the Unionide. The umbones, which
are more often eroded in this species than in any other of
the genus, are placed towards the anterior extremity, which
is fairly evenly rounded. The posterior side slopes away from
the dorsal margin. The ventral margin is almost straight, the
ligament is very long, and the lunule is inconspicuous. The
muscular and pallial scars are very distinct.

The Anodonte are the largest of our fresh-water bivalves,
sometimes measuring as much as din. in length and 3in. in
height, and they should not, therefore, be introduced into a
tank unless it is very large and the sand and gravel at its
bottom are deep in proportion.

Anodonta cygnea (Fig. 129) is the only species of the genus
which is found in Britain. Various varieties have often
been taken for different species, but I think now it is
generally considered that there is only this solitary species.
The body of the animal is greyish, slightly tinged with yellow
or red. The foot is broad, and of a dirty yellow colour. The
shell is oblong, thin, yellowish-green, or sometimes rusty

02
196 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

brown, and the valves are rather swollen. The umbones
are placed towards the anterior end, which slopes away rather
suddenly in the direction of the ventral margin. The upper
part of the posterior side has a “cut-away” or flattened

 

Fic. 129, ANODONTA CYGNEA.

appearance. There are no teeth attached to the hinge; hence
the generic name. The muscular scars are indistinct. This
species is commonly. called the “Swan Mussel,’ I suppose
because the swans are fond of feeding upon it.

Dreissena polymorpha is a curious and beautiful little
mussel, first described as a native of this country by Mr. J.
de Carle Sowerby in the year 1824. It is supposed to have
been introduced here by clinging to the timber brought from
the Volga. It has the power of living for a long time out of
water. It also possesses a byssus by means of which it is
able to attach itself firmly to shells of the larger Conchifera,
wood, stones, &c. The shell is described by the author of
the excellent little book, “Lakes and Rivers,” as “oblong,
rising in a sharp keel in the middle of each valve and flattened
below, pointed at the end or beak, and gradually but obliquely
widening towards the front, solid but not glossy. Beneath
the epidermis it is purplish-brown. The beaks (umbones) are
terminal.” This bivalve is now found in slow-running water
in many parts of England. It is said that it has even been
discovered clinging to the inside of some of the London iron
water-pipes.
CHAPTER XI.

WATER-BEETLES.

T will be wise before introducing any beetles into an
ordinary aquarium to accustom them to feed upon
that food with which in the future they will be

provided—e.g., pieces of raw meat or garden-worms. All
worms should be killed by dashing them suddenly to the
ground; their death is then painless. It is not a pleasant
sight to see a poor worm struggling and writhing while
in the clutches of several beetles. Most beetles, however,
though they may do, if carefully treated, little or no
harm to the usual inhabitants of a tank, are more interesting,
satisfactory, and ornamental in an aquarium which is entirely
given up to their use.

Aquatic beetles are not only ornamental and very interest-
ing in an aquarium, but not a few of them are useful there,
All of them, however, are not suitable for the ordinary tank,
as some are too small and others too predaceous, but they—
both the small and the predaceous ones—are quite deserving
of a place in portable and separate aquaria, where their forms
and habits will afford much pleasure and instruction. Many
of these coleoptera which must not be trusted among defence-
less inhabitants of the water, will look well and thrive in
those vessels which are kept for beautiful and interesting
aquatic plants—plants, I mean, which are too choice or too
delicate to be trusted near hungry snails or strong and active

 
198 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

fish. Under such circumstances care should be taken to give
the beetles just enough food to satisfy them, but not enough
to run the risk of corrupting the water, which ought always
to be, and will always be if the little necessary attention is
regularly given, perfectly clear.

Coleoptera are generally classified in four sections, accord-
ing to the number of the joints in their tarsi or feet: Trimera,
Tetramera, Heteromera, and Pentamera. Those possessing feet
having five joints are placed in the Pentamera, which contains
most of the aquatic beetles. And to two families of this
section are confined nearly all the coleoptera with which we
have to do in this chapter, viz, the Dytiscide and the
Hydrophilide. The former family belongs to the sub-division
Hydradephaga (aquatic carnivorous beetles) of the tribe
Adephaga (predaceous beetles), and the species are therefore
carnivorous. The Hydrophilide are herbivorous, and are
members of the only family of the tribe Palpicornia
(possessing long and slender palpi).

The Dytiscide differ from the Hydrophilide chiefly in the
formation of their antenne and palpi (Fig. 130). In the
former the antenne are slim and elongated, and in the latter
they are short and clubbed. But in the Hydrophilide the
maxillary palpi are long and slender, and are much more
conspicuous than their antenne, which are often placed close
to the body, out of sight; while the palpi of the Dytiscide
are quite small when compared with the length and
prominence of their antenne. There is a difference also in
the formation of the legs of the two families. In the
Dytiscide the legs are especially adapted for swimming, the
fore and middle pairs of legs being placed closely together,
while the hind-legs are placed at some little distance from
them to allow of plenty of room for the swimming movement.
But in the Hydrophilide the three pairs of legs are almost
equal distances apart. When swimming, the hind-legs of the
Dytiscide move together, while those of the Hydrophilide
move alternately. The former may be said to swim somewhat
similar to a frog, and the latter like a dog. This difference
in the manner of swimming is more or less apparent in most
WATER-BEETLES. 199

 

of the species of the two families. But some of the Hydro-
philide seem to have legs fitted for crawling over aquatic
plants rather than for swimming, while not a few of the
Dytiscide progress in the water like members of the Hydro-
philide. In distinguishing the different genera and species
of aquatic beetles it is necessary to pay attention to colour,
size, structure, and sculpture, but especially to the latter two.

 

Fig. 130. ENLARGED OUTLINE OF MALE WATER-BEETLE (DYTISCUS mene)
a, Antenne; b, Maxillary Palpi; c, Eye; d, Fore-Leg; e, Thorax; /, Middle
Leg; g, Elytron; A, Suture; ¢, Hind-Leg; j, Claw; k, Tarsus or Foot;
1, Tibia or Shank; m, Femur or Thigh; , First three Joints of Foot,
widened into a Plate possessing Suckers underneath.

Certain Dytiscide, such as Dytiscus marginalis, must not,
as every keeper of an aquarium knows, be placed among fish
and other defenceless inhabitants of the water, but in separate
vessels, where they will be interesting and instructive. But
some of those beetles, if properly managed, can be with
advantage placed in the ordinary aquarium, for they will act
200 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the part of scavengers. The herbivorous beetles, e.g., Hydro-
philus piceus, are especially suitable for the tank, and are
also perhaps more interesting in it than any of the others,
particularly in regard to their egg-laying arrangements. The
eggs of aquatic beetles are oval or oblong, and are placed
usually either in cocoons or upon or in slits of aquatic plants.
The larve of both the carnivorous and the herbivorous beetles
are far too predaceous to be trusted in the general tank.
They are, however, full of interest, and quite worthy of
separate aquaria easily prepared for the purpose. If it is
wished that the larve should change to the perfect beetles
while in confinement, it will be necessary to make for them
an especially arranged tank, for most of them pass their
pupal state not in the water but in the damp earth at its side.
Some larve are a long time before they become pup, while
others are only a few weeks.

The carnivorous beetles are much more likely to be a source
of danger to their defenceless comrades during summer
than during winter. The keeper should therefore guard
against jumping to the conclusion that since he has been able
to keep certain of the Dytiscide among fish without the latter
suffering any hurt during winter, he can always do so.

The Hydradephaga are divided into two families: (1) The
Dytiscide ; (2) The Gyrinide.

The Dytiscide family numbers in Britain about 114 different
species; but many of them are very locally distributed.
These beetles, which prefer stagnant to running water, are
extremely predaceous, and devour small fish, tadpoles, insects,
larve of insects and beetles of their own and other species.
They have good powers of flight, and frequently travel, chiefly
during the evening, from one piece of water to another. No
pond or puddle seems to be too small for them. They have
often been found in the latter which had been formed by recent
rains. An instance indeed is recorded of a Dytiscus being
discovered in a tumbler of water after a shower. They have
also been known to dart at and kill themselves against the
roofs of greenhouses and the like, under the idea that they
were flying into water. They are said to be influenced by
WATER-BEETLES. 201

 

atmospheric disturbances, and during storms to descend to the
bottom of the water, only rising towards the surface as the
weather becomes calmer.

The bodies of the Dytiscide are generally smooth and ovate,
and the different parts of the body, as a rule, fit into each
other. The eyes do not project. The hind-legs are long and
fringed, and the feet are broad and also fringed. The antenne,
as before mentioned, are long and slender. The anterior tarsi
of the fore-legs of the males are frequently more or less
widened, and the elytra of the female are sometimes furrowed
or sulcated.

When these beetles hibernate or are at rest, they retire
into the masses of aquatic plants or into the mud at the
bottom of the water. They all breathe atmospheric air, and
are therefore obliged to come frequently to the face of the
water. Their manner of respiration is very interesting. The
upper part of their abdomen is provided with breathing tubes
or spiracles, which are hidden by the elytra when the insects
are not flying. The back of the abdomen is nearly flat;
above it the elytra when shut form a kind of arch, and thus
inclose the spiracles in a chamber, into which water cannot
enter to wet the wings inclosed within. When the beetles
wish to take a supply of air they gently protrude the
extremities of their bodies above the water, and allow the air
to enter the chamber upon their backs. The air so obtained
can enter the spiracles as the beetles require it, and thus they
are able to remain in the depths of the water until all the
supply of air has been utilised, when they are again obliged
to return to the surface for more. If, for some reason or
other—such as their antenne being held by the valves of a
mussel, of which I have read—the insects cannot return to
the surface of the water, they, though aquatic, will be
drowned, and sooner, it is said, than even land-beetles under
the same circumstances. As these beetles swim to and fro
under the water, a small bubble of air is seen attached to
their extremities.

The tanks in which the Dytiscide are confined should be
kept covered. Carnivorous beetles while in the aquarium
202 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

may be fed upon small garden-worms, a tiny dead fish, or
pieces of raw meat suspended in the water by a little hook.
The meat should always be removed before there is a chance
of its corrupting the water.

The larve of these beetles, which are hatched from cylin-
drical eggs during the autumn and early spring, are carnivorous
in habit, and elongated in shape, gradually tapering towards
the tail. Their heads are usually provided with sickle-like
jaws, through which they are able to suck the juices of their
prey. They are very great eaters, and as they grow quickly
they frequently change their skins, which are interesting under
the microscope. The food of the larve, according to their
size, consists of small fish, tadpoles, aquatic molluses, insects,
and larve of insects, even occasionally of their own species.
When it is time for them to enter the pupal state, they leave
the water and make small caves or hollows in the damp soil
at its edge, from which hiding-places they emerge in about a
fortnight, or more or less according to circumstances and
species, perfect beetles. Though these larve are so rapacious
and fierce, they are not very tenacious of life, for a small hurt
will be quite sufficient to cause their death. It will be
frequently found, while examining the spoils of a hunt, that
they have been among the first to succumb,

The Dytiscide are divided into four sub-families, viz.,
Dytiscides, Pelobiides, Haliplides, and Hydroporides.

The sub-family of the Dytiscides comprises at least eight
genera, which are indigenous to Britain, and are: (1) Dytiscus,
(2) Acilius, (3) Colymbetes, (4) Ilybius, (5) Hydaticus, (6)
Agabus, (7) Laccophilus, (8) Noterus.

As there are about 220 or 230 different species of British
aquatic beetles, it will be quite impossible to refer in this
handbook to anything like the greater portion of them. I
will only attempt, therefore, to describe a few of the most
suitable for, and interesting in, the aquarium.

In writing of the carnivorous aquatic beetles, one naturally
thinks first (though, perhaps, scientifically it is not quite right
so to do) of the handsome, bold, popular, and greedy Dytiscus
marginalis as worthy of heading the list of those which may
WATER-BEETLES. 203

 

be readily kept in confinement. It is common, hardy, and
interesting ; but, as already mentioned, it should not be allowed
companions during its captivity. It is well described as the
“ogre” among insects; for it is indeed as much a source of
fear and danger to the small aquatic animals among which it
lives as is the pike—the fresh-water shark—to its fellow fish.

The generic name of Dytiscus implies that it and its near
relatives are great divers. D. marginalis is nearly the largest
of the British aquatic coleoptera, and it is certainly by far
the most rapacious. The strength of this beetle is amazing,
as anyone may prove for himself, either by taking it up in
his fingers and feeling how strongly it struggles with its
posterior legs to escape from the fingers which are pressing
each side of its elytra, or by endeavouring to remove the
insect while it is clinging with its fore-legs to a water-plant
or to the edges of the aquarium. One has read of the stag
beetle (Zucanus cervus) pushing along the tumbler under which
it was confined; but the water-beetie (D. marginalis) is not
far behind its distant relative in physical powers. No
wonder that this fresh-water “ogre”. is such a source of terror
to its fellows in the pond when its huge strength and great
appetite are taken into consideration.

These Dytisci are very abundant, and may be obtained in
most weedy ponds and ditches; but one must acquire a little
adroitness with the water-net before one can be sure of catching
them, for they are very wary and quick, diving to the bottom
on the first sign of danger, and remaining there clinging
to some weed or stone. They are obliged to thus anchor
themselves, for otherwise, while remaining motionless—as they
are specifically lighter than water—they would rise to the
surface. A good plan of capturing these and other aquatic
beetles is to go quietly to the side of a pond, stand there
with the net in readiness, and, as these air-breathing insects
make their necessary journeys to the surface, place it gently
under them as they dive down with their fresh supply of air.
This method of capture does not disturb either the water of
the pond or its inmates. These beetles will be often seen,
especially if the weather be fine, floating, close to the surface,
204 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

head downwards, and with their posterior legs at right angles
to their bodies. Another way to catch them is to sweep with
the net, backwards and forwards, the weedy edges of the
pond or around the masses of aquatic plants. If the first
attempt is unsuccessful, another should be made in an undis-
turbed part of the water. These beetles will generally be
found in pairs, male and female (Fig. 131). They should not
be placed, when caught, in the same vessel with other insects
of different kinds, or, notwithstanding the terrors of new
captivity, they will be found to have re-commenced their work
of destruction before they arrive at their future home. It

 

Fig. 131. DyTISCUS MARGINALIS (MALE AND FEMALE).

will be frequently noticed by the hunter for aquarium speci-
mens that pieces of water which have supplied certain species
of beetles one year will be without them the next, and vice
versd. This is accounted for by the power and love of migra-
tion which aquatic beetles possess.

As before suggested, a separate tank should be prepared
for D. marginalis. An inverted propagating glass, of 10in.
or 12in. in diameter, will do very well; but a small rect-
angular aquarium will do better, for the forms of the beetles
as they swim to and fro will then not be distorted. The
aquarium should be placed out of the rays of the sun, and
not in too much light, as it will not be wise to depend upon
WATER-BEETLES. 205

 

snails to remove any conferve, for instead of eating the alge
the unfortunate molluscs would be eaten by the beetles. A
single D. marginalis will live longer in confinement than a
pair would. One solitary beetle will sometimes survive two
or three years passed in captivity; but when a male and a
female are kept together it will be generally found that after
a few months, perhaps owing to some conjugal misunder-
standing, the male dies. Celibacy certainly in this case
conduces to longevity. The males, when both sexes are
together, nearly always die first. The female, I believe, is
more rapacious than her mate; she often eats him: he would
eat her, no doubt, if he had the opportunity.

It is not a difficult matter to provide these beetles with
food, for they will eat small fish, young newts, little frogs,
tadpoles, water-snails, garden and other worms, insects and
larvee of insects, and pieces of raw meat.

Dytisci are very destructive to the fry of fish, and often
kill more than they can eat. In the aquarium they will feast,
if no other food be given them, upon a small fish until
nothing but the skeleton is left. A good way to feed these
beetles is to put their food in a separate vessel (a large jam-
bottle will do), and remove them to it: when they have eaten
to repletion, return them to the aquarium, and throw the
discarded food and the water which the bottle contains away.
The beetles need only be fed thus twice a week, and their
aquarium will be kept quite clear and sweet; but if they are
not provided with a special vessel in which to feed, they
must be fed very carefully in their own tank, which should
contain a good supply of healthy growing weeds. The best
way to do this is to attach a piece of raw meat to a small
hook and suspend it in the water, removing it as soon as the
beetles have done with it.

Though D. marginalis is such a terror to small aquatic
insects, they are avenged, for the “ogre” himself sometimes
dies under the ravages of a parasite. A water-mite (generally
Hydrachna globulus) at a certain stage of its existence is
frequently found living as a parasite upon this beetle, and
not seldom is the cause of its death. These parasites attach
206 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

themselves to the back of the abdomen beneath the elytra,
and they are, we may conclude, breathers of atmospheric air.
D. marginalis is also subject to parasitic fungus (Saprolegnia
ferou), which I believe is not nearly so fatal to beetles as it
is to fish.

The male D. marginalis is so unlike the female that some-
times they have been taken by the inexperienced as members
of different species. These beetles are about an inch long,
oblong-ovate in shape, and olive-brown in colour. The margins
of the thorax and elytra are marked with a yellow band.
There is also a rather indistinct yellow crescent in the apex
of the latter. The males are distinguished by having the
first three joints of the fore tarsi developed into a round
sucker, and by having smooth elytra; while the females have
no widening of the tarsi, and possess wing cases which are
furrowed or sulcated. The eggs of these beetles are laid in
slits made in the aquatic plants by the help of a contrivance
called an ovipositor, possessed by the female, and are hatched
in about a fortnight.

The larva of D. marginalis (Fig. 132), when full-grown, is
about 2in. long. It is such a rapacious creature that it has
received the names of “Water-Devil” and “ Water-Tiger,”
while its shape has given it the title of “‘ Fresh-water Shrimp.”
The body of the animal.is a dirty brown in colour and
elongated in shape, and gradually tapers towards the tail.
There are six legs and eleven segments, the former being
affixed in pairs to the first three of the latter. At the
extremity of the last segment there are two appendages
fringed with hair, and close to these appendages are two
spiracles, or breathing holes, by means of which the animal
respires atmospheric air. The spiracles at the sides of the
body, not being required at present, are unopened. The larva
is furnished with some terrible-looking sickle-like jaws, which
are hollow, and through them it is able to suck the juices of
its captives. It also possesses undeveloped palpi and antenne.

The Water-Tiger is a great eater, having, if possible, a
larger appetite than its parents. It seizes its prey with its
jaws, and, with head thrown back, extracts its food. The
WATER-BEETLES. 207

 

favourite attitude of this larva is to float, head downwards,
with its caudal appendages just touching the surface of the
water. It does not swim so fast as, nor are its Jaws so strong
as those of, the perfect insect. It changes its skin from time
to time, according to its growth. The food of the animal
consists of small fish, tadpoles, insects, and larve of insects.
Two of these creatures will never live long together in the
same vessel, for sooner or later one will be almost certain to
eat the other. They may be fed upon
garden-worms, but they do not care
very much for them. They seem to
prefer Corixe to any other food, and
it is rather surprising to see how
cleverly the comparatively slow-mov-
ing animals are able to catch the fleet
ones.

If it be wished to give these larve an
opportunity of becoming beetles while
in confinement, it will be necessary to
prepare an aquarium especially for the
purpose. The tank for this arrange-
ment should be rather large, and before
the water is introduced-a~bank of soil,
sand, and gravel should be built at
one end. When the water is put in
it must be in such a quantity that it a oe
will not cover all of the sloping bank. CUS MARGINALIS).

A very fine siphon ought to be used
or the water will not be clear. The larva spends about a
fortnight in its pupal state.

The aquarium-keeper will find that this beetle and its larva
are very interesting. Of course the two must never. be kept
together, or the latter will never have the chance of becoming
the perfect insect.

I have written so much concerning D. marginalis because its
habits are more or less characteristic of its smaller relatives.

There are five other species of the genus Dytiscus, very
like in appearance and habits to the D. marginalis; but none

 

 

 

 

 
208 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

of them are so common—except, perhaps, D. punctulatus, which
may be distinguished by its somewhat smaller size, and by
the perfect blackness beneath its body.

We have only two species belonging to the genus Acilius:
of these A. sulcatus (Fig. 133) is by far the commoner. This
beetle is a favourite with aquarium-keepers, and is abundant
in still water almost everywhere. It and many of its relatives,
near and distant, certainly do not altogether deserve the bad
character which some people give them. It is not at all likely
that the Acilius sulcatus and other beetles nearly related to
him will do any harm in the ordinary aquarium if they are
properly and regularly fed. I have kept for many months
several beetles of this species in a small tank with a few

 

Fig. 133. ACILIUS SULCATUS (MALE AND FEMALE).

little fish, and not one fish, to my knowledge, has been hurt
in any way by them. These beetles, of course, had plenty of
food. Acilius sulcatus is a handsome beetle, and well adapted
by nature for an aquatic life. It is a flatter and smaller
insect than D. marginalis: it is 3in. in length, ovate in shape,
and greyish-brown in colour. The under-part of the body is
black, with the exception that the sides of the abdomen are
distinctly and regularly spotted with yellow. The margins
of the thorax, and a transverse band in the middle, are a
brownish-yellow. In the male insect the first three joints of
‘the anterior tarsi are dilated, and the elytra of the female
have furrows filled with hairs, these furrows extending to
the apex of the elytra. This beetle, when placed upon its back
while out of the water, makes a curious noise as it springs to
its feet. It also, when out of its natural element, emits, as
WATER-BEETLES. 209

 

so many of its tribe do, a not very pleasant scent. The
odour of some beetles, however, under these circumstances is
by no means unpleasing. Acilius sulcatus is very adroit in
escaping from the aquarium if it has the slightest opportunity. .
The larva of this beetle is not unlike that of a D. marginalis,
though it may be distinguished from that species by its
smaller size, and by its having the first segment of the body
so much elongated as to look like a neck. It catches its prey
by stealth, and, after it has seized it, sometimes shakes it as
a dog does a rat. This larva may be treated in the same
way as its larger relatives. A. fasciatus is the other species
which belongs to this genus.
It differs from A. sulcatus
chiefly in having yellow
abdomen and legs, and it
is not quite so large or
so common an insect.
Colymbetes striatus (Fig.
134) is a beetle of about
the size of A. sulcatus, but
rather more oblong in
shape. It is very common, Fie. ee ‘oe
and may be found at any
time during the year. This
and other species of Colymbetes are strong and ready flyers,
and are perhaps a little more likely to attack their piscine
companions than are the members of the last genus. The
shape of O. striatus is oblong; the elytra are brownish
and the thorax is a yellowish brown, having a dark stripe
in the middle; the body underneath is black and the legs
are a dull red. This beetle while in the general aquarium
should be watched from time to time, and if it seems likely
to hurt the fish, should be removed. But as a rule it may
be taken for granted that as long as it is properly fed it
will do no harm to its companions, at any rate during the
greater portion of the year. C. fuscus is rather smaller in
size and more ovate in shape than the preceding. Its elytra
are brown, with yellowish-brown lateral margins. Its thorax
P

 
210 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

is also brown, but rather darker in the centre, and its wing-
cases have the appearance of having been scratched from
side to side. Its legs are brown. This insect is common,
and is frequently found in the company of C. striatus.
There are five other species belonging to this genus, the
smallest of which is about #in. in length. The larve of
all these beetles are somewhat like those of Dytisci, but,
of course, smaller in proportion.

The genus Ilybius also possesses seven species, of which
I. ater (Fig. 1385) is one of the largest, handsomest, and
most interesting. Its form is oblong-ovate and convex. Its

 

 

Fig. 135, ILYBIUS ATER (MALE AND FEMALE).

colour above is black (whence the specific name) with a
bronze tinge, and there are upon the elytra two brownish-
yellow streaks. The under-part of the insect’s body is
brownish-black. This beetle is found in many parts of Britain
—e.g., around London, in Kent and Norfolk, and in Scotland.
I, fuliginosus has somewhat the appearance of a small Dytiscus
marginalis, and is found in many parts of Britain. It is
about Zin. in length, rather handsome, and looks well in
the aquarium.

There are only three species of the genus Hydaticus found
in Britain, all of which are oblong-ovate in shape and about
sgin. in length. The males, like those of the Dytisci and
WATER-BEETLES. 211

 

Acillii, have the first three joints of the anterior tarsi dilated.
The only species calling for mention here is H. transversalis.
The upper part of the body of this beetle is black, the
margins of the thorax are a dull red, and those of the
elytra are yellow. The legs are also a dull red. This insect
is found in the ponds of different parts of England, and is
fairly common.

We have in Britain nineteen species belonging to the
genus Agabus, of which A. bipustulatus is one of the largest,
being nearly 3in. long. It is an active and handsome beetle,
and looks exceedingly well in the aquarium as it swims to
and fro, with a most conspicuous bubble of air attached to
the apex of its elytra, looking like a drop of quicksilver in
contrast to the blackness of the insect’s body. Although
A. bipustulatus has a rather large appetite for its size, it is
not likely to do any harm in a general aquarium if it is
well fed. I saw very recently one of this species sharing
a worm with a small minnow, or rather the insect was attacking
the head of the worm while the fish was trying to swallow
the tail. This beetle is ovate in shape and black in colour.
There are two red spots upon the crown: hence the specific
name. The legs are a brownish black, and there are three
rows of punctures and quite a network of scratches upon
the elytra. A. bipustulatus is common almost everywhere, and
may be found at any season of the year. A. bipunctatus is
somewhat smaller than the last species. It is ovate and rather
flat in shape. The upper part of its body is yellowish, and
the under brownish-black. Upon the thorax there are two
round dark spots, whence the specific name. The legs and
the tip of the abdomen are a reddish colour. A. maculatus
is an active and prettily-marked beetle; it is rather common,
but looks very well in the aquarium. The shape of the
insect is oval. The elytra, which are black, have pale-yellowish
spots, lines, and margins. The thorax is yellow, with its
anterior and posterior margins black, and the legs are of a
reddish colour. The beetle is about Zin. in length.

Two of the three species belonging to the genus Laccophilus
are very common and very small. They are only about jin. in

P2
212 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

length, and are occasionally found in brackish water. These
insects are noted for the great development of their hind-
legs and for their excellence as swimmers. J. minutus is
ovate and rather convex in shape and greenish-grey in colour.
The head and thorax are yellow, and upon the elytra there
are some rather faint spots. The legs are reddish. This
little beetle is abundant. L. hyalinus is, if anything, rather
a@ commoner insect than the preceding. In shape it is
oblong-ovate and rather flat. The elytra are a greenish
brown, with rather lighter-coloured margins. The legs are
yellowish.

The beetles belonging to the genus Noterus are in form
somewhat like those known as “ Whirligigs.” There are only
two species, and both are rather common. N. semipunciatus
is a small dark-red and shining beetle, a little more than in.
in length. The elytra are rather lighter in colour at their
margins, and are covered with large punctures; the antenns
are short and thick; and the under-part of the body is not
quite so dark in colour as the upper. NV. crassicornis is very
like the preceding species, but a little lighter in colour.

Pelobius Hermanni (Fig. 186) is the only representative in
this country of the sub-family to which it belongs. It is an

 

 

Fic. 136. PELOBIUS HERMANNI (MALE AND FEMALE).

interesting and handsome beetle, and very popular with
aquarium-keepers. From a habit it has of rubbing the hard
edge of the last segment of its body in a groove under its
WATER-BEETLES. 213

 

elytra, and so making a curious noise, it has received the
names of the “ Squeaker,” the “Screech Beetle,” and the
“Chirping Beetle.” Its body appears more fitted for moving
upon the land than through the water. It is, however, very
convex, and is able, with an ambulatory motion, to swim fairly
well. It does not seem to be a great eater, and I have never
seen it attempt to attack a fish or any other of its com-
panions. This beetle, and many others, are fond of hiding
themselves in the gravel of the aquarium, only leaving exposed
the bubbles of air which are attached to the apices of their
elytra. P. Hermanni is so convex that when it is taken out
of the water it can hardly move at all. It is never a very
active-insect. Its colour is a dull red. A patch round the
eyes, the exterior and posterior margins of the thorax, and a
very large spot on the elytra, are black. It is also a dull red
underneath its body, except the breast and the apex of the
abdomen, which are black. This insect is about jin. long,
and is fairly abundant in the weedy ditches and ponds of
many parts of England, but especially in the neighbourhood
of London.

The sub-family Haliplides possesses two genera—Haliplus
and Cnemidotus. The Haliplides have more the appearance
of terrestrial beetles than aquatic, their legs not being very
well adapted for swimming, and their heads are more promi-
nent than those of most of their relatives. They swim
with an ambulatory motion, although not very often, as they
spend a considerable portion of their time in crawling upon
the water-plants. They are broad and convex in shape, and
are hardly ever more than jin. in length, but often less.
Their elytra, which are generally of a yellowish colour, have
large punctures. Their antennew are ten-jointed, while those
the rest of the Dytiscide are eleven-jointed. In distinguish-
ing one species from another, one should be guided more by
the shape of the beetle and the punctures upon its wing-cases
than by its size and colour.

The genus Haliplus contains eleven species, the commonest
perhaps of which is H. ruficollis. This is a very small beetle,
less than iin. in length, and abounds almost everywhere. It
214 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

is ovate in shape, and of a dark yellowish-red colour. The
crown and the base of the abdomen are dark brown, and the
thorax and the elytra are impressed with punctures. The
suture is dark, and there is a small line or stria on each side
of the base of the thorax. 4H. lineatocollis is also a very
common little beetle, and somewhat larger than the last
species. Its shape is ovate, its colour brownish-yellow, and it
may be distinguished by a dark longitudinal line upon the
thorax. Its elytra are punctured and faintly spotted with
brown.

There is only one solitary species belonging to the genus
Cnemidotus, viz., C. cesus. It is din. in length, ovate and
convex in shape, and of a shining yellow colour. Its elytra
are rather deeply punctured.

The sub-family Hydroporides is represented by the genera
Hyphydrus and Hydroporus. The former genus possesses only
two species, one of which is doubtful, as a British insect ;
the latter forty-seven.

The Haliplides and Hydroporides do exceedingly well in
small aquaria which contain plenty of growing plants. They
will not hurt tiny fish; large fish might eat them. But if a
fish should die, they will feed upon it until only the skeleton
is left. They are very useful scavengers. The water of the
tank in which such insects as these are kept, if they are
properly treated, will remain beautifully clear. These little
beetles will not, as a rule, hurt snails; but if one dies, they
will quickly empty its shell and use it as a hiding-place. They
do not require much feeding.

Hyphydrus ovatus (a, Fig. 137) is a most curious-looking
insect, less than jin. in length and globose in form. Its
colour is of a rusty red, and the thorax and elytra are
punctured. When captured it is often found covered with
mud or alge; and when out of the water, it is said to emit
a rather pleasant smell similar to that of honey.

The species belonging to the genus Hydroporus are by no
means easy to distinguish from each other, and one of the
largest is H. 12-pustulatus (b, Fig. 187). This is about
din. in length, and its form is oblong-ovate. The thorax,
WATER-BEETLES. 215

 

which is a light rusty red, has the anterior and posterior
margins black. The elytra are black, and are covered with
reddish spots placed in threes. The legs and antenne are a
rusty red. This beetle is fairly common. UH. palustris is a
small insect found in great abundance almost everywhere. It
is about jin. in length. Its head, margins of thorax, and legs,
are red, and its elytra are dark brown, spotted with yellow.
This beetle, however, varies much in its colouring. H. rivalis
(as its specific names implies) is. found in streams, while most of
its relatives live in stagnant water. The colour of this very
pretty little insect is brownish-yellow, and the thorax has a
black line down the centre. There are two irregular black

 

 

Fig. 137. a, HYPHYDRUS OVATUS ; b, HYDROPORUS 12-PUSTULATUS.

patches upon the elytra, jointed together by three or four
lines of the same colour. This beetle, which is not in. in
length, is not very common.

All the Hydroporides are small, and some of them are
very prettily marked. The males can often be distinguished
from the females by their shining appearance.

The Gyrinide, which includes the genera Gyrinus and
Orectochilus, form the latter of the two families of the
Hydradephaga.

Few water-beetles are more commonly known than the
merry and active little insects which belong to the genus
216 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Gyrinus. They may be seen keeping up their lively gyrations
on the surface of almost any pond or sheltered nook of
many a stream during nearly every fine and mild day
throughout the year. Their habit of continually moving in
either curves or circles has given them the generic name of
Gyrinus, and the more familiar ones of “ Whirligigs” and
“Whirlwigs,” and the sheen of their elytra has also caused
them to be called, most appropriately, “Shiners.” These
beetles are gregarious, and are generally seen together in
numbers ranging from ten to thirty, and this custom of
theirs should be remembered by those who intend to keep
them in confinement. The genus Gyrinus contains about five
British species, the members of which are in shape either
ovate or oblong-ovate, and in size vary from Hin. to a little
more than jin. Their elytra, which are very glossy and are
turned a little under the body at their edges, do not reach to
the apex of the abdomen, and their antenne are short and
thick. It will be noticed that the posterior legs of most
other aquatic beetles are the longest; but in the case of the
Gyrinide the anterior legs are of the greatest length, while
their others are very short and strong, and at the extremities
rather fin-like. The “Whirligigs” use their long fore-
legs for seizing and holding their prey, and also, it is said, for
directing their way upon the surface of the water. The eyes
of these insects are most curious and interesting. Hach eye,
so to speak, is divided into two by a partition, in which an
antenna is fixed. The upper of the two eyes thus formed is
used for looking at objects above the surface of the water,
and the lower for those beneath it. This accounts for their
extraordinary quickness of sight, which anyone can prove for
himself by trying to catch them in a net. These active and
alert little beetles dive under the water at the slightest ap-
pearance of danger from above, often coming up again
beneath some flat floating leaves. They will also thus hide
below pieces of paper placed upon the surface of the water of
the aquarium.

The Gyrinide are very good flyers, and therefore the
tank in which they are confined should be carefully covered.
WATER-BEETLES. 217

 

In captivity these beetles, which are not great eaters, may be
fed upon pieces of raw meat, water- and garden-worms, or
house-flies killed and placed upon the water. While watching
the quick and intricate movements of the “ Whirligigs” upon
the water, one wonders how they are always able to avoid
colliding; and they travel with such rapidity that it is
difficult to follow them with the eye and see how they steer
themselves. Mr. H. W. Bates, writing in Cassell’s “ Natural
History,” while speaking of their gyrations, says: “The two
hinder pairs of legs are extremely short, broad, compressed—
modified, in fact—to suit their extraordinary mode of locomo-
tion—a rapid skimming in curves or circles over the surface
of the water. The rapid forward motion is produced by the
quick fore and aft movement of these strong and well-knit
members, and the curves by the long anterior legs, which,
usually kept folded under the breast, are jerked out one at a
time, so as to change the straight line of progression into
a curve.” The Gyrinide lay their cylindrical eggs (which
hatch in about a week) end to end upon water-plants. The
larve look somewhat like aquatic centipedes, owing to the
filamentary appendages which are fixed to the abdominal
segments of their bodies. These appendages are hollow, and
are used for respiration. When the larve are ready to
assume the pupal state, they ascend the stalk of some aquatic
plant, and then, above the surface of the water, spin a
cocoon, from which they emerge in about a month perfect
“Whirligigs.” These larve,

which seem to be rather

hardier than those of other : @ BE
aquatic beetles, can easily be ~ F
kept in confinement. Small eS z=
aquatic animal life, water- : Le

worms, and the fry of mol-

luses, form their best food. Fic. 138. GYRINUS NATATOR.

Gyrinus natator (Fig. 188),
which is about the commonest
of the Gyrini, is ovate and convex in shape, and very glossy
bluish-black in colour. The edges of its elytra, which are
218 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

turned a little under the body, are red, and the whole insect
measures about in. in length.

Gyrinus bicolor (Fig. 139) is more oblong
in shape than the preceding species, and is
of a glossier bluish-black colour. The
reflected edges of the elytra, middle of the
breast, and legs, are reddish. This insect,

 

Fig. 139. z 7 . <
GYRINUS BICOLOR which is a little longer than G. natator, is

ee generally found in rather brackish water.

Orectochilus villosus is the only species which belongs to
this genus. It is so covered with short hairs that it has a
much less glossy appearance than the rest of its relatives.
This hirsute peculiarity has given it its specific name. The
upper part of the body of this curious insect is of a dull,
brassy-black colour, and the lower, red. The beetle is about
gin. in length, and oblong in shape. It is found (though not
very abundantly) in different parts of England. Unlike the
Gyrini, it prefers to sport upon the water in the dark, and
not during sunshine. In the daytime it hides under the banks
or suitable weeds.

The family Hydrophitide of aquatic Coleoptera, whose members
are, to a great extent, herbivorous, contains thirteen genera,
of which the most interesting and important is Hydrophilus
piceus (e, Fig. 140). This very handsome and gentle beetle
is as well suited for the aquarium as any yet described,
and as it is about 1#in. in length, it is one of the largest of
the British coleoptera.

Two of the more apparent differences between the Hydro-
philide and the Dytiscide have already been referred to, and
they will be of much help in distinguishing the members of
the two families.

This beetle and D. marginalis, or any of the latter’s near
relatives, should never be put together in the same vessel, for
the larger insect would almost certainly, sooner or later, be
devoured by the smaller.

Hi. piceus has frequently been called the “Harmless Water-
Beetle,” but it does not altogether deserve the name, for it
will be quite as unwise to place this large herbivorous insect
WATER-BEETLES. 219

 

among useful or choice aquatic plants as it would be to asso-
ciate an unfed D. marginalis with fish and other defenceless
animals. Though H. piceus will not, as a rule, hurt any of
the inhabitants of an ordinary aquarium, it will be more
interesting in a separate tank, where it can lead the retired
life it loves among the plants it feeds upon. As H. piceus
has no need to pursue its food, it is only adapted for travelling
somewhat slowly through the water by the alternate move-
ments of its legs. It spends a great portion of its time either
at rest among the weeds or crawling over them. Though this
beetle is generally described as herbivorous, it will occasionally,
at any rate while in captivity, partake of animal food. It
destroys a great deal of the plant upon which it feeds, and
therefore it is wise to provide it with Anacharis or some
other quickly-growing and easily-obtained weed.. A pair of
these beetles will live, to all appearance perfectly happy, in
an inverted propagating-glass, or a small rectangular tank,
well stocked with suitable vegetation, and there the female
will very likely construct her nest or cocoon (b and ¢,
Fig. 140), and lay her eggs. The nest is woven by the
help of two small spinnerets, which are placed near the
apex of the abdomen of the imsect; it is shaped some-
what like an ordinary retort. This egg-sac is formed of a
substance which is perfectly impervious to water, and which
has rather the appearance of paper. Inside this pouch,
which at its largest part is about 3in. in diameter, eggs to
the number of fifty or sixty are inclosed, and are hatched,
according to the temperature of the water, in about six weeks.
The young larve (d, Fig. 140) escape through the bottom
of the sac, and seem from the first to be quite vigorous. This
sac or pouch is so constructed that it will float upon the
water with the stem or horn-like part of it uppermost, and
is attached by the beetle to some portion of an aquatic
plant which is upon the surface (f, Fig. 140). The spike or
horn-like part, which is hollow, rises above the water, and
thus admits air to the interior of the sac. The insect is
sometimes able to spin her cocoon and lay her eggs within
three hours.
220 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The larve, although their parents are almost entirely
herbivorous, are carnivorous. They are great eaters and quick
growers; and they are not so long in the larval state as are
the larve of the Dytisci, but are ready to become pupe
within a few weeks from the time they are hatched, if they
have been able to obtain a sufficiency of suitable food. The

 

Fie. 140. HyDROPHILUS PICEUS. a, Full-grown Larva; b, Egg-sac, affixed to
Aquatic Plant; c, Egg-sac opened, showing Eggs; d, Young Larve;
e, é, Mature Insects; f, Leaf of Aquatic Plant.

larve of H. piceus are very difficult indeed to rear from
the egg while in captivity. The only chance of doing so is
to provide them with a great quantity of small aquatic animal
life, and especially the fry of water-snails. These larve,
when well fed and full grown (a, Fig. 140), are longer and
thicker than are those of D. marginalis under similar circum-
stances. They have the power of moving the head, apparently
with great ease, in every direction, and as they feed upon
WATER-BEETLES. 221

 

their prey they frequently throw their heads so far back as
to rest them upon their backs. These larve must be handled
with great gentleness or they will die.

These beetles do not obtain air in the same way as the
Dytiscide do, by protruding the apex of their elytra above
the surface of the water, but by means of their antenna,
which they raise above the water, and which conduct the air
to the hair-like surface of the lower part of the thorax, and
thence to the spiracles. This method of respiration gives
to the breasts of these beetles a silvery appearance while
they are under the water.

The male (H. piceus) is distinguished from the female by
having the last joint but one of the tarsi of its fore-feet
dilated into a kind of triangular plate. The colour of the
elytra of these beetles is a beautiful olive-black. The
abdomen beneath is also black, having quite distinct yellow
spots upon the margin. The antennz, which are reddish,
are nine-jointed, the four terminal joints forming a club.
There is upon the under-part of the body a prominent
ridge ending in a sharp spine. The posterior tarsi are well
adapted for swimming, being much compressed and ciliated.

These beetles may be found in the ponds, ditches, and
canals of England, chiefly the southern part, but they seem
to be rarer than formerly. They may be generally bought of
those who deal in aquarium requisites, however, at from
1s. to 2s. 6d. a pair, according to the dealer and the season.
The aquarium in which these insects are confined sbould be
covered, or they are likely to escape, especially just about
the time they lay their eggs; but anyone, I think, who
keeps them will come to the conclusion that they are the
most interesting and the least trouble of any of the aquatic
. coleoptera.

The only species belonging to the genus Hydréus is H.
caraboides, an insect somewhat similar in appearance to
Hydrophilus piceus, but smaller in size, being about Zin. long,
different in puncturation, and darker in colour; its keel is also
much shorter in proportion to the length of its body. The
shining blackness of its elytra occasionally has a greenish or
222 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

violet tinge. This rather common beetle is very suitable for
the aquarium.

Of the five species comprehended in the genus Hydrobius,
H. fuscipes is, perhaps, the commonest and most suitable for
the tank. This elegant insect can be found upon the weeds
of ponds, ditches, and slow-running streams in many parts
of England. It is sometimes useful in the aquarium as a

consumer of conferve. About

. June the female makes a cocoon
& Bd for her eggs, and attaches it to
4 a the under -side of floating leaves.
This sac is somewhat similar in

2 substance and appearance to

that constructed by the Hydro-

Fic. 141. HyDROBIUS FUSCIPES. philus piceus, but is without

the hollow stem. H. fuscipes
(Fig. 141) is about Zin. in length, and is of a very glossy,
brownish-black colour. Its shape is oval, and its elytra, sides
of its head, and thorax, are deeply punctured. The clubbed
antennz are rather large and conspicuous for the size of the
insect, and the legs are of a reddish colour.

The ten or twelve species belonging to the genus Helophorus
are found crawling upon the weeds, bottoms, and sides of
ponds and slow-running streams in many parts of Britain.
They are frequently found out of
the water, and often covered with
mud. H. grandis (Fig. 142) is the
largest and one of the commonest
of the Helophori. It is oblong in
shape, the thorax being somewhat
narrowed behind. The latter and Fic. 142. HELopHorus
the head have a metallic appear- —
ance, and there are a few faint
brown spots upon the yellowish-brown elytra. The legs, palpi,
and antenne, are of a yellowish colour. This insect, which
measures about Jin. in length, may be found in ponds and
sluggish streams in almost all parts of the British Islands,
and at any season of the year.

 
WATER-BEETLES. 223

 

S. emarginatus is the only representative of the genus
Spercheus. It is a very rare insect—so rare, indeed, that for
some time it was thought to be extinct as a British beetle.
It was formerly found in Whittlesea Mere, Kensington Gardens,
and at Windsor; but rather lately, I believe, it has been
discovered near the South of London. The female is said to
inclose her eggs in a pouch, and carry them about affixed to
the under-part of her body. The eggs are hatched in about
ten days, and as soon as the young larve appear, the busy
and prolific mother immediately commences a new cocoon
to contain more eggs. But notwithstanding the fecundity
of this insect, it is not only rare in this country, but also on
the Continent. This interesting beetle has been described
by the author of the “Coleoptera of the British Islands”
as having the power, both in its larval and in its perfect
state, of walking upon the under-surface of the water, in the
same way that many of the aquatic snails do. S. emarginatus
is about 4in. long, and is of a yellowish-brown colour. Its
head is flat and almost black. Its elytra, which are wider
than the thorax, are spotted with brown; its legs are reddish ;
and its palpi and six-jointed antenne (the last five joints of
which form a club) are yellowish. The larve of this beetle
are said to be so full of air that they seem to have quite a
difficulty in sinking in the water.

The seven species of small beetles which are comprehended
in the genus Philhydrus are in shape rather similar to the
Hydrobii. Their length varies from iin. to 4in., and their
antenne are nine-jointed, the last four joints forming a pointed
club. Their bodies are long and convex, and in appearance
seem more like those of terrestrial than aquatic insects.

The Berosi are yellowish and very convex insects, and
are about lin. in length. Their thoraces are ornamented
with a spot of beautiful metallic colour; their eyes are very
prominent, and their antenne are eight-jointed, the last
three joints forming an obtuse club. The four species belonging
to the genus Berosus are B. luridus, B. ericeps, B. spinosus,
and B. afinis, most of which are fairly common. B. spinosus
possesses a short spine near the apex of its elytra; hence
224 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

its specific name. It is frequently found in brackish
water.

The small beetles classified under the head Hydrochus are
not more than }in. long, but generally less. They have long,
narrow bodies, seven-jointed antenne, prominent eyes, and
their elytra are very glossy and beautifully coloured. 4H.
angustatus is perhaps the commonest of the four species of
the Hydrochi, and is really a beautiful little insect, with
its very glossy, greenish-black wing-cases. Its thorax, which
is narrower than the elytra, is deeply punctured, and its
legs and antenne are reddish.

The little beetles belonging to the genus Laccobius are
divided into the species L. minutus and DL. nigriceps. They
are rather less, most of them, than lin. in length, and are
yellowish-grey in colour. The Laccobii are by no means rare.

The very tiny beetles comprised under the head Ochthebius
are frequently found crawling under or over stones which are
half out of the water. Some of these insects are so small
that they are not more than ;,in. in length. Their antenne
are nine-jointed, the five terminal joints forming a club.
Their bodies are elliptical, their elytra of a glossy metallic
colour, and their legs short. Of the ten species included
in this genus, O. pygmeus is une of the commonest. It is
about j,in. in length, and of a bright metallic-brown colour.
The thorax is deeply punctured, the legs are reddish, and
the palpi and antenne of a lighter colour with darker
tips.

The beetles of the genus Hydrena have the same habits
and habitats as those of the preceding. They are chiefly
noticeable for the extreme length of their palpi, which almost
equal in length half of the body. Their antenne are seven-
jointed, the last four of which form an oval club. The elytra,
which are mostly of a bright black colour, do not cover all
the abdomen. The thorax is broad across the middle,
and gradually tapers towards the anterior and posterior
margins; the legs are long. 4H. riparia is one of the most
abundant of the six species of the Hydrene. It is a narrow,
shining, black insect, having rather a long head, and the
WATER-BEETLES. 225

 

thorax deeply punctured. The antenne, palpi, and legs are
dark brown. It is rather less than tin. long.

The beetles belonging to the genus Limnebius are the
tiniest of the Hydrophilide, some of them being less than
j7sin. in length. Their bodies, which are black, are slightly
depressed. Their antenne are eight-jointed, the last six joints
forming the club. The elytra are slightly truncate at the
apex. These insects are divided into five species, some of
which are very common.

The beetles comprised in the family Parnide, though very
interesting, are not so suitable for the aquarium as those
already mentioned, as they are generally found in swift-
running water. The insects of the sub-family Parnides are
covered with a kind of hair, by means of which they are
able to carry with them sufficient air for their wants during
the long time they are accustomed to spend beneath the
water. Parnus prolifericornis is the commonest species, and
is din. long. It is oblong in shape, and of a dark brown
colour, its legs being reddish. The Parnide, as well as the
Hydrophilide, are herbivorous.

The Elmides, which are also a sub-family of the Parnide,
are chiefly remarkable for their largely- developed tarsi and
claws, by means of which they are able to cling to stones at
the bottom of very swift-running water. The longest feet’
and claws are possessed by Limnius tuberculatus, the one
species of the genus. This remarkable insect, which is rare
and local, is found in the River Trent.

Very often an aquarium is found to be made out of pro-
portion—that is, its depth is too great for its length and
breadth. This mistake of construction can be rectified by
fillmg the vessel only half or three-quarters full, as the case
may be. Such a tank as this will be very useful for keeping
not only many of the smaller species of the Hydrophilide,
but also some of the very beautiful and interesting beetles
which live rather upon aquatic plants than in the water itself,
such as certain of the Donaciade, Chrysomelide, and Galleru-
cide, and even one or two of the Rhynchophora, or Weevils.
The tank for these insects should be covered with a sheet of

Q
226 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

glass cut to fit, and stocked with such aquatic plants as
protrude in their growth above the surface of the water,
choosing, if possible, those upon which the different species of
beetles are accustomed to feed—e.g., Water Plantain (Alisma
Plantago) for the Weevil, Hydronomus alismatis and the
Arrow-head (Sagittaria  sagittifolia) for the Galleruca
sagittaric, &c.

The Donaciade are very beautiful beetles, and are divided
into the genera Donacia and Hemonia, the former containing
nineteen species and the latter two. All of them are her-
bivorous, gregarious, and of more or less lovely metallic
colours. They are nearly always found upon water-plants,
in the stems of which their larve live, and at or near the
roots their pupe are inclosed in silk-like cocoons. The under-
part of these beetles is covered with downy hair, and their
legs and tarsi are very strong. Their bodies are generally
elongated, their thoraces are narrow, and their elytra are
rather flat. As a rule, these beetles do not take to the water
unless it be to escape capture; and their swimming under

such circumstances is not
/ much more than a struggle

{tere to regain the plant from

LP which they fell, or its neigh-

eee encima bour.
aX Donacia dentata (Fig.
. 143) is a species generally

found upon floating leaves,
such as those of the Water-
Lily or Pond-Weed. Its
strong hind-legs are furnished with two teeth or spines.
The elytra are of a brassy colour, and the legs are reddish.
There is a glossy pile beneath the body.

The Chrysomelide, or Golden Apple Beetles, are as beauti-
fully coloured as the Donaciade, but are of a different shape,
being very convex above and flat beneath. Their length
varies from about iin. to tin. Their heads are not sunk in
the thoraces, and their antenne are rather short, gradually
thickening towards the tips. Chrysomela polita is a common

  

 

Fic, 143. DONACIA DENTATA.
WATER-BEETLES. 227

 

species, and is frequently found upon the Water-Mint (Mentha
aquatica). It is an ovate insect, having brightly-polished
elytra of a greenish or bluish tint. The legs are of a metallic
green.

Besides the beautiful beetles just mentioned, there are many
others, equally beautiful and interesting, which have similar
habits and habitat. As all these insects delight in the sun-
shine, it should be arranged that, as far as possible, the
tank in which they are confined can receive the rays of the
sun upon the parts of the plants which are growing above
the surface of the water, but not upon the water itself.

In concluding this chapter, I venture to repeat that no one
should attempt to keep beetles in an aquarium unless they
can be properly and regularly fed. The little trouble neces-
sary for this will be amply repaid.

Q 2
CHAPTER XII.

WATER-BUGS OR WATER-MEASURERS,
WATER-SCORPIONS, ETC.

  
 

NSECTS are said to have a complete metamorphosis
when their pupal, nymphal, or chrysalis condition
is quiescent. For example, the larve of beetles
are active and voracious; but when they become pupe they
pass their time without either moving or eating, until they
arrive at the imago or perfect state. The Coleoptera have,
therefore, a complete metamorphosis. But as the Heteropterous.
insects change very little, apparently, except in size, during
their lifetime, and as they are always more or less active
and ravenous, they are said to pass through an incomplete
metamorphosis.

The Heteroptera, or Bugs, as they are not very euphoniously
called, have beaks or rostra, and by means of these they are
able to suck the juices which form their food. The holes,
whether in the plant or in the animal, through which this
liquid nutriment is extracted, are made by four very sharply-
pointed bristle-like members which are inclosed within the
rostrum.

These insects are divided into the two tribes, Geocorise
and Hydrocorise. The members of the former are chiefly
distinguished by the possession of long antenne and three-
pointed tarsi from those of the latter, which have antenne
hidden in a groove beneath the eyes, and two-jointed tarsi.
WATER-BUGS, WATER-SCORPIONS, ETC. 229

 

All the Geocorise are terrestrial with the exception of the
Hydrometride, which are generally found upon the surface
of the water.

Everyone who has been accustomed while in the country
to spend any time by the water’s side, must have noticed
those curious insects which seem to have the wonderful power
of walking or rather progressing upon the surface of the
water. These creatures are commonly called Water-Measurers,
and often, but erroneously, Water-spiders. Not a few of
them are very abundant, and may be found almost every-
where and at any season of the year. They are gregarious,
wary, and active. Some of them frequent both stagnant
and running water, and others either the former or the
latter. The Hydrometra, Gerris, and Velia are the principal
genera of the Hydrometride, the different species of which
may be treated while in confinement in almost the same
way. Many of them will be content with house-flies killed
and placed upon the surface of the water, and some of
them after a time will suck the juices from a piece of raw
meat suspended in the right position. As most of these
insects possess wings, and those which do not have them
are very agile climbers, the aquarium in which they are con-
fined should be covered. It should be also remembered that
they are carnivorous, and will be likely to feed upon each
- other unless they are properly associated and properly fed.

 

Fic. 144. HyDROMETRA STAGNORUiI.

Hydrometra stagnorum (Fig. 144) is a very remarkable-
looking insect, reminding one by its appearance of Euclid’s
definition of a line, for the creature has length, but seems to
230 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

have no breadth to speak of. It is indeed the narrowest for
its size of all British insects. It is about 3in. long and about
half a line broad; its legs are wonderfully slender, and it is
of a dark slate-colour. The portion of its head in front of
its eyes is considerably elongated, and at the extremity of
this curious elongation rather long and very fine antenne
are inserted. The eyes are prominent, and the under-part of
the body has a hair-like covering. As H. stagnorum has no
wings, the easiest way to tell the perfect insect from the pupa
is to remember that the outer part of the body in the former
is hard and in the latter soft. The soft covering allows for
the necessary growth. To detect this curious creature, one
must look very closely at the surface of the water upon
which it walks. It is found upon
both ponds and streams, and also
upon their adjoining banks.

Of the genus Gerris, which
contains about ten species,
G. lacustris (Fig. 145) is the
commonest member. It is not
quite $in. long, of a dark slate-

i colour, with yellowish marking
at the sides of the body.

Fig. 145. GERRIS LACUSTRIS. G. Najas, the largest and one of

the commonest species, can be
easily recognised by its great size, long legs, and ‘want of
wings. It is found upon running water, and is very difficult
to catch in the net. The larva and the pupa of this insect
may be distinguished by the size of the abdomen. When the
former is just hatched, the abdomen is extremely small, but
it increases in size as the animal grows older. The legs are
very long from the first, and the full-grown G. Najas is
known by the faint signs of wings. G. thoracica is, smaller
and less common than the preceding Gerris, and may be
readily detected by a reddish mark upon the back of the
thorax; hence the specific name. G. gibbifera is of the same
size as G. thoracica, but is without the mark upon the thorax.
It is also a rather broader insect, and is more abundant.

 
WATER-BUGS, WATER-SCORPIONS, ETC. 231

 

G. argentata is the smallest of all the Gerride, but it is by
no means common. All the members of this genus have a
fine, hair-like covering beneath their bodies. They use their
fore pair of legs for seizing their prey, their intermediate pair
for rowing themselves along upon the surface of the water,
and they steer by means of the last pair. Their antenne are
four-jointed, and their wings are carried so close to their
bodies that there is some little difficulty in detecting them.
Their eyes are prominent, and their beaks, when not wanted,
are kept folded back beneath the fore-part of their bodies.
Most of the Gerride hibernate in the winter-time beneath
some stone or piece of wood and the like close to the water’s
edge, occasionally leaving these quarters upon any fine and
mild days which may happen during that season. The
smaller species of the Gerride are more gregarious than the
larger.

Velia currens, a common and very active little water-runner,
is exceedingly abundant, and more suitable for the aquarium
than any of the Hydrometride already mentioned. It seems
to be a very contented insect, and readily submits to captivity.
It is, however, a skilful climber, often astonishing its owner
by its adroitness in escaping from an apparently quite secure
prison. When it has been a short time in the aquarium, it
becomes tame, and eagerly attacks the food which is given to
it. Half-a-dozen of these insects will quickly extract all the
nutriment they can from the body of a bluebottle. Flies
seem to be their most suitable food while in confinement; but
if these cannot be procured, they will satisfy their hunger
with a piece of raw meat. This lively little insect is some-
times called the Water-Cricket, and may be found upon nearly
every pond or stream, and frequently at any season of the
year. It is not quite gin. long, of a dark brown colour, with
two orange stripes along the back. It very seldom has wings.
In summer-time great numbers of these Velie are found
together, and they do not seem to care about choosing the
smoothest pieces of water for their meetings. Besides the
Hydrometride just mentioned, there are other interesting
members of the family which might be kept in confinement.
232 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The two familes belonging to the tribe Hydrocorise (Water-
Bugs) found in Britain are the Nepidw and the Notonectide.
The former include the genera Nepa, Ranatra, and Naucoris,
and the latter Notonecta and Coriaa.

All the members of the Nepide family (Water-scorpions) live
for the greater part of their life in the water, and there feed
upon other aquatic animals. They are not very active insects,
trusting rather to stealth than to speed for the capture of
their victims. The Water-scorpions have very powerful rap-
torial fore-legs, with which they seize and hold their prey
while they extract all its juices. There are four other legs,
which are chiefly used for swimming or crawling among
aquatic plants. Their rostrum, which has three joints, is
quite strong enough to pierce the human skin. They have
wings and fair powers of flight.

The Water-scorpion should not be kept in the same
aquarium with small fish, for it will kill them; nor with large
ones, for they might kill it. Though this insect is so coura-
geous and predaceous, it will quickly. succumb to improper
treatment. It is an interesting object in a small tank, where
it ought to be the only occupant. The vessel in which it is
confined should be covered, and should also be provided with
something or other, such as a piece of cork, wood, or pumice-.
stone, which will float, and upon which the creature can climb
when it wishes to leave the water for a short time. With
care the Water-scorpion will live for a long while in captivity.
For food it apparently prefers small fish and tadpoles, but it
is content with almost anything of an animal nature.

Nepa cinerea (Fig. 146) is very common in ponds nearly
everywhere. It readily escapes detection, however, owing to
its colouring, which is similar to that of the mud upon which
it is fond of resting. More than once I have thought that
my Water-scorpions had escaped from their aquarium, on
account of this facility of hiding, and only discovered my
mistake by their change of position. This aptitude for con-
cealment is very useful to the insect, for its prey comes un-
suspectingly into its neighbourhood, and only realises its danger
as it is seized by the cruel fore-legs, and pulled within reach
WATER-BUGS, WATER-SCORPIONS, ETC. 233

 

of the sharp beak. WN. cinerea has great courage, or recklessness.
For example, I have taken a Nepa from its aquarium, in which
it has lived for a consider-
able time, and placed it
with a tiny minnow, in a
saucer before me; but no
sooner did the little fish
swim within reach of the
fore-legs of the “ scorpion,”
than it was seized by them
and pressed against the
hungry creature’s rostrum. Fic. 146. NEPA CINEREA.
Yet this “water-bug” had
not only been moved from one vessel to another a minute
or two previously, but also from one room to another.

N. cinerea (Fig. 147) is very flat, elliptical, about lin. long,
and of a dark brown colour, with a slight reddish tinge.

 

 

Fic. 147, LaRVA AND PERFECT INSECT OF NEPA CINEREA.

The upper part of the abdomen is a brighter red, and the
head is small and sunk almost to the prominent eyes into
the thorax. At the end of the body there are two long and
234 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

slender appendages (Fig. 146), more than 3in. in length, which
are used for breathing. These caudal appendages, when placed
close together, have the appearance of only one appendage
(Fig. 147): they have given the animal its familiar name of
Water-scorpion, for, of course, it is no scorpion, but a bug.
This insect respires by means of these filaments. The larva,
with the exception of its size and want of wings, is very like
the imago (Fig. 147); the pupa, just before it enters the
perfect state, casts its outer covering, which, when shed, is so
complete in shape, that it may be readily mistaken for the
creature itself. N. cinerea lays very curious oval eggs, which
have seven filaments or bristles at one end. These filaments,
which are about as long as the egg itself, form themselves into
a kind of receptacle for the egg which follows that to which
they are attached.

Ranatra linearis is a much more curious and less common
insect than the preceding. It resembles the Nepa in its
antenne, tarsi, and its long respiratory apparatus at the ex-
tremity of its body, but it is unlike that creature in the great
elongation of the thorax and abdomen—hence its specific name.
The Ranatra measures 13in. from the beak to the commence-
ment of the two bristle-like appendages, and the appendages
themselves are nearly ldin. long. The head is small, but the
eyes are large and very prominent. The fore pair of legs,
which are raptorial, are extremely curious and interesting.
By means of an unusually long cova they have great freedom
of movement. These legs, so to speak, are by far the most
active portion of the animal’s body. The Ranatra moves slowly
and stealthily through the water, either by swimming with a
curious motion of the legs, or by crawling over the aquatic
plants. Its manner of securing its victims is similar to that
of the Nepa, and it is, if anything, more fearless and ravenous
than that insect. The Ranatra has very beautiful wings, which
it not infrequently uses. When this “scorpion” has been some
little time out of the water, it has difficulty in returning beneath
the surface, owing apparently to its small specific gravity and
to the dryness of its body. I remember once finding in a
corner of my study, after a long hunt, a Renatra-which had
WATER-BUGS, WATER-SCORPIONS, ETC. 235

 

escaped from its aquarium, and on replacing it in its proper
quarters it struggled seemingly so unsuccessfully to sink that
I assisted it with the gentle pressure of a finger. The upper
part of the insect’s abdomen beneath the wings is bright red,
and the rest of the body is a darkish brown. The Ranatra
will sometimes breed in confinement, but the larve are difficult
to rear. They will not hesitate, if they lack a sufficiency of
suitable food, to feed upon one another, the younger ones falling
victims to the older. It is necessary for success to provide them
with a considerable variety and quantity of small aquatic animal
life. The eggs are longer than those of Nepa cinerea, and are
fuinished with only two filaments or bristles each instead of
seven. These filaments are passed, pressed together, through
the leaf of some water-plant, such as that of the Frog-bit
(Hydrocharis morsus-rane), and immediately after insertion they
open, and thus the egg is fixed securely to the leaf. Sometimes
as many as half-a-dozen eggs will be found hanging to the same
leaf. The eggs, according to the temperature of the water,
hatch in about a month. The young Ranatre from the first
are in shape very like their parents, but lighter in colour.
R. linearis will live a long time in captivity if properly cared
for. It should be fed on the same kind of food as that recom-
mended for its relative the Nepa. The two Water-scorpions
must not be kept together in the same aquarium. QR. linearis,
which is rarer than the Nepa, can generally be bought for
about a shilling, during the summer, of London dealers in
aquarium articles.

The Naucoris cimicoides (Fig. 148)
is rather a rare insect. It is about
in. in length, oval in shape, and of an
olive-brown colour. It is not provided
with respiratory filaments like those of
the Nepa and the Ranatra. It is able, Fig. 148. Naucoris
owing to its fringed hind-legs, to swim erent)
very much faster than the two “ water-
scorpions” previously mentioned. A little care is necessary
in handling this insect because of its power to inflict a
rather painful wound. Its habits and habitat are similar to
236 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

those of its relatives, and while in confinement it should be
treated in the same way.

The best known, but perhaps not the commonest, member
of the family Notonectide is Notonecta glauca (Fig. 149),
or Water-Boatman. This curious and interesting insect
may very frequently be observed floating upon its back,
with its oar-like legs extending at right angles to its
body, just below the surface of nearly every pond or
ditch. It is a little more than }in. long; its body is convex
and slightly keeled above and flat below, and its prevailing
colour is yellow, with the exception of a black mark in the
shape of a triangle upon the back; this black triangle is
the scutellum. N. glauca has a broad head, very bold-looking
eyes, four-jointed antenne, and the tibia and tarsi of the
hind-legs very flat and
fringed on both sides with
a kind of hair. The crea-
ture’s fore-legs are raptorial,
and its beak is so sharp
and strong that it is able
to inflict quite a painful
wound on the human
hand. The eyesight of the

SG cece Water-Boatman is very

, : acute, and he will dive
quickly to the bottom of

the pond or ditch directly his would-be captor puts forth
his net to take him. This insect looks well in the aquarium,
for it is very lively and an expert swimmer. It always swims
upon its back, and as it dives beneath the water it takes
with it a store of air entangled in the hair with which parts
of its body are covered. The air under these circumstances
has somewhat the appearance of quicksilver, and makes the
insect very attractive as he darts to and fro among the weeds
of a well-arranged tank. But beauty, activity, and method
of respiration, are about all that can be said in its favour;
for it is extremely predaceous, and will quickly attack and
kill most of the aquatic animals which are usually kept in

 
WATER-BUGS, WATER-SCORPIONS, ETC. 237

 

an aquarium. It will even, unless properly and regularly fed,
destroy its own species. Small fish seem to be its favourite
food. It swims under and seizes its victim with its fore-
legs, and quickly buries its beak deeply into the poor creature’s
tissues; nor will the “boatman” relax its hold until it has
extracted all the nutriment it can. N. glauca will also feed
upon tadpoles, small frogs, and flies, placed upon the surface
of the water. Sometimes it will content itself with a worm
or a piece of raw meat suspended in the right position. As
this insect is able and willing to use its beautiful and interest-
ing wings, the vessel in which it is confined should always
be kept covered. On no account should the Water-Boatman
be placed in the same aquarium with fish. At night-time
occasionally it makes a curious noise. The larva can be
distinguished from the full-grown insect by its shorter body,
its unseasoned-looking colour, and its want of wings.

Notonecta maculata is generally regarded as a variety of
N. glawea. It may be known by a blackish band across the
lower part of the body and by its spotted back; hence its
specific name.

The insects belonging to the genus Coriwa are more
abundant and less rapacious than the species of Notonecte,
and they are quite as interesting and ornamental in the
aquarium. They are often wrongly called Water-Boatmen,
from which they may be quickly distinguished, not only by
their shape, but by their swimming with their backs upper-
most. These creatures, unlike the Notonecte, do not remain
for any length of time near the surface of the water. They
spend most of their life either hunting for food or clinging
to the stones or weeds at the bottom of the pond or ditch
in which they live. Of course, they frequently have to rise
for the purpose of taking in a fresh supply of air. It is
quite surprising how many insects of this genus one may
sometimes capture with a single sweep .of the net. They
are not able to swim so quickly as the Water-Boatman.
There are more than twenty species of Coriza found in
British waters; but some of them are taken only in Scotland,
and others in brackish water, such as the ditches near
238 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

Gravesend. They are all more or less interesting in the
aquarium, where they may be kept much more easily than
the Notonecte. The head of a Corixa is rather curious; it
is convex in front, and very concave behind, and it is attached
apparently so slightly to the thorax that there always seems
a danger of the creature becoming decapitated. Indeed, I
have not seldom found Corixe in the aquarium floating about
dead and minus their heads. The creatures take in a fresh
supply of air by coming up to the surface of the water in
such a way that the top of their heads and the upper part
of their thoraces are slightly out of the water, and then,
bending their heads downwards and upwards, they enclose
some air, which is conducted to the breathing-holes beneath
their bodies. During summer the bottoms of shallow ponds
may be seen literally swarming with small species of Coriza,
which are continually coming to the surface of the water for
oxygen. Corie have wings, which they frequently use.
The upper part of their bodies is flat, and in many of the
species is ridged. While in the aquarium Coriwe are much
more easily provided with food than the Notonecte, for they
will readily content themselves with garden-worms or pieces
of raw meat. They are very good scavengers. I have kept
a great many Coriae for a long time, and I have never seen.
them attack fish, but I am not sure that they would not do so
if starved. They will occasionally prey upon each other. The
Corize make quite a distinct noise as they knock their heads
against the side of the aquarium in which they are confined.
Coriza Geoffroyi (Fig. 150) is the largest and about the
commonest species of the
Corixe. It is about in. long,
and the upper part of its
body is a kind of dark brown,
minutely spotted with yellow,
with the exception of the
Fic. 150. CoRIXA GEOFFROYI. thorax, which is marked with
transverse black and yellow

lines. These spots and lines cannot well be seen without
the help of a magnifying-glass. The legs are also yellow,

 
WATER-BUGS, WATER-SCORPIONS, ETC. 239

 

with the exception of the lower parts of the posterior pair,
which are about the same colour as the insect’s back.
C. Geoffroyi, like Notonecta glauca, has a fringe of hair
round the extremity of its body.

C. Sahlbergi is more abundant than the preceding species,
which it resembles in appearance, but it is about half the
length, and less than half the width, of its great relative.
This insect will live for a long time in an aquarium, where
it will give very little trouble.

Besides the above, C. striata, C. moosta, and C. fossarum,
are the commonest members of this genus, the different species
of which are very difficult to distinguish.

Besides the Notonecte and the Corize, there are other
members of this family, such as Plea minutissima, closely
related to the former, and the Cymatie and Sigare, allied
to the latter, which may be kept in the aquarium, but which,
I think, give more trouble to feed and to keep than most
aquarium-owners would care to bestow upon them.
CHAPTER XIII.

LARVZ OF WATER-FLIES.

  

{|ERTAIN rather fragile-looking insects may be seen in
summer-time flying, apparently with difficulty to
H} ~themselves, over the surface and in the neighbour-
hood of fresh water, or may be found concealed among the
weeds and trees growing on its banks. These insects are
commonly called Caddis-flies. They are very like moths, with
unusually long antenne. Their chief colours are either brown
or black. Some of them are as much as 2in. across their
expanded wings, and these (the large insects) generally fly at
night. A few of the Caddis-flies are so much like moths
that it is no easy matter to make a distinction. However,
as a rule, the former may be distinguished from the latter
by remembering that the wings of the Caddis-fly are covered
more or less closely with a kind of hair, while those of the
moth are adorned with powder-like scales; hence the one is
a trichopterous (Gr. thrie, a hair, and pteron, a wing) insect,
and the other a lepidopterous (lepis, a scale, and pteron, a
wing). The Caddis-fly can also be known from a moth by its
antenne and mouth-organs. Its antenne are proportionately
longer than those of a moth, are carried more horizontally,
and are filiform or thread-like, whilst those of moths are °
generally plumose or feathery.
The females of the Caddis-fly deposit their eggs upon stones
near to, or half in, the water, upon aquatic plants, or even,
LARVZ OF WATER-FLIES. 241

 

occasionally, under the water itself. The eggs are inclosed in
a gelatinous envelope, and hatch in a few days. The young
larve remain in the glutinous mass for a short time before
they venture to brave the dangers of their watery world.
They are elongated, and more or less cylindrical in shape, and
of a yellowish-white colour. Their bodies are soft, with the
exception of the head and the thoracic segments, which are
horny. They have branchial filaments, placed either in bunches
or singly (according to the species) on the sides of their bodies,
six legs, and strong jaws. These insects, which are in them-
selves so defenceless, would soon fall victims to fish and other
aquatic animals were they not endowed with an instinct which
makes them about the most interesting inhabitants of the
fresh-water aquarium. Under the influence of this instinct,
they build for themselves houses, portable in most cases, but
stationary in others, in which they are more or less secure
from the attacks of their numerous enemies. These houses
are formed in various shapes, and are made of various
materials, according, as a rule, to the species of the larva
which constructs them. Sometimes the materials depend, to
a great extent, upon the locality. The caddis-cases, as they
are generally called, are made of pieces of stick, leaves, sand,
small stones, shells of molluscs, moss, rushes, seéds, and the
like. These cases are formed either of all one kind of sub-
stance or of two or more different kinds. But whatever
material is used, the larve generally manage to make these
places of refuge of the same specific gravity as the water, so
that they may have no difficulty in moving from place to place.
The insects fasten their building materials together by the
help of a viscous secretion, which on exposure hardens into
a kind of silk. The insides of the caddis-cases are also lined
with this silk-like substance. The larve are able to cling
most tenaciously to their tubes by means of small hooks placed
at the extremity of their bodies, by the third pair of legs,
which are often longer than the rest, and in many species by
the help of three smaller humps situated upon the first
segment of the soft part of their bodies. So firmly, indeed,

will these creatures hold to their cases, that an attempt to
R
242 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

forcibly drag them out would only end in their being pulled in
half—or, at any rate, in their death. But they may easily be
dislodged by inserting the stalk of a leaf or a very thin piece
of stick into the end at which is the extremity of the insect.
This part of the tube is generally of smaller diameter than
the other, and the animal will nearly always, after a little
tickling, evacuate its fortress. Sometimes the larve will
voluntarily leave their cases; but whether they have been. driven
out of their homes, or have left of their own accord, they will
generally return to them upon the first opportunity.

It is a very interesting sight to see these clever little
architects and builders at work. Upon being taken from their
cases and placed naked, along with suitable material, in a

 

Fic. 151. LARV# OF DIFFERENT SPECIES OF THE CADDIS-FLY, AND
THEIR CASES.

saucer or other vessel, they will readily make new tubes.
They can be persuaded to construct their dwellings of pieces
of coal, bits of glass, beads, filings of metal, and other things
of a similar kind. Some caddis-worms work much more quickly
than others, but the speed of construction frequently depends -
upon the materials at hand.

There are in Great Britain about one hundred and sixty
different species of Caddis-flies, which have been divided by
Mr. McLachlan, the author of the “ Monographic Revision and
Synopsis of the European Trichoptera,” into seven families.
Of these families, that of the Phryganeide (Gr. phruganon,
a bundle of sticks) contains the largest species; and that of
the Limnophilide the most numerous. It will, of course, be
impossible to refer in this chapter to anything like all the
LARVZ OF WATER-FLIES. 243

 

species, nor is it necessary, for reference to a few of them
will be quite sufficient to remind those who do know, or to
show those who do not know, how very interesting the larve
of the Caddis-flies are.

The worm of Phryganea grandis makes a cylindrical case
(a, Fig. 151) of almost equal diameter throughout, and forms
it of portions of leaves and other vegetable matter arranged
spirally. This larva and its case are generally found in ponds
or very slow-running streams. The insect, in common with
many others, has the habit of turning itself while within its
tube, so that it can protrude its head at either end. Phryganea
grandis (Fig. 152), about the
largest British species, is a
little more than #in. long,
and its wings, when expanded,
are at least 2in. from tip to
tip. It is one of the com-
monest and handsomest of
the Caddis-flies. It may be Fig. 152. PHRYGANEA GRANDIS.
known by its ash-coloured
anterior wings, brown posterior wings, and yellow-ringed
antenne. Like all its relatives, it folds its wings alongside
of its body when at rest. :

The larve of P. obsoleta, P. striata, and all of the family,
make the same kind of cases as that of P. grandis. P. minor
is the smallest member of the Phryganeidz. It is rather a
handsome insect. Its anterior wings
are spotted.

The larve of the large and well-
known family of the Limnophilide
make cases very varied in their con-
struction. They may be found either
Fig, 155. Case OF He in stagnant or quick-running water.

RHOMBICUS. The case of the Limnophilus rhombicus

(Fig. 153) is rather common and cum-
bersome. It is made of pieces of vegetable fibre, pieces
of stick or twigs of various thickness, bits of grass, and
portions of moss. These are all cut about the same length

R2

 

 
244, FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

and laid transversely, giving the whole case a bristling
appearance.

The cases of the larve of the Caddis-fly L. flavicornis are
very varied, and often uncommonly beautiful and interesting.
Some of them are most regular in their construction and
others exceedingly irregular. Occasionally they are made of
the same kind of materials which are used by the larve of
L. rhombicus, with the shell of a small species of Planorbis
added here and there (d, Fig. 151). Not infrequently are

 

Fic. 154. (1) LARVA AND CASE, AND (2) NAKED LARVA (ENLARGED) OF
LIMNOPHILUS FLAVICORNIS.

they constructed entirely, or almost entirely, of these shells,
which are so closely and skilfully packed together, that as
many as forty or fifty shells may be counted in a single case
(1, Fig. 154). The larve of Limnophilus flavicornis (2, Fig.
154) will use other shells besides those of tiny Planorbes in
the formation of its tube. Not only will it press into: its
service small univalves of any kind it may happen to meet
with, but even bivalves, such as the Spherium corneum, other
Spheria, or some of the Pisidia. It seems to be quite care-
less whether it makes use of the right or left valve, or both
valves of one of these molluscs. Nor does it stop to find out,
LARV OF WATER-FLIES. 245
before it “ annexes” a shell, whether the owner of it has left
or not; for it is by no means an unusual thing to find a
eaddis-case composed of shells in which the animals still live.
This is rather hard upon the poor molluscs, for they have
to be carried about as their captor wishes. It is a very
good plan for those who are collecting fresh-water shells to
examine the cases made by the larve of L. flavicornis. Of
course, it will be readily seen that the tubes formed of such
a variety of materials must often be very irregular, as well
as apparently cumbersome.

The larve of ZL. lunatus make a case of sand or vegetable
material, to which they attach long pieces of stick, which
project at either end (c, Fig. 151). These long bits of wood
seem to act as balancers. This case is generally found in
stagnant or very slow-running water.

The larve of L. vittatus make a curved case of fine sand.
It may be likened in shape to an elephant’s tusk, and in
appearance it is somewhat similar to e, Fig. 151.

The larve of DL. pellucidus make cases chiefly composed of
whole leaves, laid almost flat against each other. The “worm”
itself is inclosed in a tube within the leaves. This is by no
means an uncommon case in some parts of the country. It
is generally found in stagnant water.

The larve of the genus Stenophylax live in streams, and
make their tubes of tiny pebbles (b, Fig. 151). Sometimes
when the water is very swift, the cases are fastened slightly
to large stones. If the collector will take the trouble to
examine the lower part of large stones in quick-running
streams, he will frequently find bunches of very small gravel
attached to that part. So firmly are they fastened that it
requires quite a strong pressure of the finger or thumb to
remove them. These bunches are fixed cases of the Caddis-
worm. The larve of Caddis-flies found in quick-running
water are not suitable for the aquarium.

As the Caddis-worm grows, it enlarges its case by making
an addition to the larger end. When this is done, the case
is shortened at the other end. While the Caddis-worm is
moving from‘fplace to place, it protrudes its body just suffi-
246 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

ciently to use its legs, and when it is attacked by an enemy
it withdraws itself deeply into its tube. Most of these larve
may be considered herbivorous, though at times they are
not unwilling to partake of a carnivorous diet. They will
occasionally eat a portion of a worm, pieces of beef or mutton,
sometimes very young fish. A few of the Caddis-worms are
thought to be entirely carnivorous, feeding as a rule upon other
aquatic larve. However, it is well to take for granted that
the Caddis-worms which are suitable for the aquarium are
herbivorous. These little creatures should not be placed in a
tank in which choice weeds are growing, or they will certainly
do a great deal of harm; and the best way to keep these very
interesting insects is to place them in small aquaria, where
they may be easily seen at their work, and in which small
quantities of weeds may be put as required. Caddis-worms
should not be kept together in great numbers, or they will
interfere with one another. They will live for a long time in
the aquarium, often apparently without eating anything at
all. When they do not feed, the period at which they will
enter the pupal state is considerably postponed. Caddis-
worms of various species may be found at almost any season
of the year.

As the time arrives at which it is necessary for the larva
to enter the pupal-hood, it in most cases makes preparation
for that change by fastening its tube to a stone or water-
plant, and covering the open ends of it with a kind of silken
net, so constructed as to keep out all enemies, and let in the
water necessary for respiration. Sometimes this grating is
made with the help of pieces of stone or vegetable matter.
Occasionally a larva closes up one end of its case in the
manner just described, and with the head protruding at the
other end digs a hole in the bottom of the stream, in which
it almost half buries its tube vertically. When it has done this
it is supposed to change its position in the case before it
becomes a pupa. Very recently I saw a Caddis-worm in an
aquarium performing this act of semi-interment. I removed
it to another vessel, and it soon reburied itself. A few days
after the larva has closed up its case, it enters the pupal
LARVZ OF WATER-FLIES. 247

 

state. The insect’s appearance as a pupa is very different
from that which it had as a larva. Its wings, legs, and
antenne are then placed close to the sides of its body. The
pupa’s only movements while in the case are said to he
oscillations from side to side. After spending a few weeks in
the pupal state it breaks the covering at one end of its tube
and swims very swiftly to the surface of the water; then it
mounts some protruding stone or aquatic plant, and remains
there while the pupal envelope splits, and it—a perfect insect
—is free. Some pupe, however, do not leave the surface of
the water, but float there until they emerge fully-developed
Caddis-flies.

Everybody knows a Dragon-fly when he sees-it; but every-
body does not know what an exceedingly interesting creature
it really is, especially during that portion of its life which it
spends in the water. The Dragon-fly, of which we have in
England forty-six species, is one of the most beautiful, and
the most voracious, of all our insects. It is often called by
country people the “ Horse-Sting ” or “ Horse-Stinger,” and
sometimes also, I believe, the “Flying Adder.” But it does
not deserve such names, for it has no sting at all. That
which is taken for a sting is an apparatus given by Nature
to the male Dragon-fly for the purpose of carrying off a wife.
This gay and gaudily-dressed courtier seizes his lady-love
round the neck with the claspers situated on the last segment
but one of his body, and leads her away as his own. Pairs
of Dragon-flies thus united may be frequently seen in summer-
time making their flight together in tandem fashion. The
female Dragon-fly deposits her eggs either singly or in
bunches in the water or very close to its edge. Sometimes
they are attached to the stems of water-plants, and sometimes
also, it is said, they are inserted by females of some species,
by means of an ovipositor, in small incisions made in aquatic
weeds. Occasionally, the Dragon-fly has been seen to go
beneath the surface of the water, by crawling along the stalk
of a suitable plant, for the purpose of laying her eggs.

Dragon-flies are divided into three sub-families, viz.: (1)
Zischnide, (2) Libellulides, (3) Agrionides.
248 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The Aschnide may be generally known by their large and
almost hemispherical heads, by their exceedingly great eyes,
which meet together above, and by their long and rather
slender bodies. These insects keep their wings extended
when at rest. The largest British Dragon-fly (Anaz formosus)
belongs to this sub-family, and is about 3in. long; and the
Zschna grandis is nearly as large, measuring not much less
than 4in. across its expanded wings.

The Libellulides have heads, eyes, and wings very like the
4Eschnide, but their bodies are generally broader, shorter, and
flatter. They also keep their wings extended when not flying.
The commonest representative of this sub-family is Libellula
depressa. Perhaps this insect more than any other is called
the “Horse-Stinger.” It is about 2in. long, and its body is
broad and flattened. The male is covered with a lovely violet-
blue powder, and the female has a yellowish-brown abdomen,
spotted with yellow upon the sides. Another well-known species
belonging to the Libellulides is Sympetrum vulgatum. It is about
2in. long, and has a yellow cylindrical body and clear wings.

The Agrionides are the smallest, the most elegant, and the
most delicate-looking of all the Dragon-flies. It is owing
perhaps to their graceful forms that the French call them
and all their relatives “Demoiselles.” The English name,
however, seems the more appropriate, for the Libellulide are
certainly about the most predaceous and bloodthirsty * of
all British insects. The eyes of the Agrionides are separated
from one another by a wide crown. The abdomen is cylin-
drical, extremely slender, and flattened a little at the ex-
tremity. These Dragon-flies when at rest place their wings
close together over their backs. <Agrion puella is about the
best-known member of this sub-family. It is a little more
than lin. long. The body of the male is prettily spotted, or
rather ringed, with blue, while that of the female is marked
with brassy-black. Calopteryx virgo is also very abundant in
certain parts of the country. The abdomen of the male is
blue and that of the female is greenish. The former insect has
beautiful metallic-blue wings, while those of the latter are of
a pretty brown; hence the generic name.
LARVZ OF WATER-FLIES. 249

 

As Dragon-flies have an “incomplete metamorphosis,” their
larve have more or less a resemblance to themselves, the
full-grown insects. The resemblance is in shape, certainly
not in colour, which is generally dark brown and very like in
shade to the mud upon which the larve frequently crawl and
hunt for their prey. They are nearly the most predaceous
of all aquatic larve, and they are more ravenous still, if
possible, when they become pupx. Though they are so
greedy, they have at the same time a wonderful power of
fasting, and will live, seemingly in perfect health, without
apparently eating anything at all.

One of the best ways of procuring the larve of Dragon-
flies is to sweep the bottoms of ponds, or rather deep ditches,
with the net, or to fish up with a hook, fastened to the end
of a cord or stick, the tangles of weeds which have sunk
there, and lift them on the bank. After watching such
dripping masses for a minute or two, most likely several larve,
together with other insects of different species, will be seen
crawling about the mud and the decaying plants which have
been thus drawn out of the pond.or ditch. Some of the larve
will be exactly of the colour of the mud; others will be nearly
black; while a few, perhaps, will be covered, more or less, with
conferve. They will be, if there are many of them, most
likely of different shapes, sizes, and ages. In fact, some of
them ought to be called pupe rather than larve, for the
signs of wings in their cases will show that they have arrived
at their nymph stage.

On examining many larve of Dragon-flies taken from two
or more pieces of water, one will conclude that they may be
divided, on account of their various forms, into at least three
groups. The first animal to be noticed, perhaps, owing to its
strong and bold appearance, will be in shape like a, Fig. 155.
This will be the larva of one of the Hschnide. Then there
will be another insect, having much the appearance’ of the
preceding, but stouter and clumsier. The eyes are smaller
and further apart, and the head is more square; sometimes
it will be more or less covered with foreign matter (b, Fig. 155).
This larva is a representative of the Libellulides. And, lastly,
250 FRESH-WATHR AQUARIA.

 

there will be noticed an insect much slenderer than either of
the former, and instead of the spine-like projections at the
end of the body, there will be some beautiful leaf-like appen-
dages—often of considerable length. This is the larva of one
of the Agrionides.

All these larve, to whatever sub-family they belong, are
extremely predaceous, and get their living by preying upon
their weaker companions of the water. They occasionally do
not hesitate, if food is scarce, to become cannibals. Unlike
some aquatic carnivorous creatures, such as Nepa cinerea,

 

Fig, 155. PuP# OF DRAGON-FLIES.

they do not kill unless to satisfy hunger. Nor are they
quarrelsome.

They obtain their prey in a most extraordinary manner.
They are really hypocrites, for they wear a “mask.” This
“mask” is'a deadly and very curious apparatus. It is a re-
markable arrangement of the lower lip or labium, and consists
of several joints. The first joint is about +in. long, more or
less, according to the size and species of the insect, and it is
also about one-third of its length broad, and very thin. One
end of this piece is fixed, so to speak, under the chin of the
animal, and at the other end there is attached a somewhat
similar joint, but rather broader at its further extremity. At
LARVE OF WATER-FLIES. 251

 

this extremity there are articulated two claw-like pieces, which
open and close at the will of the insect. When this apparatus
is in repose, the first joint folds backward under the head of
the creature, the second folds forward, and the claw-like pieces,
when placed together, form a kind of cup, which covers a
portion (more or less, according to species) of the lower part
of the face. So closely does this prehensile arrangement pack
away, that its presence may easily escape unnoticed. When
the animal wishes to seize any prey, it creeps very stealthily
and slowly up to its victim, and when near enough shoots out
with great rapidity the apparatus just described, seizes the
victim with the claw-like part (a, Fig. 155), and drags it, firmly
held, to within a convenient distance of its mouth. The limb
is used so quickly and surely that one is reminded, while seeing
it in operation, of the tongue of the frog, already referred to
in Chapter VII. The creature does not often miss its mark.
This ‘mask ” has little or no lateral! movement.

The larve and pupz of Dragon-flies are not only very in-
teresting in their manner of obtaining food, but they are, if
possible, even more interesting in their method of respiration.
Those, however, which belong to the two sub-families, the
Aischnide and the Inbellulides, differ somewhat in their
breathing arrangements from those of the Agrionides. The
former have at the extremity of their bodies five spines, two
being much smaller than the other three. These spines, which
can be opened and closed at the will of the animals, surround
an opening which leads into the interior of the body, in which
the tracheal, or air, tubes are situated. Through this orifice,
thus guarded, these insects can draw water into the latter part
of their bodies, and then having, by means of the respiratory
apparatus which is placed there, extracted all the oxygen it
contained, they discharge (b, Fig. 155) it through the same
opening by which it entered. This water is generally expelled
gently, but occasionally with great rapidity and force. When
the latter is the case, the animals are driven through the water
with considerable speed. Indeed. this forcible expulsion of
water is the only way by which these creatures can travel with
anything like celerity from place to place. Under such influence
252 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA,

 

they progress with a series of jerks or plunges. Frequently,
when a larva or pupa is suddenly removed from its aquarium,
it will be seen to discharge a tiny stream of water into the
air. The water under such circumstances is sometimes shot
no little distance. J was examining lately some of these insects
which I had placed in a little water in an ordinary plate, and
while lifting gently, with a pair of forceps, the tail part of
one of the larve, some water was driven upon the globe of
the lamp by the light of which I was working; and I do not
think I shall be exaggerating when I say that, had not the
water ‘been stopped in this way, it would have been thrown
nearly 3ft. The insect was not much more than lin. long.
Sometimes, when a larva or pupa is returned to its aquarium,
it will shoot water into the air. In this case the creature seems
so anxious to get quickly away from its captor, that it discharges
its stream before it is fairly under the surface of the water.
If one of these insects is placed upon its back in a little water
contained in a plate, the expansion and contraction of its
abdomen can be plainly seen as it takes in and discharges
the water necessary for respiration. These animals are able
to swim upon their backs.

The larve and pupe of the Agrionides have three rather
large leaf-like appendages at the end of their abdomens.
These appendages, which are furnished with tracheal tubes
connected with others contained within the bodies of the
insects, extract the oxygen from the water and supply it to
the internal trachee. The animals often use these gill-like
plates in the same way that fish do their tails, and thus they
swim somewhat slowly through the water.

As the larve and pupe of Dragon-flies grow, it is neces-
sary for them, from time to time, to change their skins.
This change of skin is rather frequent, and very complete;
so complete, indeed, that sometimes the aquarium-keeper will
think that there are two larve in the same vessel where the
night before there was only one. After a certain number of
changes of skin, the wing-cases begin to appear, and then
the creature has passed from the larval state into that of
the pupal. As the time draws near for the nymph to become
LARVE OF WATER-FLIES. 253

 

the perfect Dragen-fly, it ceases to eat, and begins to grow
languid. It should now, if in captivity, be provided with
some means by which it may leave the water. A piece of
stick put slantingly in the gravel and sand at the bottom of
the tank, and rising above the surface of the water, will
answer the purpose very well. The pupa will creep slowly up
this stick, and will remain at some little distance above the
water, clinging with its claws (given it for this special purpose)
to the under side of the stick, and will wait there its final
change. In due time the skin at the back of the thorax
splits ; through this split, after considerable effort, the head,
thorax, and legs of the Dragon-fly slowly emerge, and then
the creature, apparently quite exhausted with its struggles,
hangs helplessly down, the remaining portion of its body
still being within the old skin. When it has thus rested
sufficiently, it gradually lifts itself up until it can grasp with
its legs the forepart of its late covering, and with this pur-
chase it is able to draw from the pupal integument the
remainder of its abdomen. It has now, with the exception
of the wings, all the appearance of a perfect Dragon-fly.
Gradually, however, the wings expand until they are of the
full size, and after a little hardening and drying they are fit
for use. The development of the Dragon-fly from the pupa
is a most interesting sight. I shall never forget my delight
and astonishment when the first pupa I kept became a
Dragon-fly. The change was made at night. (I believe these
changes generally do take place at night, for the Dragon-fly
is at this time of its life so helpless, that if it were not for
the darkness it would have ‘little hope of escaping from its
numerous enemies.) In the morning when I looked at my
pupa I saw it, as I thought, in the same place that it had
been the evening before, but on lifting the cover of the
aquarium I found clinging to it a magnificent Dragon-fly of
the species Aschna maculatissima. I could not quite under-
stand its presence at the moment, for to all appearance there
was still the pupa. However, on a closer inspection, I dis-
covered that it was only the skin of the former object of my
care, though it was exceedingly like the insect itself. The larve
254 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

and pup of Dragon-flies are very easy to keep in confine-
ment, giving little or no trouble. ‘They will eat various
aquatic animals, such as tadpoles, water-worms, tiny fish,
Corixe, Notonecte, &c.; and when these fail they will con-
tent themselves with garden-worms. The water in which
they live, if they are carefully supplied with food, will remain
perfectly bright and clear. Several of these insects will agree
together, and they will not be guilty of cannibalism unless
they are starved. I have hardly ever known them die, though
I have kept very many in confinement. The larve and
pupe of the Mschnide are, I think, the most suitable of
their kind to keep in confinement. It is supposed that these
insects live from one to three years, according to their
species, before they become perfect Dragon-flies.

The members of the Ephemeride (Day-flies) family of the
Neuroptera are chiefly remarkable for the extreme shortness
of their lives when they attain the imago or perfect state.
Some of them, when they have reached that condition, only
live for a few hours—being born, so to speak, after sunset
and dying before sunrise; while the longest-livers, the patri-
archs of the family, exist but for a day or two as a rule,
though in captivity it is said that they have been kept alive
for a week or even more. Appropriately, then, are they named
Ephemeride—beings whose length of life is limited to a day.
The larve of these insects, however, live from one to three
years, according to their species.

Day-flies, or rather May-flies, as they are commonly called,
are very delicate-looking creatures, generally possessing four
minutely-reticulated wings and two or three extremely long
sete, or tail filaments. The hinder pair of wings are very
much smaller than the former pair, and sometimes are wanting
altogether. These insects, owing to the lack of development
in the organs of the mouth, seem incapable of taking food of
any kind whatever. Their antenne are very short and awl-
shaped, and their fore-legs are very often extremely long.
The males are distinguished by two curious appendages affixed
to the last segment but one of their body, by the great elon-
gation of their fore-legs, and by the “ up-and-down” manner
LARVE OF WATER-FLIES. 255

 

of their flight. The females as they fly deposit their small
oval eggs in the water, which sink and adhere to stones and
aquatic weeds. The larve, which in due time are hatched
from these eggs, do not bear much resemblance to the full-
grown insects. Their bodies, which are flat and elongated,
have three long feather-like appendages at the extremity of
the abdomen. At the sides of the abdomen there are some
leaf-like branchial organs attached in pairs to all the segments
of the body except (according to species) the last three or
four. The antenne are long and bristle-like. The larve and
pupe have strong mouths, and feed by preying upon small
aquatic animal life. For a long time it was quite a matter
of doubt what was their proper food. Some authorities
declared that because their bodies, when dissected, were found
to contain mud, that they ate mud; while others supposed that
they consumed vegetable matter. These larve construct no
cases as do those of the Caddis-fly, but live either freely in
the water or in curious burrows made in the banks of the
ponds and streams which they inhabit. As a rule, it is the
larve of the larger species of the Ephemeride which make
the burrows. These burrows, which are formed somewhat in
the shape of the letter U, are so arranged that the insect can
go in at one end and out at the other, and so save itself the
inconvenience of turning round within its narrow home. In
making the burrows, these creatures seem, in some measure,
to imitate the common earthworm by swallowing at least a
portion of the mud or soil they are excavating. This habit
accounts, it is thought, for the presence of mud within their
bodies.

These larvee change their skins frequently as they grow,
and are said to become pups when their thoraces show signs
of bearing wings. After a certain time, according to species,
the pupa leaves the water and develops into a fly, but, strange
to say, not the perfect fly, for there is still another change
before the imago appears. The sub-imago, as it is called, is
the “ Green Drake” of the fisherman. It is a slow and clumsy
flyer, and-soon settles upon some spot conveniently situated
for getting rid of the pellicle which covers its whole body, and
256 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

hides its true colour. It then frees itself in a wonderful
manner from this very thin skin, and emerges a beautiful
and active fly, with the filaments at the extremity of its body
of about double their former length. Numbers of these filmy
skins may be seen adhering to trees or weeds upon the water’s
edge.

The wings of the perfect Day-fly are so delicate and fragile,
that it is almost impossible to preserve the insect in anything
approaching a life-like condition without placing it in spirits
of some kind. These insects emerge from their pupal
envelope generally about sunset. They nearly always appear,
when at all, in great numbers; the males assembling together
in crowds, and attracting attention by their curious and
graceful up-and-down flight. The swarms of these insects,
though frequently very great in this country, are often far
greater in the neighbourhood of rivers and canals upon the
Continent. Indeed, their numbers there are sometimes so
enormous that the bodies of these tiny flies are gathered and
used as manure.

The larve and pupe of the Day-flies may be easily kept
in confinement, where they may be seen to go through their
wonderful metamorphosis. They will live, apparently quite
contentedly, in a small aquarium, whether its bottom is covered
with mud or not. The best species for the tank is Ephemera
vulgata, the larve- (Fig.
156) of which is about an
inch long. It will fre-
quently change its skin,
which forms a very in-
teresting object under the
microscope. It ought to
Fic, 156. LARVA OF Day-FLy, EpHemera be always provided with

VULGATA (ENLARGED). suitable food, which

should consist of cyclops,

water-fleas (Daphnic), and the like. These little fresh-water
crustaceans may be easily bred in great numbers for this
and similar purposes, directions for which will be given in
another chapter. When the time draws near for the pupa

 
LARVE OF WATER-FLIES. 257

 

to become the sub-imago, a landing-stage should be prepared
for it—one similar to that recommended for the pupe of the
Dragon-fly will do. And if the aquarium-keeper is for-
tunate, and has arranged matters properly, he will be able to
witness not only the interesting sight of the pupa becoming
the “green drake,” but also the “green drake” developing
into the beautiful and graceful Day-fly (Ephemera vulgata)
(Fig. 157).

There are three other genera belonging to the family
Ephemeride—viz., Baétis, Brachycercus, and Cloén. The imago
of the genus Baétis is much like that of the Ephemera,
with the exception that it has only two setz instead of three,

 

Fic. 157. Day-FLY (EPHEMERA VULGATA).

but the larva of the former is very different from that of
the latter. Its head is much broader, blunter, and more
sunk in the thorax than is that of the larva of the Ephemera.
The legs are also larger in proportion and placed more
closely together than are those of the latter insect, and the
antenne are much shorter. There are some curious and
interesting branchial leaflets attached to the segments of the
abdomen, and at the extremity of the body there are three
long bristle-like appendages. Its treatment, and that of the
larve of the two genera Brachycercus and Cloén, while in
confinement should be the same as that of their near relative
the larva of the genus Ephemera. The imago of the genus
Brachycercus has two wings and three sete, and that of the
genus Cloén has two wings and two setz. The Day-fly of
8
258 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the genus Baétis is the “March Brown” of the angler. The
larve of the Ephemeride may be found, either in their burrows
in the mud, or hiding under stones, in either stagnant or
running water. It is hardly worth one’s while to hunt for
them specially, as they are so frequently found while searching
for other fresh-water animals; but they certainly repay the
trouble of keeping them when taken. They are generally
seen crawling about the mud which is brought up with the
hand-net.

The insects of the Perlide family of the Neuroptera are
distinguished chiefly by the veins of their wings and by the
formation of their thoraces. The longitudinal nervures on
the disc of their wings are united by transverse ones;
and the three segments of their thoraces are almost of equal
size. These flies have four brownish wings, and long and
tapering antenne. The wings are longer than the body, and
when folded, lie flat, overlapping each other, upon the crea-
ture’s back. There are two, generally long, filaments attached
to the last segment of the abdomen. The larve (Fig. 159) are
very similar in appearance to the perfect insects (Fig. 158).
They live in either stagnant or running water, but much
oftener in the latter than in the former; do not make cases
like the caddis-worms, nor burrow like the larve of the Day-
flies, but live freely in the water, crawling about aquatic plants
or under stones; are carnivorous, and feed upon small animal
life, especially upon the larve of other insects; and swim well
with an undulatory motion of their bodies. The pupz are
known from the larve by the appearance of the wings in their
cases. The aquatic life of the Perlide lasts for two or three
years, and when it comes to an end, the pups climb up an
aquatic plant or something else which will take them above
the surface of the water, and then wait until the pupal
skin bursts and they are able to emerge from it perfect insects.
The females carry their eggs, for a time before they deposit
them, at the extremity of the abdomen. The flight of these
insects is slow and laboured, and some of the males do not
fly at all. The larva of Nemura variegata, sometimes called
by anglers the “Willow-fly,” is the most suitable for the
LARVE OF WATER-FLIES. 259

 

aquarium, as it is found in stagnant as well as running water.
This species is one of the commonest of the Perlide. The
Perlide ave frequently called “Stone-flies.” Some fishermen,
however, only recognise the Perla bicaudata, a brownish insect
nearly lin. long, as the “Stone-fly.”

 

Fic. 158, STONE-FLIES. @, MALE; b, FEMALE,

While hunting for fresh-water animals, one not seldom comes
across an insect wrapped up in two or more green leaves or
pieces of leaves of some aquatic plant. The leaves and the
animal have somewhat the appearance of a caddis-worm in its
case; in fact, for a time before I knew what it was, I mistook
it (and I dare say others
have done so also) for a
caddis-worm. It does not
however, belong to the
Trichoptera, but is a cater-
pillar of a small moth
commonly known as a
“China Mark.” The “China Fig. 159. CREEPER, Larva OF THE
Marks” are remarkable for STONE-FLY.
being the only moths whose
caterpillars are aquatic. There are only five species of
these moths in Britain, the largest of which is not
more than lin. across its expanded wings. These moths
have white wings, with black, brownish, or yellowish mark-
ings. The females deposit their eggs upon aquatic plants,
and the larve generally seem to eat their way into the interior

s2

 
260 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

of the plant upon which they are hatched, and then after a
time proceed to make for themselves a case or home out of
its leaves. The case is usually made of two pieces of leaves
neatly joined together. The larve of some of the Hydro-
campidee use more than two portions of a leaf in the con-
struction of their cases. For instance, the larve of the
Cataclysta lemnalis, as its specific name implies, feeds upon
duckweed, and of several of the leaves of this plant it makes
its home or case. The larve of the “China Marks,” as they
grow, from time to time enlarge their cases, or, as the leaves
forming them decay, repair them. They enter and complete
their pupalhood while in their larval homes. These creatures
are herbivorous, and feed generally upon the leaves of the
plants on which they are born, and of which they make their
cases. They do not always, however, confine themselves to the
same weed either for food or for building material. One of
the most beautiful of these “China Marks” is the Hydro-
campa stagnalis, and its larva is suitable for the aquarium.
The vessels in which these larve are confined should be pro-
vided with plenty of water-weed—such, for instance, as the
Vernal Starwort (Callitriche verna), (Fig. 50), which ought to
be placed in the tank according to directions given on p. 70.

There are many people, I believe, who look upon Gnats and
their near relatives the mosquitoes as not only tormenting,
but useless and uninteresting, insects; whereas, in fact, at
least during the greater portion of their lives, they are
both useful and very interesting. And to look upon all Gnats
as tormentors is to err not a little in the matter of justice;
for it is only the female members of the family which are
guilty of what is commonly called “biting.” The males are
known by their plumed or feather-like antennsw, which have
been compared to ostrich feathers on a very minute scale.
The females are also plumed, but in a small degree when
compared with the males, and there is no difficulty in distin-
guishing the sexes. Sometimes, during fine weather, Gnats
are seen flying together in such multitudes that at a distance
they look like columns of smoke. It is only, as a rule, the
males which thus assemble in the air. For food, Gnats
LARVAE OF WATER-FLIES. 261

 

extract the nectar from flowers; but the female Guat is always
ready to make an addition to this fare by sucking the blood
of animals, not even oniitting, alas! that of man.

The female Gnat’s method of laying her eggs is exceedingly
curious and interesting. She deposits them upon the surface
of stagnant water. To do this, she looks about for some piece
of floating grass, stick, or the like, upon which she settles.
She then places her fore pair of legs upon her temporary
raft, and her intermediate pair either just touching the water
or else upon the extreme edge of the raft, while she crosses
her hind-legs ready to receive the egg she is about to lay.
This egg, which is oblong and narrower at one end than the
other, she holds until she has brought forth a second and
has joined it, by means of the sticky substance with which
it is surrounded, to the first. She thus continues to lay her
eggs and fasten them together until they number from 200
to 300. All the eggs are glued side by side with their
narrower ends uppermost, and so a kind of unsinkable boat
is formed, which is slightly concave above and convex below.
This curious “boat” will stand a great deal of very rough
weather without running any risk of going to the bottom. If
it is pushed forcibly under the water, it will rise again to the
surface in the proper position immediately upon the removal
of the pressure. Neither a very heavy shower nor the pouring
of a considerable quantity of water upon it will sink it: its
buoyancy and self-righting power are remarkable, and quite
worthy of the notice of makers of lifeboats. During favour-
,able weather the eggs which form the “boat” hatch in a few
days. A kind of small door opens at the lower end of each
egg, which closes again after the exit of the young larva
into the water.

The larve of Gnats are curious-looking little creatures
(Fig. 160); they have rather large heads, very large thoraces, and
elongated bodies, with a curious breathing arrangement near
the extremity. This breathing arrangement consists of a small
tube, which is fixed to the eighth segment of the body. When
the creature wishes to take in a fresh supply of air, it pro-
trudes the end of this tube above the surface of the water, and
262 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

the bristles which guard the orifice open in a star-like fashion,
admit the air, and close again, to prevent the ingress of the
water as the larva, with its extraordinary motion, dives down
again to the bottom of the pond, ditch, or tub. There are
some curious bristle-like fins attached to the last segment of
the body, which seem to assist it in swimming and sustaining
itself near the surface of the water during the act of respira-
tion. These larve are useful in helping to cleanse the water
in which they live by devouring various decaying matters which
they find there. The jaws of these creatures are fringed with
bristles in such a way that they are able to cause a small
current of water to set in towards the mouth, and so suitable
food is brought within the insect’s
reach. If some of these larve are
kept in a plate in which there is a
little pond-water, this very inte-
resting manner of feeding may be

ta, we plainly seen through an ordinary
‘
BL

 

magnifying-glass. These creatures
swim by alternately straightening
Baas 160, Lee AND pire and bending their bodies. They
(CULEX CILIARIS). never seem to make any journeys,
except those between the bottom
of the water and its surface. If one should go, during
warm'and sunny weather, cautiously to the side of some old
tub or butt full of water, he will most likely see several of
these larve busily taking in fresh supplies of air; but directly
they notice any movement upon the observer’s part, they,
will wriggle and jerk their way down to the bottom out
of sight. They. may be easily captured by placing under
them, as they descend, a small hand-net made of very fine
muslin. These creatures are useful for feeding small fish and
other aquatic animals upon.

Before the larve of Gnats enter their pupalhood they
change their skins at least three times. The pupa is in
appearance very different to the larva. It seems to be top-
heavy, on account of what may be called its head. This head
is enormous (Fig. 160), in proportion to the size of the body.
LARVH OF WATER-FLIES. 263

 

That which is taken for the head is really the head, thorax,
wings, and legs of the future Gnat, enclosed in a kind of
envelope. The creature undergoes another great change when
it leaves the state of the larva and enters that of the pupa,
besides the apparent enlargement of the head, namely, the
alteration of the position of the respiratory organs. The
larva, when it needed to take in oxygen, floated head down-
wards, with the top of its breathing-tube just above the sur-
face of the water; but as the pupa, on account of its large
head, would have no little difficulty in taking up such an
attitude, it is supplied with two horn-like members, which are
affixed to the hinder portion of that part which is called
the head, and which it can protrude above the surface of
the water. The pupa, therefore, when it breathes, floats
head uppermost. At the extremity of its abdomen there
are two leaf-like appendages. Its motion when swimming is
somewhat similar to that of the larva. It takes no food. As
the time for the final change draws near, it comes to the sur-
face of the water, and remains there perfectly still. Gradually
its body seems to get lighter and lighter, and to rise higher
and higher out of the water, until the skin between the respira-
tory organ splits; and soon the perfect Gnat is free. The
imago uses its late pupal skin as a kind of raft during the
time it is drying its wings and preparing for flight.

The aquatic life of the Gnat under favourable circumstances
lasts for about a month. The “egg-boats” of these insects
should be procured and placed in a suitable and portable
vessel, and then their very interesting life-history may be
observed from almost the beginning to nearly, if not quite,
the end. The Gnat, I think, will not lay her eggs and
build her boat while in confinement, but she may sometimes
be seen going through the curious operations upon the
surface of the water of some pond or tub.

In England there are nine different species of Gnats, the
commonest of which are the House Gnat (Culex ciliaris)
(Fig. 161), the Wood Gnat (C. nemorosus), and the Ring-footed
Gnat (C. annulatus). The first and the last are those which
generally enter dwelling-houses and torment their inmates.
264 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

C. annulatus is the larger of the two, and is able to inflict the

more painful wound. The curious humming noise made by

Gnats is caused by the exceed-

ingly rapid vibration of their

ee wings. It is said to be only

fei the females who make this

ieee sound. It “has been calcu-

lated,” says one writer, “that

the Gnat vibrates its wings

age > 3,000 times a minute,” but

e , “a another writer records that

At the sirene proves the vibra-

Gs He-Me ee tions to be 15,000 a second!

(CuLEx CILIARIS). The Chironomide, or Midges,

are chiefly distinguished from

gnats by their proboscis, which, instead of being long and

horny, is short and fleshy. They are very gnat-like in

appearance. Their antenne are long and plumed, especially

those of the males. The antenna is so plumed as to be of

a triangular shape. The “bite” of a Midge is not nearly so

painful as that of a gnat; and many of the Midges are

altogether harmless. These insects, like the gnats, spend the
larval and pupal portion of their lives in the water.

The members of the genus Corethra are the most gnat-like
of all the Midges. One species, C. plumicornis, is very
common, and its larva is one of the most interesting and
decidedly the most extraordinary of all aquatic larve. This
creature is sometimes called the “Phantom Larva” or the
“Glass Larva.” It well earns such names, for it is so trans-
parent that there is no little difficulty in seeing it in the water;
and through the translucent sides of the animal the greater
portion of its internal organisation is plainly visible. Its
specific gravity seems to equal that of the water, so that,
without any effort at all, it can remain at the top, middle, or
bottom of the water in which it lives, as it thinks fit. This
interesting larva is slightly more than 3in. long, about jin.
deep, and less than this broad. It gradually tapers towards
the tail. Its head has somewhat the appearance of a rabbit’s
LARVZ OF WATER-FLIES. 265

 

head when it has been skinned. Fig. 162 gives some idea of
this curious larva to those who do not know it. At the
extremity of the head there are two antenna-like members
(a), each of which is terminated with four spines, or claws.
The animal is supposed to use these claws in turning over the
mud in search of food; but though I have kept a great many
of these larve for a long time, and watched them closely, I
have never seen them so hunt. Perhaps it is because they
have always been provided with plenty of the insects upon
which they feed. Next to the antenne there is a cluster of
ten needle-like bristles, or lancets (b), and just behind these
bristles there are two little members somewhat like semi-
circular saws. Posterior to these “saws” is a curious upper
lip, or labrum, furnished with a kind of brush-like arrange-
ment (c). The eye (d) is large and black. In the upper

 

Fig. 162. LARVA OF CORETHRA PLUMICORNIS (MUCH ENLARGED).

part of the deepest portion of the body there are two air-
sacs (e). Some authorities consider that these air-sacs are
very closely connected with the respiratory organs, but others
look upon them just simply as “floats.” The csophagus, or
gullet (f), leads into a curious and powerful gizzard (n), the
use of which can be readily understood when one remembers
that this larva, as a rule, feeds upon the smaller fresh-water
crustacea, The gizzard is joined to the stomach (g) by a very
narrow channel. The stomach may be seen by the naked
eye through the very transparent sides of the creature, and
its contents can be pretty plainly observed with the help of
the microscope. The stomach is joined to the colon (%) by
four very slender tubes or ducts. Between the stomach and
the colon there are two posterior air-sacs (h), which evidently
perform the same functions as the anterior ones. There is a
266 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

curious fan (j) composed of delicately-plumed bristles attached
to the under-part of the last segment of the body. With the
help of this fan the larva forces and steers its way through
the water. It is also connected, so it is supposed, with the
tracheal system. Posterior to this organ there are two curious
and much-curved hooks (k), the use of which I do not know.
Dr. Carrington, in his very interesting article upon this
larva in Science Gossip, for April, 1868, suggests that they
are utilised during the creature’s transformation. Several of
these larve have become pupe, and the pupe have changed
into perfect Midges, while in my possession; but I have never
noticed the hooks made use of in any way. J represents four
bronchial leaflets, and above them there are four more plumed
bristles (m). Upon different parts of the body of the creature
there are very curious hairs, which are simple at their root,
but afterwards become compound. Sometimes as many as
seven or eight branches spring from a single stem. The
organs of respiration of this larva are very difficult to trace,
owing to their minuteness; but the appendages at the extremity
of the creature’s body are so formed and so connected with
the tracheal system that the animal, unlike most of the larve
of the Diptera, seems to have no need of coming to the sur-
face of the water for air.

I have given rather a long description of this larva, because
of the unusually curious and interesting formation of its body,
and I am sure that if anyone who does not know the animal
will examine it carefully, he will be amply rewarded for his
pains. A little trouble will certainly be required, for
though the creature is so strangely transparent, it is by no
means easy to investigate closely, owing to its restlessness.
Frequently when one sees it conveniently near to the side of
the vessel in which it is confined, and just as the magnifying-
glass has been placed in position, the creature, with a power-
ful stroke of the extremity of its body, will shoot out of focus.
A good plan, to simplify the examination, is to put two or
three of the larve in a very clear glass bottle, of not more
than lin. and not less than 3in. in diameter. One animal at
least will be almost certain to be in the right position for the
LARVE OF WATER-FLIES. 267

 

magnifying-glass. Under the microscope, the creature will be
even more interesting, if possible, than when seen at liberty
in the water through the magnifying-glass, though its con-
dition will not, of course, be natural.

The larva has a curious habit of suddenly turning itself, so
that its head and tail change places. Sometimes, instead of
making only half a turn, it will make the whole turn, so
quickly that the eye can scarcely follow it, as if in obedience
to the drill-sergeant’s command, “As you were!” In summer
these larve may be taken from ponds of clear water in great
numbers. Too many must not-be kept in the same vessel:
three or four in one which will hold about a quart of
water will be quite sufficient. If such a vessel is provided
with some healthy aquatic plant, and a quantity of water-
fleas and the like, the phantom larve will give no trouble
whatever. The Crustacea and their offspring will always provide
them with plenty of suitable food. These larve often live
for a long time before they become pupe. I have had some
for eight months. During that time only a very small pro-
portion of those I first captured developed into the perfect
Midge. But others which I had taken earlier in the year
(about June) entered the imago condition much quicker.

The pupa of Corethra plumicornis is somewhat like that of
the gnat. The change from the larva to the pupa is very
great indeed. Professor Rymer Jones, in reference to this
change, says that “the air-sacs, situated both in the thoracic
region and in the hinder portion, burst and unfold themselves
into an elaborate tracheal system, and a pair of ear-shaped
tubes, of which not the slightest trace could hitherto be
discerned, make their appearance upon the dorsal aspect of
the thorax; two long tracheez seem to be thus simultaneously
produced, occupying the two sides of the body, and constituting
the main trunks, from which large branches are given off
to supply—in front the head, the eyes, and the nascent limbs;
while posteriorly they spread over the now conspicuous ovaries,
and terminate by ramifying largely through the thin lamelle
(plates) that constitute the “caudal appendages.” The vessels
in which the larve and pupe of OCorethra plumicornis are
268 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

confined should be covered with glass, so that the insects,
when they become perfect, shall not escape before they have
been seen and examined. If a piece of flat wood is allowed
to float upon the surface of the water, the imago will be sure
of finding a resting place when it has
emerged from the pupal envelope. The
perfect insect (Fig. 163) is about Hin.
long, and of a brown colour. The
antenne are lighter in colour, the plumes
on those of the male being almost white.
Both the wings and the plumed antenne
look unusually beautiful under the micro-
scope. There are two dark stripes upon

 

Fig. 163. MALE MIDGE, : ie
Coretura pLuMI- the sides of the thorax. The inner edges

CORNIGIENTARGEDE: of thie wings are fringed.

The genus Chironomus includes about
195 British species, of which C. plumosus is by far the
commonest. The larva of this species is the “ Bloodworm”
of anglers, and the “Red Wriggler” of the schoolboy.
These larve can be found in stagnant water almost anywhere;
e.g., in rain-water tubs, ponds, ditches, pools, and the like.
The life-history of these insects is very similar to that of
the gnat already mentioned. These larve are much more
worm-like than those of the gnat. They are of a blood-red
colour. The pupa has five long hairy bronchial appendages
on each side of its large thorax. The perfect insect is about
3in. long, and of a light yellowish colour. There are three
dark bands on its thorax.

One of the commonest species of the family Stratiomyide
is the beautiful fly known as the Stratiomys chameleon. The
female insect deposits her eggs upon the under-side of a
broad-leafed aquatic plant—generally the Water Plantain
(Alisma Plantago). The eggs are arranged so as to overlap
each other, like the slates on the roof a house. The larve
which are hatched from these eggs are very curious and
interesting. They are elongated in shape, tapering much
towards the tail; and they have small heads. At the narrower
end of the body there is an extremely interesting breathing
LARVE OF WATER-FLIES. 269

 

apparatus, which partly consists of thirty feathery hairs
surrounding a small orifice connected with the tracheal system.
These hairs can be opened and closed at the will of the
animal. While expanded they are very star-like. When
the creature wishes to take in a fresh supply of air, it ascends
to the surface of the water by means of a wriggling motion,
and there it spreads out its bronchial plumes: these act not
only as a float to support the animal in the water, head
downwards, but are also so constructed as to repel the water
and to admit the air into the orifice which they surround.
As soon as the larva has obtained sufficient air, it folds the
plumes, which then inclose a small globule of air, and
this is carried by the animal to the bottom of the water.
This larva obtains its food in the same way as does that of
the gnat. A current of water, owing to the formation and
the movements of parts of the head, is made to set in towards
the head, carrying with it the minute animals and particles
of matter which form the creature’s food. The pupalhood
of this animal is passed within the larval skin. The pupa
only occupies the broader and anterior portion of this envelope,
and in it floats until it changes into the perfect insect. The
imago is a little more than in. long, and it has a broad flat
brassy-black body marked with yellow.

An insect belonging to the family Syrphide, known as
the Drone-fly (Hristalis tenaz), has a very curious larva;
or, rather, is a very curious creature during its larval state.
This larva is called the “rat-tailed larva,” and is very common
in stagnant water. The late Rev. J. G. Wood, speaking of
these larve, says: “The largest assemblage of these creatures
that I ever saw was in Wiltshire. A tub had been sunk
in the ground for the reception of water, and had gradually
become half-filled with dead leaves and other débris, which
decomposed into soft mud. This mud was so closely packed
with the larve of the Drone-fly that the water was quite
choked with them.” This larva is shaped somewhat like a.
“maggot,” with a long tail. The tail is composed of two
segments, one of which fits inside the other after the manner
of the joints of a telescope. The respiratory organs pass
270 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

through this curious tail, and the creature is thus able to
breathe atmospheric air while lying at the bottom of very
shallow water. When the larva is about to enter the nymphal
state, it buries itself in the ground, and becomes a pupa
while still within its larval envelope. The perfect insect
may be often seen flying about gardens and the like. It is
a little more than 4in. long, is black and hairy, and is
very active in its movements.

There are, of course, many other aquatic larve and pups,
besides those I have mentioned in this chapter, which are
suitable for and very interesting in the aquarium; but I
hope I have said sufficient to give a novice in aquarium
matters some idea what kind of creatures to look for, and
how to keep them in a manner satisfactory both to the captor
and the captives when found.
CHAPTER XIV.

WATER-SPIDERS AND WATER-WORMS.

  

HE Water-spider (Argyroneta aquatica) is an ex-
ceedingly interesting inmate of the tank: its
intelligence and ingenuity have long made it a
great favourite with aquarium-keepers. It is about 4in. long,
and is therefore rather a large spider. Its abdomen is ovate
in shape, and of an olive-brown colour, and the rest of its
body, including the legs, is a dark reddish-brown. Its first
and last pairs of legs are of greater length than the other
two pairs. The females of most spiders are larger than the
males, but in regard to the Argyroneta the reverse is the
case. Water-spiders may be found in the ponds and ditches
of many parts of England, especially in those of Cambridge-
shire and Norfolk; but when the aquarium-keeper is not
fortunate enough to be able to catch them in his own neigh-
bourhood, he can always buy them in London at prices
ranging from 3d. to 1s. each. The abdomen of the Water-
spiders is covered with a kind of hair, which repels the water
and prevents the creature from getting wet. Sometimes,
however, when these animals are being carried in water from
the pond in which they have been taken or from the shop
where they have been bought, to their new home (the
aquarium), they will be found at the end of their journey to
be nearly if not quite drowned. The splashing of the water
in the can in which they have travelled has so thoroughly
272 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

saturated the hairs which cover the abdomen that they (the
hairs) can no longer do their duty in connection with the
respiratory organs. When.a spider is found in this condition,
it should be placed upon some blotting-paper and under a
tumbler until it is perfectly dry. As a healthy spider goes
beneath the surface of the water, the latter part of its body
looks as if covered with silver, owing to the air which has
become entangled among the abdominal hairs.

Though these spiders can live upon land, they spend the
greater portion of their time under water, where they con-
struct most ingenious and curious homes, or nests. It is quite
an interesting sight to watch one of these very intelligent
creatures make its nest. First of all, it begins by weaving
a web between the branches of an aquatic plant, or between
a stone and one side of the vessel in which it is confined, or
in some similar position. When the web is completed, the
Argyroneta ascends to the surface of the water, and protrudes
above it the extremity of its abdomen, and, with a jerky
movement, obtains a bubble of air, which it holds between
the latter part of its body and its crossed hindermost legs.
The spider then descends with the bubble of air, and
discharges it within the web which it has woven. In this
way many other bubbles of air are brought beneath the
surface of the water and placed inside the web, which, after
a time, owing to the accumulation of air within it, assumes
the shape and often the size of a lady’s thimble (see Fig. 164,
in which, for the sake of clearness, the nest is shown as being
above the water). In making these journeys for air, the spider
climbs up and down a thread which it has stretched between
the nest and the surface of the water. The journeys are
long or short, according to the depth at which the Argyroneta
constructs its nest; for they are sometimes placed quite
close to the surface of the water, occasionally very near to
its bottom, but more frequently midway between these two
positions. In one of these subaqueous homes the Argyroneta
spends the greater part of the winter. I have had several
spiders which have remained in their nests under water for
three or four months, without either moving or taking food.
WATER SPIDERS AND WATER-WORMS. 273 |

 

When the female Argyroneta wishes to lay her eggs, she
either enlarges her old nest or builds an entirely new one.
The enlargement is effected by spinning an addition of web
to its lower part, which she fills or inflates with air as soon
as it is completed. The male Spider often makes a new nest
for himself near to the one which his lady-love has constructed
or enlarged for her eggs. The eggs are enveloped in a
kind of cocoon, which is fastened to the inside of the nest.
The young Spiders appear, according to the temperature of
the water, in about a fortnight. Almost directly they leave
the nest in which they have been born, they begin to construct

 

Fig. 164. WATER-SPIDER (ARGYRONETA AQUATICA) AND NEST.

small homes of web and air for themselves. Water-spiders
feed either upon terrestrial or aquatic animals; and for the
former they often leave the water. The Argyronete while in
confinement may be provided with house-flies and small
aquatic insects. Their appetites, however, are very uncertain:
sometimes they will eagerly seize flies which have been thrown
to them, and drag them within their nests, soon to turn them
out again, sucked dry of all their juices; at other times they
will disregard all food, however tempting it may be. I am
sorry to say that these intelligent little creatures are occasion-
ally guilty of cannibalism. More than once I have noticed
that when several of them have been confined in the same
carefully-covered aquarium, their numbers have gradually
T
274 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

diminished, until only one or two of them have been left.
One sex is not more guilty than the other of this un-
natural practice.

Vallisneria spiralis is about the most suitable plant to
place in an aquarium which is to contain these Spiders. If
possible, there should be no other animals associated with the
Argyronete, except those which are intended for their food.
A large snail is very likely to disturb the subaqueous nests and
set free the air which they contain; while a fish would be
greatly tempted to devour a spider. If the small tank which
is set apart for the Argyronete is properly situated in regard
to light, little or no conferve will interfere with the clearness
of either the glass or the water; and the interesting habits
of these animals cannot, of course, be satisfactorily watched
unless both the glass and the water are perfectly transparent.
This transparency is easily maintained. For example, the
water of the aquarium in which I had some Spiders was not
changed for nearly, if not quite, a year, and it seemed to be
just as clear then as it was upon the day I first introduced
it. This aquarium was covered with glass in such a way that
air could be freely admitted, and it was placed about 6ft.
from a window which faced due east. In this position the
light was quite good enough to allow all the movements of
the Spiders to be seen, and not sufficiently strong to cause
the growth of the sight-impeding conferve. Other aquaria
were in the same position, and all were as perfectly clear as
this one, and gave little or no trouble. These circumstances
are mentioned here in order that novices in aquarium matters
may not think that it requires any skill to preserve the
water of small portable tanks in a perfectly clear and bright
condition. <A little care is the only thing necessary to attain
this end.

Argyronetz often remain above the surface of the water,
especially when first placed in an aquarium. However,
after a day or two, if they are healthy, they will enter the
water and begin to construct their nests. The vessels in
which these animals are confined should be covered, or they
will escape. When flies are not taken by the Spiders after
WATER-SPIDERS AND WATER-WORMS. 275

 

they have been upon the surface of thé water for a day,
they should be removed.

While hunting for specimens for the aquarium, one frequently
notices some curious little spider-like creatures less than }in.
long. They are often called “ Water-spiders.” This, how-
ever, is not a correct name to give them, for though they
are members of the order Acarina, of the class Arachnida,
the title “ Water-spider” properly belongs to their larger
relatives the Argyronetz, which have just been described.
These Hydrachnide, or ‘ Water-mites,” are pretty, active
little creatures of various colours, and very suitable for
small aquaria. Some of them are able to swim freely about
the water, while others spend their time crawling over its
bottom or the aquatic weeds. The Water-mites are not
found in any great number, only two or three being as a
rule taken at one time; but they are by no means rare.
The Hydrachnidw, when mature, possess eight legs, affixed
to a body which may be said to be without segments or
division of any kind. The female Hydrachna lays her eggs
upon the stem of a water-plant. The young Mites which
come from these eggs are very different in formation from
their parents. They have six legs, and not eight, and what
appears to be a large head, but which is better described as
a large suctorial apparatus. By means of this apparatus the
larve are able to cling to larger aquatic animals, upon which
they live as parasites. They are not seldom found attached
to the upper part of the abdomen (beneath the elytra) of
the water-beetle (Dytiscus marginalis) or -to the long caudal
filaments of the water-scorpions (Ranatra linearis and Nepa
cinerea). After living for a certain time as parasites, the
larve become pup, and pass then through a period of
inactivity before they make their final change and emerge
as perfect eight-legged Mites. The colours of full-grown
Mites are various, but generally they are of bright red,
marked with black or brown spots. A magnifying-glass is
necessary to see the markings plainly. Hydrachnide should
be kept in small glass vessels, in which there is a healthy
aquatic plant. They are very predaceous, and ought to be

r2
276 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

provided with cyclops, water-fleas, and the like, as food. The
Mite’s manner of seizing its prey is interesting.

Aquatic Worms are not, as a rule, considered either ornamental
or desirable in an aquarium. Some of them, however, are
very useful there, and by no means uninteresting. For
instance, the Naide are active and graceful little creatures.
They seem to be nearly always in motion, spending the
greater part of their time either in crawling over weeds or
swimming through the water. Their movements are assisted
by small bristles, which are distributed over various portions
of their bodies. Their average length may be said to be
about Zin.; and they have great powers of elongation and
contraction, especially with regard to their head, which can
be easily distinguished from the rest of the body. They are
both oviparous and multiply by spontaneous division. Their
food chiefly consists of water-fleas and other minute animals.
These restless little Worms can generally be found near or
among the roots of aquatic plants. A Naid Worm is a very
interesting object under a microscope—its bristles, of which
there are two kinds, being beautifully transparent.

As one goes about the country during the spring and
summer months, he will be almost certain to notice, if at
all observant of nature, patches of red at the bottom of
shallow pools of water. These red patches are caused by
the congregation of many small, interesting, and useful Worms
(Tubifex rivulorwm), known commonly as the River, or Summer,
Worm. If the water above them is disturbed, they will
immediately disappear by withdrawing themselves into their
burrows in the soft mud. They soon, however, recover from
their fright, come out again, and at once recommence the
restless movements which, with their numbers and bright
colour, attracted the attention of the passer-by. It is the tail-
end of the animal which is protruded out of the mud. The
skin of these Worms is so thin and transparent that not
only can the blood be seen through it—hence the title of
“red”—but also all the internal arrangements of the creatures
may be plainly observed. The life-history of T. rivulorum
is very similar to that of the common earth-worm, to which
WATER-SPIDERS AND WATER-WORMS. 277

 

it is closely allied. It is not only found in ponds and pools,
but also in the Thames and other rivers.

River Worms are exceedingly prolific and very gregarious.
As they breed so quickly, they are useful in supplying fish
and other carnivorous animals with excellent food. These
Worms are often sold by aquarium-dealers, at so much a mass
of them. But as they quickly die, unless properly treated, a
little care is necessary in buying them, or else the purchaser
will perhaps find that he has bought many dead ones among
the living, and these will be sure to cause not a little
mischief if introduced into the tank. The dead Worms
may be detected by their being of a lighter colour than those
which are alive and healthy, and by the unpleasant smell
which will most likely proceed from them. It is prudent to
refuse to buy any Worms, if all do not seem to be alive and well,
for it is a difficult matter to separate the living from the dead.
In shops these Worms are generally kept in running water, or '
in that which is frequently changed; or in a running stream
during the night, and out of water altogether, but covered
with a wet cloth, during the day. But I find from experience
that they will not live in health for long under any one of
these conditions, though perhaps long enough to answer the
dealer’s purpose. It is not natural for these Worms to be
kept in tangled masses, either in water or out. Of course, the
condition most conducive to their health while in confine-
ment, is that which is most similar to that out of which they
were taken; this may be attained by placing them in soft
mud, over which there is water to a depth of from 2in. to
4in. They must not be too crowded. When the Worms are
required for the aquarium, a small quantity of mud con-
taining a number of the animals may be taken by the help
of a small hand-net and placed in a shallow vessel, such as
an old soup-plate. The mud, which has been placed with the
Worms in the plate or other receptacle, should then be washed
away with a stream of water made to run from a pump, tap,
or siphon. The current of water should be strong enough
to remove the mud, but not so great as to carry off the
Worms. If the flow of water is carefully arranged, a small
278 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

bunch of healthy Worms, free of mud, will soon be ready to
be dropped into the aquarium, where those which are not
immediately devoured by fish and other animals will live and
thrive until their turn comes, at some future day, to furnish
a meal for their fellow-captives.

I believe, from experiments which I have made, that these
Worms may be easily bred in confinement, either in a large,
shallow tank, or in such a vessel as an ordinary washing-tub,
sunk a foot or two in the ground of a garden. The bottom
of either tub or tank should be covered to the depth of about
6in. with mud taken from such pools as those in which these
animals are naturally found. The water above the mud in
the receptacle prepared for the Worms should not be more
than 6in. nor less than 3in. The most convenient way, how-
ever, to insure a constant supply of these very useful animals
is to place a quantity of them in a natural pool in the neigh-
bourhood (if not already there), and there they would be
almost sure to breed successfully.

A small hand-net, made of strong muslin or milk-straining
material, of about 4in. in diameter, is very useful for taking
the Worms from their native waters. The net should be thrust
into the mud a little beneath the red patches, and the
Worms and mud so obtained may be conveniently carried
home in an ordinary can and treated in the manner already
recommended.

I have written at some length concerning T. rivulorum,
because it is so exceedingly useful for feeding fish and other
carnivorous animals of the aquarium; because it forms one of
the most suitable foods for the fry of trout and salmon; and
because it is not likely, if not devoured immediately by the
inhabitants of the tank, to die and corrupt the water. In
conclusion, however, I venture to warn novices in aquarium
matters against using either dead or unhealthy Summer
Worms.

Leeches are by no means uninteresting in an aquarium.
Some of them are handsomely marked, and others are more
or less graceful swimmers. As they are carnivorous and
greedy, they should be kept in a tank entirely given up to
WATER-SPIDERS AND WATER-WORMS. 279

 

their use. Many people who sell Medicinal Leeches crowd
them together in a large stone bottle nearly full of water. A
cloth is tied tightly over the mouth of the bottle to keep the
unhappy captives from climbing out of their prison. They
are thus kept in the dark as well as in an unhealthy con-
dition. The water, however, is occasionally changed. Never-
theless, it is a cruel and unwise way of keeping Leeches,

. and no wonder the sellers of them complain that they are

delicate animals.

Those who wish to possess Leeches should place them in a
large, well-arranged, and securely-covered aquarium, where they
will thrive and be seen to the best advantage. They, of
course, must have no companions besides those of their own

 

Fic. 164. MEDICINAL LEECH (HIRUDO MEDICINALIS).

species, and even of their size; for not only will they feed
upon fish, frogs, and the like, but also, at times, upon one
another.

The Medicinal Leeches, of which there are said to be three
species, are the best known. They were formerly frequently
used in medicine, but now only rarely. At one time there
was such a demand for these creatures that they were with
difficulty procured, until some Frenchman started what may
be called leech-farming; and his venture was so successful,
that leech-breeding became on the Continent quite an industry.
The commonest Medicinal Leech (Hirudo medicinalis) (Fig.
164) is of a dark green colour, marked with six reddish-yellow
bands along the back, and the under-part of the body is
greenish and spotted with black. Leeches are oviparous, and

o
280 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

live, when at liberty, in ponds and small lakes. The eggs
are enveloped in cocoons, which are deposited upon the weeds
or banks of the water. These Leeches are said to be five
years arriving at maturity, but before this age they may be
used for medicinal purposes. Leeches have no branchie:
they respire by means of their skin. The mouth of a Leech
is curious and interesting. It has three teeth, somewhat
like circular saws, which make three small cuts, all inclining
towards the same point. A Leech is both gluttonous and
abstemious; that is, it will either make such a meal as to
swell to more than double its ordinary size, or it will live for
months, or even years, with no other food than that which it -
can obtain through a constant change of river or pond water.
The number of eyes which a Leech has varies according to
its genus: some have as many as ten. As these creatures
frequently rise or sink in the water, according to the state of
the atmosphere, they are regarded by some people as useful
“weather prophets.” The Medicinal Leech is from 4in. to
Zin. in length, and is able to take at one meal from Idr. to
30z. of blood.

The Horse Leech (Hemopsis sanguisuga) is about 4in. long
and 3in. broad. Its body becomes rather wider towards the
tail end, and its mouth is large and protruding above. It is
greenish-black upon the back, and yellowish-green under-
neath. This Leech is a graceful swimmer, and lives very well
in an aquarium. It is found in ponds and lakes, where it
may be seen occasionally swimming near the surface, when
it can easily be taken in a hand-net.

The Glutton Aulostome (Aulostoma gulo) is not a suctorial
animal: its teeth are not strong enough to make the necessary
wound for the extraction of blood. It is, however, an exceed-
ingly greedy creature, as its name implies. It feeds readily
upon garden-worms, snails, fish, leeches, and other aquatic
animals. This Leech is common in ponds and lakes, and as
it is bold and active, it is rather an interesting inmate of an
aquarium, of which it should be the only occupant.

The Hight-eyed Leech (Nephelis octoculata) is an active
and hardy little animal, and quite ready to adapt itself to
WATER-SPIDERS AND WATER-WORMS. 281

 

a life in confinement. It lives in stagnant water, through
which it swims quickly in a graceful and undulating manner.
It often fastens itself to a stone or the like by means of its
sucker, and while in captivity it can frequently be seen thus
fixed to the sides of its aquarium, and waving its body to
and fro. It swallows most of its prey whole, and it may be
fed upon tiny garden-worms and small aquatic animals. The
Eight-eyed Leech is about 14in. long, and is of a reddish-
brown colour, sometimes marked with yellow or other spots.

Besides the Leeches previously referred to, there are others
which will live readily in confinement, where they will be
interesting to those who care for them.

While hunting over the weeds or mud taken out of
stagnant or slow-running water, one not seldom finds some
curious worm-like creatures, of various lengths, which swim
in an eel-like manner, and which, when at rest, frequently
anchor themselves, by means of a sucker situated at the
extremity of their body, to any hard substance such as the
side of an aquarium or to a stone. These animals are called
Nematoids, and they live chiefly upon vegetable matter. They
have a habit, while holding on to anything with their sucker,
of swaying themselves backwards and forwards until they
recommence swimming in the graceful undulatory manner
which has given to them the name of “eels.”

Among the Nematoids is sometimes classed the interesting
animal known as the Hair Worm (Gordius aquuticus). This
curious creature has, at different times, given rise to some
extraordinary theories in regard to the origin of eels. I have,
more than once, in common with many others, heard it gravely
stated that when the hair from a horse’s tail falls into a pond,
it will, after a certain amount of soaking, become endowed
with life, and take the form of the Hair Worm, which, in
time, under favourable circumstances, develops into the
ordinary eel. G. aquaticus is so long—being sometimes as
much as 10in. in length, and not half a line in thickness—and
it has a habit, when being held between the fingers, of
becoming perfectly rigid, after it has tied itself into an
apparently unravellable knot, that the rustic seems .to have
282 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

some excuse for imagining it to be an animated horsehair.
The male Hair Worm may be distinguished from the female
by its forked, or bifid, tail. The head-end of both the sexes
is round. These creatures seem to have no mouth, and
appear to obtain what nourishment they require by absorp-
tion through the skin. Their power of resisting the ill-effects
of drought is so great that they may be taken out of the
water and exposed for some hours to the scorching rays of
the sun, until they look as if they were quite dead and dried
up into almost nothing, and then when returned to the
aquarium or pond they will soon regain both the life they
seemed to have lost and their former activity. They swim in
a most graceful eel-like manner. Hair Worms are oviparous
and deposit their eggs in strings.

G. aquaticus is an entozoon: that is, it spends some portion
of its life within some other animal. When a beetle, for instance,
has fallen by accident into water, or has been driven there
by instinct, a Hair Worm will sometimes be seen emerging
from the unfortunate creature, having been for long its unwilling
host. These remarkable creatures may occasionally be seen in
‘great numbers swimming about the shallowest parts of rivers
and ponds, or entwining themselves among the aquatic weeds
growing there.

The aquarium-keeper, during his hunts for aquatic animals,
frequently finds certain little fluke-like creatures, crawling
over or clinging to the mud, weeds, or stones of the water.
These animals are known as Planarian Worms. They may
be found during any season of the year and in nearly every
pond, lake, or slow-running stream. They are of various
colours. There is, for instance, a white species (Planaria
lactea), a brown (P. brunnea), and a grey (P. torva); but the
commonest of all is the Black Planarian (Polycelis nigra).
These worms have soft and gelatinous bodies, which quickly
decompose after death. The Planarie are both interesting
and useful in the aquarium. They are interesting principally
because they have the power of reproducing lost parts of
their bodies, and also because even their number may be
increased by cutting them in half; and they are useful
WATER-SPIDERS AND WATER-WORMS. 283

 

because in feeding upon dead animal matter they perform the
duties of excellent scavengers. They are able, in common
with some of the univalves, to support themselves in the water
by what may be called a muccus thread. These creatures
are oviparous, but the young remain affixed to their parent’s
body for some time after they are hatched. Planarian Worms
will live for a long time in the aquarium, where I have never
known them do any harm. They will sometimes, however,
attack a diseased fish. The largest of these animals is,
perhaps, P. lactea, which will sometimes, when well extended,
measure nearly lin. in length. The Planarie, on being
touched, either contract and harden themselves, or let go
of that to which they are clinging and sink in the water.
They progress by gliding evenly over the stones, weeds, or
mud. ’
CHAPTER XV.

FRESH-WATER CRUSTACEANS.

E fresh-water Crayfish (Astacus fluviatilis) (Fig. 165)
is a very interesting creature in an aquarium. The
aquarium, however, should not only be arranged
especially for it, but it must also be given up to the animal’s

 

 

Fig. 165. ComMON RIVER CRAYFISH (ASTACUS FLUVIATILIS).

. use entirely. Any companion, except one of its own species,
it would be almost certain to either eat or hurt. A tank
intended for a pair of Crayfish ought to be about 2ft. long
by lft. or more broad. The bottom of this vessel should
FRESH-WATER CRUSTACEANS. 285

 

be covered with well-washed gravel. and large stones, the
latter so placed that there will be an island on to which the
Crayfish can climb, and retreats into which they can retire.
The water need not be more than 4in. deep. It will not be
wise to introduce any aquatic plants, for the Crayfish would
destroy them all. These creatures, while in captivity, will
eat raw meat, tadpoles, dead fish, molluscs, garden-worms—
in fact, almost anything. of an animal nature. No food should
be left in the aquarium which the Crayfish have refused to
eat; but, notwithstanding all care in this respect, the water
will require changing from time to time.

It is a very interesting sight to watch these creatures
cast their shells. This exuviation is necessary, for the armour
of crustaceans does not stretch as the animals grow. For
some days previous to this important operation, Crayfish
lose their usually very keen appetites, and appear to take
no food at all. This fasting causes the body to shrink, and
thus the moult is facilitated. The casting of the shell takes
about half an hour, and after it is cast the animal is very
exhausted—so much so, indeed, that occasionally it dies,
especially when the exuviation takes place while the creature
is in captivity. The moulting is particularly complete, even
to the eyes, antenne, and the lining membrane of the
stomach. .

Crayfish will sometimes breed in confinement. Unlike most.
of their relatives, the young, when they leave the eggs—
for Crayfish are oviparous—very much resemble their parents.
Crayfish inhabit the rivers of different parts of England,
particularly those which have unusually gravelly and rocky
bottoms, and are fond of hiding in holes in the banks or
among the rocks and stones. They are generally caught by
means of nets, in which pieces of raw meat have been
placed.

A Crayfish may be described as a small fresh-water lobster
of a green colour. When taken out of the water and held
in the fingers, it flaps its tail with great vigour. Astaci
should not be carried from place to place in water, but in
damp water-weeds.
286 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

The little crustacean sometimes called the “ Fresh-water
Screw,” or Shrimp (Gammarus fluviatilis) (Fig. 166), is a use-
ful and interesting inmate of the aquarium. It may be found
in almost every clear and not very quick-running stream,

 

Fic. 166. FRESH-WAT&ER SHRIMPS (GAMMARUS FLUVIATILIS) (ENLARGED).

but especially in those brooks in which the watercress or the
Vernal Starwort grow in anything like profusion. A good
way to obtain Fresh-water Shrimps is to take a handful of
aquatic weeds out of the water in which these crustacea
abound, and shake it over a newspaper or a piece of macintosh.
After the first shake or two, several Shrimps, among other
FRESH-WATER CRUSTACEANS. 287

 

animals, will fall upon the surface prepared for them, and
commence at once, as they lie helplessly on their sides, those
curious twisting movements which have given them the name
of Fresh-water Screws. These animals are very similar in
appearance to the common sandhopper, to which, indeed, they
are closely related: They are frequently found in pairs, the
female being known by her smaller size, and they resemble
fish in their habit of keeping their heads facing the stream.
Fresh-water Shrimps are most useful, for not only are they
excellent scavengers, but they also in their own bodies supply
trout and other fish with the very best of foods. They may
be kept in either large or small tanks, where they will do
good by consuming any animal matter, which, if allowed to
remain in the water, would certainly become a source of
mischief. For example, should a snail die, they will quickly
devour its body and make a home of its shell. Of course, in
a large aquarium which is stocked in the usual manner, these
Shrimps are almost sure some time or other to be eaten by
the fish or other animals. The Gammari are very interesting
in a small tank which is given up entirely to their use. They
are by no means ungraceful as they dart swiftly about the
water, hunt its bottom in a very dog-like fashion, or cling
quite motionless to the weeds, with the exception of the rapid
movements of their respiratory organs. Their shells, which
from time to time they shed, are often so life-like as to be not
infrequently mistaken by the novice for the animal itself.
These crustaceans may be fed upon raw meat, a piece of dead
garden-worm, or almost anything of an animal nature. They
also feed occasionally upon aquatic weeds. They will breed
very readily in an aquarium which is kept expressly for them,
which should be stocked with plenty of aquatic plants and
water-snails, and at the bottom of it there should be several
large stones under which the Shrimps can hide. The females
carry their eggs attached to the under-parts of their bodies,
and there the young also remain for some time after they
are hatched. The young of these crustaceans are pretty and
active little creatures, and form excellent food for many kinds
of fish. They are of a very much lighter shade than their
288 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA,

 

parents, which are, as a rule, of a dark reddish colour, but
sometimes, owing to the locality in which they are found,
black. When one considers what excellent scavengers, how
prolific, and how suitable as food for fish, these Gammari are,
one will naturally come to the conclusion that they are quite
worthy of encouragement in those waters in which trout and
other fish are preserved.

The Water-louse (Asellus aquaticus) (Fig 167) is a very
common crustacean. It is so like in appearance to the wood-
louse or “ garden-pig,” that no description is necessary. It
does not swim, but is found crawling about the bottom or
weeds of ponds and ditches. A. aquaticus is a useful scavenger
in the aquarium, for it lives principally upon decaying vege-
table matter. I have, how-
ever, more than once, seen
it apparently feeding upon
animal food. The female
Water-louse carries her
eggs in a membranous sac
attached to the under-part
of her body, and there the

Fig. 167. WATER-LOUSE young remain for some
(ASELLUS AQUATICUS). time after they are hatched.
The period which elapses
between the laying of the eggs and the young Aselli leaving
their mother’s care is generally about six weeks. The young
are of a very light colour. The male is much larger than the
female, and is about }in. long. These creatures breed freely
in captivity, and thus provide fish and other inhabitants of
the aquarium with suitable food. They are easily obtained,
for they are nearly always found crawling about the mud or
weeds which are taken from either stagnant or slow-running
water. The vessels in which Aselli are kept must be securely
covered, or their inmates will be certain to escape, and, as
a consequence, die.

The tiny crustaceans which are well called Entomostraca,
or “shelled insects,” are all more or less covered with a shelly
envelope. They are both very interesting and very useful in

  
FRESH-WATER CRUSTACEANS. 289

 

the aquarium. In a natural state they do good service, by
helping to ventilate stagnant water by the means of their
almost constant movements; by (many of them) acting the
part of scavengers; and by, owing to their very great proli-
ficacy, supplying fish and other animals with most nutritious
food. They may be found in either stagnant or slow-running
water during the greater portion of the year. They will
breed freely in captivity, and their presence should always
be encouraged in the aquarium. It is a good plan to keep
a small tank especially for them, and so they will be always
at hand for supplying food to interesting carnivorous
aquatic animals. Entomostraca can easily be obtained from
their native waters by the help of a very simple contrivance,
as explained on page 37. Though they are very small, they
can, as a rule, be readily seen with the naked eye: but a
microscope, or at any rate a magnifying-glass, is generally
necessary for observing their different parts. The commonest,
and perhaps the most interesting and useful, of these small
crustaceans, are the Daphnie, the Cyprides, and the Cyclops.

The Daphnia, owing to their curious antenne, belong to
the order Cladocera (“branching horned”). Their jerky or
jumping movements in the water have given them the common
name of Water-fleas. Of these Water-fleas, Daphnia Pulex
is by far the commonest. Its body, and that of all its near
relatives, may be said to be divided into two parts: the
smaller part is the head, a portion of which is produced in
front to a kind of beak; and the larger part, which consists
of the thorax and abdomen, is inclosed in a shelly envelope.
All the Daphnie possess five pairs of legs, which by the
help of a microscope may be seen in almost constant motion
through the transparent shell. The female Water-flea carries
her eggs for a time between her shell and the back part of
her body. These small crustaceans are frequently found in
stagnant water in great numbers, especially where there is
plenty of duckweed. I have sometimes caught what appeared
to be thousands of them with one dip of a large bottle in
that part of a pond where they seemed to be the most
numerous. Dr. Baird, in his “British Entomostraca,” in

U
290 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

speaking of the profusion of these creatures, says: “J have
frequently seen large patches of water in different ponds
assume a ruddy hue, like the red rust of iron, or as if blood
had been mixed with it, and ascertained the cause to be an
immense number of Daphnia Pulex. The myriads necessary
to produce this effect are really astonishing, and it is extremely
interesting to watch their motions. On a sunshiny day, in
a large pond, a streak of red a foot broad and ten or twelve
yards in length, will suddenly appear in a particular spot,
and this belt may be seen rapidly changing its position, and
in a short time wheel completely round the pond. Should
the mass come near enough to the edge to allow the shadow
of the observer to fall upon them, or should a dark cloud
suddenly obscure the sun, the whole body immediately
disappears, rising to the surface again when they have reached
beyond the shadow, or as soon as the cloud has passed over.”

The male Water-flea is rarely found, and then only during
the latter part of the year. It may be known by its smaller
size and its larger superior antenne, which are situated beneath
what may be called the beak. In the female these antenne
are very small. It has been calculated that a Daphnia may
have three broods during a month, each brood numbering
from forty to fifty. No wonder that these tiny crustaceans
are sO numerous in our ponds! The Daphnice are said to
eject ephippia, or “ winter eggs,” which are said to be protected
with an envelope of extra hardness, so that they will be able
to bear without damage a degree of cold which would prove
fatal to the crustaceans themselves. The food of these Water-
fleas consists, for the most part, of minute infusoria. Dr.
Baird enumerates at least six other species besides the one
just described. The Parrot-beaked Water-fiea (D. psittacea)
receives its name from the formation of its beak, which is
shaped somewhat like that of a parrot. The margin of its
shell at the back is serrated. The Large Water-flea (D.
Schefferi) is the largest British species, and has its shell
almost circular. Dr. Baird speaks of it as having a heavy,
tumbling sort of movement in the water. It is not very
common. However, from its size it is certainly worth the
FRESH-WATER CRUSTACEANS. 291

 

trouble of procuring, for its interesting habits will be more
easily observed than those of its commoner relative, D. Pulex.
The Spineless Water-flea (D. Vetula) is without the tail-like
spine which is possessed by all the species just mentioned.
It has also a small head and hardly any “beak.” This creature
is fairly common. The Reticulated Water-flea (D. reticulata),
as its specific name implies, has its shell covered with
a net-work, the mesh of which is hexagonal. The spine is
short, and is inclined backwards. This animal is by no means
rare. The Rounded Water-flea (D. rotunda) receives its
name from the fact that its shell is almost circular. It is
not uncommon. The Long-spined Water-flea (D. mucronata)
may be readily recognised by the straight edge of the front
part of its shell and by its long, pointed spine. The whole
creature is of a dark grey colour. The different species of
these Water-fleas may be easily identified; and they can all
be readily kept and bred in captivity. The vessels in which
they are confined should possess plenty of vegetation, and
ought to be placed in a light position, but not within reach
of the rays of the sun. Water-fleas will give no trouble at
all, and will be both very interesting and very useful to
those who care for and keep aquaria.

The small and active crustaceans known as Cypride are
placed in the order Ostracoda (from the Greek ostrakon,
“a shell,” their bodies being inclosed in a bivalve shell).
Indeed, their outward appearance is so like very tiny bivalve
molluscs that they have been mistaken, when at rest, for
young mussels. The Cypridw are divided into the two genera
Cypris and Candona. The former genus contains about
seventeen different species, all the members of which are rapid
swimmers ; and the latter not more than six, all of which spend
their time in crawling over the mud or weeds of the water
in which they live: they cannot swim, because they lack the
hairy antenne which their near relatives possess. The Cypride
have two pairs of feet, two pairs of antenne, and one eye.
They are found in almost every piece of clear stagnant water,
where they may be easily seen with the naked eye. They live
chiefly upon dead—not putrid—animal matter, and they lay

u2
292 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

their eggs in masses upon stems of plants and sides of stones.
The eggs hatch in about four days. The young Cypride
shed their shells frequently as they grow, the exuviation each
time being very complete. The eggs have great vitality,
and will survive the drying up of the ponds in which they
have been deposited.

The members of the genus Cypris—of which C. fusca
(Fig. 168) is one of the commonest—are, on account of their
swimming powers and active habits, much more interesting
in the aquarium than are those of the other genus, Candona.
The Cypride can be obtained from their native pools in the
same way as that recommended for procuring the Daphnie.
They may be fed while in captivity
upon a tiny piece of a garden-
worm or a small portion of raw
meat. If food is not given to
them, they will devour one another.
These little Entomostraca are very
interesting under the microscope.
While viewing them in this way,
Fig. 168. Cypris Fusca (a, MucH = it, will be seen how they protect

ENLARGED; b, NATURAL SIZE).

themselves upon the appearance

of any danger, by withdrawing
their legs and antenne within the shelter of their pretty
shells. And when they think that there is nothing further
to fear, the watcher will notice how cautiously they protrude
their limbs and make preparation for continuing their journey
in the drop of water which has been placed with them upon
the stage of the microscope. As they are securely inclosed
within their shells, their resemblance to tiny mussels will be
readily observed. The shells are often prettily marked and
coloured, and covered with fine hairs. The aquarium-keeper
may take it for granted that all the Cypride which he captures
are females, for the males, I believe, have never been found.
These crustaceans are larger than the water-fleas.

The curious, interesting, and useful Cyclops may be found
in ponds, ditches, and slow-running streams, almost every-
where. Oyclops quadricornis (Fig. 169) is shaped somewhat

 
FRESH-WATER CRUSTACEANS. 293

 

like an “Indian club,” or an elongated pear, and it is quite
large enough to be easily seen without the help of a magnifying-
glass. It has received the generic name of Cyclops, from
the fact that it possesses only one eye, which is situated in
the centre of the fore-part of the first and largest segment
of its body; while the specific name of quadricornis (‘ four-
horned”) has been given to it on account of what may be
called its double antenne. The male Cyclops differs from
the female in the formation of its antenne. The superior or
upper antenne of the latter are long, tapering, and gracefully
curved, while those of the former are rather shorter and
thicker, and slightly swollen
near their tips, which termi-
nate in a kind of hinge-joint.
The lower pair of antenne
of both the male and female
are not nearly so long or so
slender as their upper pair.
All the antenne have numer-
ous articulations, and are
fringed with very fine fila-
ments. Cyclops posses8 five
pairs of legs, two pairs of
foot-jaws, and at the end of Fig. 169. CY¥CLOPS QUADRICORNIS
their bodies two elongated (a, MUCH ENLARGED ; b, NATURAL SIZE).
lobes, to each of which are

attached four sete of different lengths; these sete, like the
antennex, are also finely and beautifully fringed. The females
are about three times as numerous as the males, and may very
frequently be seen swimming about with their eggs hanging
to each side of the lower part of their bodies. The eggs
can easily be detected with the naked eye, but under the
microscope they look very like bunches of grapes. In each
cluster there are sometimes as many as thirty or forty eggs.
M. Jurine is said to have made careful observations and
calculations in regard to the increase of these Entomostraca,
and he came to the conclusion that one female would lay, or
rather produce, her eggs at least eight times within three

 
294, FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

months, and at each laying there would not be less than forty
eggs; and from these 320 eggs there would come by the end
of a year (supposing, of course, that all were hatched and no
enemies attacked the young) 4,442,189,120 Cyclops; that is,
considerably more than four thousand millions. As one tries
to comprehend this vast number, he need feel no surprise
that these crustaceans, notwithstanding their numerous foes,
can nearly always be found in such profusion. They supply
fish with excellent food, and some authorities say that the
trout frequently owes the delicate flavour of its flesh to these
little creatures. The young Cyclops is so unlike its parent
that it frequently has been mistaken as belonging to a different
genus. Dr. Baird considers that it takes these crustaceans
from seventeen to twenty days to complete their growth,
and during this time they moult three times. At every
change of shell the little creature becomes more and more
like its parent. Cyclops can endure extreme cold much
better than drought, for it has been proved that while
exclusion from all moisture for five-and-twenty minutes is
sufficient to kill them, they will survive continuous freezing
for twenty-four hours apparently without any evil conse-
quences. The Cyclops feed upon both animal and vegetable
matter, but principally the former, and they are most readily
kept and bred in confinement. As they not only act the
part of efficient scavengers, but also supply the best of
living food to fish and the like, they should certainly be
encouraged as far as possible in the aquarium. They seem
to increase most rapidly in those tanks in which carnivorous
animals are kept. They swim in a very jerky fashion.
C. quadricornis varies in both size and colour, this variation
being chiefly due to locality and food. It is often white, but
sometimes of a greenish or reddish tinge.

Besides the Entomostraca thus briefly described, there are,
of course, many others which are just as interesting and
nearly as useful in the aquarium. Those just referred to -
are the commonest and the most easily obtained, and, per-
haps, owing to their great prolificacy, the most useful in the
tank.
FRESH-WATER CRUSTACEANS. 295

 

There is, however, one other Entomostracon, which I think
ought, though rather rare, to be mentioned here, owing to its
beauty, viz., the Fairy Shrimp (Chirocephalus stagnalis). It
is about lin. long, and nearly transparent. The tail is a bright
red, and the back of the female is blue. It is found in
stagnant water, and, according to Dr. Baird, in ditches and
deep cart-ruts on the edges of woods and plantations. I
believe that it is nearly always to be seen in a pond on
Blackheath. Dr. Baird, in writing of the Fairy Shrimps,
says that “they swim upon their backs, and in fine warm
weather, when the sun is not too strong, they may be seen
balancing themselves, as it were, near the surface by means
of their branchial feet, which are in constant motion. On
the least disturbance, however, they strike the water rapidly
with their tail from right to left, dart away like a fish,
and hasten to conceal themselves by diving into the soft
mud, or amongst the weeds at the bottom of the pool. It
is certainly the most beautiful and elegant of all the Ento-
mostraca. The male is especially beautiful: the uninterrupted
undulatory, waving motion of. its graceful branchial feet,
slightly tinged as they are with a light reddish hue, the
brilliant mixture of transparent bluish-green and bright red
of its prehensile antenne, and its bright red tail, with the
beautifully plumose setz springing from it, render it really
exceedingly attractive to the view. The undulatory motion
of its branchial feet serves another purpose in addition to
that of keeping the animal suspended in the water. The
thorax, or body, of the animal has been described, when
floating on its back, as like the cavity of a little boat, the
feet representing oars. When these are in motion, they cause
the water contained in this cavity to be compressed, and to
mount up as along a canal, carrying in the current the
particles destined for its food towards its mouth. It seems
to be constantly, when in this position, employed in swallowing
and digesting its food, its masticatory organs being in
perpetual motion.”

The food of this beautiful little crustacean consists of
animal and vegetable matter—chiefly, however, the former.
296 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

It is said to lay its eggs, during March and April, loosely
in the water. Though they are very small, they can be seen
by the naked eye. They are covered very thickly with
“sharp spines.” These spines, which can, of course, only be
seen by the help of a microscope, are for the purpose, it is
supposed, of causing the eggs to adhere to any solid substance
against which they may fall, and also to act as some slight
protection from the attacks of small aquatic animals.
CHAPTER XVI.

HYDRE.

  

HERE is nothing in connection with the fresh-water
aquarium more extraordinary and interesting than
the Hydre. These polypes were first noticed, I
believe, by Leeuwenhoek, in 1703; but M. Trembley, of Geneva,
about 1740, was the first to describe their life-history. The
three species known in Britain are the Green Hydra (Hydra
viridis), the Orange-brown (Hydra vulgaris), and the Brown
(H. fusca). These interesting creatures, of which H. vulgaris is
about the commonest, may be found in ponds or slow-running
streams nearly everywhere. They are generally taken adhering
to such plants as the duckweed or water-crowfoot. The best
way to procure Hydre for the aquarium is to gather a little
of the weed among which these tiny creatures are supposed
to live, and take it home. Then fill a few tumblers, or other
transparent glass vessels, with clear water, put them in a sunny
window, and in each of these receptacles place a small portion
of the weed. If there are any polypes at all, their presence will
be easily detected in less than an hour. When startled or
frightened in any way, these creatures contract themselves until
they assume the appearance of minute lumps of jelly, which are
not likely to be noticed by an inexperienced eye; but under
the influence of quiet and sunshine they will soon begin to
extend themselves in such a way that even a novice will be
easily able to see them. Their bodies may be likened in size
298 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

and shape to a piece of horsehair of about lin. long. One end
of this body has a sucking-disc, by means of which the animal
is able to affix itself to any foreign substance; at the other
end there is a mouth, which is surrounded by very fine tentacles,
varying in number from three or four to twelve. These tentacles
are capable of great extension, so much so that in some species
they may be stretched several times longer than the length of
the creature’s body. The mouth, which is very elastic, has the
food brought to it by the tentacles. Dr. Hogg says that “the
organ of prehension, which is called the hasta, consists of a
sac opening at the surface of the tentacle, within which, at
the lower portion, is placed a saucer-shaped vesicle supporting
a minute ovate body, which again bears a sharp calcareous
piece called the ‘sagitta’ arrow. This can be pushed out at
the pleasure of the animal, serving to roughen the surface of
the tentacle, and afford a much firmer hold of the living prey.”
The tubercles, which more or less cover the tentacles, possess
extremely fine threads, called “urticating threads,” by means
of which the Hydra is able to sting its victim to death. These
‘‘urticating threads” are so deadly in their action that none
of the smaller aquatic animals, upon which this polype feeds,
ever seem to recover from the consequences of coming in contact
with them. It is a most curious sight to watch a Hydra fishing,
as it were, for its food. Its tentacles are extended and swaying
to and fro, and directly a water-flea, larva of a gnat, little red-
worm, or any such creature comes within touch of one or more
of them, the victim seems to be paralysed, for after a few faint
struggles it either dies, or resigns itself to its fate as the long
and pliant tentacles slowly entwine themselves around the poor
creature, and gradually draw it towards the mouth which they
surround. Sometimes a Hydra catches at the same time more
victims than it feels disposed to eat. It will, in such a case,
devour sufficient to satisfy its appetite and relax its hold upon
the rest: for the latter, however, there is no escape, as the
“urticating threads ” will have done their work, and the unfor-
tunate animals just released from captivity sink down to the
bottom of the water to die—that is, if they were not already dead
before the polype allowed them to become disentangled. <A red-
HYDRA. 299

 

worm or small larva seems immediately to succumb to the powers
of the Hydra’s sting, but a Cyclops or Daphnia will, with a few
struggles, make some show of resistance, the shell, or carapace,
of the tiny crustaceans in their case affording a slight pro-
tection against the effects of the captor’s poison.

While in confinement, the Hydra may be fed upon such
Entomostraca as the Cyclops and Daphniz, which may be
bred in a separate vessel for the purpose. The polypes expel
the indigestible parts of these small crustacea. Though the
Hydre very often kill more animals than they are able to
eat, the dead bodies of the victims need not be removed
from the water, for the Entomostraca, if present in the tank
in any numbers, will act the part of scavengers, and help

 

 

 

Fic. 170, HyDR# ATTACHED TO A PIECE OF ANACHARIS PLANT.

to keep the water pure. A clear and thin glass tumbler
makes a very suitable little aquarium for the Hydre, which
of course should have no other companions than those they
feed.upon. They ought to be provided with some aquatic
plant, to which they can affix themselves (Fig. 170) if they
choose. A little duckweéd, or a small spray of the water-
thyme (Anacharis alsinastrum) will answer the purpose very
well. The Hydre, however, frequently fasten themselves to
the sides of the aquarium, thus much facilitating the observa-
tion of their habits. Hydre increase both by germination
and by being hatched from eggs. The former manner of
reproduction seems to be commoner than the latter. The
budding takes place on any part of the creature’s body
except the tentacles. When a polype is about to produce
300 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

offspring by germination, a small lump or tubercle will be
seen upon some portion of its body, and this gradually grows
and lengthens out until the small tentacles of the young
Hydra appear, which it begins to use for obtaining food
almost immediately. The young sometimes remain attached
to their parent’s body until they are quite full grown, and
oceasionally, indeed, until they themselves have also produced
children by germination. It not infrequently happens that
mother and daughter, though still closely united by family
ties, will both begin to devour the same unhappy worm, and
in a little time the relatives meet face to face near the
middle of their victim’s body, which, however, generally
breaking in half, frees the captors from an awkward dilemma.
It does happen, though rarely, when two Hydre have attacked
the same worm, that the worm is too tough to be broken,
and the stronger polype swallows the weaker one and its prey
until the prey has been digested, and then the vanquished
Hydra is rejected, or returned to its watery world to fish
and fight again, and none the worse, apparently, for its
rather unpleasant experience. Polypes increase very rapidly
during the summer time by budding.

Other lumps grow upon the body of Hydra besides those
which are to bud into young polypes, and these are called
sperm-cells or ovisacs. Both sperm-cells and ovisacs appear
upon the same Hydra. When the former are ripe, they burst
and discharge that which they contain, and thus fertilise the
ovum. After a time the ovum is extruded, and sinks to the
bottom of the water, where it remains for a long or short time,
according to the season, until it is hatched. The parent Hydra
dies after producing her egg. It very rarely happens that a
polype discharges more than one egg. The ova are about ith
of an inch in diameter. The young Hydra, when first hatched,
possesses only two tentacles, which gradually increase in number.
Mr. James Fullagar, who has written in Science Gossip from
time to time some very interesting articles upon these creatures,
says that the young Hydre have the power of stinging their
natural prey to death before they are old enough to devour it.
Hydre which have been kept in captivity during the summer
HYDRA. 301

 

apparently disappear about autumn, but reappear again in the
spring from the ova which during the previous summer had been
deposited at the bottom of the aquarium. According to Mr.
Fullagar “the reproduction of Hydra vulgaris from ova takes
place in the autumn, and that of Hydra viridis in the spring.”

There is another way by which Hydre may be increased,
besides being produced from eggs and by budding, and this is
by artificial division. This extraordinary power on the part
of this polype has given it the generic name of Hydra, and well
is it deserved, for it does seem to rival in this particular that
monster which, according to the ancients, was conquered
by Hercules. If a Hydra is cut in half, it apparently suffers
little or no pain; for the half containing the tentacles will sink
to the bottom of the water, because it has no disc by which
it can adhere, but will, if it has an opportunity, immediately
seize and devour prey. The other half will remain clinging
to the spot to which it was affixed when the operation took place,
and gradually develop a new mouth and new tentacles. Should
a polype be divided into four or more pieces, it will, in all pro-
bability, produce in time the same number of perfect Hydra;
or, if it be slit from top to bottom, the cut portions of each
piece will slowly unite, and two Hydre will take the place of the
original one. It has been said that a fresh polype will grow
from a small portion of a tentacle, but this is very doubtful.
It has been generally noticed that those Hydrz which have been
the result of artificial division are stronger and finer animals
than those which have sprung from eggs or have been produced
by germination. M. Trembley has recorded that he was suc-
cessful in turning some of these polypes inside out, and that
even under this unnatural condition they were able and willing
to capture their prey and feed upon it and thrive.

Anyone who carefully studies these wonderful fresh-water
Hydre will be sure to be amply rewarded for his trouble, for
nothing can be more extraordinary than their habits and life-
history.
CHAPTER XVII.

RECAPITULATION.

THINK it wise in a very short chapter to recapitu-
late, in a rule-like form, some of the suggestions
and warnings which I have given in the previous
chapters to novices in aquarium matters.

1. No one should think of keeping an aquarium who does
not make up his mind to bestow upon it a little daily attention.
This necessary attention will involve hardly any trouble.
Sometimes all that will be required will be just a glance to
see that nothing is wrong. ‘As a rule, however, there will
be little to do but to supply some of the inhabitants of
the tank with a small quantity of food. If the aquarium is
attended to at a stated time—such as always before breakfast
or before lunch—the giving of this necessary attention will
become a habit, and therefore, then, is not likely to be
omitted. An aquarium properly arranged and _ properly
looked after is certain to be a source of pleasure and instruc-
tion; but if neglected, or only noticed by fits and starts, it
is sure to become an eyesore and a nuisance.

2. An aquarium will run a great risk of being altogether
a failure unless it be correctly proportioned; that is, the
breadth of the vessel should always be greater than its depth.
The strength of the tank ought to be considered before its
elegance, though the latter quality should by no means be
entirely disregarded.

 
RECAPITULATION. 303

 

3. An aquarium cannot do well, without a great deal of
unnecessary trouble, unless it be properly situated. The
sun should never be allowed (except under special circum-
stances, which have already been referred to) to shine. directly
upon the water of it: and a north aspect is the best.

4. Unless it be very small, an aquarium should be placed
in the position in which it is intended to remain before it
is filled with water. Any attempt to remove a fairly-sized
tank when full of water will be certain to do some, if not
great, harm to the vessel or its contents.

5. Everything, whether gravel or sand, or water or weed,
which is placed in the aquarium should be perfectly clean.

6. The aquarium ought always to be filled with water by
means of one or more small siphons.

7, All aquaria, with very few exceptions (which have already
been mentioned), should contain aquatic plants. These plants
ought, of course, to be healthy, of the right kind, and set in
the right way. Vallisneria spiralis is one of the best of all
plants for this purpose.

8. All aquatic animals should be wisely associated. No fish
or any other animal ought to be allowed to molest its
companions.

9. No strange fish, especially a fish purchased, should be
introduced into a tank unless it has been for some time in
quarantine. The introduction of an unhealthy fish is almost
certain to be the cause of considerable loss. All gold-fish
procured for the aquarium should be those known as *‘cold-
water” fish.

10. Aquatic snails ought to be judiciously chosen; that is,
those univalves which feed upon conferve and decaying vege-
table matter should be preferred to those which eat healthy
and growing plants. The Planorbes, as a rule, are the best
for aquarium purposes.

11. Carnivorous and herbivorous beetles should never be kept
in the same vessel.

12. No animals should be expected to live without food; nor
ought animals to be tempted to prey upon each other through
lack of a sufficiency of food.
304 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA.

 

13. The different foods should be kept conveniently near the
aquarium or aquaria: the animals will then run less risk of
being starved.

14. No discarded food ought to be left in the tank. If
allowed to remain, it will be certain to corrupt the water, and
so considerably interfere with the welfare of the whole of the
inmates of the aquarium.

15. All garden-worms should be killed (as already suggested)
before they are given to carnivorous fish or other carnivorous
animals. It is neither a pleasant nor a profitable sight to see
a worm struggling with its captor, even if the creature suffers
no pain. Worms should also be dipped in water before they
are placed in the aquarium: they will not then be the cause
‘of the introduction of impurities into the tank.

16. A dead animal or plant or any decaying matter should
at once, upon discovery, be removed from the aquarium. A
small glass tube is very useful for obtaining certain things
from the bottom of the water. The tube should be about 3in.
in diameter and a few inches longer than the water in the
tank is deep. It ought to be cut perfectly square at both
ends. Almost everything which is small enough to enter the
tube may be removed by it from the bottom of the aquarium.
The tube is used in the following way: One end of the tube
is hermetically closed by means of a finger, the other end is
placed over the object required, the finger is then suddenly
removed from the upper end of the tube, and the object desired
shoots up immediately into the tube; and if the finger be
returned to its former position, and kept carefully there, so
that no air can enter the tube, the object now contained within
the pipe may be readily removed from the aquarium. This
operation is very simple, and may be easily and quickly
performed. The tube should be kept conveniently near the
aquarium.

17. Every aquarium should be covered with glass in such
a way that the necessary air may be able to come in contact
with the water, that none of the inhabitants of the tank can
escape, and that no dust can fall upon the surface of the
water.
RECAPITULATION. 305

 

18. No aquarium is likely to do well unless the representa-
tives of the vegetable and animal world which it contains
are properly balanced: that is to say, that there is a suffi-
ciency of oxygen-yielding weed. This balance may be known
by the growth of the plants, by the health of the animals,
and the brightness of the water.

19. The water of a properly-balanced aquarium need never
be changed—except, of course, under the special circum-
stances which have already been referred to. A little water
must be added occasionally to make up for the loss by
evaporation.

20. Aquatic animals should never be crowded together in
an aquarium. It is always wiser to have too few animals
than too many. When fish are swimming with their heads
close to the surface of the water, it may.be taken for granted
that there are too many in the tank, or that the temperature
of the water is higher than it should be. Under these
circumstances, some of the fish should be at once removed,
or one of the artificial means of aération previously described
should be resorted to, or the method (which has. also been
described) of reducing the state of the water to its proper
temperature should be employed.

21. Directly a fish or any other animal is seen suffering
from the dreaded fungus, it should be removed from the
aquarium. If a cure is wished for, the sufferer should be
placed (as already described) in running water, or in water
in which chloride of sodium has been dissolved, in the propor-
tion of a tablespoonful of the salt to half a gallon of water.
A fish should be kept in this solution until it turns upon
its back, when it ought to be at once placed in fresh water.
This operation should be repeated once or twice every day
until a cure is effected. A beetle might be kept in the
solution for at least half a minute.

92, All the animals and plants which can be kept in an
aquarium are interesting and instructive; some, no doubt,
more so than others. Nothing, however, should be discarded
as useless or uninteresting, for everything has a duty to perform
in the world.

x
306 FRESH-WATER AQUARIA

 

23. All who keep aquaria should be on their guard against
giving the animals which they may contain any suffering,
but should, instead, learn to have the same consideration for
their feelings (whether they be sensitive or not) that a reason-
able and properly-disposed person is expected to have for
those of his fellow-creatures.

24. The pleasure of keeping an aquarium is very much
enhanced if the person who owns it has some definite object
in view; e.g., the thorough investigation of the life-history
of some particular plants or animals. There is very, very
much still to be learnt in this direction. :

The series of chapters which it has given me so much
pleasure to write, is now completed; and I venture to express
the hope that what I have said in them will be of such use
to novices in aquarium matters as to save them from some
failure and disappointment, and not a few aquatic animals
from unnecessary suffering.

I here repeat, that a properly arranged aquarium which is
well cared for is always ornamental, interesting, instructive,
.and, in its best sense, elevating.
A.

Abramis blicca, 129
brama, 130
Buggenhagii, 131

Acarina, 275

Acephalous Mollusca, 162

Acerina cernua, 138

Acilius, 202
fasciatus, 209
sulcatus, 208

Acorus Calamus, 83

“ Adder, Flying,” 247

Advice, condensed, 302

Aérating bait-can, 34

Aération, artificial, 50

Aischna grandis, 248
maculatissima, 253

Aischnide, 247

Agabus, 202, 211
bipunctatus, 211
bipustulatus, 211
maculatus, 211

Agrion puella, 248

Agrionides, 247

Alburnus lucidus, 131

Alisma Plantago, 81

Amblystoma mexicanus, 105

Amblystome, 105
tadpole of, 105

Amphibians, 92

Amphibious Persicaria, 80

 

INDEX.

Anacharis alsinastrum, 59, 65
Anax formosus, 248
Ancylus, 172, 185
fluviatilis, 185
oblongus, 186
Anguilla latirostris, 157
mediorostris, 157
vulgaris, 155
Animal and Vegetable Worlds,
balancing, 305
Animals, association of, 303
Anodonta, 195
cygnea, 195
Aponogeton distachyon, 84
Apparatus for collecting, 34
Apple Beetles, Golden, 226
Aquaria, 1 (see also TANK)
and fernery combined, 19
cabinet, 25
cements for, 24
easily and cheaply-made, 27,
30

insect, 18, 27, 30

making, 8

management of, 42

portable, 18

various kinds of, 4-33
Aquatic, see WATER
Arachnida, 271, 275
Argulus foliaceus, 155
Argyroneta aquatica, 270
Arrow-head, Common, 82

x2
308

INDEX.

 

Artificial aération, 50

Asellus aquaticus, 288
Astacus fluviatilis, 284
Attention, necessary, 302
Aulostoma gulo, 280
Aulostome, Glutton, 280
Autumnal Water-Starwort, 71
Awlwort, Water, 87

Axolotl, Mexican, 105, 106

B.

Baétis, 257
Baird, Dr., quoted, 289, 294, 295
Bait-cans, 34
Bar, steel, for making framework, 9
Basket for collecting, 36
Bass, Black, 140
Bates, Mr. H. W., quoted, 217
Beetle, Chirping 213

Golden Apple, 226

“ Harmless Water,” 218

Screech, 213

Water, diagram of, 199
Beetles, Water, 197, 303
Bellows, home-made, for aérating,

Bennett, Mr. R. A. R., quoted, 159
Berosus, 223
affinis, 223
luridus, 223
cericeps, 223
spinosus, 223
Bivalves, 162, 187
Black Bass, 140
Bladderwort, 77
Bleak, 131
Blocks for aquaria-making, 8-10
Bloodworm, 268
Boatman, Water, 236
Bolts for slate and glass aquarium,
17

Bottles for cabinet aquarium, 27
for collecting, 36
Bowcombe’s aérating bait-can, 34
Box for collecting, 36
Brachycercus, 257
Branched Bur-reed, 83
Bream, Pomeranian, 131
White; 130

 

Bream-flat, 130

Broad-leaved Pond-weed, 84

Broad-nosed Eel, 157

Brooklime, 76

Brown Hydra, 297

Buck-bean, 74

Buckland, Frank, quoted, 34, 113,
125, 180, 188, 154, 160,
161

Bugs, Water, 228, 232

Bullhead, River, 142

Bur-reed, Branched, 83

Butomus umbellatus, 80

Bythinia tentaculata, 170

C.

Cabinet aquarium, 25
Caddis-flies, 240
Callitriche autumnalis, 71
verna, 69
Calopteryx virgo, 248
Canadian Water-weed, 59, 65
Candona, 291, 292
Cans for transmission of animals, 34
Cape Fragrant Water-Lily, 84
Carassius auratus, 111
gibelio, 118
vulgaris, 119
Carbonnier, M., quoted, 160
Carp, Common, 115
Crucian, 119, 120
German, 118
Gibel, 118
Golden, 111
“ King of the,” 119
Prussian, 118, 120
Speigel, 119, 120
Carp-Bream, 129
Carrington, Dr., quoted, 266
Cataclysta lemnalis, 260
Cave, constructing, 44
Cements for aquaria, 14, 24, 29
Ceratophyllum demersum, 76
Changing water, 42, 45, 47
Chara, 89
Characez, 89
Charcoal for aquaria, 43
Charr, 150
INDEX.

Cheaply-made aquaria, 18, 27
Chestnut, Water, 85
“China Marks,” 259
Chirocephalus stagnalis, 295
Chironomus plumosus, 269
Chirping Beetle, 213
Chrysomela polita, 226
Chrysomelide, 225, 226
Chub, 122
Cladocera, 289
Clark’s bottles for collecting, 36
leanliness necessary, 303
Cloén, 257
Cnemidotus, 213

cesus, 214
Cobitis barbatula, 132

toenia, 134
Coke for rockwork, 44
“ Cold-water ” Gold-fish, 112
Coleoptera, 197
Collecting equipment, 34
Colymbetes, 202

fuscus, 209

striatus, 209
Combined aquarium and fernery,

19

Conchifera, 162, 187
Confervez, effect of light on, 48
Corethra plumicornis, 264
Corixa, 232, 237

fossarum, 239

Geoffroyi, 238

moosta, 239

Sahlbergi, 239

striata, 239 9 __
Cottus gobio, 142
Covering aquaria, 304
Crayfish, fresh-water, 284
Creeper, larva of the Stone-fly, 259
Creeping Water Scorpion Grass, 76
Crowding to be avoided, 305
Crowfoot, Ivy-leaved, 72

Water, 71
Crucian Carp, 119
Crustaceans, fresh-water, 284
Crystalworts, 90
Culex annulatus, 263

ciliaris, 263

nemorosus, 263
Cutting grooves in slate, 15

 

309

Cyclops, 289
quadricornis, 292
Cymatin, 239
Cyprides, 289, 291
Cyprinide, 113
Cyprinus carpio, 115
rex Cyprinorum, 119
Cypris, 291
fusca, 292

D.

Dace, 123
Daphnia mucronata, 291
psittacea, 290
Pulex, 289
reticulata, 291
Scheefferi, 290
Vetula, 291
Daphniz, 289
Darwin quoted, 186
Day-flies, 254
Dead and decayed matter, remov-
ing, 304
Deep vessels, evils of, 2, 302
“ Demoiselles,” 248
“ Devil, Water,” 206
Dimensions of aquaria, 3, 302
Dimyarian Mollusca, 188
“ Dipping-tube,” 304
Donacia, 226
dentata, 226
Donaciads, 225, 226
Dragon-flies, 247
Dredging, net for, 278
Dreissena polymorpha, 196
Dreissenide, 188
Drone-fiy, 269
Duck Mussel, 193
Duckweed, 87
Greater, 88
Ivy-leaved, 88
Lesser, 88
Thick, 88
Dytiscide, 198, 200, 221
Dytiscides, 202
Dytiscus, 202
marginalis, 199, 202, 218
punctulatus, 208
310

E.

Kasily-made aquaria, 18, 27, 30

Edible Frog, 96

Eel, Broad-nosed, 157
Common, 155
Sharp-nosed, 155
Snig, 157

Hight-eyed Leech, 280

Elmides, 225

Elvers, 155

Emptying aquaria, 47

Emys Bealii, 93 ‘
europxa, 93
orbicularis, 93
reticulata, 93

Enamel for aquaria, 19, 30

Encephalous mollusea, 162

Entomostraca, 288
apparatus for obtaining, 37

Ephemera vulgata, 256

Ephemeride, 254, 257

Equipment, collecting, 34

Eristalis tenax, 269

Esox lucius, 151

F.

Fairy Shrimp, 295
Feeding animals, 302, 303, 304
Fernery and aquarium combined, 19
Field's aérating bait-can, 34
Filling aquaria, 45, 303
Filter, flower-pot, 57
Fishes, 109
diseased, 305
fungous disease of, 305
intelligence of, 109
introduction of strange, 303
rules for keeping, 110
tameness of, 109
Flag, Sweet, 83
Fleas, Water, 289
Flies, Caddis, 240
Day, 254
Dragon, 247
Drone, 269
Stone, 259
Water, larve of, 240
Willow, 258

 

INDEX.

Flowering Rush, 80
Flower-pot filter, 57
“ Flying Adder,” 247
Fontinalis antipyretica, 90
Food and feeding, 302, 303, 304
Forceps for collecting, 38
Forget-me-not, 75
Fountain, easily-arranged, 50
Fragrant Water-Lily, Cape, 84
Framework of aquaria, 9, 14, 19
Fresh-water Crayfish, 284

crustaceans, 284

“ Fox,” 115

Screw, 286

“ Shark,” 152

Shrimp, 207, 286

Tortoise, 92

“ Winkle,” 170
Frog-bit, 59, 63
Frog, Common, 96

. Edible, 96

Frog, metamorphoses of the, 94
Fullagar, Mr. James, quoted, 300
Fungous disease of fishes, 305

G.

Gallerucide, 225

Gammarus fluviatilis, 286

Gasteropoda, 162

Gasterosteus aculeatus, 143
pungitius, 148

Geocorise, 228

German Carp, 119

’ Gerris, 229

argentea, 231
gibbifera, 230
lacustris, 230
Najas, 230
thoracia, 230
Gibel Carp, 118
Glass coverings for aquaria, 304
for aquaria, 12
Larva, 264
tube for removing decayed
matter, 304
Glasses for cabinet aquarium, 27,
32
Globe, common glass, 5
Glutton Aulostome, 280
INDEX.

311

 

Gnats, 260
House, 263
Ring-footed, 268
Wood, 263
Gobio fluviatilis, 120
Golden Apple Beetles, 226
Carp, 111
Orfe, 134
*¢ Pippins,” 164
Schlei, 128
Tench, 128
Gold-fish, 111
Gordius aquaticus, 281
Gravel for aquaria, 32, 43
Great Water-Newt, 98
Water-Plantain, 81
Green Hydra, 297
Grooves in slate for tank, cutting,
15
Grystes nigricans, 140
Gudgeon, the, 120
Gyrinidee, 200, 215
Gyrinus, 215
bicolor, 118
natator, 217

H.

Heemonia, 226
Hemopsis sanguisuga, 280
Hair Worm, 281
Haliplides, 202, 218, 214
Haliplus, 213

lineatocollis, 214

ruficollis, 213
“ Harmless Water-beetle, 218
Helophorus grandis, 222
Heteromera, 198
Heteroptera, 228
Hippurus vulgaris, 67
Hirudo medicinalis, 279
Hogg, Dr., quoted, 298
Hoop-iron, cutting grooves in slate

with, 16

Hornwort, Common, 76
Horse Leech, 280

“ Stinger,” 247, 248
Hottonia palustris, 80
“ Hot-water” Gold-fish, 112

 

House Gnat, 263
Hydaticus, 202, 210

transversalis, 211
Hydra, Brown, 297

fusca, 297

Green, 297

Orange-brown, 297

viridis, 297

vulgaris, 297
Hydrachna, 275

globulus, 205
Hydrachnidex, 275
Hydradephaga, -00, 215
Hydre, 297
Hydrena, 224

riparia, 224
Hydrobius fuscipes, 222
Hydrocampa stagnalis, 260
Hydrocampide, 260
Hydrocharidex, 59
Hydrocharis morsus-rane, 59, 63
Hydrochus, 224

angustatus, 224
Hydrocorisx, 228, 232
Hydrometra, 229

stagnorum, 229
Hydrometrids, 229
Hydrophilida, 198, 218, 225
Hydrophilus, 218

piceus, 218
Hydroporides, 202, 214, 215
Hydroporus, 214

palustris, 215 -

rivalis, 215

12-pustulatus, 214
Hydréus, 221 ‘

caraboides, 221
Hyphydrus, 214

ovatus, 214

I.

Tlybius, 202, 210

ater, 210

fuliginosus, 210
Implements for collecting, 34
Insect aquarium, 18, 27, 30
Italian Water-weed, 59
Ivy-leaved Crowfoot, 72
312

INDEX.

 

J.

Jars for cabinet aquarium, 27
Jeffreys, Dr.Gwynn,quoted, 184,191
Jesse, Mr., quoted, 153

Jet for fountain, 52

Jones, Mr. T. H., on Gold-fish, 111
Jones, Prof. Rymer. quoted, 267
Jurine, M., quoted, 293

K.
“King of the Carp,” 119

L.

Labelling aquaria, 32
Laccobius minutus, 224
nigriceps, 224
Laccophilus, 202, 211
hyalinus, 212
minutus, 212
Lamellibranchiata, 188
Lampern, 157
Lamprey, River, 157
Larvee of Water-flies, 240
Leech, Hight-eyed, 280
Glutton, 280
Horse, 280
Leeches, Medicinal, 278
Lemna gibba, 88
minor, 88
polyrhiza, 88
trisulca, 88
Leuciscus cephalus, 122
erythropbthalmus, 124
orfus, 134
phoxinus, 125
rutilus, 121
vulgaris, 123
Libellula depressa, 248
Libellulides, 247
Light, effects of, 48
Lily, Cape Fragrant Water, 84
Lily-like Villarsia, 72
Limneza, 172, 179
auricularia, 163, 181
glabra, 184
glutinosa, 184
palustris, 182
peregra, 179, 182

 

Limnea stagnalis, 163, 165,167,180
truncatula, 184
Limneide, 172
Limnebius, 225
Limnius tuberculatus, 225
Limnophilide, 242, 243
Limnophilus flavicornis, 244
lunatus, 245
pellucidus, 245
rhombicus, 243
vittatus, 245
Limpets and snails, 162
Lissotriton punctatus, 98
Livingstone, Dr., quoted, 139
Loach, Spinous, 134
Stone, 132
Lobelia Dortmanna, 72
Water, 72
Looking-glass for cave, 44
Fish, 119
for shading and effect, 49
Louse, Water, 288

M.

Making aquaria, 8
“March Brown,” 258
Mare’s-tail, 67
Maxims for aquarium-keepers, 302
May-flies, 254
McLachlan, Mr., quoted, 242
Medicinal Leeches, 279
Melted glass for rockwork, 44
Mentha sylvestris, 76
Menyanthes trifoliata, 74
Metamorphoses of the frog, 94

of the newt, 101

of the toad, 94
Mica-schist for rockwork, 44
Midges, 264
Milfoil, Spiked Water, 68
Miller’s Thumb, 142
Minnow, 125
Mint, Water, 76
Mirror-fish, 119
Mites, Water, 275
Mollusca, 162
Monomyarian Mollusca, 188
Moss, Willow, 90
Moulding, zinc, for framework, 10,13
INDEX.

313

 

Mussel, Duck, 193
Pearl-bearing, 195
shell, diagrams of, 189, 190
Swan, 196

Mussels, 162, 187

Myosotis palustris, 75

Myriophyllum spicatum, 68

N.

Naidex, 276
Naid Worm, 276
Naucoris, 232
cimicoides, 235
Nematoid Worms, 281
Nemura variegata, 258
Nepa, 232
Nephelis octoculata, 280
Nepide, 232
Neritide, 168
Neritina fluviatilis, 169
Net for collecting, 37
for transferring specimens, 40
for water-worms, &c., 278
Neuroptera, 254, 258
Newt, Common Smooth, 98, 99
Great Water, 98
Palmated Smooth, 98, 100
Straight-lipped Water, 98, 100
Newts, catching, 101
metamorphoses of, 101
their power of reproducing
lost limbs, 104
Nine-spined Stickleback, 148
Nitella, 89
translucens, 89
Noterus, 202, 212
crassicornis, 212
semipunctatus, 212
Notonecta, 232
glauca, 236
maculata, 237
Notonectide, 232, 236
Number of inmates, 47

O.

Object of the aquarium-keeper,
1, 306
Ochthebius, 224

 

Ochthebius pygmus, 224
Orange-brown Hydra, 297
Orectochilus, 215
villosus, 218
Orfe, Golden, 134
Osphromenus Olfax, 159
Overcrowding, evils of, 47
Oviparous snails, 164
Ovoviviparous snails, 164

P.

Painting framework of aquaria,
12, 14, 30
Palmated Smooth Newt, 98, 100
Paludina contecta, 168
vivipara, 169
Paludinidz, 168
Paradise Fish, 159
Parnidx, 225
Parnides, 225
Parnus prolifericornis, 225
Parrot-beaked Water-flea, 290
Pearl-bearing Mussel, 195
Pectini-branchiate snails, 164, 168
Pelobiides, 202
Pelobius Hermanni, 212
Pennell, Mr. Cholmondeley, quoted,
158, 195
Pentamera, 198
Petromyzon fluviatilis, 157
Perca fluviatilis, 135
Perch, Common, 135
Perenni-branchiata, 105
Perla bicaudata, 259
Perlide, 258
Persicaria, Amphibious, 80
Phantom Larva, 264
Philhydrus, 223
Phryganea grandis, 243
minor, 243
obsoleta, 243
striata, 243
Phryganeide, 242
Physa, 172, 178
fontinalis, 179
hypnorum, 164, 178
“ Physician Fish,” 128
Pickerel, 152
314

INDEX.

 

Pike, 151
‘* Pippins, Golden,” 164
Pisidium, 189, 191
amnicum, 192
fontinale, 192
nitidum, 192
pusillum, 192
roseum, 192, 193
Planaria brunnea, 282
lactea, 282
torva, 282
Planarian Worms, 282
Planorbes, 303
Planorbis, 172
albus, 176
carinatus, 174
contortus, 177
corneus, 163, 167, 173
glaber, 178
lineatus, 176
marginatus, 175
nautileus, 178
nitidus, 177
spirorbis, 176
vortex, 175
Plantain, Great Water, 81
Plants, 59, 303
introducing, 59
lead for sinking, 32
Plea minutissima, 239
Polycelis nigra, 282
Polygonum amphibium, 80
Polypes, 297
Pomeranian Bream, 131
Pond-weed, Broad-leaved, 84
Pope, 138 ;
Portable aquarium, 1
Position for aquaria, 48
for cabinet aquarium, 25
Potamogeton natans, 84
Pots for plants, 45
Propagating glasses, 5, 26
Proportions of aquaria, 3, 302
Protection from sunlight, 49
Prussian Carp, 118, 120

Pulmobranchiate snails, 164,
172

Pumice-stone for making rock-
work, 44

Pump for aérating, 55

 

R.

Rana esculenta, 96
temporaria, 96
Ranatra, 232
linearis, 234
Ranunculus aquatilis, 71
hederaceus, 72
Recapitulation, 302
Reducing temperature, 49
Red Wriggler, 268
Rhynchophora, 225
Riccia fluitans, 90
natans, 90 ©
Ring-footed Gnat, 263
River Bullhead, 142
Crayfish, 284
Lamprey, 157
Worm, 276
Roach, 121
Rockwork, 43
to hide fountain-pipes, 52
Rudd, 124
Ruffe, 138
“ Ruins” out of place in aquaria, 44
Rules for aquarium-keepers, 302
Rush, Flowering, 80

8

Sagittaria sagittifolia, 82
Salmo alpinus, 150

fario, 148
Sand for aquaria, 32, 42
Saprolegnia ferox, 116, 206
Schlei, Golden, 128
Scorpion Grass, Creeping Water, 76
Scorpions, Water, 228, 232
Screech Beetle, 214
Screw, fresh-water, 286
Season for collecting, 41

‘Selaginella Water, 91

Shading, 49

Shallow vessels, advantages of 2,302
Shapes of aquaria, 3

“ Shark, Fresh-water,” 152
Sharp-nosed Eel, 155

Shells of snails, 163

Shelves for cabinet aquarium, 25
“ Shiners,” 216

Shrimp, Fairy, 295
INDEX.

315

 

Shrimp, fresh-water, 206, 286

Sigarz, 239

Silver-fish, 112

Sinking plants, lead for, 32

Siphon for emptying and filling
aquaria, 46

Siredon pisciformis, 105

Situation of aquaria, 303

Slate and glass aquarium, making,
15

cutting grooves in, 15
for aquaria, 15
Smooth Newt, Common, 98, 99
Newt, Palmated, 98, 100
Snails and limpets, 162
choosing, 303
Snail’s shell, diagram of, 167
Snig Hel, 157
Soldering zinc framework, 11, 14
Sowerby, J. de Carle, quoted, 196
Sparganium ramosum, 83
Spawn of frogs and toads, to
distinguish, 94
Speigel Carp, 119
Spercheus emarginatus, 223
Spheriide, 187, 189
Spherium, 189
corneum, 191
lacustre, 191
ovale, 190
Spiders, Water, 271
Spiked Water-Milfoil, 68
Spinous Loach, 134
Sponge filter for flower-pot, 57
Squeaker, 213
Stand for zine-framed aquaria, 13
for propagating glass, 27
Starwort, Autumnal Water, 71
Vernal Water, 69
Stenophylax, 245
Stickleback, Nine-spined, 148
Ten-spined, 148
Three-spined, 143
Stone Loach, 132
Straight-lipped Water-Newt, 98,
100
Strange fish, introduction of, 303
Stratiomyidz, 268
Stratiomys chameleon, 269
Stratiotes aloides, 59, 65

 

Subularia aquatica, 87
Summer Worm, 276

Sun’s rays, effects of, 48
Swan Mussel, 196

Sweet Flag, 83

Sympetrum vulgatum, 248
Syringe for aérating, 53, 55
Syrphide, 269

T

Tadpoles, development of, 94, 101
Tandon, M. Moquin, quoted, 194
Tank, the, 1
and fernery combined, 19
emptying, 43
filling, 45, 303
fountain for, 50
glass for, 15
making, 8
painting, &c., 14, 15
position for, 48
removing, 303
rockwork for, 43, 52
sand for, 32, 42
shape of, 2
situation of, 303
slate for, 15
tools required for, 8
various kinds of, 4-33
zinc framework for, 10
Tench, Common, 127, 129
Golden, 128
Ten-spined Stickleback, 148
Terrapins, 92
Tetramera, 198
Thread-spinners, 164, 189
Three-spined Stickleback, 143
“Tiger, Water,” 206
Tinca auratus, 128
vulgaris, 127
Tools for aquaria-making, 9
for collecting, 38
Tortoise, Fresh-water, 93
Transferring-net, 40
Trapa natans, 85
Trembley, M., quoted, 301
Trimera, 198
Triton Bibronii, 98, 100
cristatus, 98
palmipes, 98, 100
316

INDEX.

 

Triton punctatus, 98, 99
Tritons, metamorphoses of, 101
their power of reproducing

lost limbs, 104

Trout, Common or Yellow, 148

“Tube for removing decayed matter,
804 :

Tubifex rivulorum, 276

Tumblers for cabinet aquarium, 32

Tye, Mr. G. Sherriff, quoted, 164

Unio, 193
margaritifer, 195
pectorum, 194
tumidus, 193; shell of, 189
Unionide, 188, 193
Univalves, 162, 165
Utricularia vulgaris, 77

Vv.

. Vallisneria spiralis, 59
Valvata cristata, 172
piscinalis, 171
Valvatide, 168
Varnish for cement, 14.
for portable aquarium, 19
Vegetable and Animal Worlds,
balancing, 305
Velia, 229
currens, 231
Vernal Water-Starwort, 69
Veronica Beccabunga, 76
Villarsia, Lily-like, 72
nympheoides, 72
Violet, Water, 80

Ww.
Water, 45

Awlwort, 87
beetle, ‘‘ Harmless,” 218
beetles, 197
Boatman, 236
bugs, 228, 232
changing, 42, 45
Chestnut, 85
Crowfoot, 71
“ Devil,” 206
fleas, 289
flies, larvee of, 240

 

Water Lily, Cape Fragrant, 84
Lobelia, 72
louse, 288
Measurers, 228
Milfoil, Spiked, 68
Mint, 76
Mites, 205, 275
Newt, Great, 98
Newt, Straight-lipped, 98, 100
Plantain, Great, 81
plants, 59, 303
plants, sinking, 32
Scorpion Grass, 76
Scorpions, 228, 232
Selaginella, 91
snails, 162
Soldier, 59, 65
spiders, 229, 271
Starwort, Autumnal, 71
Starwort, Vernal, 69
“Tiger,” 206
Violet, 80
weed, Canadian, 59, 65
weed, Italian, 59
“Wolf,” 154
Worms, 271
Weevils, 225
Whirligigs, 212, 216, 217
White Bream, 130
Willow Moss, 90
‘Winkle, Fresh-water,” 170
Wriggler, Red, 269
“Wolf, Water,” 154
Wood Gnat, 143
Wood, Rev. J. G., quoted, 269
Worm, Hair, 281
Naid, 276
River, 276
Summer, 276
Worms, garden, to kill, 304
Nematoid, 281
Planarian, 282
_ Water, 271

Ys

Yarrell quoted, 138
Yellow Trout, 148

Z.
Zinc for framework, 10
Catalogue of Practical Handbooks
Published by L, Upcott Guill,
170, Strand, London, W.C.

ANGLER, BOOK OF THE ALL-ROUND. A Compre-
hensive Treatise on Angling in both Fresh and Salt Water. In
Four Divisions, as named below. By JOHN BICKERDYKE. With
over 220 Engravings. Jn cloth, price 5s. 6d. (A few copies of a
LARGE PAPER EDITION, dound in Roxburghe, price 255.; the
price will shortly be raised to 305.).

Angling for Coarse Fish. A very Complete and Practical
Work on Bottom Fishing, according to the Methods in use on the
Thames, Trent, Norfolk Broads, and elsewhere. Illustrated. Price
15., cloth 2s. (uncut). 4

' Angling for Pike. A Practical and Comprehensive Work on
the most Approved Methods of Fishing for Pike. or Jack ; including
an Account of Some New Tackles for Spinning, Live-baiting, and
Trolling. Profusely Illustrated. Przce 1s., cloth 2s..(uncut).

Angling for Game Fish. A Practical Treatise on the Various
Methods of Fishing for Salmon; Moorland, Chalk-stream, and
Thames Trout; Grayling, and Char. Well Illustrated. Price.
1s. 6d., cloth 2s. 6d. (uncut).

Angling in Salt Water. A Practical Work on Sea Fishing
with Rod and Line, from the SHore, Piers, Jetties, Rocks, and from
Boats ; together with Some Account of Hand-Lining. Over 50
Engravings. Price 1s., cloth 2s. (uncut).

AQUARIA, MARINE: Their Construction, Arrangement,
and Management. Fully Illustrated. By R. A. R. BENNETT, B.A,
In cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.

BEE-KEEPING, BOOK OF. A very practical and Complete
Manual on the Proper Management of Bees especially written
for Beginners and Amateurs who have but a few Hives. Fully
Illustrated. By W. B. WEBSTER, First-class Expert, B.B.K.A.
Price 1s.; cloth, 1s. 6d.

- BEES AND BEE-KEEFPING: Scientific and Practical. By
| F. R. CHESHIRE, F.L.S., F.R.M.S., Lecturer on Apiculture at
South Kensington. J two vols., price 16s.

Vol. I., Scientific. A complete Treatise on the Anatomy and
Physiology of the Hive Bee. Ju cloth gilt, price 7s. 6d.

Vol. IJ., Practical Management of Bees. An Exhaustive
Treatise on Advanced Bee-Culture. Jn cloth gilt, price 8s. 6d.

BICYCLES AND TRICYCLES OF THE YEAR.
Descriptions of the New Inventions and Improvements for the Present ,
Season. Designed to assist intending purchasers in the choice of a
machine. Illustrated. By HARRY HEWITT GRIFFIN. Twelfth
Annual Issue, for 1889. Ja paper, price 1s. ; ‘

 

 

All Books Post Free. C 2.—1889-90,
2 Published by L. UpcotrT GILL,

BOAT BUILDING AND SAILING, PRACTICAL.
Containing Full Instructions for Designing and Building Punts, Skiffs,
Canoes, Sailing Boats, &c. Particulars of the most Suitable Sailing
Boats and Yachts for Amateurs, and Instructions for their Proper
Handling. Fully Illustrated with Designs and Working Diagrams.
By ApDRIAN NEISoN, C.E., Dixon Kemp, A.I.N.A,, and G.
CHRISTOPHER DAVIES. In one vol., cloth gilt, price 7s. 6d.

BOAT BUILDING FOR AMATEURS, PRACTICAL.
Containing Full Instructions for Designing and Building Punts, Skiffs,
Canoes, Sailing Boats, &c. Fully Illustrated with Working Diagrams.
By ADRIAN NEISON, C.E. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged
by D1xon KEmp, Author of “Yacht Designing,” “A Manual of
Yacht and Boat Sailing,” &c. Jn cloth gilt, price 25. 6d.

BOAT SAILING FOR AMATEURS. Containing Par-
ticulars of the most Suitable Sailing Boats and Yachts for Amateurs,
and Instructions for their Proper Handling, &c. Illustrated with
numerous Diagrams. By G. CHRISTOPHER DaviEs. Second Edition,
Revised and Enlarged, and with several New Plans of Yachts. J#
cloth gilt, price 5s.

BOOKBINDING FOR AMATEURS: Being Descriptions
of the various Tools and Appliances Required, and Minute Instructions
for their Effective Use. By W.J. E. CRANE. Illustrated with 156
Engravings. Jn cloth gilt, price 25s. 6d.

BROADS, THE LAND OF THE. By E. R. Svurriine.
ILLUSTRATED EDITION.—The most Complete Guide to
the whole of the District—embracing the Broads and their Water-
ways of Norfolk and Suffolk—that has yet been published. With a
good Map, grinted in four colours. Price 25. 6d.
CHEAP EDITION.—An abridged Edition, with. Plates of
Characteristic Sketches by J. TEMPLE. A good and clear Map,
in black and white, is also given. J Coloured Cover, price 1s.

BUTTERFLIES AND MOTHS, COLLECTING: Being
Directions for Capturing, Killing, and. Preserving Lepidoptera and
their Larvze. Illustrated. Reprinted, with Additions, from “ Practi-
cal Taxidermy.” By MONTAGU BROWNE. Jn paper, price 1s.

CACTUS CULTURE FOR AMATEURS: Being
Descriptions of the various Cactuses grown in this country; with

. Full and Practical Instructions for their Successful Cultivation.

’ By W. Watson, Assistant Curator of the Royal Botanic Gardens,
Kew. Profusely Illustrated. J cloth gilt, price 5s.

CAGE BIRDS, BRITISH. Containing Full Directions for
Successfully Breeding, Rearing, and Managing the various British
Birds that can be kept in Confinement. [Illustrated with
COLOURED PLATES and numerous finely-cut Wood Engravings.
By R. L. WALLACE. Jn cloth gilt, price 10s. 6d.

CAGE BIRDS, DISEASES OF: Their Causes, Symptoms,

and Treatment. A Handbook for everyone who keeps a Bird. =
Dr. W. T. GREENE, F.Z.S. ln paper, price is. ;

 

4% All Books Post Free,
170, Strand, London, W.C. 3

 

CANARY BOOK. Containing Full Directions for the Breeding,
Rearing, and Management of all Varieties of Canaries and Canary
Mules, the Promotion and Management of Canary Societies and
Exhibitions, and all other matters connected with this Fancy. By
ROBERT L, WALLACE. Second Edition, Enlarged and Revised,
with many new Illustrations of Prize Birds, Cages, &c. Jn cloth gilt,
price 5s. ; with Coloured Plates, 6s. 6d.; and in Sections as follows :

Canaries, General Management of. Including Cages and
Cage-making, Breeding, Managing, Mule Breeding, Diseases and their
Treatment, Moulting, Rats, Mice, &c. Illustrated. Cloth, price 2s. 6d.

Canaries, Exhibition, Containing Full Particulars of all the
different Varieties, their Points of Excellence, Preparing Birds for
Exhibition, Formation and Management of Canary Societies and
Exhibitions. Illustrated. J cloth, price 2s. 6d.

CARD TRICKS, BOOK OF, for Drawing-room and Stage
Entertainments by Amateurs ; with an Exposure of Tricks as practised
by Card Sharpers and Swindlers. Numerous Illustrations. By Prof.
R. KUNARD. Jllustrated Wrapper, price 25. 6d.

CHURCH EMBROIDERY: Its Early History and Manner
of Working ; Materials Used and Stitches Employed; Raised and
Flat Couching, Appliqué, &c., &c., including Church Work over
Cardboard. A practical handbook for Church Workers. Illustrated.
In paper, price is.

CHURCH FESTIVAL DECORATIONS. Comprising
Directions and Designs for the Suitable Decoration of Churches for
Christmas, Easter, Whitsuntide, and Harvest. Illustrated. A useful
book for the Clergy and their Lay Assistants. J paper, price 1s.

COINS, A GUIDE TO ENGLISH PATTERN, in Gold,
Silver, Copper, and Pewter, from Edward I. to Victoria, with their
Value. By the REv. G. F. CROWTHER, M.A. Illustrated. Jz
silver cloth, with gilt facsimiles of Coins, price 5s.

COINS OF GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND, A
GUIDE TO THE, in Gold, Silver, and Copper, from the Earliest
Period to the Present Time, with their Value. By the late Colonel W.*
STEWART THORBURN. Of immense value to collectors and dealers.
27 Plates in Gold, Silver, and Copper, and 8 Plates-of Gold and
Silver Coins in RAISED FACSIMILE. Ju cloth, with silver fac-
stmiles of Coins, price 7s. 6d.

COLLIE, THE. Its History, Points, and Breeding. By
HuGH DALziEL. Illustrated. Demy 8vo, price 1s.; cloth, 2s.
CONJURING, BOOK OF MODERN. A Practical Guide
to Drawing-room and Stage Magic for Amateurs. By PROFESSOR

R. KuNARD. Illustrated. //ustrated Wrapper, price 2s. 6d.

COOKERY FOR AMATEURS; or, French Dishes for
English Homes of all Classes. Includes Simple Cookery, Middle-
class Cookery, Superior Cookery, Cookery for Invalids, and Breakfast
and Luncheon Cookery. By MADAME VALERIE. Second Edition.

In paper, price 1s.
*% All Books Post Free.
4 Published by L. UPCOTT GILL,

CUCUMBER CULTURE FOR AMATEURS. Including
also Melons, Vegetable Marrows, and Gourds. Illustrated. By
W. J. May. ln paper, price ts.

DEGREES, A GUIDE TO, in Arts, Science, Literature,
Law, Music, and Divinity, in the-United Kingdom, the Colonies, the
Continent, and the United States. By E. Wooton, Author of “A
Guide to the Medical Profession,” &c. ln cloth, price 155.

DOGS, BREAKING AND TRAINING: Being Concise
Directions for the proper Education of Dogs, both for the Field and
for Companions. Second Edition. By “PATHFINDER.” With Chapters
by HuGH DaALzIEL on Work of Special Breeds; Trail or Drag
Hounds; Training Bloodhounds; Defenders and Watch Dogs;
Sheep Dogs—Stock Tenders; Life Savers—Water Dogs; Vermin
Destroyers ; House Manners ; Behaviour Out of Doors. Illustrated,
In cloth gilt, price 6s. 6d.

DOGS, BRITISH : Their Varieties, History, and Characteristics
By HucuH DALZIEL, assisted by Eminent Fanciers. NEW
EDITION, Revised and Enlarged. [Illustrated with First-class
COLOURED PLATES and full-page Engravings of Dogs of the
Day. This is the fullest and most recent work on the various
breeds of dogs kept in England. In two Volumes, Demy 8vo,
cloth gilt, price ios. 6d. each, as follows :

Dogs Used in Field Sports. Containing Particulars of the
following, among other Breeds: Greyhound, Irish Wolfhound,
Bloodhound, Foxhound, Harrier, Basset, Dachshund, Pointer,
Setters, Spaniels, and Retrievers. SEVEN COLOURED PLATES and
21 full-page Engravings.

Dogs Useful to Man in other Work than Field Sports;
House and Toy Dogs. Containing Particulars of the following,
among other Breeds: Collie, Bulldog, Mastiff, St. Bernard, New-
foundland, Great Dane, Fox and all other Terriers, King Charles
and Blenheim Spaniels, Pug, Pomeranian, Poodle, Italian Greyhound,
Toy Dogs, &c., &c. COLOURED PLaTES and full-page Engravings.

.DOGS, DISEASES OF: Their Causes, Symptoms, and
Treatment; Modes of Administering Medicines ; Treatment in
cases of Poisoning, &c. For the use of Amateurs. By HUGH
DALZIEL. Second Edition. Jn paper, price 1s.; in cloth gilt, 2s.

DUCKS AND GEESE: Their Characteristics, Points, and
Management. Splendidly Illustrated. lu paper, price 1s. 6d.
ENGRAVINGS AND THEIR VALUE. Containing a
Dictionary of all the Greatest Engravers and their Works. By
J. H. SLATER, Barrister-at-Law. [ln the press.

EXHIBITION ACCOUNT BOOKS. For use at all Dog,
Poultry, Rabbit, and Cage Bird Shows. In Four Books, comprising :
I. Minute Book; II. Cash Book; III. Entries Book; IV. Ledger.
With Full Directions, and Illustrative Examples for Working them.
N.B.—The Set of Four Books is kept in Three Series: No. 1,
for Show of 500 Entries, 55. the Set ; No. 2, for 1000 Entries, 75. 6d.

 

*% All Books Post Free.
170, Strand, London, W.C. 5

 

the Set; and No. 3, for 1500 Entries, 12s. 6d. the Set. Larger
sizes in proportion. The books’ can be had separate. MINUTE
BooKk—No. 1, 15.3; No. 2, 15. 3a; No. 3, 25. CAasH BOOK—
No. 1, 25.; No. 2, 25. 6¢.; No. 3, 4s. ENTRIES BOOK—No. 1, 25. ;
No. 2, 25. 6d. ; No. 3, 4s. Ledger—No. 1, 25. ; No. 2, 25. 6a. ; No. 3, 45,

FANCY WORK SERIES, ARTISTIC. A Series of Illus-
trated Manuals on Artistic and Popular Fancy Work of various
kinds. Each number is complete in itself, and issued at the uniform
price of 6d. Now ready—(1) MACRAME LacE (Second Edition) ;
(2) PATCHWORK; (3) TATTING; (4) CREWEL WORK; (5) APPLIQUE;
(6) FANCY NETTING.

FERNS, THE BOOK OF CHOICE: For the Garden,
Conservatory, and Stove. Describing and giving explicit Cultural
Directions for the best and most striking Ferns and Selaginellz
in Cultivation. Illustrated with Coloured Plates and numerous
Wood Engravings, specially prepared for this work. [/x the press.

FERNS, CHOICE BRITISH. Descriptive of the most
beautiful Variations from the common forms, and their Culture. . By
C. T. DRuERY, F.L.S. Very accurate PLATES, and other Illus-
trations. lx cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.

FERRETS AND FERRETING. Containing Instructions for

the Breeding, Management, and Working of Ferrets. Second Edition,
Re-written and greatly Enlarged. Illustrated. J paper, price 6d.

FERTILITY OF EGGS CERTIFICATE. These are
Forms of Guarantee given by the Sellers to the Buyers of Eggs for
Hatching, undertaking to refund value of any unfertile eggs, or to
replace them with good ones. Very valuable to sellers of eggs, as
they induce purchases. Jn books, with counterfoils, price 6d.

FIREWORK-MAKING FOR AMATEURS. A com-
plete, accurate, and easily-understood work on Making Simple and
High-class Fireworks. By Dr. W. H. BROWNE, M.A. Price 25. 6d.

FOX TERRIER STUD BOOK. Vol. I., containing the
Pedigree of every Fox Terrier that Won a Prize at any of the
Principal Shows in 1888. Over 1400 Entries of Leading Dogs.
Edited by HUGH DALZIEL. Jn cloth, price 25. 6d.

Supplement for 1890. [ln the press.

FOX TERRIER, THE. Its History, Points, Breeding,
Rearing, Preparing for Exhibition, and Coursing. By HuGH
DALZIEL. Illustrated. Price 1s.; cloth, 25.

GAME AND GAME SHOOTING, NOTES ON. Mis-
cellaneous Observations on Birds and Animals, and on the Sport
they afford for the Gun in Great Britain, including Grouse, Partridges,
Pheasants, Hares, Rabbits, Quails, Woodcocks, Snipe, and Rooks.
By J. J. MANLEY, M.A. Illustrated. Jv cloth gilt, 400pp., price 7s. 6d.

% All Books Post Free.

 
6 Published by U. UPCOoTT GILL,
GAME PRESERVING, PRACTICAL. Containing the

fullest Directions for Rearing and Preserving both Winged and
Ground Game, and Destroying Vermin; with other Information of
Value to the Game Preserver. Illustrated. By WILLIAM CARNEGIE,
In cloth gilt, demy 8vo, price 215.

GARDENING, DICTIONARY OF. A Practical Encyclo-
pedia of Horticulture, for Amateurs and Professionals. Illustrated
with upwards of 2440 Engravings. Edited by G. NICHOLSON,
Curator of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew; assisted by
Prof. Trail, M.D., Rev. P. W. Myles, B.A., F.L.S., W. Watson,
J. Garrett, and other Specialists. if 4 vols. large post 4lo.
Vol. I., A to E, 552pp., 743 Illustrations ; Vol. II., F to O, 544pp.,
811 Illustrations; Vol. III., P to S, 537pp., 564 Illustrations;
Vol. IV., T to Z, and Supplement of Pronouncing Dictionary,
Indices to Plants for Special Purposes, Recent Introductions,
&c. 322 Illustrations. Price 155. each. In Monthly Parts,
price 2s. 6a.

GARDEN PESTS AND THEIR ERADICATION.

Containing Practical Instructions for the Amateur to overcome the
Enemies of the Garden. Illustrated. J paper, price Is.

GOAT, BOOK OF THE. Containing Full Particulars of the
various Breeds of Goats, and their Profitable Management. With
many Plates. By H. STEPHEN HOLMES PEGLER. Third Edition,
sae aera and Coloured Frontispiece. Cloth gilt, price
4s. 6d.

GOAT-KEEPING FOR AMATEURS: Being the Practi-
cal Management of Goats for Milking Purposes. Abridged from
“The Book of the Goat.” Illustrated. Jn paper, price 1s.

GREENHOUSE MANAGEMENT FOR AMATEURS.
Descriptions of the best Greenhouses and Frames, with Instructions
for Building them, particulars of the various methods of Heating, Ilus-
trated Descriptions of the most suitable Plants, with general and
special Cultural Directions, and all necessary information for the
Guidance of the Amateur. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged.
Magnificently Illustrated. By W. J. May. lu cloth gilt,
price 5s.

GREYHOUND, THE: [Its History, Points, Breeding,
Rearing, Training, and Running. By HuGH DALZIEL. With
Coloured Frontispiece. Jn cloth gilt, demy 8vo, price 2s. 6d.

GUINEA PIG, THE, for Food, Fur, and Fancy. Illustrated
with Coloured Frontispiece and Engravings. An exhaustive book
on the Varieties of the Guinea Pig, and its Management. By
C. CUMBERLAND, F.Z.S. Jn cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.

HANDWRITING, CHARACTER INDICATED BY.
With Illustrations in Support of the Theories advanced taken from
Autograph Letters of Statesmen, Lawyers, Soldiers, Ecclesiastics,
Authors, Poets, Musicians, Actors, and other persons. Second
Edition. By R. Baucuan. Ju cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.

 

 

*% All Books Post Free.
170, Strand, London, W.C. 7
HARDY PERENNIALS and Old-fashioned Garden Flowers.

Descriptions, alphabetically arranged, of the most desirable
Plants for Borders, Rockeries, and Shrubberies, including

Foliage as well as Flowering Plants. Profusely Illustrated.
By J. Woop. in cloth rice 55.

HOLIDAY HOMES, INEXPENSIVE. Giving particulars
of how to live in our leisure periods almost where we please, in a
cheap, comfortable, quick erected, and withal comfortable house,

which can be removed if necessary without much expense. Jn stiff
paper cover, price 1s.

HOME MEDICINE AND SURGERY: A Dictionary
of Diseases and Accidents, and their proper Home Treatment.
For Family Use. By W. J. MACKENZIE, M.D., Medical Officer
for Lower Holloway, Medical Referee for North London of the
Scottish Provincial Assurance Company, late Lecturer to the St.
John’s Ambulance Association, Author of “The Medical Management
of Children,” &c.- Illustrated. Jn cloth, price 2s. 6d.

HORSE-KEEPER, THE PRACTICAL. By Gzorce

FLEMING, LL.D., F.R.C.V.S., Principal Veterinary Surgeon of the
Army. Price 3s. 6d.

HORSE-KEEPING FOR AMATEURS. A Practical
Manual on the Management of Horses, for the guidance of those
who keep them for their personal use. By Fox RUSSELL.
Price s.; cloth, 2s.

HORSES, DISEASES OF: Their Causes, Symptoms, and
Treatment. For the use of Amateurs. By HuGH DALzIEL. J”
paper, price 15.3 cloth, 2s.

INLAND WATERING PLACES. A Description of all
the principal Spas in the United Kingdom. A companion volume
to “Seaside Watering Places.” [Zn the press.

JOURNALISM, PRACTICAL: How to Enter Thereon and
Succeed. A book for all who think of “writing for the Press.” By
JOHN Dawson. Jn cloth gilt, price 25. 6d.

LEGAL PROFESSION, A GUIDE TO THE. A Prac-
tical Treatise on the various Methods of Entering either Branch of
the Legal Profession ; also a Course of Study for each of the
Examinations, and selected Papers of Questions ; forming a Com-
plete Guide to every Department of Legal Preparation. By J. H.
SLATER, Barrister-at-Law, of the Middle Temple. Price 75. 6d.

LIBRARY MANUAL, THE. A Guide to the Formation
of a Library and the Valuation of Rare and Standard Books.
By J. H. SLATER, Barrister-at-Law. Third Edition. Revised
and Greatly Enlarged. (ln the press.

LILY OF THE VALLEY: All About It, and How to Grow
It; Forced Indoors and Out of Doors, in Various Ways. By
WILLIAM ROBERTS. Jn paper covers, price 6d.

 

** All Books Post Free.
8 Published by 1. Upcort Git,

MICE, FANCY: Their Varieties, Management, and Breeding.
‘Re-issue, with Criticisms and Notes by DR. CARTER BLAKE.
Illustrated. Jn paper, price 6d.

MODEL YACHTS AND BOATS: Their Designing, Making,
and Sailing. . Illustrated with 118 Designs and Working Diagrams.
A splendid book for boys and others interested in making and rigging
toy boats for sailing. It is the best book on the subject now pub-
lished. By J. DU V. GROSVENOR. Jn leatherette, price 5s.

MONKEYS, NOTES ON PET, and How to Manage Them.
Profusely Illustrated. By ARTHUR PATTERSON. Cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.

MUSHROOM CULTURE FOR AMATEURS. With
_ Full Directions for Successful Growth in Houses, Sheds, Cellars,
‘and Pots, on Shelves, and Out of Doors. Illustrated. By W. J..
May. In paper, price is.

NATURAL HISTORY SKETCHES among the Car-
nivora— Wild and Domesticated; with Observations on_ their
Habits and Mental Faculties. By ARTHUR NICcOLs, F.G.S.,°
F.R.G.S. Illustrated. Jn cloth gilt, price 55.

NEEDLEWORK, DICTIONARY OF. An Encyclopedia
of Artistic, Plain, and Fancy Needlework; Plain, practical,
complete, and magnificently Illustrated. By S. F, A. CAULFEILD
and B. C. SAwWARD. Accepted by H.M. the Queen, H.R.H. the
Princess of Wales, H.R.H. the Duchess of Edinburgh, H.R.H. the
Duchess of Connaught, and H.R.H.the Duchess of Albany Dedicated
by special permission to H.R.H. Princess Louise, Marchioness of Lorne.
In demy 4t0, 5286., 829 Jllustrations, extra cloth gilt, plain edges,
cushioned bevelled boards, price 21s.; with COLOURED PLATES,
elegant satin brocadé cloth binding, and coloured edges, 315. 6d.

ORCHIDS: THEIR CULTURE AND MANAGE-
MENT, with Descriptions of all the Kinds in General Cultivation.
Illustrated by Coloured Plates and Engravings. By W. WATSON,
Assistant-Curator, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew; Assisted by
W. BEAN, Foreman, Royal. Gardens, Kew. Jn Monthly Parts,

_ price is.

PAINTING, DECORATIVE. A Practical Handbook on
Painting and Etching upon. Textiles, Pottery, Porcelain, Paper,
Vellum, Leather, Glass, Wood; Stone, Metals, and Plaster, for the
Decoration of our Homes. By B. C. SAWARD. Cheap Edition, price 55..

PARROTS, THE SPEAKING. The Art of Keeping and
Breeding the principal Talking Parrots in Confinement. By Dr.
Kart Russ. Illustrated with COLOURED PLATES and
Engravings. ln cloth gilt, price 5s.

PATIENCE, GAMES OF, for one or more Players. A
very clearly- -written and well-illustrated Book of Instructions on How
to Play all the different Games of Patience. By Miss WHITMORE
Jones. Illustrated. Series I., thirty-nine games, Is. ; Series IL,
thirty-four games,-Is. Zhe two bound together in Cloth, price 2s. 6a.

 

** All Books Post Free.
170, Strand, London, W.C. 9

PHEASANT-KEEPING FOR AMATEURS. A Practi-
cal Handbook on the Breeding, Rearing, and General Management
of Fancy Pheasants in Confinement. By Gro. HORNE. Illustrated
with Diagrams of the necessary Pens, Aviaries, &c., and a
COLOURED FRONTISPIECE and many full-page Engravings of
the chief Varieties of Pheasants, drawn from life by A. F. LYDON.
In cloth gilt, price 3s. 6d.

PIANOFORTES, TUNING AND REPAIRING. The
Amateur’s Guide to the Practical Management of a Piano without
the intervention of a Professional. By CHARLES BABBINGTON.
In paper, price 6d.

PHOTOGRAPHY (MODERN) FOR AMATEURS.
By J. EATON FEARN. [Jn the press.

PICTURE-FRAME MAKING FOR AMATEURS.
Being Practical Instructions in the Making of various kinds of
Frames for Paintings, Drawings, Photographs, and Engravings.
Illustrated. By the REV. J. LUKIN. Cheap Edition, 77 pafer, price 1s.

PIG, BOOK OF THE. Containing the Selection, Breeding,
Feeding, and Management of the Pig; the Treatment of its
Diseases ; the Curing and Preserving of Hams, Bacon, and other
Pork Foods ; and other information appertaining to Pork Farming.
By Professor JAMES LoNG. Fully Illustrated with Portraits of Prize
Pigs by HARRISON WEIR and other Artists, Plans of Model
Piggeries, &c. Jn cloth gilt, price ios. 6d.

PIGEONS, FANCY. Containing Full Directions for the
Breeding and Management of Fancy Pigeons, and Descriptions of
every known Variety, together with all other information of interest
or use to Pigeon Fanciers. Third Edition, bringing the subject down
to the present time. 18 COLOURED PLATES, and ‘22 other
full-page Illustrations. By J. C. LYELL. Jz cloth gilt, price ios. 6d.

POKER BOOK, THE. A Practical Book on Playing the
Fascinating American Game of Poker with Success. By R. GUERN-
DALE. Jn paper, price Is.

POOL, GAMES OF. Describing Various English and Ameri-
can Pool Games, and giving the Rules in full. Illustrated. Jz paper,
price is.

POULTRY AND PIGEON DISEASES: Their Causes,
Symptoms, and Treatment. A Practical Manual for all Fanciers.
In paper, price 1s.

POULTRY FOR PRIZES AND PROFIT. Contains:
Breeding Poultry for Prizes, Exhibition Poultry, and Management
of the Poultry Yard. Handsomely Illustrated. New Edition, Revised
and Enlarged. By Professor JAMES LONG. Cheap Edition, in cloth
gilt, price 2s. bd.

RABBIT, BOOK OF THE. A Complete Work on Breeding
and Rearing all Varieties of Fancy Rabbits, giving their History,
Variations, Uses, Points, Selection, Mating, Management, &c., &c.

 

** All Books Post Free.
10 Published by L. UPCOTT GILL,

NEW EDITION, Revised and Enlarged. Edited by KEMPSTER
W. KNIGHT. With an additional chapter on “Hutch Rabbit
Farming in the Open,” by Major MOoRANT. Illustrated with
Coloured and other Plates. One handsome vol., price 105. 6d.

RABBITS, DISEASES OF: Their Causes, Symptoms, and
Cure. With a Chapter on THE DISEASES OF CAVIES. Reprinted
from “ The Book of the Rabbit” and “ The Guinea Pig for Food, Fur,
and Fancy.” Jn paper, price 1s.

RABBIT-FARMING, PROFITABLE. A Practical Manual,

showing how Hutch Rabbit-farming in the Open can be made to
Pay Well. By Major G. F. Morant. Jn paper, price 1s.

RABBITS FOR PRIZES AND PROFIT. Containing
Full Directions for the Proper Management of Fancy Rabbits in
Health and Disease, for Pets or the Market, and Descriptions of
every known Variety, with Instructions for Breeding Good Specimens
Illustrated. By CHARLES Rayson. Jn cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.
Also in Sections, as follows :—

Rabbits, General Management of. Inciuding Hutches,
Breeding, Feeding, Diseases and their Treatment, Rabbit Coverts, &c.
Fully Illustrated. Jn paper, price 1s.

Rabbits, Exhibition. Being descriptions of all Varieties of
Fancy Rabbits, their Points of Excellence, and how to obtain them.
Illustrated. Ju paper, price 1s.

REPOUSSE WORK FOR AMATEURS: Being the Art
of Ornamenting Thin Metal with Raised Figures. By L. L. HASLOPE.
Illustrated. Jz cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.

ROSES FOR AMATEURS. A Practical Guide to the
~ Selection and Cultivation of the best Roses, both for Exhibition or
mere Pleasure, by that large section of the Gardening World, the
Amateur Lover of Roses. Illustrated. By the REv. J. HONYwooD
D’OMBRAIN, Hon. Sec. of the National Rose Society. Price 15.

ST. BERNARD, THE. Its History, Points, Breeding, and
Rearing. By HuGH DALzIEL. Illustrated. Demy 8vo, cloth, price
2s. 64.

SANITARY AIDS FOR HOUSE-HUNTERS: What
to Look For and What to Avoid. By H. W. CRossE, Associate
of the Sanitary Institute, &c. ln paper, price 6d.

SEA-FISHING FOR AMATEURS. Practical Instructions
to Visitors at Seaside Places for Catching Sea-Fish from Pier-heads,
Shore, or Boats, principally by means of Hand Lines, with a very
useful List of Fishing Stations, the Fish to be caught there, and
the Best Seasons. By FRANK HUDSON. Illustrated. Crown Svo,
price Is.

SEASIDE WATERING PLACES. A Description of
nearly 200 Holiday Resorts on the Coasts of England and Wales,
the Channel Islands, and the Isle of Man, including the gayest and
most quiet places, giving full particulars of them and their attractions,

 

 

** All Books Post Free.
170, Strand, London, W.C. 11

 

and all other information likely to assist persons in selecting. places
in which to spend their Holidays according to their individual tastes ;
with BUSINESS DIRECTORY of Tradesmen, arranged in order
of the Towns. Sixth Edition. Illustrated. /# cloth, price 2s. 6d.

SHEET METAL, WORKING IN: Being Practical In-
structions for Making and Mending Small Articles in Tin, Copper,
Iron, Zinc, and Brass. Illustrated. Third Edition. By the Rev.
J. LUKIN, B.A. Jn paper, price 6d.

SHORTHAND, ON GURNEY’S SYSTEM (IM-
PROVED), LESSONS IN: Being Instructions in the Art of
Shorthand Writing as used in the Service of the two Houses
of Parliament. By R. E. MILLER. Jn paper, price 1s.

SHORTHAND, EXERCISES IN, for Daily Half Hours,
on a Newly-devised and Simple Method, free from the Labour of
Learning. Illustrated step by step. Being Part II. of “ Lessons in
Shorthand on Gurney’s System (Improved).” By R. E. MILLER.
Price 9d. .

SHORTHAND SYSTEMS; WHICH IS THE BEST?
Being a Discussion, by various Experts, on the Merits and Demerits
of all the principal Systems, with Illustrative Examples. Edited by
THOMAS ANDERSON. Jn paper, price 1s.

SICK NURSING AT HOME: Being Plain Directions and
Hints for the Proper Nursing of Sick Persons, and the Home
Treatment of Diseases and Accidents in case of Sudden Emer-
gencies. By S. F. A. CAULFEILD. J paper, price 1s.; in cloth,
price 1s. 6d.

SLEIGHT OF HAND. A Practical Manual of Legerdemain
for Amateurs and Others. New Edition, Revised and Enlarged.
Profusely Illustrated. By E. Sacus. Cloth gilt, price 6s. 6d.

SNAKES, MARSUPIALS, AND BIRDS. A Charming
Book of Anecdotes, Adventures, and Zoological Notes relating to
Snakes, Marsupials, and Birds.. A capital Book for Boys, and all
interested in Popular Natural History. By ARTHUR NICOLS, F.G.S.,
F.R.G.S., &c. Illustrated. Price 5s.

TAXIDERMY, PRACTICAL. A Manual of Instruction to
the Amateur in Collecting, Preserving, and Setting-up Natural
History Specimens of all kinds. Fully Illustrated with Examples

and Working Diagrams. By Montacu. Browne, F.ZS.,
Curator of Leicester Museum. Second Edition. cloth gilt,
price 7s. 6d.

TOURISTS ROUTE MAP of England and Wales. The
Third Edition; thoroughly Revised. Shows clearly all the
Main, and most of the Cross, Roads, and the Distances between
the Chief Towns, as well as the Mileage from London. In addition
to this, Routes of Zhirty of the most Interesting Tours are printed in
red. The Map is mounted on linen, and is the fullest, handiest, and
best tourist’s map in the market. J» cloth, price 1s.

4

 

4% All Books Post Free.
12 Published by L. UPCoTT GILL, 170, Strand, London, W.C.

TRAPPING, PRACTICAL: Being some Papers on Traps

and Trapping for Vermin, with a Chapter on General Bird Trap-
ping and Snaring. By W.CARNEGIE. Jn paper, price 1s.

TURNING FOR AMATEURS: Being Descriptions of the
Lathe and its Attachments and Tools, with Minute Instructions
for their Effective Use on Wood, Metal, Ivory, and other Materials,
New Edition, Revised and Enlarged. By JAMES LUKIN, B.A.
Illustrated with 144 Engravings. Jn cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.

TURNING LATHES. A Manual for Technical Schools and

- Apprentices. A Guide to Turning, Screw-cutting, Metal-Spinning,
&c. Edited by JAMES LUKIN, B.A. Third Edition. With 194
Illustrations. Ju cloth gilt, price 2s. 6d.

VEGETABLE CULTURE FOR AMATEURS. Con-
taining Concise Directions for the Cultivation of Vegetables in Small
Gardens so as to insure Good Crops. With Lists of the Best
Varieties of each Sort. By W. J. May. Illustrated. //ustrated
Wrapper, price is.

VINE CULTURE FOR AMATEURS: Being Plain Direc-
tions for the Successful Growing of Grapes with the Means and
Appliances usually at the command of Amateurs. Illustrated. Grapes
are so generally grown in villa greenhouses that this book cannot fail
to be of great service to many persons. By W. J. May. lu paper,
price Is.

VIOLINS (OLD) AND THEIR MAKERS: Including
some References to those of Modern Times. By James M.
FLEMING. _ Illustrated with Facsimiles of Tickets, Sound Holes, &c.

' Reprinted by Subscription. J Cloth, price 7s. 6d.

VIOLIN SCHOOL, PRACTICAL, for Home Students. A
Practical Book of Instructions ‘and Exercises in Violin Playing,
for the use of Amateurs, Self-learners, Teachers, and others With
a Supplement on “Easy Legato Studies for the Violin.” By
J. M. FLeminc. 1 handsome vol. demy 4to, half Persian, price
gs. 6d. Without Supplement, price 75. 6d.

WAR MEDALS AND DECORATIONS. A Manual
for Collectors and for all who are interested in the Achieve-
ments of the British Army and Navy, and the Rewards issued
in public recognition of them ; with some account of Civil Rewards
for Valour. Beautifully Illustrated. Price 7s. 6d.

WATERING PLACES OF FRANCE, NORTHERN.
A Guide for English People to the Holiday Resorts on the Coasts
of the French Netherlands, Picardy, Normandy, and Brittany. By
Rosa BAUGHAN. Jn paper, price 2s.

WOOD CARVING FOR AMATEURS. Containing De-
scriptions of all*the requisite Tools, and Full Instructions for their
Use in producing different varieties of Carvings. Illustrated. Jz
paper, price Is.

London: L. UPCOTT GILL, 170, Strand, W.C.

 

 

 
BOOKS PUBLISHED BY HORACE COX,

AT THE “FIELD” OFFICE, 346, STRAND, LONDON, W.C.

 

FouRTH EDITION. In post 8vo, limp cloth, gilt, price 2s. 6d., by post 2s. 8d.
YIHE ART OF SKATING; With Ilustrations, Diagrams, and Plain
Directions for the Acquirement of the Most Difficult and Graceful Movements. B:
GEORGE ANDERSON (‘‘Cyclos”), Vice-President of the Crystal Palace Skating Club, an
for many years President of the Glasgow Skating Club.

 

THIRD EDITION. Price 7s. 6d., by post 7s. 10d.

IGURE SKATING; Being the Theory and Practice of the Art as

Developed in England, with a Glance at its Origin and History. By H. C.
VANDERVELL and T. MAXWELL WITHAM (Members of the London Skating Club). There
are thousands of skaters who attain a small amount of skill in Figure skating, and there
stop, because they neither know what to do, or how to do it. A reference to this, the
acknowledged Text Book of Fugue Skating, will solve any difficulty that may have stopped
pre ess for years. It now includes all the new Figures, with the new nomenclature which

8 been authorised by the Skating Club.

Price 8d., by post 9d.
JHE “FIELD” LAWN TENNIS UMPIRES’ SCORE-SHEET BOOK

(Sixty Sets), with Instructions for the Use of Umpires. Adapted for the Use of
Umpires, as used at the Championship Meetings.

FourtH EDITION. In demy 4o, on toned paper, and in fancy cover, price 28., by post 2s. 2d.

JHE BOOK OF DINNER SERVIETTIES contains a New Intro-

duction on the Decoration of Dinner Tables, and General Directions for Folding the
Serviettes. There are Twenty-one different kinds given, with Ninety-two Woodcuts
illustrative of the various Folds required and the Serviettes complete.

 

 

Demy 8v0, price 5s. 6d., by post 58, 10d.

YIHE ROTHAMSTED EXPERIMENTS ON THE GROWTH OF
WHEAT BARLEY, AND THE MIXED HERBAGE OF GRASS LAND.
WILLIAM FREAM, B.Sc. Lond, F.L.S., F.G.S., F.S.S

In demy 8vo, price 3s. 6d., by post 3s. 9d.

UINTS ON THE MANAGEMENT OF HAWKS. By J. EH. Hanrina,
Author of “‘ A Handbook of British Birds,” ‘‘ Essays on Sport and Natural History.”

: Price 1s., by post 1s. 2d. With Full-Page Coloured Hlustration and Woodcuts.
PALLAS’S SAND GROUSE: Its Natural History, and a Plea for its

Preservation. By W. B. TEGETMEIER.

YlHE RULES OF PIGEON SHOOTING. Published by Special Per-
mission ; the Hurlingham Club and the Gun Club Rules of on Shooting. SECOND
EDITION. Bound together in cloth, gilt edges, price 6d., by post 7d.

WHE LAWS OF LAWN TENNIS, as adopted by the Marylebone
Cricket Club and the All England Croquet and Lawn Tennis Club. Entered at
Stationers’ Hall. Price 6d., by post 63d.

“FIELD” OFFIGE,

3846, STRAND, LONDON, W.C.

 
BOOKS FOR ANGLERS.

THO 00000000 OOO i 11-2 0000000 C0 e ee

NEAR AND FAR: an Angler's Sketches of Home Sport and Colonial
Life. By Wm. SENIOR (‘Red Spinner”), Angling Editor of The Field, Author of
“Waterside Sketches,” &¢. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s.

“Both for young and old these pages are good reading.”—Daily Telegraph.
ee SKETCHES. By ‘Red Spinner” (WM. SENIOR) Imp. 32mo,
oards, 1s

SEC one OF FLY-FISHING FOR SALMON, TROUT, AND

LIN By EpwaRD HAMILTON, M.D., F.L.S., &c. Tilustrated. Small post,
ge cloth iia: 6s.

THE SPORTING FISH OF GREAT ERITAIN. By H. CHOLMONDELEY-
PENNELL. Illustrated by Sixteen Lithographs of Fish in Gold, Silver, and Colours,
First Edition. Demy 8vo, 15s.

MODERN IMPROVEMENTS IN FISHING TACKLE AND FISH HOOKS.
aca CHOLMONDELEY-PENNELL. With Two Hundred Illustrations. Crown 8yo,

loth, 2s.

NORTH COUNTRY TROUT FLIES. ByT. E. Pritt. With Coloured Plates
of all the best Flies. Second Edition. Demy 8vo, cloth, 10s. 6d.

THE AMERICAN SALMON FISHERMAN. By HEnry P. WELLS. Illustrated,
116 pages. Small post 8vo, cloth, 6s.

FLY RODS AND FLY tein ae estions for Amateurs as to their Manu-
facture and Use. By HENRY P. ee yaetrated, Small 4to, 364 pages, cloth
extra, 10s. 6d.

SALMON PROBLEMS. By J. W. Wiuls BuND. Boards, 2s. 6d.; cloth, 3s. 6d,

' AN AMATEUR ANGLER’S DAYS IN DOVEDALE. pene an Account of

my Three Weeks’ Holiday in July and August, 1884. Imp. 32mo, fancy boards, 1s. ;

limp leather-cloth, gilt edges, 1s. 6d. ,

FRESH WOODS AND PASTURES NEW. By the Author of “An Amateur
Angler’s Days in Dovedale,” “ Frank’s Ranche,” &c. Large fcap. 8vo, cloth, 1s. 6d.

AN ANGLER'S STRANGE EXPERIENCES. By Corswo.p Isys, M.A. Pro-
fusely illustrated. Small 4to, cloth extra. Second and cheaper edition, 3s. 6d.

HOW AND WHERE TO FISH IN IRELAND. By Hi REGAN. With Map and
numerous Text Dlustrations. Second Edition, crown 8vo, 3s. 6

NOTES ON FISH AND FISHING. By. J. J. MANLEY, M.A. With Illustrations.
Crown 8vo, cloth extra, 363 pages, leatherette binding, 6s.

THE ART OF TROUT FISHING ON RAPID STREAMS. By H. C.
CUTCLIFFE, F.R.C.S. Small post 8vo, cloth, 3s. 6d.

st FISHING AND SPINNING IN THE NOTTINGHAM STYLE.
By J. W. Martin, the ‘Trent Otter.” Coloured boards. Illustrated, crown 8vo,
2s. 6d. New, Revised, and Enlarged Edition.

THE BOOK OF THE ROACH. By the late J. GREVILLE FENNELL. In cloth, 2s.
FLY TYING. By James OGDEN. Illustrated. 2s. 6d.

 

SAMPSON LOW, MARSTON, SEARLE & RIVINGTON

(LIMITED),

St. Dunstan’s House, Fetter Lane,

LONDON, =.c.
ROWLAND'S TOILET ARTIGLES

Have been known for nearly 100 years to be the best
which can be obtained; the best articles are, in the long run, always the cheapest.

  

Sis enon VING ra Fe Le

Denes) ie a2 oe Le eo

ROWLANDS’ MACASSAR OIL

Is the best and safest preserver and beautifler of the hair, and has a most
delicate and fragrant bouquet. It contains no lead or mineral ingredients, and

“ee N BOLDEN COLOUR

for fair and golden- haired children, and people whose hair has become grey.
Sizes : 3/6, 7/-; 10/6, equal to four small.

ROWLANDS’ KALYDOR

Is a most HOOLLIDE emollient and refreshing preparation for the face, hands,
and arms, It removes all freckles, tan, sunburn, sting of insects, prickly heat,
chaps, redness, irritation and roughness of the ‘skin, &c., produces a beautiful
and delicate complexion, and renders the

SKIN SOFT, FAIR,

and delicate; it is warranted free from any greasy or metallic ingredients. Sizes
4/6 and 8/6. Half-sized bottles at 2/3.

ROWLANDS ODONTO

Is the best, purest, and most fragrant Tooth Powder; it prevents and arrests
decay, stren; hens the gums, gives a pleasing fragrance to the breath, and

TEETH WHITE AND SOUND.

ROWLANDS’ EUKONIA

Is a pure and delicate toilet. powder, free from any bismuth or ota eg ingredients
Sold in three tints, white, rose, and cream, 2/6 per box. =

ROWLANDS’ ARTICLES,

of 20, HATTON GARDEN, LONDON, and avoid cheap, spurious imitations, under
the same or similar names.

      

 

 

 
Purveyors by Special Warrants to
H.M. THE QUEEN

     

and fama
H.R.H. THE PRINCE OF WALES. - BY SPECIAL
APPOINTMENT. APPOINTMENT.

SPRATTS PATENT

Meat ‘‘Fibrine’’ Vegetable

DOG CAKES

: (WITH BEETROOT).
BEWARE OF WORTHLESS IMITATIONS!
“ $EBE EACH CAKE IS STAMPED

SPRATTS PATENT and a ‘xX.’
COD LIVER OIL

DOG” CA KES.

For Puppies after Distemper, and for Dainty Feeders and
Sick or Pet Dogs.

DISTEMPER POWDERS, WORM POWDERS, MANGE, ECZEMA,
and EAR CANKER LOTIONS, TONIC CONDITION PILLS, &c.
PAMPHLET ON CANINE DISEASES,
And full List of Medicines, Post Free.

Dog, Poultry, # Game Mouses # Appliances.

 

 

TO POULTRY REARERS.
SPRATTS PATENT
POULTRY MEAL.

The Most Nutritious and Digestible Food for Chicks and Laying Hens (being
thoroughly cooked). Samples Post Free.

New Edition of “THE COMMON SENSE of POULTRY KEEPING,” 3d., Post Free
GRANULATED PRAIRIE MEAT, “CRISSEL.”
Price 25s, per cwt. Takes the Place of Insect Life. ;
“CARDIAC;” A TONIC FOR POULTRY.
Price 1s. per Packet, or 3s. per 7lb. Bag.

GAMB MBATL.

SAMPLE AND FULL PARTICULARS POST FREE.

Extract from “THE FIELD” :—‘‘Thanks to Spratts Pheasamt Meal and Crissel, I
have reduced the cost a great deal, and reared a considerably greater average With Spratts
Food they require no custards, ants’ eggs, or, in fact, anything from hatching till they are
turned in coverts and eat corn.”—CAREFUL SPORTSMAN.

“<The Common Sense of Pheasant Rearing,’’ 3d., Post Free.
   
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 

AQUARIUMS

SQUARE AND GLOBE
AQUARIA.
All Sizes kept i in Stock.
MARINE AC AQUARIA,
ALSO Hired
AQUARIA oF SPECIAL 2&
SHAPES é
made to order.

ROCKWORK BUILDERS.

ROCKS FOR AQUARIUMS
OF EVERY SIZE.

z a

 

   
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
   

GOLD FISH, WATER PLANTS +p
SHINGLE, NETS, CANS, &. {i /i4

WINDOW cS
CONSERVATORIES. 7*

FERN CASES.

7 ah

al i
5 ih nt a
ar AY at NY
HAND LIGHTS. F BaD
Send for Dios NS
List to

S EADE&SON,
* 130 High Holborn, ke
: LONDON, W.C.

ESTIMATES FREE.

 

fr PRIVATE )\) Aquaria

EXCHANGING| Beetles
Fish
Newts
Snails

Weeds
&e., &c.

 

 

SELLING #
OFFICE:
BUYING } 170, strawo, conoon, wc.

 
SUMNER’S NATURALISTS’ STORES,

135, Oxford Street, London, W.

A CHOICE ASSORTMENT OF

Every Description of Natural History Apparatus and Requisites,

 

ORNITHOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.—British and Foreign Birds,
Aviaries, “ages, and Parrot Stands for the Drawing Room and Con-
servatory ; Fountains, Baths, and all Requisites for the Aviary.

Specialties——Piping Bullfinches, Belgium and Hartz Mountain
Canaries.

OOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.—Birds’ Eggs and Nests, Oological
Cabinets, Blowpipes, Drills and Forceps. All Eggs are side-blown,
and guaranteed authentic.

REPTILIAN IDEPARTMENT.—British, European, and Exotic Snakes,
Slow-worms, and Lizards, Chameleons, Tortoises, Terrapins, Turtles,
&c., in great variety from all parts of the globe.

AMPHIBIAN DEPARTMENT.—Green Tree, Horned, Common and
Hdible Frogs, Common, Natterjack and Fire-bellied Toads, Alpine
and Yellow Salamanders, Mexican Axolotl, Tritons and Newts.

PISCATORIA!. DEPARTMENT.—Gold and Silver Fish, Carp, Roach,
Tench, Dave, Golden Orpe, Minnows, Snails, Water Beetles and
Plants, Aquariums, Globes, Fountains, Rocks, Nets, &c. SUMNER’s
Fish Food, 1d. packets; Ants’ Eggs, 6d. pint.

ENTOMOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.—Ova, Larve, and Pupe of
Lepidoptera, Insect Cabinets, Cases, Store Boxes, Setting Boards,
Cork, Killing Bottles, Entomological Pins, &c. Silkworms, large
collection of British and Foreign Butterflies, Moths, and Beetles are
on view. ,

CONCHOLOGICAL AND CRUSTACEAN DEPARTMENTS.—
Land, Freshwater, and Sea Shells, Preserved Crabs and Lobsters,
Living Craytish, Freshwater Mussels and Snails.

Please address all communications to their respective Depart-
ments, each of which is under the control of a specialist.

The Kensington Vivarium for Living Reptiles and Insects, 2/-, 2/6, 3/6.

All Goods being manufactured on the premises are of superior
quality and improved patterns, and can be made to customers’
own designs.

A Selection of Books upon all branches of Natural History is kept
in Stock.

ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE POST FREE.

 

NOTE THE ADDRESS:

135, Oxford Street, London, W.
 

Se
ae
_

Ny

ANS
SRA
AA
SEAS

SS S

LESS AS
XY WSS
SSS

AS

~
‘